Time and Labor Implementation Guide

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Time and Labor Implementation Guide

Release 9.1.x
E15151-08
September 2013
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor Implementation Guide, Release 9.1.x
E15151-08
Copyright © 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on
use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your
license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license,
transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse
engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is
prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If
you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it
on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software,
any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users
are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and
agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and
adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on
the hardware, and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to
the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management
applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including
applications that may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous
applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other
measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages
caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of
their respective owners.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks
are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD,
Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced
Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products,
and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly
disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle
Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your
access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.
Contents
Preface .............................................................................................................................................................. xvii

Audience.................................................................................................................................................... xvii
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Products...................................................................... xvii
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Application Fundamentals .................................................................... xvii
Documentation Accessibility ................................................................................................................. xviii
Related Documents ................................................................................................................................. xviii
Conventions ............................................................................................................................................. xviii
1 Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor

1.1 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Overview........................................................ 1-1
1.1.1 System Features ................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Important JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Tables ................................... 1-2
1.2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Integrations.................................................... 1-3
1.3 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Implementation............................................. 1-5
1.3.1 Global Implementation Steps............................................................................................. 1-6
1.3.2 Implementation Steps for the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor System. 1-6
1.4 Business Interface Integration Objects ..................................................................................... 1-7
2 Overview of Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking

2.1 Understanding Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking .................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Setting Up Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking ..................................................... 2-3
2.1.2 Set Up Company Options................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Set Up General Accounting Constants ............................................................................. 2-3
2.1.4 Set Up a Billing Rate/Markup Table ................................................................................ 2-3
2.1.5 Set Up Employee Payroll Information.............................................................................. 2-3
2.1.6 Setting Processing Options for Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking .................. 2-4
3 Setting Time Entry Processing Options

3.1 Understanding Time Entry Processing Options .................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Timecard Derivation Sequence.......................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Setting Processing Options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options Program
(P050002A) ................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 Pay Rates ............................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Pay Types .............................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.3 Equipment............................................................................................................................. 3-8
iii
3.2.4 Batches................................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.2.5 Employee .............................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.2.6 Recharge................................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.2.7 Leave Entry........................................................................................................................ 3-11
3.2.8 Interims .............................................................................................................................. 3-11
3.2.9 Processing .......................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.2.10 Burden ................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.2.11 Rate Editing ....................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.3 Setting Processing Options for the Speed Time Entry Program (P051121) ..................... 3-13
3.3.1 Time Entry ......................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.2 Defaults .............................................................................................................................. 3-13
3.3.3 Manufacturing................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.4 Localization Selections ..................................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.5 Profit Management ........................................................................................................... 3-14
3.4 Setting Processing Options for the Time Entry Floods Program (P051191).................... 3-14
3.4.1 Display................................................................................................................................ 3-14
3.4.2 Line Detail Time Entry..................................................................................................... 3-15
3.4.3 Daily Time Entry............................................................................................................... 3-16
3.4.4 Time Sheet Time Entry..................................................................................................... 3-17
3.4.5 Profit Management ........................................................................................................... 3-17
3.4.6 Localization........................................................................................................................ 3-18
3.4.7 Timecard Corrections....................................................................................................... 3-18
4 Setting Up Piece Rate Processing

4.1 Understanding Piece Rate Processing...................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.3 Setting Up Employee Piece Rates ............................................................................................. 4-2
4.3.1 Understanding Employee Piece Rates Setup................................................................... 4-2
4.3.2 Forms Used to Set Up Employee Piece Rates .................................................................. 4-2
4.3.3 Setting Up Employee Piece Rates...................................................................................... 4-2
4.4 Setting Up Piece Rate Item Masters ......................................................................................... 4-2
4.4.1 Understanding Piece Rate Item Masters Setup ............................................................... 4-2
4.4.2 Forms Used to Set Up Piece Rate Item Masters .............................................................. 4-3
4.4.3 Setting Up Piece Rate Item Masters .................................................................................. 4-3
4.5 Setting Up Item Piece Rates....................................................................................................... 4-3
4.5.1 Understanding Item Piece Rate Setup .............................................................................. 4-3
4.5.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.5.3 Forms Used to Set Up Item Piece Rates............................................................................ 4-4
4.5.4 Setting Up Item Piece Rates................................................................................................ 4-4
4.6 Setting Up Minimum Wage Information for Piece Rate Processing ................................... 4-5
4.6.1 Understanding Minimum Wage Requirements for Piece Rate Processing................. 4-5
4.6.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.6.3 Forms Used to Set Up Minimum Wage Information for Piece Rate Processing ........ 4-7
4.6.4 Setting Up Minimum Wage Information for Piece Rate Processing ............................ 4-7
5 Setting Up Time Entry Batch Processing

5.1 Understanding Time Entry Batch Processing......................................................................... 5-1
iv
5.2 Setting Up a Flat File Cross-Reference..................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1 Understanding Flat File Cross-References....................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.3 Forms Used to Set Up a Flat File Cross-Reference.......................................................... 5-2
5.2.4 Setting Up a Flat File Cross-Reference.............................................................................. 5-2
5.3 Completing Fields for the Employee Transactions - Batch File Table ................................ 5-3
5.3.1 Understanding the Fields in the Employee Transactions - Batch File Table............... 5-3
5.3.1.1 Required Fields ............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.1.2 Optional Fields.............................................................................................................. 5-4
5.4 Uploading Timecard Information ............................................................................................ 5-7
5.4.1 Understanding the Timecard Upload Process ................................................................ 5-7
5.4.2 Setting Processing Options for Inbound Flat File Conversion (R47002C)................... 5-7
5.4.2.1 Transaction .................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.4.2.2 Separators ...................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.4.2.3 Process............................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.5 Revising Uploaded Timecard Information ............................................................................. 5-7
5.5.1 Understanding Uploaded Timecard Revision ................................................................ 5-8
5.5.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.5.3 Forms Used to Revise Uploaded Timecard Information ............................................... 5-8
5.5.4 Selecting a Batch of Timecards for Revision .................................................................... 5-8
5.5.5 Revising a Batch of Uploaded Timecards ........................................................................ 5-9
5.6 Reviewing the Time & Pay Entry Register for Batch File Report ........................................ 5-9
5.6.1 Understanding the Time & Pay Entry Register for Batch File Report ......................... 5-9
5.6.2 Setting Processing Options for Time & Pay Entry Register for Batch File Report
(R053001Z) ............................................................................................................................ 5-9
5.6.2.1 Defaults .......................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.7 Creating Timecards from Uploaded Information and Purging Processed Payroll Batches
.................................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.7.1 Understanding the Creation of Timecards from Uploaded Information................. 5-10
5.7.2 Setting Processing Options for Time Entry Batch Processor (R05116Z1I) ............... 5-11
5.7.2.1 Processing ................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.7.2.2 Select ............................................................................................................................ 5-12
5.7.2.3 Messages ..................................................................................................................... 5-13
5.7.2.4 Interims ....................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.7.3 Purging Processed Payroll Batches ................................................................................ 5-14
6 Setting Up Timecard Automation

6.1 Understanding Timecard Automation .................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Timecard Templates ............................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.2 Retroactive Pay Rules.......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Overtime Rule Sets .............................................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.4 Employee Groups ................................................................................................................ 6-4
6.1.5 List Group ............................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.1.6 Select Group ......................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.7 Combo Group....................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.8 Exclusion Group .................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.1.9 Timecard Review and Approval ....................................................................................... 6-5
v
6.1.10 Formulas and Functions ..................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2 Creating Employee Groups ....................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.1 Understanding Employee Groups .................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.1.1 Types of Employee Groups......................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.2 Forms Used to Create Employee Groups......................................................................... 6-7
6.2.3 Creating a List Group.......................................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.4 Creating a Select Group ...................................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.5 Creating a Combo Group ................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3 Creating Timecard Templates................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.1 Understanding Timecard Templates ............................................................................. 6-11
6.3.1.1 Creating Timecard Templates ................................................................................. 6-11
6.3.1.2 Submitting Timecard Templates for Processing ................................................... 6-12
6.3.1.3 Timecard Template Processing Report (R186303) ................................................ 6-12
6.3.1.4 Timecard Template Batch Review Report (R186304) ........................................... 6-13
6.3.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................ 6-13
6.3.3 Forms Used to Create Timecard Templates.................................................................. 6-13
6.3.4 Creating Timecard Templates......................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.4.1 Main............................................................................................................................. 6-14
6.3.4.2 Category Codes.......................................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.4.3 Organization............................................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.4.4 Subledger .................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.4.5 Rates ............................................................................................................................ 6-16
6.3.5 Processing Timecard Templates ..................................................................................... 6-16
6.3.6 Running the Timecard Template Batch Review Report (R186304) ........................... 6-16
6.4 Creating Retroactive Pay Rules.............................................................................................. 6-16
6.4.1 Understanding Retroactive Pay Rules........................................................................... 6-17
6.4.1.1 Creating Retroactive Pay Rules ............................................................................... 6-17
6.4.1.2 Processing Retroactive Pay Rules............................................................................ 6-18
6.4.1.3 Reviewing the Retroactive Pay Rule Processing Report...................................... 6-19
6.4.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.4.3 Forms Used to Create Retroactive Pay Rules ............................................................... 6-20
6.4.4 Setting Processing Options for Retroactive Pay (P186701)......................................... 6-20
6.4.4.1 Defaults ....................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.4.5 Creating Retroactive Pay Rules ...................................................................................... 6-20
6.4.6 Processing Retroactive Pay Rules................................................................................... 6-23
6.5 Creating Overtime Rule Sets .................................................................................................. 6-23
6.5.1 Understanding Overtime Rules...................................................................................... 6-23
6.5.1.1 Overtime Rule Sets .................................................................................................... 6-25
6.5.1.2 Timecard Accumulator Rules .................................................................................. 6-26
6.5.1.3 Method 1 ..................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.5.1.4 Method 2 ..................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.5.1.5 Method 3 ..................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.5.1.6 Method 4 ..................................................................................................................... 6-29
6.5.1.7 Setting Up Overtime Pay Type Exclusion Lists (Release 9.1 Update) ............... 6-29
6.5.1.8 Timecard Change Rule ............................................................................................. 6-31
6.5.1.9 Call Rule Set Rule ...................................................................................................... 6-32
6.5.1.10 Call Custom Rule....................................................................................................... 6-32
vi
6.5.1.11 User Parameters......................................................................................................... 6-33
6.5.1.12 Processing Overtime Rule Sets ................................................................................ 6-33
6.5.1.13 Overtime Rule Processing Reports ......................................................................... 6-33
6.5.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................ 6-33
6.5.3 Forms Used to Create Overtime Rule Sets.................................................................... 6-34
6.5.4 Creating an Overtime Rule Set ....................................................................................... 6-34
6.5.5 Creating a Timecard Accumulator Rule........................................................................ 6-35
6.5.6 Creating a Timecard Change Rule ................................................................................. 6-37
6.5.7 Creating a Call Rule Set Rule .......................................................................................... 6-39
6.5.8 Creating a Call Custom Rule........................................................................................... 6-39
6.5.9 Defining the User Parameters ......................................................................................... 6-41
6.5.10 Setting Processing Options for Overtime Rules (P186401)......................................... 6-41
6.5.10.1 Defaults ....................................................................................................................... 6-41
6.5.11 Processing Overtime Rule Sets ....................................................................................... 6-42
6.5.12 Setting Processing Options for the Overtime Rule Set Batch Review Report (R186404)
............................................................................................................................................. 6-42
6.5.12.1 Display ........................................................................................................................ 6-42
7 Setting Up Functions and Formulas for Timecard Automation

7.1 Understanding Functions and Formulas................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Registering a Function................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2.1 Understanding Functions ................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.1.1 Hours Worked Function for Timecard Templates .................................................. 7-2
7.2.1.2 Hours Worked Function for Retroactive Pay Rules ................................................ 7-3
7.2.1.3 Hourly Rate Function for Timecard Templates ....................................................... 7-3
7.2.1.4 Hourly Rate Functions for Retroactive Pay Rules ................................................... 7-4
7.2.1.5 Hourly Rate Functions for Overtime Accumulator Rules...................................... 7-5
7.2.1.6 Custom Overtime Rules Functions ............................................................................ 7-7
7.2.1.7 Registering Functions .................................................................................................. 7-8
7.2.2 Forms Used to Register a Function ................................................................................... 7-9
7.2.3 Registering Functions.......................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3 Creating and Testing Formulas ................................................................................................ 7-9
7.3.1 Understanding Formulas.................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.1.1 Time-and-a-Half Overtime Based on Average Hourly Rate............................... 7-10
7.3.1.2 Chinese Overtime ...................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.1.3 Time-and-a-Half Overtime Based on Employee Master Rate............................. 7-11
7.3.1.4 Time-and-a-Half Overtime Based on Union Rate................................................. 7-11
7.3.1.5 Regular Portion of Overtime Based on Employee Master Rate, and Premium
Portion of Overtime Based on Average Hourly Rate........................................... 7-11
7.3.1.6 Spread Employee's Salary ........................................................................................ 7-11
7.3.1.7 Overtime Rate Based on Timecard Rate and Pay Rate Multiplier ..................... 7-11
7.3.1.8 Testing Formulas ....................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................ 7-12
7.3.3 Forms Used to Create and Test Formulas ..................................................................... 7-12
7.3.4 Creating a Formula........................................................................................................... 7-13
7.3.5 Testing a Formula for a Timecard Template ................................................................ 7-13
7.3.6 Testing a Formula for a Retroactive Pay Rule .............................................................. 7-14
vii
7.3.7 Testing a Formula for an Overtime Rule Set ................................................................ 7-15
8 Working with Timecards for Timecard Automation

8.1 Understanding Timecard Automation Timecards................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Reviewing and Revising Timecards Created by Timecard Automation ............................ 8-2
8.2.1 Understanding Timecard Review and Revision ............................................................. 8-2
8.2.1.1 Revising Timecards Created by Timecard Automation ......................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Forms Used to Review and Revise Timecards Created by Timecard Automation ... 8-4
8.3 Working with Timecard Batches .............................................................................................. 8-4
8.3.1 Understanding Timecard Batches ..................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1.1 Revising the Status of a Batch of Timecards............................................................. 8-5
8.3.1.2 The Labor Rules Batch Approval/Cancellation Report ......................................... 8-5
8.3.2 Forms Used to Work with Timecard Batches .................................................................. 8-5
8.4 Viewing the Timecard Batch File Audit History ................................................................... 8-6
8.4.1 Understanding Timecard Batch File Audit History ....................................................... 8-6
8.4.2 Form Used to View the Timecard Batch File Audit History ......................................... 8-6
8.4.3 Viewing a Timecard Batch File Audit History ................................................................ 8-6
9 Setting Up Global Leave Administration

9.1 Understanding Global Leave Administration Setup............................................................. 9-1
9.1.1 System Features ................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Employee Schedules............................................................................................................ 9-2
9.1.2.1 Setting Up Activity Types for Employee Schedules................................................ 9-3
9.1.2.2 Setting Up Working Schedule Codes for Employee Schedules............................. 9-4
9.1.2.3 Assigning Schedules to Employee Groups............................................................... 9-4
9.2 Setting Up Global Leave System Controls .............................................................................. 9-4
9.2.1 Understanding Global Leave System Controls ............................................................... 9-4
9.2.2 Forms Used to Set Up Global Leave System Controls ................................................... 9-5
9.2.3 Setting Up Global Leave System Controls ....................................................................... 9-5
9.3 Setting Up Leave Types for Global Leave ............................................................................... 9-8
9.3.1 Understanding Leave Types .............................................................................................. 9-8
9.3.2 Forms Used to Set Up Leave Types .................................................................................. 9-9
9.3.3 Setting Up Leave Types ...................................................................................................... 9-9
9.4 Setting Up Leave Verification Rules ..................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.1 Understanding Leave Verification Rules ...................................................................... 9-11
9.4.2 Forms Used to Set Up Leave Verification Rules .......................................................... 9-13
9.4.3 Setting Up a Leave Verification Rule ............................................................................. 9-13
9.5 Setting Up FMLA Leave Substitution Rules (Release 9.1 Update) ................................... 9-16
9.5.1 Understanding FMLA Leave Substitution Rules......................................................... 9-16
9.5.2 Forms Used to Set Up FMLA Leave Substitution Rules ............................................. 9-17
9.5.3 Setting Up a Leave Substitution Rule for FMLA Leave Type .................................... 9-17
9.6 Setting Up the Leave Transactions Table ............................................................................. 9-18
9.6.1 Understanding the Leave Transactions Table .............................................................. 9-18
9.6.2 Form Used to Run the Leave Transactions Update Report........................................ 9-19
9.6.3 Setting Processing Options for the Leave Transaction Update Report (R0707620) 9-19
9.6.3.1 Default......................................................................................................................... 9-19
viii
9.6.4 Running the Leave Transactions Update Report ......................................................... 9-19
9.7 Associating Pay Types with Activity Types ........................................................................ 9-19
9.7.1 Understanding Activity Type Linking .......................................................................... 9-19
9.7.2 Form Used to Associate Pay Types with Activity Types............................................ 9-20
9.7.3 Associate Pay Types with Activity Types ..................................................................... 9-20
9.8 Assigning Schedules to Employee Groups .......................................................................... 9-20
9.8.1 Understanding Schedule Assignment ........................................................................... 9-20
9.8.2 Form Used to Assign Schedules to Employee Groups................................................ 9-21
9.8.3 Assign Schedules to Employee Groups......................................................................... 9-21
10 Creating Employee Assignments

10.1 Understanding Employee Assignments............................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.3 Setting Up Default Pay Type Cross-References .................................................................. 10-2
10.3.1 Forms Used to Set Up Default Pay Type Cross-References ....................................... 10-2
10.3.2 Setting Up Default Pay Type Cross-References ........................................................... 10-2
10.4 Creating Employee Assignments .......................................................................................... 10-3
10.4.1 Understanding Employee Assignment Creation ......................................................... 10-3
10.4.1.1 Calculating Overtime for Employee Assignments ............................................... 10-4
10.4.2 Forms Used to Create Employee Assignments ............................................................ 10-5
10.4.3 Setting Processing Options for the EE Assignment Program (P0716701) ................ 10-5
10.4.3.1 Defaults/Basic............................................................................................................ 10-5
10.4.3.2 Defaults/Cat Codes P/R .......................................................................................... 10-6
10.4.3.3 Defaults/Subledger................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4.3.4 Manufacturing ........................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4.3.5 Recharge...................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4.4 Creating Employee Assignments ................................................................................... 10-7
10.4.5 Defining Time Entry Templates for Employee Assignments..................................... 10-8
10.4.5.1 CO/BU ........................................................................................................................ 10-9
10.4.5.2 Job/Pos........................................................................................................................ 10-9
10.4.5.3 Cat Codes P/R ......................................................................................................... 10-10
10.4.5.4 Subledger .................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.4.5.5 P/R Tax ..................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.4.5.6 Sales Tax.................................................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.5.7 Equipm Bill ............................................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.6 Adding a Job Description to an Employee Assignment ........................................... 10-13
10.4.7 Setting Up Third-Party Payment Information............................................................ 10-13
10.5 Generating and Saving Timecard Templates..................................................................... 10-13
10.5.1 Understanding Timecard Template Processing......................................................... 10-13
10.5.2 Prerequisite ...................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.5.3 Setting Processing Options for the Generate Timecard Template Program (R0716711)
........................................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.5.3.1 Selection .................................................................................................................... 10-15
10.5.3.2 Time Entry ................................................................................................................ 10-16
10.5.3.3 Edits ........................................................................................................................... 10-16
10.5.3.4 Resource Assignment.............................................................................................. 10-16
10.6 Generating Timecard Corrections ....................................................................................... 10-17
ix
10.6.1 Understanding Timecard Corrections ......................................................................... 10-17
10.6.2 Setting Processing Options for Generating Timecard Corrections (R05602) ......... 10-17
10.6.2.1 Processing ................................................................................................................. 10-17
10.6.3 Generating the Timecard Corrections ......................................................................... 10-17
10.7 Archiving and Restoring Employee Assignments ............................................................ 10-17
10.7.1 Understanding Employee Assignment Archiving and Restoration ....................... 10-17
10.7.2 Forms Used to Archive and Restore Employee Assignments ................................. 10-18
10.7.3 Setting Processing Options for the Archive EE Assignment T/E Information Program
(R0716709) ........................................................................................................................ 10-18
10.7.3.1 Dates .......................................................................................................................... 10-18
10.7.4 Restoring Employee Assignments ............................................................................... 10-18
11 Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions for JD Edwards

EnterpriseOne Human Capital Management
11.1 Understanding AAIs for Human Capital Management .................................................... 11-1
11.1.1 When to Create Journal Entries ...................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.2 The General Ledger Account Structure......................................................................... 11-2
11.1.3 Dates That You Associate With Journal Entries........................................................... 11-3
11.1.4 Payroll Journal Entries ..................................................................................................... 11-4
11.1.5 Time and Labor Journal Entries...................................................................................... 11-4
11.1.6 Default Journal Types ...................................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.7 Example: Payroll Journal Entry ...................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.8 Codes That Are Used to Identify Journal Entries ........................................................ 11-6
11.1.9 Document Type T1 - Payroll Disbursement Journal Entries ...................................... 11-7
11.1.10 Document Type T2 - Labor Distribution Journal Entries ........................................... 11-7
11.1.11 Document Type T3 - Actual Burden Journal Entries................................................... 11-8
11.1.12 Document Type T4 - Labor Billing Distribution Journal Entries............................... 11-8
11.1.13 Document Type T5 - Equipment Distribution Journal Entries .................................. 11-9
11.1.14 Document Type T6 - Payroll Accruals and Deferrals................................................ 11-10
11.1.15 Document Type T7 - Payroll Vouchers ....................................................................... 11-11
11.1.16 Example: Journal Entry with Document and Journal-Entry Types......................... 11-11
11.1.17 The Search Criteria That the System Uses................................................................... 11-12
11.1.18 Intercompany Settlements............................................................................................. 11-12
11.1.19 Example: Intercompany Settlements Using Document Type T2............................. 11-13
11.1.20 Intercompany Settlements: Scenario One ................................................................... 11-13
11.1.21 Intercompany Settlements: Scenario Two................................................................... 11-13
11.1.22 How Do You Generate Intercompany Settlements?.................................................. 11-14
11.1.23 Verifying the Chart of Accounts................................................................................... 11-14
11.1.24 Setting Up AAIs for Intercompany Settlements......................................................... 11-15
11.1.25 Setting Up a Payroll ID for Intercompany Settlements............................................. 11-15
11.1.26 Journal Entry Setup by AAI Table................................................................................ 11-15
11.1.27 Prerequisite ...................................................................................................................... 11-17
11.2 Setting Up AAIs for Labor, Billings, and Equipment Distribution ................................ 11-18
11.2.1 Understanding AAIs for Labor, Billings, and Equipment Distribution ................. 11-18
11.2.1.1 Search Criteria for Labor Distribution.................................................................. 11-18
11.2.2 Prerequisite ...................................................................................................................... 11-20
11.2.3 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Labor, Billing, and Equipment Distribution ....... 11-20
x
11.2.4 Setting Processing Options for the Debit-Labor/Billing/Equipment Program (P069043)
........................................................................................................................................... 11-20
11.2.4.1 Default....................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.2.5 Setting Up AAIs for Labor, Billing, and Equipment Distribution........................... 11-21
11.3 Setting Up AAIs for Burden and Premium Labor Distribution...................................... 11-21
11.3.1 Understanding AAIs for Burden and Premium Labor Distribution....................... 11-22
11.3.1.1 Search Criteria for Burden Fringe ......................................................................... 11-23
11.3.1.2 Company Burden Rules.......................................................................................... 11-24
11.3.1.3 Business Unit Burden Rules................................................................................... 11-24
11.3.2 Prerequisite ...................................................................................................................... 11-24
11.3.3 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Burden and Premium Labor Distribution........... 11-25
11.3.4 Setting Processing Options for the Debit-Burden/Premium-Labor Dist Program
(P069042) .......................................................................................................................... 11-25
11.3.5 Setting Up AAIs for Burden and Premium Labor Distribution............................... 11-25
11.3.6 Setting Up Company Burden Rules ............................................................................. 11-27
11.3.7 Setting Up Business Unit Burden Rules ...................................................................... 11-27
11.4 Setting Up AAIs for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution................................................ 11-28
11.4.1 Understanding AAIs for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution................................. 11-28
11.4.1.1 Search Criteria for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution .................................... 11-30
11.4.2 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution..................... 11-30
11.4.3 Setting Up AAIs for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution......................................... 11-31
11.5 Setting Up AAIs for Liabilities............................................................................................. 11-31
11.5.1 Understanding AAIs for Liabilities.............................................................................. 11-31
11.5.1.1 Search Criteria for Liabilities ................................................................................. 11-32
11.5.1.2 Understanding Distribution Account Fields for Liabilities............................... 11-32
11.5.2 Prerequisite ...................................................................................................................... 11-33
11.5.3 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Liabilities.................................................................. 11-33
11.5.4 Setting Up AAIs for Liabilities...................................................................................... 11-33
11.6 Setting Up AAIs for Labor Billings .................................................................................... 11-34
11.6.1 Understanding AAIs for Labor Billings ...................................................................... 11-34
11.6.1.1 Search Criteria for Labor Billings .......................................................................... 11-34
11.6.2 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Labor Billings .......................................................... 11-35
11.6.3 Setting Processing Options for Credit-Labor Billings (P069044) ............................. 11-35
11.6.4 Setting Up AAIs for Labor Billings .............................................................................. 11-35
11.7 Setting Up AAIs for Accruals and Clearing....................................................................... 11-35
11.7.1 Understanding Accruals and Clearing ........................................................................ 11-35
11.7.1.1 Search Criteria for Accruals and Clearing ........................................................... 11-36
11.7.1.2 Understanding Distribution Account Fields for Accruals and Clearing ........ 11-37
11.7.2 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Accruals and Clearing............................................ 11-38
11.8 Setting Up Journal Summarization Rules .......................................................................... 11-38
11.8.1 Understanding Journal Summarization Rules ........................................................... 11-38
11.8.2 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Accruals and Clearing............................................ 11-39
11.8.3 Setting Up Journal Summarization Rules ................................................................... 11-39
12 Entering Timecards for Employees

12.1 Understanding Employee Timecards ................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.1 Multicurrency Timecards ................................................................................................ 12-4
xi
12.1.2 Prerequisites ...................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.2 Selecting Employees for Time Entry ..................................................................................... 12-6
12.2.1 Understanding the Employee Selection Process for Time Entry ............................... 12-6
12.2.2 Forms Used to Select Employees for Time Entry......................................................... 12-7
12.2.3 Selecting Employees for Time Entry from the Employee Master Information Table
............................................................................................................................................. 12-7
12.2.3.1 Form Header Information ........................................................................................ 12-7
12.2.3.2 1-8................................................................................................................................. 12-7
12.2.3.3 Organization............................................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.3.4 Other............................................................................................................................ 12-8
12.2.4 Selecting Employees for Time Entry Who Have Unprocessed Timecards .............. 12-9
12.2.4.1 Form Header Information ........................................................................................ 12-9
12.2.4.2 Organization............................................................................................................... 12-9
12.2.4.3 Category Codes.......................................................................................................... 12-9
12.2.4.4 Subledger .................................................................................................................. 12-10
12.2.5 Selecting Employees for Time Entry Who Have Processed Timecards.................. 12-10
12.2.5.1 Form Header Information ...................................................................................... 12-10
12.2.5.2 Organization............................................................................................................. 12-11
12.2.5.3 Subledger .................................................................................................................. 12-11
12.2.5.4 Category Codes........................................................................................................ 12-11
12.2.5.5 Other.......................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.3 Entering Timecards for Employees ..................................................................................... 12-12
12.3.1 Understanding Timecard Entry.................................................................................... 12-12
12.3.1.1 Entering Timecards Per Pay Period for Employees ........................................... 12-13
12.3.1.2 Entering Daily Timecards for Employees ............................................................ 12-14
12.3.1.3 Entering Timecards Using Time Sheet Groups................................................... 12-14
12.3.2 Prerequisite ...................................................................................................................... 12-14
12.3.3 Forms Used to Enter Timecards for Employees......................................................... 12-15
12.3.4 Entering Timecards Per Pay Period for Employees................................................... 12-15
12.3.5 Entering Daily Timecards for Employees ................................................................... 12-21
12.3.6 Entering Timecards Using Time Sheet Groups .......................................................... 12-22
12.4 Entering Timecards Using Speed Time Entry ................................................................... 12-23
12.4.1 Understanding Speed Time Entry................................................................................ 12-23
12.4.1.1 Selecting Employees................................................................................................ 12-23
12.4.1.2 Entering Timecards Using Speed Time Entry ..................................................... 12-24
12.4.2 Forms Used to Enter Timecards with Speed Time Entry ......................................... 12-24
12.4.3 Selecting Employees For Speed Time Entry by Individual ...................................... 12-25
12.4.4 Selecting Employees for Speed Time Entry by Batch................................................ 12-25
12.4.5 Entering Timecards Using Speed Time Entry ............................................................ 12-25
12.5 Entering Piece Rate Timecards............................................................................................. 12-31
12.5.1 Understanding Piece Rate Processing Setup .............................................................. 12-31
12.5.1.1 Entering Piece Rate Timecards .............................................................................. 12-31
12.5.1.2 Processing Overtime and Minimum Wage Requirements for Piecework ...... 12-32
12.5.1.3 Reviewing Piece Rate History................................................................................ 12-32
12.5.2 Prerequisites .................................................................................................................... 12-32
12.5.3 Forms Used to Review Piece Rate History Online..................................................... 12-33
12.5.4 Reviewing Piece Rate History Online.......................................................................... 12-33
xii
12.5.5 Setting Processing Options for the Piecework Register (R078001).......................... 12-34
12.5.5.1 Defaults ..................................................................................................................... 12-34
12.6 Reviewing Timecard History for Standalone Time and Labor ....................................... 12-34
12.6.1 Understanding Timecard History for Standalone Time and Labor ........................ 12-35
12.6.2 Prerequisite ...................................................................................................................... 12-35
12.6.3 Forms Used to Review Timecard History for Standalone Time and Labor........... 12-35
13 Overriding Timecard Information

13.1 Understanding Timecard Overrides ..................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Overriding an Hourly Rate for an Employee ...................................................................... 13-2
13.2.1 Understanding Employee Rates on Timecards ............................................................ 13-2
13.2.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................ 13-2
13.2.3 Forms Used to Override an Hourly Rate for an Employee ........................................ 13-3
13.2.4 Overriding an Hourly Rate for an Employee ............................................................... 13-3
13.3 Entering DBA Overrides......................................................................................................... 13-4
13.3.1 Understanding DBA Overrides ...................................................................................... 13-4
13.3.1.1 Scenario One............................................................................................................... 13-5
13.3.1.2 Scenario Two .............................................................................................................. 13-5
13.3.1.3 Scenario Three............................................................................................................ 13-5
13.3.1.4 Timecard Transaction Numbers.............................................................................. 13-6
13.3.1.5 Example 1: DBA Overrides That Are Attached to Timecards ............................ 13-6
13.3.1.6 Example 2: Standalone DBA Overrides for Autopay Employees ...................... 13-7
13.3.1.7 Example 3: Standalone DBA Overrides for Non-Autopay Employees ............. 13-8
13.3.1.8 Resetting DBA Overrides ......................................................................................... 13-8
13.3.2 Forms Used to Enter DBA Overrides ............................................................................ 13-9
13.3.3 Attaching a DBA Override to an Existing Timecard ................................................... 13-9
13.3.4 Entering Standalone DBA Overrides........................................................................... 13-11
14 Administering Global Leave

14.1 Understanding Global Leave Administration ..................................................................... 14-1
14.1.1 Global Leave Administration Overview ....................................................................... 14-1
14.1.1.1 Prerequisite................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.1.2 Global Leave Administration Features.......................................................................... 14-2
14.2 Requesting Leave Time ......................................................................................................... 14-10
14.2.1 Understanding Leave Requests .................................................................................... 14-11
14.2.1.1 Creating FMLA Leave Request (Release 9.1 Update) ........................................ 14-11
14.2.1.2 Submitting Leave Requests .................................................................................... 14-12
14.2.1.3 Updating Submitted Requests............................................................................... 14-13
14.2.2 Forms Used to Enter Leave Requests .......................................................................... 14-13
14.2.3 Setting Processing Options for Employee Leave Request (P07620) ........................ 14-15
14.2.3.1 Defaults ..................................................................................................................... 14-16
14.2.3.2 Leave Entry............................................................................................................... 14-16
14.2.4 Entering a Leave Request .............................................................................................. 14-16
14.2.5 Entering Medical Information for a Leave Request................................................... 14-19
14.2.6 Submitting a Leave Request......................................................................................... 14-19
14.3 Administering Leave Requests ............................................................................................ 14-21
xiii
14.3.1 Understanding Leave Administration......................................................................... 14-21
14.3.1.1 Leave Trends ............................................................................................................ 14-22
14.3.1.2 Leave Inquiry and Management ........................................................................... 14-22
14.3.2 Forms Used to Administer Leave Requests................................................................ 14-23
14.3.3 Setting Processing Options for Manager Self-Service Leave Review (P076311) ... 14-24
14.3.3.1 Defaults ..................................................................................................................... 14-24
14.3.4 Setting Processing Options for Leave Inquiry and Management (P07640)............ 14-24
14.3.4.1 Processing ................................................................................................................. 14-24
14.3.5 Approving Leave Requests ........................................................................................... 14-25
14.3.6 Reviewing Leave Trends ............................................................................................... 14-26
14.3.7 Managing Leave Information ....................................................................................... 14-27
14.3.8 Managing Leave Entry (Release 9.1 Update).............................................................. 14-28
14.3.8.1 Leave Comments ..................................................................................................... 14-29
14.3.8.2 FMLA Information .................................................................................................. 14-29
14.3.8.3 FMLA Subsitution ................................................................................................... 14-30
14.4 Tracking Medical Leave Information................................................................................. 14-30
14.4.1 Understanding Medical Leaves .................................................................................... 14-30
14.4.2 Forms Used to Track Medical Leave Information ..................................................... 14-31
14.4.3 Tracking Medical Leave Information .......................................................................... 14-31
14.4.4 Attaching a Medical Opinion to a Leave Request...................................................... 14-32
14.5 Tracking Leave History and Accrual Balances................................................................. 14-33
14.5.1 Understanding Leave History and Accrual Balances ............................................... 14-33
14.5.1.1 Tracking Leave History by Employee .................................................................. 14-34
14.5.1.2 Tracking Leave History by Leave Type ............................................................... 14-34
14.5.1.3 Tracking Accrual Balances ..................................................................................... 14-35
14.5.2 Setting Processing Options for Tracking Leave History By Employee (R07531) .. 14-35
14.5.2.1 Totals ......................................................................................................................... 14-35
14.5.3 Setting Processing Options for Accrual Roster Report (R074501) ........................... 14-35
14.5.3.1 Defaults ..................................................................................................................... 14-36
14.5.3.2 Dates .......................................................................................................................... 14-36
14.5.3.3 DBAs.......................................................................................................................... 14-36
14.6 Reviewing Leave Trends....................................................................................................... 14-36
14.6.1 Understanding Leave Trend Review........................................................................... 14-37
14.6.2 Form Used to Review Leave Trends ............................................................................ 14-37
14.7 Purging Leave Requests........................................................................................................ 14-37
14.7.1 Understanding Leave Purging...................................................................................... 14-37
14.7.2 Setting Processing Options for Purge Leave Request (R07520) ............................... 14-37
14.7.2.1 Purge Selections ....................................................................................................... 14-38
14.7.2.2 Mode.......................................................................................................................... 14-38
14.8 Administering Employee Schedules ................................................................................... 14-38
14.8.1 Understanding Employee Schedule Administration ................................................ 14-38
14.8.1.1 Employee Scheduling Integration with Time Entry........................................... 14-39
14.8.2 Forms Used to Administer Employee Schedules....................................................... 14-40
14.8.3 Setting Processing Options for Manage Employee Schedules (P07311)................. 14-40
14.8.3.1 Display ...................................................................................................................... 14-40
14.8.3.2 Versions..................................................................................................................... 14-40
14.8.4 Administering Employee Schedules............................................................................ 14-40
xiv
15 Processing Journal Entries
15.1 Understanding Journal Entries .............................................................................................. 15-1
15.2 Processing and Reviewing Journal Entries .......................................................................... 15-2
15.2.1 Understanding Journal Entries for Timecards ............................................................. 15-3
15.2.1.1 Reviewing the Payroll Journal Proof/Edit Report ............................................... 15-3
15.2.1.2 Reviewing Batches of Journal Entries..................................................................... 15-4
15.2.1.3 Deleting Batches of Journal Entries......................................................................... 15-5
15.2.2 Setting Processing Options for Generate Timecard Entries (R052901) ..................... 15-6
15.2.2.1 Date.............................................................................................................................. 15-6
15.2.2.2 Process......................................................................................................................... 15-6
15.2.2.3 Timecard Selection .................................................................................................... 15-8
15.2.3 Setting Processing Options for Payroll Journal Proof/Edit Report (R05229) .......... 15-8
15.2.3.1 Defaults ....................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.2.4 Setting Processing Options for Create Payroll JE's - Batch Delete (R05227) ............ 15-9
15.2.4.1 Select ............................................................................................................................ 15-9
15.3 Posting Journal Entries............................................................................................................ 15-9
15.3.1 Understanding the Post Process ..................................................................................... 15-9
15.3.2 Prerequisite ...................................................................................................................... 15-10
15.3.3 Setting Processing Options for General Ledger Post (R09801) ................................ 15-10
15.3.3.1 Print ........................................................................................................................... 15-11
15.3.3.2 Versions..................................................................................................................... 15-11
15.3.3.3 Taxes .......................................................................................................................... 15-12
16 Working with the ALM Workbench

16.1 Working with ALM Workbench............................................................................................ 16-1
16.1.1 Understanding ALM Workbench................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.2 Forms Used to Work with ALM Workbench ............................................................... 16-2
16.1.3 Accessing Tasks Under ALM Workbench .................................................................... 16-2
16.2 Setting Processing Option for the Advanced Labor Management Workbench Program
(P05210) ..................................................................................................................................... 16-2
16.2.1 Processing .......................................................................................................................... 16-2
16.3 Importing Timecards............................................................................................................... 16-3
16.3.1 Forms Used to Import Timecards .................................................................................. 16-3
16.3.2 Setting Up Timecard Imports Through ALM Workbench ......................................... 16-3
16.3.3 Importing Timecards Through ALM Workbench ....................................................... 16-3
16.3.4 Reviewing and Revising Imported Timecards Through ALM Workbench ............ 16-4
16.3.5 Running the Time and Pay Register for Imported Timecards Through ALM
Workbench ........................................................................................................................ 16-4
16.3.6 Uploading Timecards....................................................................................................... 16-4
16.3.6.1 Forms Used to Upload Timecards .......................................................................... 16-5
16.3.6.2 Review and Revise Imported Timecards Before Uploading Through ALM
Workbench.................................................................................................................. 16-5
16.3.6.3 Run Time and Pay Register Before Uploading Through ALM Workbench..... 16-5
16.3.6.4 Uploading Timecards Through ALM Workbench ............................................... 16-5
16.3.6.5 Purging Processed Timecards Through ALM Workbench ................................. 16-6
16.3.6.6 Reviewing and Revising Uploaded Timecards Through ALM Workbench .... 16-6
16.3.7 Generating Component Pay............................................................................................ 16-6
xv
16.3.7.1 Forms Used to Generate Component Pay.............................................................. 16-7
16.3.7.2 Generating Component Pay Through ALM Workbench .................................... 16-7
16.3.7.3 Reviewing and Revising Processed Timecards Through ALM Workbench .... 16-7
16.3.7.4 Running Time and Pay Register Through ALM Workbench ............................. 16-7
16.3.8 Setting Up Total Time Accounting................................................................................. 16-8
16.3.8.1 Forms Used to Set Up Total Time Accounting...................................................... 16-8
16.3.8.2 Setting Up Rules and Submitting Batches Through ALM Workbench ............. 16-8
16.3.8.3 Reviewing and Approving Rules Batches Through ALM Workbench ............. 16-8
16.3.8.4 Reviewing and Revising Timecards with TTA Rules Through ALM Workbench
...................................................................................................................................... 16-9
16.3.9 Processing Journals........................................................................................................... 16-9
16.3.9.1 Generating Timecard Corrections Through ALM Workbench .......................... 16-9
16.3.9.2 Processing Timecard Journals Through ALM Workbench ................................. 16-9
16.3.9.3 Deleting Journal Batches Through ALM Workbench ........................................ 16-10
16.3.9.4 Reviewing and Revising Timecards with Processed Journals Through ALM
Workbench................................................................................................................ 16-10
16.3.10 Processing Payroll........................................................................................................... 16-10
16.3.10.1 Forms Used to Process Payroll .............................................................................. 16-11
16.3.10.2 Processing Payroll Through ALM Workbench ................................................... 16-11
A JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports

A.1 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports: A to Z ............................................. A-1
A.2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports: Selected Reports ........................... A-1
A.2.1 Setting Processing Options for the Generate Timecards from Schedule Program
(R07311) ................................................................................................................................ A-2
A.2.1.1 Processing ..................................................................................................................... A-2
A.2.1.2 Select .............................................................................................................................. A-2
A.2.2 R186404 - Overtime Rule Set Batch Review Report....................................................... A-2
A.2.3 R186405 - Overtime Rule Set Processing Report ............................................................ A-2
B Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor

B.1 Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor.............................. B-1
B.1.1 Update Employee Auto Deposit Instructions ................................................................ B-1
B.1.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................... B-1
B.1.1.2 Workflow Objects ........................................................................................................ B-1
B.1.2 Add Bank Transit Number................................................................................................ B-2
B.1.2.1 Description ................................................................................................................... B-2
B.1.3 Verification of Employment Request............................................................................... B-2
B.1.3.1 Description ................................................................................................................... B-2
Index
xvi
Preface
Welcome to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor

Implementation Guide.
Audience
This guide is intended for implementers and end users of the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Products

This Implementation Guide refers to these JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products from
Oracle:
■ JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Contract Billing
■ JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Multicurrency
■ JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll
■ JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Accounting
■ JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Service Billing
■ JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Human Capital Management Self-Service
■ JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Human Capital Management Fundamentals
■ JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Financial Management Application Fundamentals
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Application Fundamentals

Additional, essential information describing the setup and design of the system
appears in a companion volume of documentation called JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Financial Management Application Fundamentals 9.0 Implementation Guide.
Customers must conform to the supported platforms for the release as detailed in the
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne minimum technical requirements. In addition, JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne may integrate, interface, or work in conjunction with other Oracle
products. Refer to the cross-reference material in the Program Documentation at
http://oracle.com/contracts/index.html for Program prerequisites and version
cross-reference documents to assure compatibility of various Oracle products.
See Also: ■JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Financial
Management Fundamentals Implementation Guide.
xvii
Documentation Accessibility
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle
Accessibility Program website at
http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Access to Oracle Support

Oracle customers have access to electronic support through My Oracle Support. For
information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or
visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing
impaired.
Related Documents
You can access related documents from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release
Documentation Overview pages on My Oracle Support. Access the main
documentation overview page by searching for the document ID, which is 1308615.1,
or by using this link:
https://support.oracle.com/CSP/main/article?cmd=show&type=NOT&id=1308615.1
To navigate to this page from the My Oracle Support home page, click the Knowledge
tab, and then click the Tools and Training menu, JD Edwards EnterpriseOne, Welcome
Center, Release Information Overview.
Conventions
The following text conventions are used in this document:
Convention Meaning
Bold Indicates field values, important terms, and emphasis.
Italics Indicates emphasis and JD Edwards EnterpriseOne or other
book-length publication titles.
Monospace Indicates a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne program, other code
example, or URL.
xviii
1
Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
1
Time and Labor
This chapter contains the following topics:

■ Section 1.1, "JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Overview"
■ Section 1.2, "JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Integrations"
■ Section 1.3, "JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Implementation"
■ Section 1.4, "Business Interface Integration Objects"
1.1 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Overview

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system from Oracle provides a
versatile, cost-effective, and time-efficient solution for managing and accounting for
employee time and the associated labor costs. Because this information is necessary for
both the payroll and accounting departments, Time and Labor integrates with Oracle's
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll and General Accounting systems to simplify the
sharing of data. If you are not using the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system,
you can use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor as a standalone system to
account for employee time and to update JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Ledger.
To process an employee through Time and Labor or Payroll, the employee must have
at least one timecard in the system. The term timecard refers to a one-line time entry
record. These timecards can be manually entered or automatically created by the
system.
Although you can use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor independently of
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll, you must use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time
and Labor if you use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll, because payroll processing
depends upon timecard records. Use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor to:
■ Enter and review employee timecards.
■ Collect, review, and approve timecards that were entered by employees through
self-service.
■ Upload time entry information from a third-party time collection system.
■ Automatically calculate overtime rates for time worked.
■ Calculate retroactive pay.
■ Automatically create timecards for groups of employees in situations such as
company holidays or bonuses.
Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor 1-1

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Overview
■ Track employee assignment information and populate timecards automatically

with the assignment information.
■ Create journal entries for the general ledger.
■ Track employee leave information.
■ Assign the correct account numbers to timecards and the respective journal entries
that are created from those timecards.
1.1.1 System Features

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor includes many features that can simplify
data entry, time collection, and calculations of complicated pay situations, such as
overtime and retroactive pay. These procedures can ease the administrative burden on
payroll and accounting clerks. For example, you can customize the amount of
information that employees must enter on their timecards to suit the needs of the
organization.
Feature Description
Default Job Information Define default job information at the employee or group
level. The system can enter this information automatically
on employee timecards to eliminate the need for employees
to enter the information manually. This feature can save
employees time and reduce the frequency of timecard data
errors.
Timesheet Time Entry Enter time for employees using Timesheet time entry, which
enables you to complete a time entry grid with a group of
employees. You can quickly enter time for each employee in
the group or create timecards for the group by specifying
timecard default information before you complete the grid.
Timecard Automation Use timecard automation to automatically create overtime
pay from regular hours using simple or complex
calculations that you define. This functionality ensures that
employees are paid accurately and in accordance with the
overtime rules of the organization, labor unions, and
legislative requirements. Timecard automation also enables
you to automatically create retroactive pay timecards and
timecard templates to use with groups of employees.
Autopay Use autopay to automatically create timecards for salaried
employees when you process payroll.
Self-Service Time Entry Using time entry self-service, employees can enter
summarized or daily timecards through the internet, which
reduces or eliminates the need for payroll personnel to enter
timecards manually.
Upload Time Entry Information Upload time entry information from a third-party source to
create timecards. You can then process those timecards
through Payroll or use Time and Labor as a standalone
system and create journal entries that are written to the
general ledger.
1.1.2 Important JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Tables

This table lists the key tables:
Table Name Table Description

Address Book Master (F0101) Contains name and address information for all employees.
1-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor Implementation Guide

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Integrations
Table Name Table Description

Employee Master Information (F060116) Contains detailed information about employees, such as
salary, pay grade, birth date, and job type.
Job Information (F08001) Contains information for job ID and for the job evaluation.
The job ID is the combination of the job type and job step.
Employee Transactions - Batch File (F06116Z1) Contains timecard information that has been uploaded
from a third-party time tracking system. Timecards in this
table must be reviewed, approved, and transferred to
F06116 before they can be processed in the system.
Employee Transaction Detail File (F06116) Contains detailed timecard information for employees.
Employee Transaction History (F0618) Contains detailed history information associated with
processed timecards.
Union Rate File (F069126) Contains pay rate information that is recorded by union
and job ID.
Employees Pay Rate File (F060146) Contains pay rate information that is recorded by job ID.
Automatic Accounting Instructions (F06904) Contains detailed account information that is used to derive
timecard account numbers.
Shift Differential (F069246) Contains information about special pay rates that are
associated with specified work shifts.
Payroll Transaction Constants (F069116) Contains detailed information about each pay type,
deduction, benefit, and accrual (PDBA).
Employee Pay Instructions (F06106) Contains instructions for splitting and prorating employee
timecard information across specified business units.
Business Unit Master (F0006) Contains detailed information about each job or business
unit that is set up in the organization.
Account Balances (F0902) Contains account balance information for each account in
the general ledger.
Account Ledger (F0911) Contains detailed journal entry information that is
reviewed and then transferred to F0902.
1.2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Integrations

This process graphic shows how the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor
system integrates with other JD Edwards EnterpriseOne systems:

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Integrations
Figure 1–1 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system integration
We discuss integration considerations in the implementation chapters in this

implementation guide. Supplemental information about third-party application
integrations is located on the Oracle or JD Edwards Customer Connection website.
To use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor, you must also use the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Human Capital Management Foundation system from Oracle. JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Human Capital Management Foundation contains the central
database for all information that pertains to employees, jobs, pay types, deductions,
benefits, and accruals. Human Capital Management Foundation information
integrates with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor by:
■ Associating time entry records with the appropriate employee.
■ Identifying which pay rates to use for each employee.
■ Determining how to distribute labor and how to treat its associated burden.
■ Identifying specific billing rates to charge customers for employee time.
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system also integrates with the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll, General Accounting, and Accounts Payable systems
from Oracle. Time and Labor is particularly important to Payroll. Payroll uses time
entry records to calculate employees' gross payment amounts. Because of this
dependency, an understanding of Time and Labor is prerequisite to understanding the
Payroll system.
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system integrates with other JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne systems because the system stores information that it
processes in a central database. Using integrated software with a central database:
■ Eliminates redundant data entry.
■ Maintains current and accurate information across all of the business operations.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Implementation
■ Improves communication between departments.

This table shows how JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor integrates with
these JD Edwards EnterpriseOne systems:
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne System Description of Integration

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book contains
employee names, addresses, and tax IDs. This information is
used by JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor to
create timecards.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General If you are using JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor
Accounting as a standalone system (that is, you are not processing
timecards using the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll
system), you can set up the system to integrate directly with
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Accounting. This
integration enables you to update general ledger
transactions and account balances.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor creates and post
transactions to the general ledger using Automatic
Accounting Instructions (AAIs) that you define. You can
also select the level of detail to create the journal entries,
which are written from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time
and Labor to the general ledger.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Project Costing Use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor to enter
labor and equipment time by day. Then use JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Project Costing to analyze those costs by job.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Contract and Use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor to enter
Service Billing labor and equipment time by job (business unit). Then use
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Contract and Service Billing to:
■ Bill customers for the labor and equipment expenses
that are associated with the job.
■ Bill customers for the payroll burden expense (if you
are also using the Payroll).
■ Bill customers for contract time that is associated with
the job.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Capital Asset Use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor to enter
Management labor and equipment time. Then use JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Capital Asset Management to:
■ Charge a job for the use of equipment.
■ Track labor for equipment maintenance.
You can use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor
system to enter and track labor and equipment time against
a work order. Use work orders to identify specific costs of a
task or track equipment repair costs. You can create work
orders for small projects and service calls.
1.3 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Implementation

This section provides an overview of the steps that are required to implement the Time
and Labor system.
In the planning phase of the implementation, take advantage of all JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne sources of information, including the installation guides and
troubleshooting information.
When determining which electronic software updates (ESUs) to install for JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Tax Processing, use the EnterpriseOne and World Change Assistant.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Implementation
EnterpriseOne and World Change Assistant, a Java-based tool, reduces the time
required to search and download ESUs by 75 percent or more and enables you to
install multiple ESUs at one time.
See JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Software Updates Guide
For information about the Oracle Business Accelerator solution for implementation of
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor, review the documentation available.
Seehttp://docs.oracle.com/cd/E24705_01/index.htm
1.3.1 Global Implementation Steps

This table lists the suggested global implementation steps for JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Time and Labor:
1. Set up companies, fiscal date patterns, and business units.
See "Setting Up Organizations" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Financial Management Fundamentals Implementation Guide.
2. Set up accounts, and the chart of accounts.
See "Creating the Chart of Accounts" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Financial Management Fundamentals Implementation Guide.
3. Set up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Accounting constants.
See "Setting Up the General Accounting System" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications General Accounting Implementation Guide.
4. Set up multicurrency processing, including currency codes and exchange rates.
See "Setting Up General Accounting for Multicurrency Processing" in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Multicurrency Processing Implementation Guide.
See "Setting Up Exchange Rates" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Multicurrency Processing Implementation Guide.
5. Set up ledger type rules.
See "Setting Up the General Accounting System" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
6. Enter address book records.
See "Entering Address Book Records" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Address Book Implementation Guide.
1.3.2 Implementation Steps for the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor System
This table lists the implementation steps for the Time and Labor system.
1. Set processing options for these programs:
Time Entry MBF Processing Options (P050002A)
Speed Time Entry (P051121)
Time Entry Floods (P051191)
See Setting Time Entry Processing Options.
2. Set up employee piece rates, piece rate item masters, item piece rates, and
minimum wage information.
See Setting Up Piece Rate Processing.

Business Interface Integration Objects
3. Set up a flat file cross-reference and complete fields for the Employee Transactions
– Batch File table. Upload timecard information, revise uploaded timecard
information, and review the Time & Pay Entry Register for Batch File Report.
Create timecards from uploaded information and purge processed payroll batches.
See Setting Up Time Entry Batch Processing.
4. Create employee groups, timecard templates, retroactive pay rules, and overtime
rule sets.
See Setting Up Timecard Automation.
5. Register a timecard automation function, then create and test formulas.
See Setting Up Functions and Formulas for Timecard Automation.
6. Set up global leave system controls and leave types.
See Setting Up Global Leave Administration.
7. Set up employee assignments.
See Creating Employee Assignments.
8. Set up AAIs for each of these:
Labor, billings, and equipment distribution.
Burden and premium labor distribution
Cash-in-bank account distribution.
Liabilities.
Labor billings
Accruals and clearing.
Also set up journal summarization rules.
See Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Human Capital Management.
1.4 Business Interface Integration Objects

A business interface is a set of components that implementation teams can use to
create an integration between JD Edwards EnterpriseOne and an external system.
Business interfaces can include one or more of these business interface components:
■ Business Services
■ Real-Time Events
■ Batch Import and Export Programs
For additional information about business interfaces, and the business objects
available for this product area, see these topics in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Business Interface Reference Guide:
■ Business Interfaces Overview
■ Timecard

Business Interface Integration Objects

2
Overview of Multicurrency Time and Labor
2
Tracking

■ Section 2.1, "Understanding Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking"
2.1 Understanding Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking

As companies expand their business internationally, they find that they must send
their employees abroad or employ workers in foreign countries. JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne and Time and Labor software provides such multicurrency features.
The system includes multicurrency time and labor tracking features in all of the
programs that you use to enter employee time. When multicurrency time and labor
tracking is enabled, the currency information from specified accounts provides
domestic and foreign recharge rates from F48096. If you do not use F48096, the system
calculates the billing rate by using the currency of the company that is associated with
the business unit that is entered in the account number and job location. The system
also uses this currency information during the journal entry process to determine
correct amounts for entries to the general ledger.
Multicurrency time and labor tracking uses two types of currency:
Currency Type Description

Base currency The currency of the company that is associated with the
employee's home business unit.
Transaction or recharge currency The currency of the company that is associated with the job
location to which time is charged.
You can specify whether the billing rate or the foreign billing rate is fixed. You can
enter the fixed rate manually on the timecard, or the system can derive the fixed rate
from F060116 or F48096. The other rate is then calculated from the conversion rates
that you set up in the Currency Exchange Rates program (P0015A).
To account for different billing rates and maintain foreign billing rates, the system uses
F48096. This table includes rates for each specified currency code and enables you to
set up billing rates for multiple transactions.
For example, if an employee based in the United States works in Japan on two jobs
with different billing rates, you can account for each billing rate. After you create a
user-defined generation type, you can retrieve payroll billing rates from F48096.
Overview of Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking 2-1

Understanding Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking
If you are not using F48096, the system retrieves currency rates from the Work With
Currency Exchange Rates program. You set up the currency for each company. The
system determines which company is associated with the specified business unit and
uses the currency that is associated with that company, as defined in F0010. The
system then uses the business unit and job location to derive the additional currency.
After both currencies have been identified, the system uses the Work With Currency
Exchange Rates program to determine the conversion rate on the specified date.
Note: The system initially uses the work date on the timecard to
determine the exchange rate. However, the system uses the general
ledger date to derive the rate when creating journal entries. For
example, if a conversion rate of 2.0 is valid from January 1, 2005
through January 31, 2005 and a conversion rate of 3.0 is valid from
February 1, 2005 through February 28, 2005, the system uses the
conversion rate of 2.0 when you enter a timecard with a work date of
January 31, 2005. However, if the timecard is posted on February 03,
2005, the system uses the exchange rate of 3.0 to create the journal
entries that are associated with that timecard.
If the system finds exchange rates on the timecards that are different
from those on the journal entries, the Employee Transaction Detail
Payroll Journal (Compressed), and Account Ledger files are updated
with the journal entry rate to ensure that the data between the general
ledger and the timecard history tables is accurate.
The system uses these tables to manage multicurrency time and labor tracking:
■ F06116
■ F0618
■ F05290
■ F063951
■ F06116Z1
■ F0911
■ F48096
After payroll processing is complete, only the F0618, F48096, and F0911 tables retain
multicurrency records.
When multicurrency time and labor tracking is enabled, these reports contain
multicurrency time and labor information:
■ Payroll Journal Proof/Edit Report. (R05229)
This report provides a pro forma version of the journal entries that will be posted
to the general ledger for timecard entries.
All journal entries (T1-T6), as well as intercompany settlements, appear on the
report. The report lists one entry for each transaction amount in the transaction
currency. However, when the batch is posted, the system creates two entries from
the single entry. The first entry shows the base amount of the transaction in the
transaction currency. The second entry, noted by the AM journal type, shows the
transaction currency for the difference between the base and transaction amounts.
In addition to normal payroll information, the currency code is displayed for all
multicurrency debit and credit entries created during payroll.

Note: If you are posting entries with no currency amounts (hours

only), the system does not display a currency code on the report;
however, the currency code exists in F063951.
■ Time and Pay Entry Register (R053001)

This report provides detailed information about all of the timecard records that
you include in a batch. When multicurrency time entry is enabled, this report
includes currency information.
2.1.1 Setting Up Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking

This section discusses how to:
■ Set up company options.
■ Set up general accounting constants.
■ Set up a billing rate/markup table.
■ Set up currency exchange rates.
■ Set up employee payroll information.
■ Set the Time Entry Master Business Function processing options.
■ Set the processing options for the Generate Timecard Journals program (R052901),
also called the Generate Timecard Entries program.
The following setup procedures apply only to multicurrency time and labor tracking;
separate procedures exist for setting up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and
Labor system.
2.1.2 Set Up Company Options

To enable multicurrency time and labor tracking, you must enable multicurrency
functionality and general ledger integration on the Additional Company Options form
for Company 00000.
2.1.3 Set Up General Accounting Constants

To update multicurrency time and labor information in the general ledger, you must
set up the multicurrency conversion option in the General Accounting Constants
(P0000) to use either the multicurrency account multiplier or account divisor. You must
also set up the general accounting constants to use the Flex - Create Interco w/o Hub
method (method 2) when creating multicurrency intercompany settlement
transactions.
2.1.4 Set Up a Billing Rate/Markup Table

You must define billing rate markup rules in F48096. This table stores information that
the system uses to convert rates for multicurrency time and labor tracking.
2.1.5 Set Up Employee Payroll Information

Multicurrency information is based on the assumption that the work that employees
perform is billable. Therefore, you must set up employees to create billing (recharge
records) for the system to create multicurrency information. The system will generate

multicurrency information when timecards exist for employees who are set up for
payroll and recharge processing (Type 2) or recharge processing only (Type 3).
2.1.6 Setting Processing Options for Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking
To use multicurrency time and labor tracking, you must set processing options for the
Batch Time Entry File Revisions program (P05116Z1) and the Time Entry MBF
Processing Options program (P050002A). Processing options in the Batch Time Entry
File Revisions program:
■ Enable multicurrency time and labor tracking.
■ Specify whether amounts that you enter are in the domestic currency of a contract
or the foreign currency of a supplier.
■ Specify whether the system dynamically creates new accounts.
Processing options in the Time Entry MBF Processing Options program enable
multicurrency time and labor tracking. The processing options in the Time Entry MBF
Processing Options program specify how the system uses F48096, and whether the
system dynamically forces account creation. You also use the processing options to
determine which currency (base or foreign) is fixed and which is calculated. To set
multicurrency processing options, access the Recharge tab on the Time Entry MBF
page.
You use the processing options in the Time Entry MBF program to:
■ Enable multicurrency time and labor tracking.
■ Specify whether the system uses the currency that is associated with the
employee's business unit or the currency that associated with the recharge
business unit as the fixed currency.
If you select the employee's business unit as the fixed currency, you must enter a
billing rate on the timecard. The Foreign Billing Rate field is then disabled and the
value for that field is calculated by the system. Conversely, if you use the recharge
business unit as the fixed currency, you must enter a foreign billing rate on the
timecard. The Billing Rate field is then disabled, and the value for that field is
calculated by the system.
These examples illustrate how the system differentiates between the home and
recharge business units.
■ If the employee's home business unit is 9, which is part of a company that is
associated with United States dollars (USD), the system uses USD for the base
amount.
For this example, F48096 must be defined for USD currency, or the exchange rates
must be set up within the Work With Currency Exchange Rates program.
■ If the employee's recharge business unit is Business Unit 77, which is part of a
company that is associated with Canadian currency (CAD), the system uses CAD
for the base amount.
For this example, F48096 must be defined for CAD currency, or the exchange rates
must have been set up within the Currency Exchange Rates program (P0015A).
■ Specify whether the system uses F48096 to retrieve rates. If you do not use F48096,
the system uses the exchange rates that you set up in the Currency Exchange Rates
program.
■ Specify the generation type.

■ Specify the action to take if no record is found in F48096.

■ Specify the version of the Billing Rate / Markup Table program (P48096).
■ Specify whether the system uses dynamic account creation.
The dynamic account creation process creates a valid account when you enter a
timecard that includes an account number that is not active in the system.
However, the account number must exist in the model business unit. Dynamic
account creation does not create records in F48096.
Note: If you use F48096, you must enter recharge account numbers,
specify billing rate information, and define effective dates in this table.
The system does not require that accounts entered into this table be
active.
See Also:
■ Setting Time Entry Processing Options.
■ JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Foundation Guide.
■ "Setting Up Table Information" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Contract and Service Billing Implementation Guide.
■ "Setting Up Billing Rate and Markup Rules" in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Contract and Service Billing
Implementation Guide
■ "Setting Up Company Options" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Human Capital Management Fundamentals
■ "Entering Additional Employee Information" in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Human Capital Management
Fundamentals Implementation Guide.
■ "Entering Payroll Information for Employees" in the JD Edwards
Fundamentals Implementation Guide
■ "Setting Up Exchange Rates" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Multicurrency Processing Implementation Guide.
■ "Setting Up Table Information" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Contract and Service Billing Implementation Guide.
■ "Understanding Billing Rate and Markup Rules, Multicurrency
Setup of Billing Rate and Markup Tables" in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Contract and Service Billing
Implementation Guide .
■ "Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions" in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Financial Management Fundamentals


3
Setting Time Entry Processing Options
3

■ Section 3.1, "Understanding Time Entry Processing Options"
■ Section 3.2, "Setting Processing Options for the Time Entry MBF Processing
Options Program (P050002A)"
■ Section 3.3, "Setting Processing Options for the Speed Time Entry Program
(P051121)"
■ Section 3.4, "Setting Processing Options for the Time Entry Floods Program
(P051191)"
3.1 Understanding Time Entry Processing Options

Several JD Edwards EnterpriseOne systems access centralized programs called master
business functions. A master business function is a program that serves as a central
location for adding, changing, and updating information in a database. Master
business functions pass information between data entry forms and the appropriate
tables.
Master business functions provide a common set of functions that contain all of the
necessary default information and editing rules for related programs. They contain
logic that ensures the integrity of adding, updating, and deleting information from
databases.
A master business function helps to standardize data entry information across related
programs. For example, a large company might have employees enter their time from
multiple sites and sources.
Master business functions are most commonly used in these situations:
■ You accept records from a third-party source.
■ Multiple programs update the same table.
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Human Capital Management system has one master
business function, Time Entry MBF Processing Options (P050002A), which interacts
with all time entry programs. You need to set up processing options for this master
business function to define default values, valid values, and functions for time entry
programs.
Processing options for master business functions are attached to version ZJDE0001.
You should normally use this version as the default version for all of the entry
programs. If you need to create different versions for other data entry programs,
contact the system administrator.
Setting Time Entry Processing Options 3-1

Understanding Time Entry Processing Options
Version ZJDE0001 of the master business function has security set to restrict access by
certain users. An error message occurs if you try to access the version while security is
enabled. The system administrator must disable version security before you can create
a new version or access the processing options. After you have set the appropriate
values for the processing options, the system administrator must enable security again
for the version.
It is also recommended that you set these processing options one time only. Changing
these processing options might completely change necessary business functions for the
time entry system. Obtain technical support if you want to change these processing
options after you have begun processing timecard information for the organization.
After setting the processing options for P050002A, you need to select either the default
version (ZJDE0001) or a user-defined version of the master business function in the
processing options for these time entry programs:
■ Speed Time Entry (P051121).
■ Time Entry Floods (P051191).
■ EE Assignment (P0716701).
You might need to create multiple versions of the Time Entry MBF Processing Options
program if you want to process timecard information differently within the
organization. For example, you might want to use one version of the master business
function to process employee assignment information and use a different version to
process other time entry programs. Contact the system administrator if you need to
use multiple versions.
3.1.1 Timecard Derivation Sequence

When you set the processing options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options
business function, you determine the sequence that the system uses to derive values
for fields on the timecard entry forms.
The system first uses the field value that is described in the Step 1 column. If no value
exists, the system then uses the field value that is described in the Step 2 column. If no
value is found, the system uses the value that is described in the Step 3 column, and so
on, until the system derives a value for the specified field.
For example, the system derives a value for the Timecard Record Type field as follows:
■ Step 1
The system determines whether a value has been manually entered into that field
on the timecard. If a value has been manually entered on the timecard, the system
uses this value to process the timecard, and no further action is taken. If no value
was entered on the timecard, the system proceeds to Step 2.
■ Step 2
The system tries to retrieve the value that is in the Timecard Record Type field in
the F060116 table. If a value exists in this table, the system uses it to process the
timecard and no further action is taken. If no value exists in this table, the system
proceeds to Step 3.
■ Step 3
The system populates the Timecard Record Type field on the timecard with a
default value of 1.
This table lists the sequence that the system uses to populate fields on the timecard:

Field on the
Timecard Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
Timecard Manually F060116 table Default - 1 Blank Blank
Record Type entered on
timecard.
Pay Type Manually Option - U, Option - E, Labor Blank
entered on F069126 table F060146 table Distribution
timecard. table
Date Worked Manually Pay Period Blank Blank Blank
entered on Ending for
header of Autopay
timecard.
Home Company Manually F060116 table Blank Blank Blank
entered on
timecard.
Home Business F0693006 table Manually F060116 table Blank Blank
Unit entered on
timecard
Union Code for Manually F069306 table F060116 table Blank Blank
Wages and entered on
Reporting timecard.
Job Type Manually F060116 table Blank Blank Blank
entered on
timecard.
Job Step Manually F060116 table Blank Blank Blank
entered on
timecard.
Labor Manually Employee Labor F081012 table F06904 table Blank
Distribution entered on Distribution
Account timecard. Instructions (for
autopay
employees)
Billing Manually AAIs for any Blank Blank Blank
Distribution entered on Missing Element
(Recharges) timecard. RD (F06904)
Equipment Manually AAIs for Object Blank Blank Blank
Distribution entered on Account ED
timecard. (F06904)
Job Location Manually Business Unit Blank Blank Blank
entered on associated with
timecard. Primary
Distribution
Shift Code Manually F060116 table Blank Blank Blank
entered on
timecard.
Shift Differential Manually Shift Differential If Shift Code is Blank Blank
and Method entered on Table $/HR or% blank, retrieve
timecard. (F069246) from Pay Type
table $/HR
(F0690116)
Hours Worked Manually Autopay Labor Blank Blank
entered on Instructions Distribution
timecard. table

Field on the
Timecard Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
Rate Manually Option - U, Option - U, Option - E, F060116 table
entered on F069126 table F060146 table F060146 table
Xe Table:
timecard.
F060118
Base Rate See explanation. Blank Blank Blank Blank
Gross Pay Entered Lump Calculated Blank Blank Blank
Sum Amount.
Flat Burden per F060116 table Option - U, Labor Blank Blank
cent F069126 table Distribution
Business Unit
(F0006)
W/C Insurance Manually Labor F06106 table Option - U, F060116 table
entered on Distribution F069126 table
timecard. Account, update
in F0901
Work Tax Area Manually Labor F060116 table Blank Blank
entered on Distribution
timecard. Payroll Business
Unit (F0006)
Check Route Manually F060116 table Blank Blank Blank
Code entered on
timecard.
Equipment Rate Manually Distribution Labor F1302 table Blank
Code entered on Account, update Distribution
timecard in the F0901 Business Unit,
(F1301). table update in
Payroll Business
Unit or F0006
table
Equipment Rate Manually F1301 table Blank Blank Blank
entered on
timecard.
Bank Account Defined in Interim check AAIs Blank Blank
prepayroll entry
processing
option.
The base rate is not derived from the hourly rate. The hourly rate is derived from the
base rate, usually by applying a multiplier. The extended hourly rate is derived by
applying shift and uprate amounts to the hourly rate.The derivation of the base rate
depends on the derivation of the hourly rate:
Note: The shift sequence can alter the sequence used when applying
multipliers and shift amounts to the base hourly rate when deriving
the hourly and extended rates.
■ You can retrieve the base rate from the record in the F069126 table. The base hourly
rate does not include any multiplier associated with the pay type. The multiplier is
used to derive the hourly rate (PHRT) from the base hourly rate (BHRT). The base
hourly rate and hourly rate can be retrieved from the F069126. The Time Entry
MBF determines which rate to retrieve from Union Rates table based on the pay
type of the timecard and the pay types specified in the Time Entry MBF POs. If the

Setting Processing Options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options Program (P050002A)
timecard's pay type is the same pay type as listed in the "Pay Type - Hourly"
processing option, then both the base rate and hourly rate is the hourly rate
retrieved from the F069126. If the timecard's pay type is the same pay type listed in
the "Pay Type - Regular Overtime" processing option, then the base hourly rate is
the F069126 hourly rate and the hourly rate is either the F069126 overtime rate (if
an overtime rate was specified on the Union Rate's record) or the base rate times
the pay type multiplier from the timecard (if the OT rate was not specified on the
Union Rates record). The same process continues for the other overtime and
holiday rates. For the overtime rates, the pay type multiplier will only be applied
to the base hourly rate if the overtime rate is not found in the F069126 Union Rates
record. Otherwise, the hourly rate will be the OT rate retrieved from the F069126.
■ If the system uses F060146 to derive the hourly rate, the system uses the same rate
as the base rate.
■ If you manually enter the hourly rate, the system determines the base rate by
dividing the hourly rate by the pay-type multiplier. If an override rate is entered
on the timecard, the override rate becomes the base rate, hourly rate, and extended
rate. No other modifications are made to these three rates by the Time Entry MBF.
■ If the hourly rate is retrieved from the F060116 table, the system uses the same rate
as the base rate.
3.2 Setting Processing Options for the Time Entry MBF Processing
Options Program (P050002A)
Use these processing options as the basis for all time entry processing in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system.
Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.
3.2.1 Pay Rates

Use these processing options to specify how the system retrieves an employee's pay
rates for time entry. You can specify the tables that you want the system to search to
retrieve pay rates, and whether you want the system to use the highest pay rate found
or the standard pay rate.
1. Pay Rate
Specify the tables that the system searches to retrieve employees' pay rates for time
entry. If you are using job step progression, the system always retrieves employee rates
for step progression employees from the F069126 table, regardless of how this option is
set. Values are:
Blank: Use pay rates from the F060116 table.
E: Include pay rates from the F060146 table.
U: Include pay rates from the F069126 table.
When you select option E, the system first searches the F060146 table. If no rate exists
for an employee in this table, the system uses the rate that you entered in the F060116
table.
When you select option U, the system first searches the F069126 table. If an employee
does not enter a rate in this table, the system searches for a rate in the F060146 table. If
no rate exists for the employee in the F060146 table, the system uses the rate that you
entered in the F060116 table.

2. Assign Highest Pay Rate

Specify whether the system uses the standard pay rate or the highest pay rate when it
performs the search that you specified in the Pay Rate processing option. If you are
using job step progression, you must set this option to use the standard pay rate.
Values are:
0: Standard pay rate.
1: Highest pay rate found.
3. Offsite Hourly Rate Source (Release 9.1 Update)

Specify a value to determine the method used to assign base hourly rates to offsite
timecards. Values are:
Blank: Assign base hourly rates from the Employee Master File table (F060116).
1: Assign base hourly rates from the Occupational Pay Rates table (F060146).
If you specify a value of 1, and a rate is not found in the Occupational Pay Rates table
(F060146), the base hourly rate is assigned from the Employee Master File table
(F060116).
4. Assign Highest Offsite Hourly Rate (Release 9.1 Update)

Specify a value to determine whether the system assigns the original hourly rate from
the selected offsite rate source or searches all of the offsite rate sources to assign the
highest hourly rate to an offsite timecard. Values are:
Blank: Assign the hourly rate from the selected offsite rate source.
1: Assign the highest hourly rate off all offsite rate sources.
5. Piece Rate
Specify whether the system uses the employee piece rate or the item piece rate when
entering timecards for piece rate employees. Values are:
Blank: Retrieve pay rates from F060116.
E: Retrieve piece rate from F060146.
P: Retrieve piece rate from F06918.
6. Pay Type Multiplier Override

Specify whether the system applies the pay type multiplier when you manually enter
a pay rate on a timecard. Values are:
0: Use pay type multiplier.
1: Do not use pay type multiplier.
7. Override Rate Assignment (Release 9.1 Update)

Specify a value to determine how an override rate is assigned to a timecard. Values
are:
Blank: Assign override rate as the final hourly rate.
1: Assign override rate as the base hourly rate.
If you specify a value of 1, the system initially assigns the specified rate to the base
hourly rate (BHRT). Then, the system modifies the base hourly rate to include the pay
type multiplier and assigns it to the hourly rate (PHRT). Finally, the system applies
any shift or uprate amounts on the timecard to the hourly rate and assigns it to the
extended hourly rate (SHRT). If you do not specify a value, the system assigns the
specified rate to the base hourly rate, hourly rate, and extended hourly rate without
making any modifications.

3.2.2 Pay Types

Use these processing options to specify the pay types and pay tables that the system
uses to determine employee pay rates. If you are using job step progression
processing, you must complete these processing options to ensure that overtime is
calculated correctly.
1. Union Table - Pay Type Codes

Specify rate and pay type multiplier information.
Pay Type - Hourly

Specify the hourly pay type to process. If you are using pay rates from the F069126
table, enter only pay type codes that are linked to the entries in F069126. If you entered
regular or premium amounts in F069126, enter their matching pay type codes here.
Pay Type - Regular Overtime

Specify the regular overtime pay type to process. If you are using pay rates from
F060146, complete this processing option only. If you are using pay rates from F069126,
enter only pay type codes that are linked to the entries that you made in F069126. If
you entered regular or premium amounts in F069126, enter their matching pay type
codes here.
Note: If you complete this processing option, the Time Entry

program retrieves the rate from F069126 before applying overrides
such as shift differential. If the Time Entry program does not find
premium amounts in F069126, but you completed the Regular
Overtime processing option, the program applies the pay type
multiplier before applying shift differential overrides.
Pay Type - Double Overtime

Specify the double overtime pay type to process.
If you are using pay rates from the F069126, enter only pay type codes that are linked
to the entries in F069126. If you entered regular or premium amounts in the F069126
table, enter their matching pay type codes.

program retrieves the rate from the F069126 before applying overrides
premium amounts in F069126, but you completed the Double
Overtime processing option, the program applies the pay type
multiplier before applying shift differential overrides.
Pay Type - Triple Overtime

Specify the triple overtime pay type to process.
If you are using pay rates from F069126, enter only pay type codes that are linked to
the entries in F069126. If you entered regular or premium amounts in F069126, enter
their matching pay type codes here.


premium amounts in F069126, but you completed the Triple Overtime
processing option, the program applies the pay type multiplier before
applying shift differential overrides.
Pay Type - Holiday

Specify the holiday pay type to process. If you are loading pay rates from F069126,
enter only pay type codes that are linked to the entries in F069126. If you entered
regular or premium amounts in F069126, enter their matching pay type codes here.

premium amounts in F069126, but you completed the Holiday
processing option, the program applies the Pay Type Multiplier before
applying shift differential overrides.
2. Job Type and Step Cross-Reference

Specify whether the system automatically enters job information into the Pay Type
field. When this option is set to 1, the system automatically enters the job type and step
from F06932 into the Pay Type field. Values are:
0: Do not automatically enter job information.
1: Enter job information automatically.
3. Pay Type Description

Specify whether the system automatically enters explanation text into the Pay Type
Description field. This automatic function can reduce data entry. The system enters the
pay type description from F069116 in the Explanation field (YTEXR) of F06116. Values
are:
0: Do not load the Pay Type Description field automatically.
1: Load the Pay Type Description field automatically.
4. Split Time
Specify whether the system splits time automatically. The system splits time according
to the percentages specified in the F06016 table. The total percentages of hours must
equal 100 percent. Values are:
0: Do not split time automatically.
1: Split time automatically.
3.2.3 Equipment
Use these processing options to determine how equipment charges are handled during
time entry.
1. Zero Billing Rate

Specify whether the system uses the zero billing rate when you charge employee time
against specific equipment. Values are:

0: Do not use.
1: Use.
3.2.4 Batches
Use these processing options to determine how the system assigns time entry batches.
1. Batch Number
Specify whether the system assigns batch numbers automatically from next numbers.
It is recommended that you enable the system to assign batch numbers automatically.
You can override the batch number that the system assigns. Enabling the system to
assign batch numbers disables the Get Batch Number form exit. When you do not
assign batch numbers automatically, you must either enter a batch number or use the
Get Batch Number form exit to retrieve a batch number. Values are:
0: Do not assign.
1: Assign.
3.2.5 Employee
Use these processing options to determine whether the system automatically
information from the timecard to F060116.
1. Check Route Code

Specify whether the system updates the check route code on the employee master
record with the value entered on the timecard. Values are:
0: Update the employee master record only if the check route code is blank.
1: Always update the employee master record.
2: Do not update the employee master record.
3.2.6 Recharge
Use these processing options to specify the default values that the system uses for
multicurrency and recharge rate information.
1. Enable Multi-Currency Functionality

Specify whether multicurrency time accounting is enabled. Values are:
0: Do not enable.
1: Enable.
2. Business Unit Currency for Base Amount

Specify a code that represents an amount, for recharge records, that is the fixed
amount and is not susceptible to currency fluctuations. Values are:
0: The amount in the home business unit currency is the fixed amount.
1: The amount in the recharge job currency is the fixed amount.
Note: This code does not apply to other payroll records. For
example, for document type T2, the home business unit currency is
the fixed amount.

3. Use Billing Markup Table for Rate Lookup

Specify whether the system obtains recharge billing rates from F48096. Values are:
0: Do not use.
1: Use.
4. Generation Type Payroll

Specify the type of entries for a batch and the markup rules for F48096. When
associated with types of entries, the system uses these codes to assign the generation
type of a batch at the time the batch is created. When associated with billing
rate/markup processing, the system uses these codes to determine the markup rules
for invoice, revenue, and component amounts. Depending on how you define the
billing constants, different markup rules can apply to different amounts, as follows:
Type 1: When the billing constants specify that invoice and revenue amounts are
always the same, the markup rule applies to revenue, invoice, and component
amounts. If the billing constants specify that the invoice and revenue amounts can be
different, the markup rule still applies to revenue, invoice, and component amounts if
no Type 2 rule exists.
Type 2: When the billing constants specify that the invoice and revenue amounts can
be different, the markup rule applies to revenue and component amounts only.
Type 3: This type applies to component amounts. This rule is not dependent on the
billing constants settings.
Type P: Payroll recharge processing is used for billing recharge rates using the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system. Values are:
1: Invoice Processing
2: Revenue Processing
3: Component Processing
P: Recharge Processing
5. No Billing Markup Rate Found Action

Specify how the system establishes the employee's rate when not using F48096. Values
are:
Blank: Use the Employee Distribution Rate.
1: Use the Employee Cost Rate.
2: Return error.
6. Billing Rate Markup Table Version (P48096)

Specify a program version that identifies a specific set of data selection and sequencing
settings for the application. You can name versions using any combination of
alphabetic and numeric characters. Versions that begin with XJDE or ZJDE are
predefined.
7. Force Dynamic Account Creation

Specify whether the system forces dynamic account creation. Dynamic account
creation enables the system to write invalid accounts on timecards and process them
through a payroll as long as they follow the model chart of accounts (search for
business unit MD in Account Master (P0901). The system automatically creates
accounts when you run the post to the general ledger. The system adds # as the first
characters of the account to enable validation of the account. To activate dynamic

account creation at the system level, go to System Setup [P0000]), then into General
Accounting Constants, and select the Allow Invalid Accounts option. Values are:
0: Do not force.
1: Force.
3.2.7 Leave Entry

Use these processing options to specify how the system processes leave time.
1. Leave Verification Set

Specify a code that identifies a group of leave verification rules that are grouped
together for processing on any given application that will validate entry of leave time.
You set up this code in the Leave Verification Rules program (P07602).
2. Leave History Source File

Specify whether to calculate leave balances using the Employee F06146 table, or the
F06147 table. Values are:
0: F06146
1: F06147
3.2.8 Interims
Use these processing options to enable the Time Entry Interim Generator and to
determine which interim ID is used during timecard entry.
1. Interim Header
Specify whether the system automatically creates interim payment header records
during the time entry process. If you create interim header record for timecards, you
must process the interim payments using the Interim Payment Workbench to populate
all calculated values associated with the payment. Values are:
1: Create.
0: Do not create.
2. Interim ID Pay Cycle Code

Identify the pay cycle code that the system uses to search for the default interim ID
that creates interim payments during time entry. The system determines which interim
ID to assign to interim payments that are created during time entry using the value in
this processing option and the value in the country code processing option on this tab.
The system assigns the interim ID that is set up as the default interim ID for the pay
cycle code and country code combination for these processing options to the interim
payments.
3. Interim ID Country Code

Identify the country code that the system uses to search for the default interim ID that
is assigned to interim payments. The default interim IDs are created during time entry.
The system uses the value in this field, along with the value in the Pay Cycle Code
processing option on this tab, to determine which interim ID to use. The system uses
the default interim ID that is set up for this pay cycle code and country code
combination.

3.2.9 Processing
Use these processing options to specify how the system processes locked employees
and public timecards.
1. Time Entry Lockout

Specify whether to release processed records to payroll. Values are:
0: Release processed records (default).
1: Keep processed records locked out to Time Entry.
When you keep time entry records locked, the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll
system does not process them. You can set this processing option to 1 when you have
multiple stages through which you need to process time entry records prior to running
payroll. For example, to process the records through Time Card Automation/Overtime
Rule Evaluation, use a time entry version that releases the time entry records to payroll
on the final step.
2. Public or Private Timecards

Specify whether the system creates private or public timecards. Values are:
0 or blank: Create private timecards (default).
1: Create public timecards.
3. Suspense Account Derivation

Specify whether the system uses a suspense account when the account number entered
in the timecard entry is an invalid account. Values are:
Blank: Do not use the suspense account (default).
1: Use the suspense account.
3.2.10 Burden
Use these processing options to specify how the system calculates burden.
1. Calculate Flat Burden when Lump Sum is entered

Specify whether the system calculates the flat burden for a lump sum that you enter on
the timecard. Values are:
0: Calculate.
1: Do not calculate.
3.2.11 Rate Editing

Use these processing options to specify whether the system allows blank billing rates.
1. Pay Rate Editing

Specify whether you can enter a blank billing rate on a timecard or whether the system
enters billing rate information through the timecard automation process. Values are:
0: Do not allow.
1: Allow.

Setting Processing Options for the Speed Time Entry Program (P051121)
3.3 Setting Processing Options for the Speed Time Entry Program
(P051121)
Time Entry (G05BT1), Speed Time Entry.
3.3.1 Time Entry

Use these processing options to specify whether the system automatically prevents
changes and the program version.
1. Time Entry Changes

Specify whether changes are permitted. Values are:
1: Prevent changes.
0: Do not prevent changes.
2. Time Entry Version

Specify which version of the Time Entry Master Business Function (P050002A) you
want to use to process timecards. If you leave this processing option blank, the system
uses ZJDE0001.
3.3.2 Defaults
Use these processing options to specify the default information that the system
displays automatically.
1. Address Number
Specify whether the system automatically supplies this field as you enter timecards on
the Speed Time Entry Revisions form (W051121C). The system supplies this processing
option if you leave it blank and tab to the next processing option. Values are:
1: Supply address number
0: Enter address number manually.
2. Pay Type
Specify whether the system automatically supplies this field as you enter timecards on
the Speed Time Entry Revisions form (W051121C). The system supplies this processing
option if you leave it blank and tab to the next processing option. Values are:
1: Supply pay type.
0: Enter pay type manually.
3.3.3 Manufacturing
Use these processing options to specify a type of time entry.
1. Manufacturing Time Entry

Specify whether the manufacturing functionality in Speed Time Entry (P051121) is
enabled. Setting this value to 1 enables the speed time entry application (JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Payroll system) to be used within the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Manufacturing system. When this feature is enabled and appropriate values are
entered on a linked timecard, the system creates resulting records in the Work Order
Time Transactions table (F31122). The required timecard processing options are as
follows:
■ Order Number

Setting Processing Options for the Time Entry Floods Program (P051191)
■ Operational Sequence Number

■ Shift code
■ Quantity
■ Unit of Measure
To disable the link to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manufacturing system when
entering timecards, leave this processing option blank. Values are:
0 or blank: Disable Manufacturing Time Entry.
1: Enable Manufacturing Time Entry.
Note: When you delete timecards that include records in the Work
Order Time Transactions table, set the Manufacturing processing
option to 1. If this processing option is not set to 1, then the system
does not delete Work Order Time Transactions records.
3.3.4 Localization Selections

Use these processing options to specify New Zealand processing.
1. New Zealand Holiday Pay Act.

Specify New Zealand processing. Values are:
Blank: Does not use New Zealand leave processing.
1: Holiday Pay (1981) Act Logic for Leave (Holidays) Taken.
3.3.5 Profit Management

Use these processing options to specify whether you must enter an activity code.
1. Activity Code
Specify whether entry of the activity code is required. Values are:
1: Mandatory entry.
0: Optional entry.
3.4 Setting Processing Options for the Time Entry Floods Program
(P051191)
Time Entry (G05BT1), Employee Master Filter.
3.4.1 Display
1. Employee Master Tabs
Specify whether the system displays certain options.
Category Codes 001–008, 009–016, 017–020

Specify whether the system displays category codes 001 through 008. Values are:
0: Hide tab
1: Display tab

Organization
Specify whether you want to display the tab containing organization information on
the Employee Master Filter form. Values are:
0: Hide tab
By not displaying this tab, you will not be able to use organization information such as
company, business unit, supervisor, and check route code for determining selection
criteria for the filter.
1: Display tab
By displaying this tab, you will be able to use organization information such as
company, business unit, supervisor, and check route code for determining selection
criteria for the filter.
Other
Specify whether you want to display the tab containing other information on the
Employee Master Filter form. Values are:
0: Hide tab
By not displaying this tab, you will not be able to use information contained in the
Other tab, such as last business unit worked, benefit group, shift code, job type, and
job step and pay cycle code for determining selection criteria for the filter.
1: Display tab
When you display this tab, you are able to use information contained in the Other tab,
such as last business unit worked, benefit group, shift code, job type, and job step and
pay cycle code for determining selection criteria for the filter.
2. Current Transaction Tabs and 3. Historical Transactions Tabs

Specify whether the system displays certain options.
Organization
Specify display settings. Values are:
0: Hide tab
1: Display tab
Subledger
0: Hide tab
1: Display tab
Category Codes (001-004)

0: Hide tab
1: Display tab
3.4.2 Line Detail Time Entry

Specify whether you want to prevent changes to and deletion of timecards locked by
another user when using the Line Detail Time Entry form. Values are:
0: Do not prevent changes.

1: Prevent changes.

Specify the version of the Time Entry Master Business Function (P050002A) that you
want to use when processing timecards using Line Detail Time Entry. If you leave this
processing option blank, the system uses ZJDE0001.
3. Line Detail Display Tabs

These processing options specify display options.
Category Codes
Specify whether you want to display the tab containing category codes on the Line
Detail Time Entry form. Values are:
0: Do not display.
By not displaying this tab, you will not be able to use category codes as default
information on timecards entered using the Line Detail Time Entry form. If you have
not defined category codes, it is not necessary to display this tab.
1: Display.
By displaying this tab, you will be able to use category codes as default information on
timecards entered using the Line Detail Time Entry form.
Organization
Specify whether you want to display the tab containing organization information on
the Line Detail Time Entry form. Values are:
0: Do not display.
By not displaying this tab, you will not be able to use organization information such as
company, business unit, supervisor, and check route code as default information on
1: Display.
By displaying this tab, you will be able to use organization information such as
company, business unit, supervisor, and check route code as default information on
Subledger
Specify whether you want to display the tab containing subledger information on the
Line Detail Time Entry form. Values are:
0: Do not display.
By not displaying this tab, you will not be able to use subledger information such as
subledger and subledger type as default information on timecards entered using the
Line Detail Time Entry form.
1: Display this tab on the form.
By displaying this tab, you will be able to use subledger information such as subledger
and subledger type as default information on timecards entered using the Line Detail
Time Entry form.
3.4.3 Daily Time Entry

1. Time Entry Week Begin Day
Specify the day of the week that time entry begins.


Specify whether changes are allowed. Values are:
1: Prevent changes
0: Do not prevent changes

Specify a program version. Values are:
Blank: Default version
4. Daily Time Entry Display Tabs

Specify time entry display information.
Category Codes, Organization tab, and Subledger tab

0: Hide tab
1: Display tab
3.4.4 Time Sheet Time Entry

Specify a program version. Values are:
Blank: Default version
2. Time Sheet Display Tabs

Specify display options on the time sheet.
Category Codes, Organization, Subledger, and Pay Info

0: Hide tab
1: Display tab
3. Time Entry Defaults

Specify time entry default information.
Address Number
Specify whether the system automatically displays the address number. Values are:
1: Supply address number.
0: Enter address number.
Pay Type
Specify whether the system automatically supplies the pay type from the previous
timecard if you tab through the pay type field. Values are:
0: Enter the pay type manually.
1: The system automatically supplies pay type.
3.4.5 Profit Management

1. Activity Code
Specify whether the activity code is required. Values are:

1: Mandatory entry.
0: Optional entry.
3.4.6 Localization
1. New Zealand Holiday Pay Act.
Specify whether the system applies the New Zealand Holiday Pay Act when you enter
timecards that include vacation time. Values are:
0: Do not apply.
1: Apply.
3.4.7 Timecard Corrections

Specify the version of Time Entry. Values are:
Blank: System considers the default version.
You can enter the required version.
2. Gross Pay change resulting with no change in Hours.

Specify how the system handles a timecard correction that results in a change in gross
pay without a change in hours. Values are:
Blank: Automatically generate a Lump Sum timecard for the difference.
1: Do not recalculate the timecard's Gross Pay amount.

4
Setting Up Piece Rate Processing
4

■ Section 4.1, "Understanding Piece Rate Processing"
■ Section 4.2, "Prerequisites"
■ Section 4.3, "Setting Up Employee Piece Rates"
■ Section 4.4, "Setting Up Piece Rate Item Masters"
■ Section 4.5, "Setting Up Item Piece Rates"
■ Section 4.6, "Setting Up Minimum Wage Information for Piece Rate Processing"
4.1 Understanding Piece Rate Processing

Use piece rate processing to pay employees in the organization by the number of units
that they produce or complete, by the number of hours that they work, or on a salaried
basis.
You can enter timecards into the system for piece rate employees by using any of the
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne time entry programs. Depending on how you set the
processing options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options program, the system
derives the piece rate from either the F060116 or F06918 table.
To set up piece rate processing, you must complete these tasks:
■ Set up employee piece rates if the system derives rates from F060116.
■ Create item master records for each piece that you want to track using piece rate
processing.
■ Set up rates for each item that you want to track using piece rate processing.
■ Enter current federal and state minimum wage rates.
■ Create timecard automation rule sets to calculate minimum wage information and
the hourly rate for overtime calculations.
■ Create employee groups that include all employees who you pay using piece rate
processing.
4.2 Prerequisites
Before you complete the tasks in this section:
■ Set the processing options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options program
(P050002A) to specify how the system retrieves rates for piece rate employees.
Setting Up Piece Rate Processing 4-1

Setting Up Employee Piece Rates
■ Set up pay types for piece rate processing.
See Also:
■ Creating Employee Groups.
■ Creating Overtime Rule Sets.
■ Entering Piece Rate Timecards.
■ "Setting Up Pay Types" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Human Capital Management Fundamentals
4.3 Setting Up Employee Piece Rates

This section provides an overview of employee piece rates setup and discusses how to
set up employee piece rates.
4.3.1 Understanding Employee Piece Rates Setup

You can specify a piece rate at the employee level so that regardless of which items the
employee completes, the employee is always paid the same piece rate.
4.3.2 Forms Used to Set Up Employee Piece Rates
Form Name FormID Navigation Usage

Work With Employee W07024A Piece Rate (G07BPR), Select employees for whom
Piece Rates Employee Piece Rate you want to add or update
piece rates.
Employee Piece Rate W07024B From the Work With Add or revise employee
Revisions Employee Piece Rates form, piece rates.
select a record and then click
Select.
4.3.3 Setting Up Employee Piece Rates

Access the Employee Piece Rates Revisions form.
4.4 Setting Up Piece Rate Item Masters

This section provides an overview of piece rate item master setup and discusses how
to set up piece rate item masters.
4.4.1 Understanding Piece Rate Item Masters Setup

Before you can process piece rate information in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Payroll system, you must enter the pieces or items into the system. You use the Item
Master program (P07916) to enter a record for each item or piece into the F06916 table.
This table stores information that is specific to each item that is used for piece rate
processing.
You can enter an item into the system multiple times if that item is measured or
quantified using more than one unit of measure. For example, if some employees are
paid according to the number of pieces of an item that they produce, and other

Setting Up Item Piece Rates
employees are paid according to the number of pounds that they produce of the same
item, you can enter multiple piece rate records for the item.
4.4.2 Forms Used to Set Up Piece Rate Item Masters

Work With Piece Rate W07916A Piece Rate (G07BPR), Piece Access the Piece Rates Item
Item Master Rate Item Master Master Revisions form.
Piece Rate Item W07916B Click Add on the Work With Set up piece rate item
Master Revisions Piece Rate Item Master form. masters.
4.4.3 Setting Up Piece Rate Item Masters

Access the Piece Rate Item Master Revisions form.
Primary Unit of Measure

Enter a code (UDC 00/UM) that designates any unit of measure appropriate for an
employee's time and pay.
Conversion Factor 1 through Conversion Factor 3

Enter a code that specifies a factor for converting one unit of measure to another unit
of measure. This field is informational only.
Unit of Measure 1 through Unit of Measure 3

Enter a unit of measure. You may define the use and description of this code to fit the
needs of the organization. For example, piece rate items currently do not calculate unit
of measure conversions, therefore all units are considered equal to one.
You can set up this category code to monitor unit of measure conversion information
that relates to piece rate items. This field is used for information purposes only.
Target Production
Enter the total number of pieces that should be entered. The system compares this
number to the actual number of pieces that are entered and a variance amount is
generated to display the difference between expected and actual pieces.
This item is reserved for future use.
Product Group Code

Reserved for future use.
Stock Number
Enter the stock number for the processed item.
Item Code
Reserved for future use.
4.5 Setting Up Item Piece Rates

This section provides an overview of item piece rate setup and discusses how to set up
item piece rates.
4.5.1 Understanding Item Piece Rate Setup

After you set up items in F07916, you must enter rates for those items so that
employees who are processed through payroll using piece rates are paid correctly. Use

Setting Up Item Piece Rates
the Item Piece Rate Revisions program (P06918) to set up multiple rates for each item
that is stored in the Piecework Item Master table. Item piece rates are stored in F06918.
You can create multiple piece rate records in F06918 for each unique combination of:
■ Business unit
■ Union code
■ Job type
■ Job step
■ Effective date
■ Item number
■ Unit of measure
For example, you might pay employees who belong to different unions different rates
for completing the same piece. The system uses the information on employee
timecards to determine which rates to retrieve from F07918.
4.5.2 Prerequisite
Enter item master records for each piece for which you want to set up rates.
See Setting Up Piece Rate Item Masters.
4.5.3 Forms Used to Set Up Item Piece Rates

Work With Item Piece W07918A Piece Rate (G07BPR), Item Access the Item Piece
Rates Piece Rates Rates Revisions form.
Item Piece Rates Revisions W07918C Click Add on the Work Set up item piece rates.
With Item Piece Rates
form.
4.5.4 Setting Up Item Piece Rates

Access the Item Piece Rates Revisions form.

Setting Up Minimum Wage Information for Piece Rate Processing
Figure 4–1 Item Piece Rates Revisions form
Begin Date
Enter the first date in a range of dates.
End Date
Enter the last date in a range of dates.
Labor Distribution Flag

Enter a value that controls whether the labor costs include a flat burden for payroll
taxes and benefits. Values are:
0: The flat burden factor is always 1.0000, so the resulting amount for the flat burden is
zero.
1: The flat burden factor is always greater than 1.0000, so the labor costs include a flat
burden.
Labor Distribution Multiplier

Enter a multiplier to load direct labor costs with burden. For example, a factor of 1.32
would load every dollar of labor cost with 32 cents worth of burden.
4.6 Setting Up Minimum Wage Information for Piece Rate Processing

This section provides an overview of minimum wage requirements for piece rate
processing and discusses how to set up minimum wage information for piece rate
processing.
4.6.1 Understanding Minimum Wage Requirements for Piece Rate Processing

When you pay employees using the piece rate method, you must verify that each
employee is paid enough so that they meet the legal minimum wage requirements that
are defined by the federal government. If the minimum wage rate is higher in your
state than the rate that is determined by the federal government, you must verify that
each employee meets the state's minimum wage requirements.

Companies use minimum wage laws to ensure that employees are paid at or above a
specified pay rate for each hour of labor that they perform. When you pay an
employee using piece rate processing, you do not necessarily pay the employee an
hourly wage. Therefore, you must determine whether the pay that an employee
receives for completing a specified number of pieces, along with any other wages
received, meets or exceeds the minimum wage when the total is divided by the
number of hours worked.
Using timecard automation rules and functions, the system can calculate whether an
employee meets the minimum wage requirements. If an employee does not meet the
minimum wage requirement, the system automatically creates additional timecards to
ensure that the employee does meet the wage requirements.
To accurately calculate minimum wage information, you must:
■ Enter the federal minimum wage rate in the default value for data item FMRT
(Minimum Wage Rate).
■ Set up state minimum wage rates if any states in which the organization does
business has a minimum wage rate that is higher than the federal rate.
■ Set up employee groups that include all of the employees who are paid using
piece rate processing.
■ Set up timecard automation rules to calculate minimum wage information.
You also need to set up:
■ Piece rate pay type.
■ Employee information.
■ Time Entry MBF processing option.
When setting up piece rate processing, you also need to set up a piece rate pay type
that is usually pay type 35. Use the Pay Types, Deductions, Benefit program (P059116)
and set the pay source to B. Anything other than B is an hourly rate.
Use the Basic Compensation form in the Employee Master Information program
(P0801) to set the pay class to P (not H or S).
Set these processing options on the Pay Rates tab in the Time Entry MBF program
(P050002A) to:
■ Pay Rate: Blank
■ Piece Rate:P (the F060116 table) or E (the F06918 table).
The system overrides the value for the Piece Rate field unless the value for the Pay
Rate field is Blank. Use this version for time entry. Also use this version in the Payroll
Cycle Workbench (P07210). When a version is set up for Piece Rate, then you need to
specify that version when using any time entry program.
See Also:
■ "Setting Up Payroll Cycle Information, " in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Payroll Implementation Guide.
■ "Setting Up the Payroll Cycle Workbench," in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Payroll Implementation Guide
■ Setting Processing Options for Payroll Cycle Workbench
(P07210)," in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Payroll

4.6.2 Prerequisite
Add the value MW to UDC 06/TX.
See Also:
■ Creating Employee Groups.
■ Creating a Timecard Change Rule.
■ Setting Up Minimum Wage Information for Piece Rate Processing.
4.6.3 Forms Used to Set Up Minimum Wage Information for Piece Rate Processing

Work With Tax Area W069012C Taxes and Insurance Access tax area
Information Setup (G07BPTI4), Tax information by state.
Area Information
Tax Area Revisions W069012B Click Add on the Work Set up minimum wage
With Tax Area information for specific
Information form. states.
4.6.4 Setting Up Minimum Wage Information for Piece Rate Processing

Access the Tax Area Revisions form.
Figure 4–2 Tax Area Revisions form
Tax Type
Enter MW in this field when setting up tax area information for minimum wage
processing

Tax Adjustment Limitation

Enter the minimum wage rate for the state. Enter rates using two decimal places. For
example, to enter a minimum wage rate of USD 6, enter 6.00 in this field.

5
Setting Up Time Entry Batch Processing
5

■ Section 5.1, "Understanding Time Entry Batch Processing"
■ Section 5.2, "Setting Up a Flat File Cross-Reference"
■ Section 5.3, "Completing Fields for the Employee Transactions - Batch File Table"
■ Section 5.4, "Uploading Timecard Information"
■ Section 5.5, "Revising Uploaded Timecard Information"
■ Section 5.6, "Reviewing the Time & Pay Entry Register for Batch File Report"
■ Section 5.7, "Creating Timecards from Uploaded Information and Purging
Processed Payroll Batches"
5.1 Understanding Time Entry Batch Processing

Time entry batch processing uploads and converts timecard information from a
third-party source to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system. After the
information is converted, you can create timecards in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Payroll system. You can upload timecard information from any of these third-party
sources:
■ A remote PC time entry program.
■ Custom systems.
■ Electronic data interchange (EDI) transactions.
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Interoperability model makes possible the sharing and
processing of information between a third-party source and JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne software.
The Inbound Flat File Conversion program (R47002C) for uploading batches of
timecards verifies that the information in F06116Z1 is processed correctly and copied
to F06116. After the information is in F06116Z1, you can create timecards.
You can upload timecard information from a third-party source as a flat file that will
correspond to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne time entry forms. You might need to format
the timecard information in the third-party source so that the information is uploaded
in a corresponding tabular format.
The uploaded timecard information is stored in the F06116Z1 table until you process
the information. When you process the information, the system creates timecards and
stores them in the F06116 table with all other timecards. However, before you create
timecards from uploaded information, you can review the information in the table and
Setting Up Time Entry Batch Processing 5-1

Setting Up a Flat File Cross-Reference
revise it for accuracy. Review the Batch File Register report to verify that the uploaded
batches are accurate. After you have reviewed and revised a batch of uploaded
timecard information, you can use the information to create timecards. After the
timecards are created, you can include them in payroll cycle processing.
You can set processing options to have the system automatically purge the processed
batches from the F06116Z1 table when you create the timecards. The system
automatically purges the processed batches from F06116Z1. Doing so conserves
computer disk space and makes locating unprocessed batches easier.
5.2 Setting Up a Flat File Cross-Reference

This section includes an overview of flat file cross-references, lists a prerequisite, and
discusses how to set up a flat file cross-reference.
5.2.1 Understanding Flat File Cross-References

The system needs to associate the flat file with the timecard information before it can
upload data from a third-party source. When you upload timecard information, the
system retrieves the data from the flat files and stores it in the F06116Z1 table. The
system uses flat file cross-reference information for these conditions:
■ For inbound transactions, the system uses flat file cross-reference information if
the third-party source cannot write data to the interface tables in the required
format for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne software. The third-party source can write
the data to a specific flat file for each transaction and record type.
■ For uploading information, the system uses flat file cross-reference information if
the third-party source is a new or different source.
5.2.2 Prerequisite
Set up the conversion table that supports Unicode processing.
See JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools System Administration Guide
5.2.3 Forms Used to Set Up a Flat File Cross-Reference

Work With Flat File W47002A In the Fast Path field, Review and revise
Cross-Reference enter P47002. existing flat file
cross-references, or access
the Flat File
Cross-Reference form.
Flat File Cross-Reference W47002B Click Add on the Work Set up a flat file
With Flat File cross-reference
Cross-Reference form.
5.2.4 Setting Up a Flat File Cross-Reference

Access the Flat File Cross-Reference Form.
Transaction
Enter the qualifier that identifies a specific type of transaction.

Completing Fields for the Employee Transactions - Batch File Table
Dir Ind (direction indicator)

Enter a code that indicates whether the transaction is inbound or outbound.
Flat File Name

The name of the flat file. This name includes the directory path where the flat file
exists. Any folders that you specify in the filename path must already exist, because
the system does not create the folders. Also, you must use double backslashes (\\) in
the filename (for example, c:\\Batch Time Entry\\F06116Z.txt).
Record Type
Identifies EDI transaction records as header and detail information. This is an EDI
function only.
Record Type Description

Enter a user-defined name or remark.
5.3 Completing Fields for the Employee Transactions - Batch File Table
This section provides an overview of the fields in the Employee Transactions - Batch
File Table (F06116Z1) table:
5.3.1 Understanding the Fields in the Employee Transactions - Batch File Table
When you upload flat-file information to the F06116Z1 table, you must ensure that the
information from the third-party time tracking system is in the correct format. The
F06116Z1 table has a large number of fields that you can populate when you upload
timecard information. Some of these fields are required.
To upload information from a third-party time tracking system, you must complete
required fields in a custom program so that the system can identify the information
and create a timecard with valid information in JD Edwards Time and Labor.
Review the tables in the following sections for the field names, alpha names,
explanations, and values of required fields needed for the F06116Z1 table.
5.3.1.1 Required Fields

These transaction fields must be completed in a custom program for the system to
identify the transaction and enter the values in the F06116Z1 table:
Field Name Field Description

VLEDUS (User ID) Enter the ID of the employee who enters the
transactions.
VLEDTN (User Transaction Number) Enter a number to identify a specific transaction
within a batch.
VLEDLN (Line Number) Enter a number to identify each line within a given
transaction.
VLEDDT (EDI Transmission Date) Enter the Julian date of the transmission.
VLEDER (Send/Receive Indicator) Enter R for inbound transactions. This code indicates
that the record was written by a system other than JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne software, with the intent
that the transaction be received in JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne software.


VLEDSP (Processed Flag) Enter 0 for inbound transactions. When the system
finishes uploading the information, it automatically
updates this field to 1.
VLEDTC (Action Flag) Enter either A for add or D for delete (left justified).
VLEDTR (Transaction Type) Enter 1 for the inbound transaction.
VLEDBT (User Batch) Enter a batch number to identify a specific
transaction for the specific user ID.
Note: The VLEDUS (User ID), VLEDBT (User Batch), and VLEDTN
(User Transaction Number) fields must contain values that identify
the transaction within the table. You can complete any combination of
these three fields to identify the transaction during the interface
processing.
You must complete these data fields for the system to accept the transaction:

VLAN8 (Address Number) Enter the employee's address book number.
VLPRTR (Transaction Number) Enter a unique number assigned within the batch that
uniquely identifies the transaction.
VLPHRW (Hours Worked) Enter a number with implied decimals.
VLDWK (Date Worked) Enter the date in Julian format that is used as the actual
work date or pay period ending date.
VLPDBA (Pay Type Code) Enter a pay type. The pay types are controlled by the
F069116 table.
VLICU (Batch Number) Enter a number assigned to a batch of timecards. This
number can be the same as the EDBT (User Batch) field.
5.3.1.2 Optional Fields

Many fields in the F06116Z1 table are not required to upload timecard information.
However, you might upload values into these fields. You can complete these optional
fields in a custom program. If necessary, obtain technical support for additional
assistance.
These fields are optional:


VLANI (Account Number) A number that identifies an account in the general ledger.
You can use one of these formats for account numbers:
■ Structured account (business unit, object, subsidiary)
■ 25-digit unstructured number
■ 8-digit short account ID number
■ Speed code
The first character of the account indicates the format of the
account number. You define the account format in the
General Accounting Constants program (P0000).
The value is supplied from the master business function
based on labor distribution fields.
Use this field or the VLMCU (Business Unit), VLOBJ (Object
Account), and VLSUB (Subsidiary) fields.
VLMCU (Business Unit) A value that identifies a separate entity within a business
for which you want to track costs. For example, a business
unit might be a warehouse, location, or job.
VLOBJ (Object Account) The object account portion of the general ledger account.
VLSUB (Subsidiary) A subdivision of an object account. Subsidiary accounts
include more detailed records of the accounting activity for
an object account.
VLGMCU (Recharge Business Unit) For payroll purposes, a business unit that represents the
distribution account where the recharge (billing) amounts
are to be posted. The only time that this field is generated is
when you enter 2 or 3 in the Record Type field for an
employee. In these instances, the derived distribution
account, or entered account, equals this business unit.
VLGOBJ (Recharge Object Account) For payroll purposes, the number of the account to which
the recharge (billing) amounts are to be posted.
VLGSUB (Recharge Subsidiary) For payroll purposes, the number of the subsidiary account
to which the recharge (billing) amounts are to be posted.
VLSBL (Subledger) A code that identifies a detailed auxiliary account within a
general ledger account. A subledger can be an equipment
number, an address book number, and so forth. If you
complete this field, you must also complete the VLSBLT
(Subledger Type) field.
VLSBLT (Subledger Type) A user-defined code (UDC) (00/ST) that is used with the
Subledger field to identify the subledger type.
VLWR01 (Phase) A UDC (00/W1) that indicates the current stage or
development of a work order. You can assign a work order
to only one phase code at a time.
This UDC is automatically supplied from the work order if
the speed coding method for entering a work order is used.
VLMCUO (Chargeout Business Unit) A business unit that represents the location where the
employee worked. You can use this code to indicate that an
employee worked at this location but charged the time to
another business unit. This field is used for deriving rates
from F069126 and is used exclusively by the Certified
Payroll Register program (R07371).
VLMAIL (Check Route Code) A UDC (06/CR) that specifies the check routing or mail stop
code. Use this code to sequence the printing of payroll
checks to facilitate their handling and delivery.


VLUN (Union Code) A UDC (06/UN) that represents the union or plan in which
the employee or group of employees work or participate.
VLJBCD (Job Type) A UDC (06/G) that defines the jobs within the organization.
You can associate pay and benefit information with a job
type and apply that information to the employees who are
linked to that job type.
VLJBST (Job Step) A UDC (06/GS) that designates a specific step, grade, or
salary level within a particular job type. The system uses
this field in conjunction with job type to determine pay rates
by job.
VLSHFT (Shift Codes) A UDC (06/SH) that identifies daily work shifts. In payroll
systems, you can use a shift code to add a percent or
amount to the hourly rate on a timecard.
VLSHD (Shift Differential) An additional rate, expressed in currency or percent, that
the system adds to an employee's hourly rate, depending on
the shift worked. This rate can be applied in one of two
ways as defined by the Shift Differential Calculation
Sequence (data item CMTH).
VLDTBT (Date Time Clock Start) The date and time that the timecard transaction was created.
VLTCDE (Date Time Clock End) The date and time that the timecard transaction was ended.
VLEQWO (Equipment Worked On) The ID number for the equipment that an employee
maintained or repaired, but did not use. For example, an
employee might change the oil in the company dump truck.
Use this field to direct labor expenses to the specific piece of
equipment.
VLEQCG (Equipment Worked) The ID number of the equipment that an employee used to
perform a job. For example, an employee might drive a
company dump truck or operate a printing press. Use this
field to distribute the cost of using the equipment to the
proper account in the general ledger.
VLQOBJ (Equipment Object Account) The object account to which you want the system to
distribute equipment utilization charges.
VLERC (Equipment Billing Rate Codes) A UDC (00/RC) that indicates a billing rate, such as DY for
daily, MO for monthly, and WK for weekly. You can set up
multiple billing rates for a piece of equipment.
VLEQRT (Billing Rate) The monetary amount for the equipment billing rate. Each
equipment item can have numerous billing rates based on
the rate code (see Equipment Billing Rate-ERC).
VLEQHR (Equipment Hours) The number of hours that the equipment was operated. If
you leave this field blank, the system uses the hours from
employee time entry when you enter an equipment number.
If you do not enter employee hours, you must complete this
field.
VLEXR (Explanation) A name or remark that describes a timecard record.
VLP001–VLP004 (Category codes 14) The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system category
codes for which you can define the use and description of
each to fit the needs of the organization.
VLEPA (Entered Gross Pay) A lump sum amount, an adjustment amount, or an amount
that represents an employee's gross pay. This amount
temporarily overrides any pay calculation that the system
normally performs.

Revising Uploaded Timecard Information
5.4 Uploading Timecard Information

This section includes an overview of the timecard upload process and discusses how
to set processing options for Inbound Flat File Conversion (R47002C).
5.4.1 Understanding the Timecard Upload Process

If you use a third-party source to store timecard information, you need to upload the
information from a flat file into the F06116Z1 table before you can create timecards.
You use the Inbound Flat File Conversion program to upload this information.
For example, if you keep timecard information in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, you
need to import that information into the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time Entry
system to create timecards. You should normally run the default version, XJDE0031.
This version is set up with the proper processing option values.
After you upload timecard information from the third-party system, review the
information before you create actual timecards in the F06116 table.
5.4.2 Setting Processing Options for Inbound Flat File Conversion (R47002C)
Select Batch Time Entry Processing (G05BBT3), Batch Time Entry File Upload.
reports.
5.4.2.1 Transaction
1. Enter the transaction to process.
Specify the transaction to process.
5.4.2.2 Separators
1. Enter the field delimiter.
Specify the field delimiter.
2. Enter the text qualifier.

Specify the text qualifier.
5.4.2.3 Process
1. Enter the inbound processor.
Specify the inbound processor to run after successful completion of the conversion.
2. Enter the version for the inbound processor.

Specify the version for the inbound processor. If you leave this processing option
blank, the system uses XJDE0001.
5.5 Revising Uploaded Timecard Information

This section provides an overview of uploaded timecard revision, lists a prerequisite,
and discusses how to:
■ Select a batch of timecards for revision.
■ Revise a batch of uploaded timecards.

Revising Uploaded Timecard Information
5.5.1 Understanding Uploaded Timecard Revision

When the system uploads timecard information, it often identifies one or more
inbound transactions that contain invalid transactions. For example, an employee
might have an invalid employee number. In this case, the system does not add the
record to the F06116Z1 table. Instead, it generates an email message that indicates the
transaction number for the transaction that is in error and sends the message to the
employee work center queue.
After the system uploads timecard information to the F06116Z1 table, you should
review the information and correct any errors before you create timecards. This
process helps prevent errors on timecards and in the timecard tables.
Note: You can run the Time & Pay Entry Register For Batch File
program (R053001Z) and print the associated report as an alternative
to reviewing timecard information errors online.
5.5.2 Prerequisite
View the employee work center queue for transaction errors.
See JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Foundation Guide.
5.5.3 Forms Used to Revise Uploaded Timecard Information

Work with Time Entry Batch W05116Z1A Batch Time Entry Select batches of
File Revisions Processing (G05BBT3), uploaded timecards for
Batch Time Entry File revision.
Revisions
Time Entry Batch Revisions W05116Z1B Select a record and then Revise a batch of
select Time Entry from uploaded timecards.
the row menu on the
Work with Time Entry
Batch File Revisions
form.
5.5.4 Selecting a Batch of Timecards for Revision

Access the Work with Time Entry Batch File Revisions form.
User ID (user identification)

Identifies the source of the transaction. This can be a user ID, a workstation, the
address of an external system, a node on a network, and so on. This field helps identify
both the transaction and its point of origin.
Batch Number
Indicates the number that the transmitter assigns to the batch. During batch
processing, the system assigns a new batch number to the transactions for each control
(user) batch number it finds.
From Date
Enter the date to use as the actual work date or pay-period ending date.
Thru Date
Enter the date to use as the actual work date or pay-period ending date.

Reviewing the Time & Pay Entry Register for Batch File Report
5.5.5 Revising a Batch of Uploaded Timecards

Access the Time Entry Batch Revisions form.
Figure 5–1 Time Entry Batch Revisions form
If you selected the Project and Gov Contract Accounting Used check box in the Service
Billing Constants program (P48091), the system displays the Contract Labor Category
field on the Time Entry Batch Revisions form.
See "Processing Timecards Using Contract-Specific Labor Categories"in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Project and Government Contract Accounting Implementation
Guide..
Processed
Select to indicate that a record was processed successfully. Depending on the
application, the system updates the EDSP field in a table with one of these values:
1 or Y: The record was processed successfully.
Blank or N: The record was not processed.
Note: The system automatically updates a blank field.
5.6 Reviewing the Time & Pay Entry Register for Batch File Report
This section provides an overview of the Time & Pay Entry Register for Batch File
report (R053001Z) and discusses how to set processing options for the report.
5.6.1 Understanding the Time & Pay Entry Register for Batch File Report
After you revise uploaded timecard information, you should run the Time & Pay Entry
Register for Batch File program (R053001Z) to verify that the information is correct.
5.6.2 Setting Processing Options for Time & Pay Entry Register for Batch File Report
(R053001Z)
Select Batch Time Entry Processing (G05BBT3), Batch Time Entry File Register.
5.6.2.1 Defaults
Use these processing options to specify the type of information that appears on the
report.

Creating Timecards from Uploaded Information and Purging Processed Payroll Batches
1. Time Card Type

Specify the type of timecard to be printed. Values are:
L: Labor
R: Recharge
E: Equipment
2. Employee Number Format

Specify the type of employee number to be printed if you are printing labor timecards
(type L). Values are:
A: Address Number
O: Alternate Number
S: Tax ID
3. Print GL Account Number and Tax Area (print general ledger account number and
tax area)
Specify whether to print the general ledger account number and tax area on the report.
Values are:
Blank: Do not print.
0: Do not print.
1: Print.
4. Print EE Totals (print employee totals)

Specify whether to print the employee totals on the report. Values are:
Blank or 0: Do not print.
1: Print.
5.7 Creating Timecards from Uploaded Information and Purging

Processed Payroll Batches
This section provides an overview of the creation of timecards from uploaded
information and discusses how to:
■ Set processing options for Time Entry Batch Processor program (R05116Z1I).
■ Purge processed payroll batches.
5.7.1 Understanding the Creation of Timecards from Uploaded Information

After you review and revise uploaded timecard information, you can create timecards.
You then include those timecards in the usual payroll cycle processing. When you
create timecards from uploaded timecard information, the system verifies the
information against constants tables in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system.
When you create timecards, the system transfers the uploaded information from the
F06116Z1 table to the F06116 table.
You must set up the processing options for Time Entry Batch Processor (R05116Z1I) to
run this program in proof or final mode. When you run the program in proof mode,
the system prints the Employee Transaction Update report and the Transaction Errors
report without updating the F06116 table. Correct any errors before resetting the
processing options to run the program in final mode.

When you run the program in final mode, the system:

■ Uses next numbers to assign batch numbers and transaction numbers for each
timecard.
■ Creates and prints the Employee Transaction Update report and the Transaction
Errors report.
■ Marks transactions as processed.
■ Supplies any applicable default values in the optional timecard fields.
If no errors appear on the Transaction Errors report, the system creates timecards in
the F06116 table. If errors occur, the system does not create timecards; instead, it sends
an error message to the person that you specify in the processing options. You should
correct the errors and run the batch again.
Timecards with contract-specific labor categories in the F0611Z1 workfile are edited
and updated in the F06116 table.
See JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Human Capital Management Fundamentals
You can specify in the processing options that the system automatically purge the
records from the F06116Z1 table when the batch runs successfully.
You cannot use the Time Entry Batch Revisions form to revise processed batches. If
you find an error in processed batches, you must make revisions on individual time
entry forms.
After you create timecards, you should purge the processed batches if the processing
options for the Time Entry Batch Processor program (R05116Z1I) are not set up to do
so automatically. Purging batches conserves disk space and makes locating
unprocessed batches easier. When you purge processed batches, the system removes
records from the F06116Z1 table.
5.7.2 Setting Processing Options for Time Entry Batch Processor (R05116Z1I)
Select Batch Time Entry Processing (G05BBT3), Time Entry Batch Processor.
5.7.2.1 Processing
Use these processing options to determine whether the program runs in final or proof
mode, whether the system purges processed transactions from the F06116Z1 table, and
how the system processes employee records that are locked to a payroll.
1. Version - Time Entry MBF (version - time entry master business function)
Specify whether the system overrides the processor for standard time entry. The
default version for Time Entry Master Business Function (P050002A) is ZJDE0001.
Additional versions might be required to meet new requirements. For example, you
might need to create a new version of the Time Entry MBF for employee assignment.
To change the default value, enter a different version number. Only persons
responsible for system-wide setup should change this option.
2. Final Flag
Specify the mode in which to run the universal batch engine (UBE). Values are:
Blank: Process batch information in proof mode. The system generates a report but
does not update tables. This option enables you to preview the results that occur when
you process batch information in final mode.

1: Process the batch information in final mode. The system updates batch information
in the relevant tables. To automate time entry template generation for Employee
Assignment, set this option to 1.
3. Purge Flag
Specify whether the system purges processed transactions from the F06116Z1 table
when the transactions are complete. Values are:
1: Automatically purge processed transactions from the batch file.
Blank: Flag transactions as processed, but do not purge transactions from the batch
file.
4. Payroll Lockout Processing

Specify how the system manages an employee record that is locked out of a payroll.
Values are:
1: Report an error for a specific employee record that is locked out of a payroll.
The system does not upload time for the locked employee record.
2: Report a warning for a specific employee address book number.
The system sends a warning message to the message center indicating the employee
address book number and payroll ID that caused the error, but the system uploads
time for the employee. This setting can force an active payroll into a changes-only run.
3: Receive no messages.
The system uploads time for the employee. This setting can force an active payroll into
a changes-only run.
5. Date Worked Override

Specify whether to assign the labor period ending date of the employee's labor
distribution period to the date worked. Values are:
Blank: Do not assign the date worked from the employee's labor distribution period.
1: Assign the labor period ending date from the employee's labor distribution period
to the date worked.
When you run the Time Entry Batch Processor program (R05116Z1I), the system
creates records in the Timecard Transaction table (F06116).
Manual Date Worked Override

Specify the manual date to override the date worked with a date other than the labor
period ending date.
6. Summarize Employee's F06116Z1s

Specify whether to summarize employee timecard details. Values are:
Blank: Do not summarize the timecards.
1: Summarize the timecards.
5.7.2.2 Select
Use these processing options to specify the payroll ID, pay cycle code, and pay period
number that the program uses, and the records to select.
1. Self-Service TE (self-service time entry)

Specify the data source of the records that you want to upload. Values are:

Blank: Transfer all records. (Use this option when Employee Self-Service Time Entry is
not implemented.)
1: Transfer records that are approved and records that do not require approval.
2. Payroll ID (payroll identification)

Specify a regular payroll ID (pre-payroll version) that the program uses to select
records that are transferred. If the payroll ID is specified, then the start date, stop date,
pay cycle code, and pay period number entered on this PO tab are ignored because the
system retrieves and uses the values that are associated with this payroll ID.
2. Use Data Selection of Payroll ID (use data selection of payroll identification)

Specify the selection criteria defined in the specified payroll ID version when selecting
assignment records to process. The system compares all of the assignment records to
the selection criteria that are linked with the payroll ID that is defined in the Payroll ID
processing option on this tab. If you leave this processing option blank, all active
assignment records are processed through template generation. Values are:
Blank: Do not use data selection. (default)
1: Use data selection.
3. Pay Cycle Code

Specify the pay cycle code. Values include:
W: Weekly
BW: Biweekly
SEMI: Semimonthly
4. Pay Period Number

Specify the pay period number. If the pay period number is not specified, then the
system uses a pay period number that includes the system date. When the system uses
a pay period number that includes the system date, the start and stop dates are based
on values from the Master Pay Cycle.
Pay periods are sequentially numbered from the first of the year. For example, a
monthly payroll cycle beginning in January has a total of 12 periods, with October as
period number 010. Value ranges include:
001–052 (Weekly payroll cycle)
001–026 (Biweekly payroll cycle)
001–024 (Semimonthly payroll cycle)
001–012 (Monthly payroll cycle)
001–004 (Quarterly payroll cycle)
001–001 (Annual payroll cycle)
Refer to the Master Pay Cycle settings to determine how pay periods are defined.
5. Starting Date
Select records that include a date worked that is equal to or after the current date.
6. Ending Date
Select records that include a date worked that is before or equal to the current date.
5.7.2.3 Messages
Specify the person who will receive messages directed to the Work Center.

1. User ID for Work Center Messages (user identification for work center messages)
Specify the person who receives PPAT (persons, places, and things) error messages.
Enter an employee address book number. If you leave this processing option blank, the
system sends error messages to the person who is running the batch application.
5.7.2.4 Interims
Specify version information for the Batch File Upload.
1. Default Interim Payroll Version

Specify the valid interim ID that is assigned to timecards that are created using the
upload process.
5.7.3 Purging Processed Payroll Batches

This section discusses how to run the Purge Batch Time Entry report (R05116Z1P).
Access the Work With Timecard Automation Batches form.
Select the batch that you want to use to create the report, and then select Report from
the Row menu. The system generates the report.

6
Setting Up Timecard Automation
6

■ Section 6.1, "Understanding Timecard Automation"
■ Section 6.2, "Creating Employee Groups"
■ Section 6.3, "Creating Timecard Templates"
■ Section 6.4, "Creating Retroactive Pay Rules"
■ Section 6.5, "Creating Overtime Rule Sets"
6.1 Understanding Timecard Automation

Entering time for employees each pay period can be time-consuming. In addition to
recording time for regular hours, most companies need to calculate overtime based on
federal, state, or labor union requirements, and overtime calculations can be simple or
complex. For example, some organizations need to calculate overtime differently for
certain groups of employees.
In addition to entering time for regular and overtime hours, you might need to
calculate additional types of pay, such as time for company holidays, bonuses, or
retroactive payments for salary adjustments. Using the Timecard Automation module,
you can enter the calculation information for each type of payment once, after which
the system automatically applies the calculation rules to each selected employee.
Automating these processes can save time and reduce the likelihood of calculation or
data-entry errors.
The Timecard Automation module consists of these components:
■ Timecard Templates
■ Retroactive Pay Rules
■ Overtime Rule Sets
■ Employee Groups
6.1.1 Timecard Templates

Many organizations need to enter the same types of timecards repetitively. For
example, you might need to enter timecards for bonus or commission pay each
quarter. To automate this process, you can use the Timecard Templates program
(P186301) to automatically create timecard templates. The Timecard Templates
program enables you to create model timecards and apply those timecards to specified
groups of employees. After you apply the template to the employee group, the system
Setting Up Timecard Automation 6-1

Understanding Timecard Automation
creates a timecard with the information from the template model for each employee in
the group.
When you create a timecard template, you specify values for fields on the timecards,
such as pay type, lump sum amount, hours, date, and account number. You can save
the timecard template that you create and use it each time that you need to create
timecards with the specified values. In addition to creating timecards, the Timecard
Templates program generates a report so that you can review information about the
newly created timecards before you process them through a payroll cycle.
When you create a timecard template, you can specify whether the timecard is public
or private. You can set a processing option on the Processing tab of the Time Entry
Master Business Function program (P050002A) to create public timecards. When the
processing option is set to enable public timecards, an administrator or employees can
select the Public Timecard option.
6.1.2 Retroactive Pay Rules

Occasionally, an employee's pay must be adjusted after the employee's payment has
been disbursed. For example, if an employee was supposed to receive a pay increase
on the first day of the month but the increase was not entered into the system until the
middle of the month, then you might want to create a payment to compensate the
employee for the amount of the increase from the date on which it should have been
effective. This type of pay is called retroactive pay.
You can use retroactive pay rules to calculate retroactive pay amounts based on
current and historical time entry information. To do so, you first define the retroactive
pay calculation. After you have defined the calculation, you identify the employees for
which the retroactive pay rule should apply, as well as the time period that contains
the timecards that you need to adjust. When you process the retroactive pay rules, the
system creates timecards and uses the pay type that you specify when you create the
rule. You can then use reports and online reviews in the Timecard Automation module
to review the new timecards and the timecards from which the retroactive pay
originated.
6.1.3 Overtime Rule Sets

Calculating overtime correctly can be difficult due to the regulations that are imposed
by federal, state, and union organizations. For example, overtime regulations for
California require that a company pay nonexempt employees one-and-a-half times
their hourly rate for any time that they worked over eight hours each day (or 40 hours
each week). The regulations also specify that companies must pay nonexempt
employees twice their hourly rate for any time worked over 12 hours each day, and
over eight hours on the seventh day of work in a week.
To ensure that the organization pays employees according to regulations, you can
create overtime rules and overtime rule sets to automate overtime calculations. You
use overtime rules to specify how to calculate overtime pay. You can create overtime
rules and store them in overtime rule sets. Overtime rule sets can consist of a single
rule or multiple rules.
You can create an ordered set of overtime rules to calculate overtime for a specific
employee. Overtime rule sets enable you to define and maintain the overtime rules
that are required to comply with overtime regulations. For example, to comply with
California overtime regulations, you might create a rule set called California Overtime
Rule Set, which would consist of these overtime rules:

■ Calculate pay at one-and-a-half times the regular rate when an employee works
more than eight hours in a day.
■ Calculate pay at one-and-a-half times the regular rate when an employee works
more than 40 hours in a week.
■ Calculate pay at twice the regular rate when an employee works more than 12
hours in a day.
■ Calculate pay at twice the regular rate when an employee works more than eight
hours on the seventh day of the week.
Because the system processes the overtime rules within a set in the sequence that you
specify, the sequence of the rules is important. Processing the rules out of sequence
might produce results that do not match overtime requirements.
Using overtime rules, you can automate the process of calculating more complex
overtime rules. For example, some organizations calculate overtime using the Chinese
Overtime method, in which an employee's overtime rate decreases with each hour of
overtime that is worked. The organization might require complex calculations to
satisfy overtime requirements that are mandated by labor contracts.
After you create overtime rules and define an overtime rule set, you apply the rule set
to an employee group. When you process the rule set, the system changes current,
unprocessed timecards and, if necessary, creates new timecards to ensure that
employees are paid correctly for any overtime hours that they work.
Note: You cannot use the overtime rule set feature to change
historical timecards. Additionally, the regulatory examples in this
section are for illustrative purposes only. You should refer to the
federal, state, and union labor organizations for accurate and current
information about overtime pay regulations.
You can create these overtime rules and attach them to overtime rule sets:
Overtime Rule Set Description

Timecard Change Rules Timecard change rules use if/then logic to change original
timecards, but they do not create new timecards. For
example, you can identify timecards that include regular
time on a designated company holiday, and then change
the pay type from regular pay to overtime pay. In this
scenario, the system changes the pay type on the original
timecards.
Timecard Accumulator Rules Timecard accumulator rules enable you to calculate
overtime pay based on a specified limit and time period,
and create additional timecards for the overtime pay. When
you use timecard accumulator rules, you must use
employee groups to identify eligible employees. The
accumulator rule then calculates the overtime pay, changes
the original timecards to remove the original overtime
amounts, and creates new timecards for the overtime pay.
For example, you can create an overtime rule to pay
employees one-and-a-half times their regular rate for any
hours worked in excess of 40 in a week. Thus, if an
employee timecard includes 45 hours of regular time in a
given week, the system would change the existing timecard
to include 40 hours of regular time, and create a new
timecard (or timecards) that would include five hours of
overtime.

Overtime Rule Set Description

Call Custom Rules Use call custom rules to call a user-defined business
function. If a company has special overtime requirements
that cannot be accommodated using change or accumulator
rules, you can create a custom function and call the
function in the custom rule. For example, if you want to
pay a meal allowance of 8.00 USD per day for all
employees who work over nine-and-a-half hours, you can
create a call custom rule to perform this calculation.
Call Rule Set Rules Use call rule set rules to call overtime rule sets that you
have previously defined. Call rule set rules enable you to
reuse rule sets in multiple ways and eliminate the need to
re-create rule sets that you use frequently.
6.1.4 Employee Groups

To use timecard templates, retroactive pay rules, or overtime rule sets, you must define
employee groups. Employee groups identify which employees the system includes in
a selected process. The system cannot process timecard templates, retroactive pay
rules, or overtime rule sets unless an employee group is attached. In addition to
attaching a group to define which employees to include for processing, you can also
attach a group to timecard templates, retroactive pay rules, and overtime rule sets to
exclude employees from being processed.
The system uses employee groups with Timecard Automation in the Employee
Assignment module, the Job Step Progression module, and to generate group gross-up
payments using the Interim Payment module. You can create these employee groups:
■ List group
■ Select group
■ Combo group
■ Exclusion group
6.1.5 List Group

A list group is a static listing of employees by address book number. You might use a
list group when you need to create a group of employees with no common criteria. For
example, to create an employee group that contains employees who work in different
business units, job types, and locations, you can create a list group by entering the
address book numbers of the employees. When you need to remove an employee from
the group, you must do it manually. A list group can contain any number of
employees.
6.1.6 Select Group

A select group is a dynamic group of employees. You enter selection criteria over
records in the F060116 table, F06116 table and F0618 table to create the group. For
example, to create a group that includes all employees in business unit 100, you can
create a select group. The system performs the selection criteria search each time that
you use the employee group. The system automatically includes only the employees
who meet the selection criteria at the time of processing. If an employee leaves
business unit 100, that employee will no longer be part of that particular select group.

Creating Employee Groups
6.1.7 Combo Group

Combo groups are lists of multiple list groups or select groups. You can use combo
groups to combine multiple lists and to reuse groups that you have already defined.
For example, to include all employees in business unit 100 and all employees in
business unit 9, you can create a combo group that contains two groups that have
already been set up as list or select groups.
6.1.8 Exclusion Group

For each type of group, you can identify an exclusion group. You can set up exclusion
groups as either list, select, or combo groups, and attach them to other list, select, or
combo groups. For example, you might set up a list group that contains three
employees in business unit 9 who should not be included for processing with the rest
of the employees in business unit 9. You would then attach the select group as an
exclusion group to the select group for business unit 9.
6.1.9 Timecard Review and Approval

When you process timecard templates, retroactive pay rules, or overtime rule sets, the
system creates timecards in the F06116 table and assigns the newly created timecards a
status of Pending. After the system creates the timecards, you can review, revise, and
delete any individual timecards. You can approve or cancel entire batches of
timecards. When you approve a batch of timecards, the system removes the Pending
status from the timecards, which enables you to include them in a payroll cycle. When
you cancel a batch of timecards, the system removes them entirely from the F06116
table.
6.1.10 Formulas and Functions

When you create timecard templates, retroactive pay rules, or overtime rule sets, you
can create formulas that calculate pay rates or hours worked. The system provides
several predefined business functions that calculate values for some of the variables
that you commonly use when creating formulas.
See Also:
■ Setting Up Timecard Automation.
6.2 Creating Employee Groups

This section provides an overview of employee groups and discusses how to:
■ Create a list group.
■ Create a select group.
■ Create a combo group.
6.2.1 Understanding Employee Groups

Employee groups are the foundation of the Timecard Automation module. You cannot
process timecard templates, retropay rules, or overtime rules without using an
employee group. You use employee groups to specify the employees for whom you
want to create or change timecards.
Timecard templates use employee groups to create a new, template-based timecard for
each employee in the group. Retropay rules use employee groups to identify

employees with timecards that you need to adjust and to create the adjustment
timecards for each applicable employee in the group. Overtime rule sets use employee
groups to identify the employees to process, identify the timecards that you need to
change or create based on the rules, and create or change timecards for each applicable
employee in the group.
After you define employee groups, you can use them interchangeably to process
timecard templates, retropay rules, and overtime rule sets. You can reuse employee
groups for each pay period. You can also use employee groups to specify the
employees whom you want to include in a process and identify employees whom you
want to exclude from the group when processing timecard templates, retropay rules,
and overtime rule sets.
To use a group as an exclusion group, you must first identify a group of employees to
include in the process. The system processes the timecard template, retropay rule, or
overtime rule set, including the employees in the first group, and bypasses any
employees who are part of the exclusion group.
After you define an employee group, you can review the group online to determine
whether the correct employees are included. The Employee Groups program uses
these tables:
■ F060116
■ F186201
■ F186202
■ F186203
■ F186204
■ F186206
6.2.1.1 Types of Employee Groups

You use the Employee Groups program (P186201) to create employee groups. The
types of groups that you can create include:
■ List groups
■ Select groups
■ Combo groups
List groups are a basic type of group that includes a static list of employees. The
members of a list group change only if you manually change the group. You create list
groups by entering a list of employee numbers. For example, you might create a list
group of ten employees who had the highest sales performance and should therefore
receive a bonus. If, after you create this list group, the top ten sales performers change,
you must manually update the group.
Select groups are dynamic and flexible. You create a select group by specifying
selection criteria. You can use fields from the F060116, F06116 and F0618 tables as
selection criteria. For example, you can use a select group to select all hourly
employees who work in a specific business unit. Regardless of whether employees
change within a business unit, the selection criteria for the group remains the same.
Each time that you run a process using a select group, the system generates the group
based on the selection criteria. Therefore, you do not need to modify or re-create the
group when members of the group change.
You can create combo groups to join multiple employee groups together. You must
first define list and select groups before you can create a combo group. Combo groups

save time and reduce effort by enabling you to reuse existing groups. You are not
limited to the number of employees that you can include in a combo group. If the
system encounters duplicate employee records when compiling a combo group, it
deletes the duplicate records when the group is built. For example, you might want to
create bonuses for all employees in a specified business unit, along with the top
performers from several other business units. Using a combo group, you could create a
list group to include the top performers and use a select group to include all of the
employees in the specified business unit. You then enter both of these groups in the
combo group to include all of the desired employees in one single process.
After you create an employee group, you can print the Employees by Group report
(R186202) to view a list of all the employees in the group. You use this report to verify
that the group includes the employees that you intended to include. For all types of
employee groups and the employees included in the groups, the report displays:
■ Group name.
■ Group type.
■ Associated exclusion group (if any).
■ Names and address book numbers of employees.
■ Number of members.
You typically print this report before you process a timecard template, overtime rule
set, or retroactive pay rule that uses the employee group. When you print the report
for a select group, the report also includes the selection table name and the selection
criteria. When you print the report for a combo group, it includes the names of the
other groups within the combo group.
To support the global leave administration module, two Row menu options exist in the
Employee Groups program:
■ Build Leave Group
■ View Leave Group
When you create a new group and then select Build Leave Group from the Row menu,
the system creates the F186206 table and saves new leave group records. When the
table already exists with data for a particular group, the system overwrites the existing
data with new information. You can view the information in this table by selecting the
View Leave Group option from the Row menu.
6.2.2 Forms Used to Create Employee Groups

Work With Employee W186201A Periodic Processing menu Select an existing employee
Groups (G18620), Employee group for review or
Groups revision.
Group Type W186201H Click Add on the Work Select the type of group
With Employee Groups that you want to create.
form.
Employee List Group W186201B Select List Group on the Create a list group.
Group Type form.
Employee Select Group W186201C Click Select Group on the Create a select group.
Group Type form.


Employee Combo Group W186201E Select Combo Group on Create a combo group.
the Group Type form.
Employees In Group W186201F Select a group and select View the employees in an
View Group from the Row existing group.
menu to review all of the
employees in the group on
the Work With Employee
Groups form.
Work With Employee W0801A Select the employee to Review information about
Information review, and then select an employee in a group.
Employee Info from the
Row menu on the
Employees In Group form.
Work With Employee W186201A Select a report type on the Select one of these options
Groups Work With Employee from the Report menu:
Information form.
■ Selected Group
■ All Groups
6.2.3 Creating a List Group

Access the Employee List Group form.
Figure 6–1 Employee List Group form
Name
Enter a user-defined name for an employee group. The group name should describe
the employees who make up the group. For example, a group name might be Business
Unit 9.
Exclusion Group
Enter the name of an existing employee group to exclude the employees in that group
from processing.
Home Company
Enter the number of the company where the employee records generally reside.
Country Code
Indicates the country in which the employee resides. Select a value from user-defined
code (UDC) table 00/CN.
6.2.4 Creating a Select Group

Access the Employee Select Group form.

Figure 6–2 Employee Select Group form
Name
Enter a user-defined name for an employee group. The group name should describe
the employees who make up the group. For example, a group name might be Business
Unit 9.
Exclusion Group
Enter the name of an existing employee group to exclude the employees in that group
from processing.
Field Name
Identifies and defines a unit of information. The identifier is a 32-character, alphabetic
field that does not allow blanks or special characters such as%, &, +, and so on.
You cannot change the data item. It forms the C-code data name (for example Address
Number) that the system uses in business functions, data structures, and event rules.
The table that you select determines which fields are available when you create the
selection criteria. You can select the F060116, F06116, or F0618 table.
After you create a select group, you cannot change the selection table. If you need to
change the selection table, you must create a new select group.
Field Alias
Identifies a data item by the alias or alpha description.
If the field alias column is not available in the detail area, select Show Alias from the
Form menu. If you enter a field alias, the system automatically completes the field
name with the information that you provide. To use Field Name (and hide Field Alias),
select Hide Alias from the Form menu.
Op (operand)
Enter a code that identifies the operand in Boolean logic. Values are:
EQ: Equal to.
LT: Less than
LE: Less than or equal to.
GT: Greater than.
GE: Greater than or equal to.
NE: Not equal to.
NL: Not less than.
NG: Not greater than.

Creating Timecard Templates
You use simple logic to create selection criteria statements for select groups. After you
have specified the field on which you want to base selection criteria, you use the Op
and Value fields to define the statement and identify whether the field value should be
equal to, greater than or equal to, greater than, less than or equal to, less than, not
equal to, not greater than, or not less than the value in the Value field. For example, to
include all employees in business unit 9, enter HMCU in the Field Alias field, EQ in
the Op field, and 9 in the Value field.
And /Or
Enter a code to designate whether the test parameters or criteria are based on an AND
condition or an OR condition.
Use this field to add complexity to a logic statement. For example, to further define the
previous statement to narrow the group to include only hourly employees in business
unit 9, enter an AND statement and enter FLSA in the Field Alias field, EQ in the Op
field, and N in the Value field.
6.2.5 Creating a Combo Group

Access the Employee Combo Group form.
Figure 6–3 Employee Combo Group form
Type Code
Enter a code that identifies the type of employee group. The system automatically
populates this field when you enter an employee group. Values are:
LIST: A list group is a static list of employees that can be stored and used repeatedly.
ELECT: A select group is a group of employees that meet the selection criteria that you
specify in a request.
COMBO: A combination group is a list of other groups. The other groups can include
list groups, select groups, or both.
6.3 Creating Timecard Templates

This section provides an overview of timecard templates, lists a prerequisite, and
discusses how to:
■ Create timecard templates.
■ Process timecard templates.
■ Run the Timecard Template Batch Review report.

6.3.1 Understanding Timecard Templates

You can use the Timecard Templates program (P186301) to automatically create and
save timecard models for certain pay situations, such as holiday pay or bonuses. After
you create the model, which is also called a template, you can process the template for
a specified employee group. The system creates timecards that are based on the
template for each employee in the group.
A timecard template consists of an employee group and field values. The system uses
the employee group to determine which employees to process. The system uses the
field values that you specify to create timecards for all employees in the employee
group. Examples of fields for which you might supply values are:
■ Pay type
■ Hours
■ Lump Sum Amount
■ Timecard Date
■ Account Number
A timecard template enables you to create one timecard pattern and associate an
employee group with the pattern instead of manually creating a timecard for each
employee. When you process the template, the system creates the employee timecards
from information in the timecard template. For example, to pay all of the employees in
a group eight hours of holiday pay for a company-paid holiday, you can create a
timecard template to create timecards for each employee in the group. You can set up
the template to automatically enter values into the timecard for date, pay type, and
number of hours.
After you create a timecard template, you can save it for future use. Timecard
templates can simplify the time entry process by dramatically reducing the amount of
manual data entry that is necessary to create employee timecards. Timecard templates
can also help reduce errors that can occur with manual data entry.
When you submit a timecard template for processing, timecard automation creates a
batch of timecards. You can use the Reviewing and Approving program (P186601) to
review, approve, or cancel the timecard batch. When you review a batch, you can
delete selected employee timecards within the batch. You must approve the batch
before the timecards can be processed in a payroll cycle. The system also generates
reports that you can review to verify the timecard information before you process the
timecards in a payroll cycle.
6.3.1.1 Creating Timecard Templates

When you create timecard templates, you create a model timecard for all employees in
the attached group. The fields that you use to create the template are the same fields
that exist in the time entry applications, and they are used in the same way on
timecard templates except that you can create formulas to calculate hours worked and
rates paid.
You create timecard templates using the Timecard Templates program (P186301). To
ensure that you are creating all of the templates that you need, you should carefully
analyze the types of pay that the organization disburses. After you have determined
which templates you need, you should identify the field values for each template.
Field values include items such as account number, pay type, and timecard date. The
system uses field values to create batches of model timecards.
When you create a timecard template, you must attach at least one employee group. If
necessary, you can change the employee group each time that you process the

template, which enables you to reuse the timecard template for multiple groups of
employees. You must also assign a version of the Time Entry MBF program
(P050002A) when you create a timecard template. Use the Time Entry MBF program to
define processing rules for creating timecards.
6.3.1.2 Submitting Timecard Templates for Processing

When you submit a timecard template for processing, the system creates a batch of
timecards for the employee group that is associated with the timecard template. The
timecards in this batch are created in the F06116 table with a status of Pending
Approval. You cannot include timecards with a pending status in a payroll cycle. You
should review these timecards and revise them if necessary. When you are satisfied
that the timecards are correct, you can approve the batch. When you approve the
batch, the system removes the Pending Approval status. If you cancel the batch, the
system removes the timecards from the F06116 table. You must approve the batch
before you can process the timecards in a payroll cycle.
Note: You can change any original option, including the employee
group that is assigned to the template. Changes that you make to
timecard templates affect all batches of timecards that you process
after the change, but do not affect batches of timecards that have
already been processed.
You can delete a timecard template from the Timecard Templates
program if the template has no batches of timecards that are pending
approval with which the batches are associated. Before you can delete
a timecard template, you must approve or cancel any batches of
timecards on which the template is based, and then delete the
associated header records for the timecards. If the timecard template
has a batch of timecards with which it is associated, the system
displays an error message and prevents you from deleting it.
6.3.1.3 Timecard Template Processing Report (R186303)

When you submit a timecard template for processing, the system generates the
Timecard Template Processing report (R186303). Use this report to verify that the
system created timecards for all of the employees who are in the employee group and
are associated with the timecard template. The Exceptions (errors) section of the report
lists employees for whom one of the these criteria is met:
■ An error prevents the system from creating the timecard.
■ The system creates the timecard, but an error or warning exists.
You should investigate each error and warning and make the necessary corrections
before you process a payroll cycle that includes these timecards. If all or most of the
timecards are incorrect, you might have entered incorrect information on the template
or the associated employee group. In this case, you can cancel the batch of timecards,
correct the error, and then resubmit the batch. If only a few timecards contain errors,
you can use a time entry program, such as Speed Time Entry (P051121), to review the
errors and make corrections. In this case, you do not need to cancel and resubmit the
batch.
In addition to the exceptions, the report also includes totals of:
■ Employee records that the system processed.
■ All timecards that the system created.

■ Timecards that the system was unable to create.

■ Timecards that the system created without errors or warnings.
■ Timecards that contained errors.
■ Timecards that contained warnings.
■ Hours worked.
■ Gross pay.
6.3.1.4 Timecard Template Batch Review Report (R186304)

After you submit a timecard template for processing, you can print the Timecard
Template Batch Review report (R186304). This report lists detailed information about
the timecards that were created without errors and that are currently awaiting
approval or cancellation. Use this report to review information about the timecards
that the system created for the employees in the employee group that is associated
with the timecard template.
6.3.2 Prerequisite
Create one or more employee groups that include the employees for which you want
to create timecards.
See Creating Employee Groups.
See Also:
■ Setting Up Functions and Formulas for Timecard Automation.
■ Working with Timecards for Timecard Automation.
6.3.3 Forms Used to Create Timecard Templates

Work With Timecard W186301B Periodic Processing Select existing timecard
Templates (G18620), Timecard templates for review or
Templates revision.
Timecard Template W186301E Click Add on the Work Create a timecard template
With Timecard Templates and submit it for
form. processing.
Work With Timecard W186601A Daily Processing (G18610), Select batches of timecards
Automation Batches Reviewing and Approving to use when generating the
Timecard Template Batch
Review report.
6.3.4 Creating Timecard Templates

Access the Timecard Template form.

Figure 6–4 Timecard Template form
Name
Enter a user-defined name for a timecard template. The name should describe the
purpose of the template. For example, a timecard template name might be Holiday
Timecards.
Employee Group
Enter a user-defined name for an employee group.
Time Entry MBF Version (time entry master business function version)
The version of the Time Entry MBF program to run when creating timecards. When
you select the Time Entry MBF version for Timecard Templates, you are selecting the
version that includes the processing options that you want. If you leave this field
blank, the system uses version ZJDE0001. If the Time Entry MBF version has defined
values for optional fields in the timecard template definition, the Time Entry MBF
version enters the appropriate values in the optional fields that you leave blank.
6.3.4.1 Main
Select the Main tab.
Hours Worked
Enter a formula that the system uses to calculate the number of hours that the
employees worked.
You can enter a specific number of hours in the Hours Worked field or create a formula
for calculating the hours worked by clicking the search button. For example, the
holiday policy might stipulate that, to receive holiday pay, the employee must have
worked at least eight hours on the workday prior to the holiday. You would create a
formula for the system to determine whether employees meet this criteria. If you leave
this field blank, you must enter a value in the LS Amount field.
LS Amount (lump sum amount)

Enter a lump sum amount, an adjustment amount, or an amount that represents an
employee's gross pay. This amount temporarily overrides any pay calculation that the
system normally performs. If you enter a value or a formula in the Hours Worked
field, you can leave this field blank.

System Date
Indicates from where the timecards that were created by a timecard template will
receive their work date. You can select these dates from:
System Date
Day Before System Date
Day After System Date
Specify Date
You should review the dates of the pay period before you select a date for the
timecards. The system includes only the timecards with dates that occur within the
pay period dates of the payroll cycle that you are processing.
6.3.4.2 Category Codes

Select the Category Codes tab.
Category Code 01
Enter a category code that defines payroll system needs. You can define the use and
description of this code to fit the organization. For example, you can set up a category
code for information such as division, supervisor, branch office, health insurance plan,
stock plan, and so on.
Note: When setting up category codes in the JD Edwards

EnterpriseOne Workforce Management system, you should coordinate
information with the payroll department to ensure that information is
not duplicated or overwritten.
6.3.4.3 Organization
Select the Organization tab.
Job Location
Enter a value that represents the location in which the employee worked. You can use
this value to specify that an employee worked at this location but charged the time to a
different business unit. The system uses this value to derive rates from the Union Pay
Rate table and uses the value exclusively with the Certified Payroll Register.
A value in this field overrides the rates that are set up in the F069126 table if it is set up
by job or business unit.
Check Route Code

Enter a code from UDC table 07/CR that specifies the check routing or mail-stop code.
Use this code to sequence the printing of payroll checks to facilitate their handling and
delivery.
6.3.4.4 Subledger
Select the Subledger tab.
Subledger
Enter a code that identifies a detailed, auxiliary account within a general ledger
account. A subledger can be an equipment item number or an address book number. If
you enter a subledger, you must also specify the subledger type.

Creating Retroactive Pay Rules
Subledger Type
Enter a code from UDC table 00/ST that the system uses with the Subledger field to
identify the subledger type and how the system performs subledger editing. On the
User Defined Codes form, the second line of the description controls how the system
performs editing. This value is either hard-coded or user-defined. Values include:
A: Alphanumeric field; do not edit.
N: Numeric field; right-justify and zero fill.
C: Alphanumeric field; right-justify and blank fill.
Order Number
Enter a number that identifies an original document. This document can be a voucher,
a sales order, an invoice, unapplied cash, a journal entry, and so on.
6.3.4.5 Rates
Select the Rates tab.
Hourly Rate
Enter a formula that the system uses to calculate an actual hourly rate. You can enter a
specific hourly rate or create a formula for calculating the hourly rate. For example,
you might want to create a formula to multiply by two the employee's regular hourly
rate if he or she worked on a holiday. If you leave this field blank, the system uses the
employee's rate from the employee master or union pay rates table. If you enter a
specific hourly rate, the system uses that rate for all employees for whom the template
is processed.
6.3.5 Processing Timecard Templates

Access the Timecard Template form.
Select the timecard template that you want to process, and then select Submit from the
Form menu. The system processes the timecard template, creates a new batch of
timecards based on the options specified in the timecard template (including employee
group), and creates the Timecard Template Processing report, which shows the
processing details.
6.3.6 Running the Timecard Template Batch Review Report (R186304)

Select the batch that you want to use to create the report, and then select Report from
the Row menu. The system generates the report.
6.4 Creating Retroactive Pay Rules

This section provides an overview of retroactive pay rules, lists a prerequisite, and
discusses how to:
■ Set processing options for Retroactive Pay (P186701).
■ Create retroactive pay rules.
■ Process retroactive pay rules.

6.4.1 Understanding Retroactive Pay Rules

Payroll departments frequently need to adjust payments that were previously
disbursed to employees. These adjusted payments, which are called retroactive
payments, are usually made when salary adjustments are made effective on a date that
has already passed. You can use the Retroactive Pay Rules program (P186701) to pay
employees retroactive pay. The system uses these rules to determine how to calculate
retroactive pay adjustments.
The Retroactive Pay Rules program simplifies the process of paying employees
retroactively and reduces the chances for miscalculated amounts by automating the
calculations. When you apply retroactive pay rules, the system:
■ Determines which employees in an employee group are eligible for retroactive
pay.
■ Uses current and historical timecard information to calculate the retroactive pay
that each employee earns.
■ Creates new timecards for the retroactive pay adjustment.
For example, according to a newly ratified union contract, you might need to pay
union laborers retroactively at a three percent increase for hours that were worked
over the last month. Instead of determining which employees are union members and
calculating each employee's pay manually, you can define a retroactive pay rule that
the system uses to select employees, create timecards, and calculate pay automatically.
After you have defined a retroactive pay rule, you can save it for future use. The
payroll process is simpler and the output more consistent because you are using one
set of criteria for all timecards.
When you create a retroactive pay rule, the Retroactive Pay Rules program uses the
employee group, the date range, and the pay type inclusion criteria to determine
which timecards are affected in the current and historical timecards tables. The system
includes timecards from both tables and selects the timecards based on whether you
select all timecards, timecards of certain pay types, or timecards of certain pay-type
categories. The system selects the appropriate timecards from the tables to retrieve
amounts and provide template information. The Retroactive Pay Rules program does
not change historical or current timecards. Instead, it creates new timecards for the
retroactive pay adjustment. The system ignores any original voided timecards. The
parent or original timecard in either the current or historical timecards tables
corresponds directly to the child or new timecard in the batch.
After the batch is processed, it is submitted to the Reviewing and Approving program
(P186601). You use the Reviewing and Approving program to review, approve, or
cancel the batch. You can also review the Retroactive Pay Rule Processing report
(R186702) from within the Retroactive Pay Rules program.
6.4.1.1 Creating Retroactive Pay Rules

You create a retroactive pay rule to specify information (such as the appropriate hourly
rate, number of hours worked, and pay types) that the system uses to calculate
retroactive pay for an employee group. You can save and reuse retroactive pay rules.
For example, instead of creating timecards manually each time that you have to
retroactively pay employees, you can create a retroactive pay rule once and reuse it as
needed. When you create a retroactive pay rule, you must assign an employee group.
When adding a retroactive pay rule, you can select the option Select Groupto specify
the group of timecards to display. You can enter select statements to select the fields
from the F0618 table.

Note: You can select the fields in the F0618 table as all the fields of
F0618 exist in F06116 but not vice versa. Also, the F186704 table stores
the select statements.
When you reuse the retroactive pay rule, you can use the existing group or change to
another employee group.
The system creates timecards for retroactive pay based on the information that you
enter in the retroactive pay rule. To successfully process retroactive pay rules, the
system requires this information:
■ The employees that you want to process, which you specify by attaching one or
more employee groups to the retroactive pay rule.
■ The period that you want to process, which you specify by selecting starting and
ending work dates.
The system uses the date range to locate current and historical timecards, which
are used as the basis for the new retroactive pay timecards.
■ The elements that create new timecards, which you specify by selecting a new
work date, new pay type, new hourly rate, new hours worked, or no hours on
timecard.
■ The timecards to include (based on pay type) for the basis of the retroactive pay
calculation, which you specify by selecting all pay types, a specific list of pay
types, or a pay type category.
You can change any original option, including the employee group that is assigned to
the retroactive pay rule. Changes that you make to retroactive pay rules affect all
batches of timecards that are processed after the change, but do not affect batches of
timecards that you already processed.
You can delete retroactive pay rules from the Retroactive Pay Rules program if the
retroactive pay rule does not have any batches of timecards that are pending approval.
Before you can delete a retroactive pay rule, you must approve or cancel any batches
of timecards on which it is based and then delete the associated header records for the
timecards. If the retroactive pay rule has a batch of timecards with which it is
associated, the system displays an error message and prevents you from deleting it.
6.4.1.2 Processing Retroactive Pay Rules

When you submit a retroactive pay rule for processing, the system creates a batch of
new timecards for the employee group that is associated with the retroactive pay rule.
The timecards in this batch have a status of Pending Approval. You cannot include
pending timecards in a payroll cycle. You should review these timecards and revise
them if necessary. When you are satisfied that the timecards are correct, you can
approve the batch, which removes the pending status from the timecards. You must
approve the batch before you can process the timecards in a payroll cycle. If, after
reviewing the timecards, you find that the retroactive pay rule did not achieve the
desired outcome, you can cancel the batch, modify the retroactive pay rule, and
resubmit it for processing. When you cancel a batch, the system deletes any timecards
that were created in the batch.
When you submit a retroactive pay rule, the system also generates the Retroactive Pay
Rule Processing report (R186705), which you can use to verify the timecard
information.

6.4.1.3 Reviewing the Retroactive Pay Rule Processing Report

When you submit retroactive pay rules for processing, the system generates the
Retroactive Pay Rule Processing report (R186705). Use this report to verify that the
system created timecards for all of the employees who are in the employee group that
is associated with the retroactive pay rule. The Exceptions (errors) section of the report
lists those employees for whom one of these statement is true:
■ The system creates the timecard, but an error or warning exists.
You should investigate each error and warning and make any corrections before you
process a payroll cycle that includes these timecards. If all or most of the timecards are
incorrect, you might have entered incorrect information on the retroactive pay rule or
the associated employee group. If so, you can cancel the batch of timecards, correct the
error, and then resubmit the batch. If relatively few timecards contain errors, you can
use a time entry program, such as Speed Time Entry (P051121), to review the errors
and make corrections. In this case, you do not need to cancel and resubmit the batch.
In addition to the exceptions, the report also includes totals of:
■ Employee records that the system processed.
■ All timecards that the system created.
■ Timecards that the system was unable to create.
■ Timecards that the system created without errors or warnings.
■ Timecards that contained errors.
■ Timecards that contained warnings.
■ Hours worked.
■ Gross pay.
6.4.2 Prerequisite
Create one or more employee groups that contain the employees for whom you want
to process a retroactive pay rule.
See Also: ■Setting Up Functions and Formulas for Timecard
Automation.
■ Working with Timecards for Timecard Automation.
■ "Setting Up Payroll Cycle Information, " in theJD Edwards
■ "Setting Up the Payroll Cycle Workbench," in the JD Edwards
■ "Setting Processing Options for Payroll Cycle Workbench
(P07210)," in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Payroll

6.4.3 Forms Used to Create Retroactive Pay Rules

Work With Retroactive W186701A Periodic Processing Select existing retroactive
Pay Rules (G18620), Retroactive Pay pay rules for review or
revision.
Retroactive Pay Rule W186701B Click Add or select a Create a new retroactive
retroactive pay rule, and pay rule, or review and
click Select on the Work revise existing rules.
With Retroactive Pay Rules
form.
6.4.4 Setting Processing Options for Retroactive Pay (P186701)

Set these processing options before you enter requests into the system.
6.4.4.1 Defaults
1. Time Entry MBF Version (time entry master business function version)
Specify the default version of the Time Entry MBF (Master Business Function)
program that the system uses when timecards are added as this rule is processed.
2. Copy account information

Specify how the system determines the account information (cost center, object
account, and subsidiary) for newly created timecards. This processing option does not
affect the account information for modified timecards. Values are:
Blank: Retrieve the account information from the payroll automatic accounting
instructions (AAIs).
Y: Copy new timecard account information from the original timecard.
1: Get the subsidiary from the work order (cost center = original timecard; object =
payroll AAIs; subsidiary = work order).
3. Custom Rule Pay Type

Specify a pay type to be used in a custom retro pay rule to calculate a retro pay rate.
For example, to use 886 as the pay type that the custom retro pay rule will use for
calculations, enter 886.
6.4.5 Creating Retroactive Pay Rules

Access the Retroactive Pay Rule form.

Figure 6–5 Retroactive Pay Rule form
Name
Enter a user-defined name for a retro pay rule.
Enter a name that describes the purpose of the retroactive pay rule. For example, if
you are creating a retro pay rule to apply a 3 percent salary adjustment, the name for
the retro pay rule might be Three Percent Salary Adjustment.
Employee Group
Time Entry MBF Version (time entry master business function version)
Enter the version of the Time Entry MBF program to run when creating timecards
If you leave this field blank, the system uses version ZJDE0001. If the version that you
select has defined values for optional fields in the retroactive pay rule definition, the
system enters the values that you defined into the optional fields if you leave them
blank.
Starting Work Date

Enter the date upon which the system begins including timecards for processing that is
generated by a particular rule.
Ending Work Date

Enter the date up to which the system includes timecards for processing generated by
a particular rule.

New Work Date

Enter a code that indicates whether timecards that are created by a rule contain a new
work date or retain the same work date as the original timecard. If you select this
option, the system uses this date as the timecard date for the newly created timecards.
If you complete this field, verify that the date that you enter falls within the pay period
dates of the payroll cycle in which you want to process the timecards.
If you do not select this option, the new timecards contain the same date as the old
timecards.
New Pay Type

pay type or retain the same pay type as the original timecard. If you select this option,
the system uses this pay type to create the adjustment timecards. You might want to
use a pay type with a description that indicates what the payment is for. If you do not
select this option, the system uses the pay type from the old timecards.
New Hourly Rate

hourly rate or retain the same hourly rate as the original timecard. If you select this
option, enter a rate or a formula to calculate the hourly rate in this field. For example,
if the retroactive pay adjustment is 3 percent of employees' timecard rate, you might
enter this formula:
.03 × RHRF_TimecardRate
If you do not select this option, the existing timecards retain their original hourly rate.
New Hours Worked

number of hours worked or retain the same number of hours worked as the original
timecard. If you select this option, enter an amount or a formula to calculate the
number of hours that are worked. The system uses this amount on the newly created
timecards.
If you do not select this option, the new timecard retains the same amount of hours
worked as the original timecard.
No Hours On Time Card

Enter a code that specifies whether timecards that are created by a retroactive pay rule
will have a value of zero in the Hours Worked field.
If you select this option, the system enters a value of zero in the Hours Worked field on
the new timecards. For example, if the purpose of the adjustment is to calculate three
percent of employees' timecard rate, and an employee has a timecard with 40 hours
that you want to adjust at an hourly rate of 12.50 USD, the system creates a new
timecard in the amount of 15 USD (40 hours ×.375 USD), but enters zero in the Hours
Worked field.
Pay Types
If you select this option, the detail area is enabled. You must enter into the detail area
the specific pay types to include in the basis of calculation for the adjustment. For
example, if the new timecards should be based only on regular and overtime hours,
you would enter the pay types that you use for regular and overtime pay into the
detail area.
Pay Type Categories

Select this option for the system to enable the detail area below the inclusion options.
You must enter into the detail area the specific pay type to include in the basis of

Creating Overtime Rule Sets
calculation for the adjustment. For example, if you want to include only regular time
hours in the calculation, and all of the regular pay types are in a pay type category
called Regular, enter Regular in the detail area.
All
Select this option for the system to create the adjustment using all eligible timecards
within the specified date range as the basis of calculation. The detail area is hidden if
you select this option.
Select Group
Select this option to enable the detail area. You must enter the select statements to
determine the group of timecards to which the Overtime is to be applied.
6.4.6 Processing Retroactive Pay Rules

Access the Retroactive Pay Rule form.
Select the retroactive pay rule that you want to process, and then select Submit from
the Form menu. The system processes the rule, creates a new batch of timecards based
on the options specified, and creates the Retroactive Pay Rule Processing report
(R186702) that shows the processing details.
6.5 Creating Overtime Rule Sets

This section provides an overview of overtime rules, lists a prerequisite, and discusses
how to:
■ Create an overtime rule set.
■ Create a timecard accumulator rule.
■ Create a timecard change rule.
■ Create a call rule set rule.
■ Create a call custom rule.
■ Define the user parameters.
■ Set processing options for Overtime Rules (P186401).
■ Process overtime rules sets.
■ Set processing options for the Overtime Rule Set Batch Review report (R186404).
6.5.1 Understanding Overtime Rules

Due to federal, state, or union requirements, most organizations need to pay
employees overtime pay when employees work a certain number of hours. When you
pay overtime to employees, you can use the Overtime Rules program (P186401) to
automate many actions. You can create an overtime rule set, which is a group of
overtime rules that the system uses to automate the calculation of overtime pay. The
system uses overtime rule sets to:
■ Determine which employees in an employee group are eligible for overtime pay.
■ Identify the timecards that are the basis for overtime pay calculation, based on a
user-defined date range.
■ Calculate the overtime pay for each eligible employee.

■ Change current, unprocessed timecards, or create new timecards for the overtime
pay.
Note: Overtime rule sets can affect current, unprocessed timecards.

Historical timecards are not affected when you process overtime rule
sets.
An overtime rule set is a group of individual overtime rules that contains the employee
group or groups for which you want to process the set of overtime rules. An overtime
rule is a set of specifications that specify how the system calculates different types of
overtime. This example illustrates how you can use overtime rules and overtime rule
sets.
A typical overtime calculation for a company might be to pay all nonexempt
employees one-and-a-half times their base salary for any time that they worked over 8
hours a day or 40 hours a week. The company might also pay employees double time
for any time that they worked over 12 hours a day. To accommodate this overtime
calculation, use a rule set and attach an employee group consisting of all nonexempt
employees. This rule set would consist of:
■ A rule to calculate time-and-a-half for all hours worked over 8 hours per day.
■ A rule to calculate time-and-a-half for all hours worked over 40 hours per week.
■ A rule to calculate double time for all hours worked over 12 hours per day.
You can create four types of overtime rules within an overtime rule set, as described in
this table:
Rule Type Description

Timecard change rules Timecard change rules use if/then logic to change original
timecards, but they do not create new timecards. For
example, if a timecard includes regular time on a designated
company holiday, then change the pay type from regular
pay to overtime pay. In this example, the system changes the
pay types on the original timecards.
Timecard accumulator rules Timecard accumulator rules enable you to pay overtime
based on a specified limit and time period, and create
additional timecards for the overtime pay. When you use
timecard accumulator rules, you must use employee groups
to identify eligible employees. The accumulator rule then
calculates the overtime pay, changes the original timecards
to remove the original overtime amounts, and creates new
timecards for the overtime pay.
For example, you can create an overtime rule to pay
employees one-and-a-half times their regular rate for any
hours worked over 40 in a week. Therefore, if an employee
timecard included 45 hours of regular time in a given week,
the system would change the existing timecard to include 40
hours of regular time, and create a new timecard, or
timecards, that would include 5 hours of overtime.

Rule Type Description

Call custom rules Use call custom rules to call a user-defined business
function. If a company has special overtime requirements
that cannot be accommodated using change or accumulator
rules, you can create a custom function and have the system
call the function in the custom rule. For example, if you
want to pay a meal allowance of 8.00 USD per day for all
employees who work over nine-and-a-half hours, you can
create a call custom rule because neither the timecard
change rule nor the timecard accumulator rule can perform
this calculation.
Call rule set rules Use call rule set rules to call overtime rule sets that you have
previously defined. Call rule set rules enable you to reuse
rule sets in a variety of situations and eliminate the need to
re-create rule sets that you use frequently.
The system uses overtime rule sets to calculate overtime amounts for batches of
timecards. You can have several different overtime rules within one overtime rule set.
However, you must have at least one overtime rule for the system to process an
overtime rule set. Also, because you create overtime rules within overtime rule sets, an
overtime rule cannot exist outside of an overtime rule set.
You create an overtime rule set and then create and add the overtime rules to the set.
After you have created the overtime rules within a rule set, you must sequence the
rules in the appropriate processing order. The system must process certain rules before
others to obtain the desired results. For example, the system should process the rule
for time-and-a-half over 8 hours per day before it processes the rule for
time-and-a-half over 40 hours per week. If the rules are processed out of sequence, the
rule set might not meet overtime requirements.
The Overtime Rules program uses an employee group, a date range, and the overtime
rules that you identify to determine which timecards are affected. After the system
selects the appropriate timecards, the Overtime Rules program uses these timecards as
the basis to create new timecards or to change existing ones as necessary. The system
does not change historical timecards, nor does it process any original voided
timecards.
The system processes these timecards but does not change the types:
■ Posted timecards.
■ Interim, nonvoided timecards.
■ Printed check timecards.
After you submit the overtime rule set for processing, you can use the Reviewing and
Approving program (P186601) to review, approve, or cancel a batch. If you cancel a
batch, the system restores the original timecards. You can review the processing report
from within the Overtime Rule Sets program. Later, you can review the results,
without the processing notes, of submitting the overtime rule set in the Reviewing and
Approving Timecards program.
6.5.1.1 Overtime Rule Sets

You create an overtime rule set to define an ordered group of overtime rules that the
system uses to calculate overtime for a specific batch of timecards and employee
group. You can include one overtime rule set within another to eliminate the need to
re-create a rule set for multiple overtime calculations. When you create a rule set, you
must specify these items before creating and sequencing overtime rules:

■ The employee group that contains the employees to whom the overtime rule set
applies.
■ The dates for which employees should receive overtime pay.
You can process an overtime rule set for each pay period; however, you must change
the date range before you do so. You can also reuse an overtime rule set for different
groups of employees. To do so, you change the employee group before you process the
rule set.
After you create an overtime rule set, you need to create the overtime rules that
provide the system with the criteria that it uses to calculate overtime. Any
combination of overtime rules is acceptable in overtime rule sets. The system processes
overtime rules in the order in which you specify them in the overtime rule set.
You can create or delete overtime rules at any time. Changing the order of overtime
rules or including additional overtime rules does not affect current or past batches of
timecards.
You can change any original option, including the employee group that is assigned to
the rule. Changes that you make to overtime rule sets affect all batches of timecards
that are processed after the change, but do not affect batches of timecards that have
already been processed.
You can delete an overtime rule set if the overtime rule set has no batches of timecards
that are pending approval. Before you can delete an overtime rule set, you must
approve or cancel any batches of timecards on which it is based, and then delete the
associated header records for the timecards. The system verifies that no batches of
timecards depend on the overtime rule set before it enables you to delete the rule set. If
the overtime rule set has a batch of timecards with which it is associated, the system
displays an error message and prevents you from deleting the overtime rule set.
6.5.1.2 Timecard Accumulator Rules

You can create a timecard accumulator rule to control the hourly overtime rate,
overtime pay type, and the way that overtime is charged. A timecard accumulator rule
enables you to create calculations to pay overtime based on an overtime limit for a
given period of time, and charge the overtime to different timecards. Accumulator
rules are created within an overtime rule set.
The system identifies eligible employees from the employee group that you specify in
the overtime rule set, calculates the correct overtime amount, changes old timecards to
reflect the time that is removed for overtime, and creates new timecards for the
overtime. The overtime rule can specify a different pay type or rate for use on the new
timecards. All other fields on the new timecards are populated with the same values as
the original timecards. The system can create new timecards or change existing
timecards based on the way that you set up the overtime rule.
Accumulator rules are used to calculate overtime in situations in which employees
must accumulate a certain amount of time before they are eligible for overtime. For
example, you might pay employees time and a half for all hours worked over 8 hours
per day or 40 hours per week, and double time for all hours worked over 12 hours per
day. In this example, you can create an accumulator rule to calculate time and a half
for all hours worked over eight, indicating an accumulation period of one day. Within
the accumulator rule you would specify the pay types or pay type categories that the
system should use to locate the timecards that are used as the basis for the overtime
calculation. For example, if you specify regular pay as the basis, the system locates all
timecards with regular pay that fall within the specified criteria, changes the original
timecards to remove the overtime hours, and creates new timecards that contain the
overtime hours with the appropriate pay type.

For the system to perform the calculation, you must enter time on a daily basis rather
than on a summarized basis by pay period.
The timecard accumulator rule consists of these components:
■ An accumulation period.
The accumulation period is the time over which the system accumulates the hours
that employees work. For example, the accumulation period for a biweekly payroll
might be 14 days.
■ An include section.
The include section is the criteria that the system uses to determine which
timecards to include in the accumulation, based on pay type or pay type category.
For example, you can include all timecards with regular time but exclude
timecards with sick time.
■ An overtime limit.
The overtime limit is the point above which any additional hours are considered
overtime. For example, if you pay employees overtime for all hours worked over
eight hours in a day, the overtime limit would be eight hours.
■ A charge-to method.
A charge-to method specifies how and from where the system removes hours from
existing timecards, and how and where it applies overtime timecards to. Available
types of charge-to methods are:
■ Method 1
■ Method 2
■ Method 3
■ Method 4
6.5.1.3 Method 1
Beginning with the most recent timecard in the period and working backwards one
timecard at a time, the system removes time that should be considered overtime from
the existing timecards until the system accounts for all overtime. The system creates
one new timecard for each original timecard on which overtime hours are removed
and creates new timecards using the same data as the original timecards, with the
exception of the pay type and rate, which are derived from the information that you
enter in the accumulator rule. You might use this charge-to method if you track
overtime by criteria, such as work order or account number.
For example, a warehouse employee works 43 hours in a week. You can pay the
employee at the regular pay rate for the first 40 hours and at the overtime rate for the
remaining 3 hours. The system removes 3 hours from timecards, starting with the most
recent timecard and working backwards until the system accounts for all 3 hours. The
system creates new timecards for those 3 hours and changes the original timecards to
reflect the time that was removed.
This table illustrates the number of hours that are included on the timecards before
and after processing:
Hours on the New Regular Hours on the New Overtime

Hours on the Original Timecard Timecard Timecard
8 8 Blank

Hours on the New Regular Hours on the New Overtime

Hours on the Original Timecard Timecard Timecard
10 8 2
9 8 1
8 8 Blank
8 8 Blank
6.5.1.4 Method 2
The system removes time from timecards and changes them the same way as in
Method 1. However, the system charges the overtime to timecards in a different way.
Using method 2, the system charged all overtime to a single timecard. This timecard is
created using the same data as the timecard with the most recent work date, with the
exception of the pay type and rate, that is specified in the accumulator rule. You might
use this charge-to method if you want to create fewer timecards for faster processing,
and you do not need to track overtime by criteria.
For example, for the warehouse employee in the previous example, the system
removes time from the timecards using the same process as Method 1, but charges the
three hours of overtime to a single timecard.
This table illustrates the number of hours that are included on the timecards before
and after processing:
Original Timecard Hours New Regular Timecard Hours New Overtime Timecard Hours
8 8 Blank
10 8 Blank
9 8 Blank
8 8 Blank
8 8 Blank
Blank Blank 3
6.5.1.5 Method 3
The system removes time from and changes every timecard in the accumulation
period on a prorated basis. The prorated basis is a percentage, which is calculated by
dividing the amount of time on each individual timecard by the total time during the
accumulation period. The system creates one new timecard for each original timecard
with the corresponding prorated number of hours. The new timecards use the same
data as the original timecards, with the exception of the pay type and rate, that is
specified in the accumulator rule. You might use this charge-to method if you need to
allocate overtime to all timecards, regardless of when it was earned.
For example, for the warehouse employee in the previous examples, the system
removes a percentage of the three hours of overtime from each original timecard based
on the percentage of total time that each original timecard represents. The system
changes the original timecards to reflect the percentage of time removed. The system
creates new timecards for those three hours based on the percentage of total time that
the original timecard represents.
This table illustrates the number of hours included on the timecards before and after
processing:

8 7.43 .57
10 9.34 .66
9 8.37 .63
8 7.43 .57
8 7.43 .57
6.5.1.6 Method 4
The system removes time from and changes timecards as in Method 3. The system
charges all overtime to a single timecard. This timecard is created using the same data
as the most recent timecard, with the exception of the pay type and rate, that is
specified in the accumulator rule. You might use this charge-to method if you want
faster system processing, but you do not need to track overtime by criteria.
For example, for the warehouse employee in the previous examples, the system
removes the time in the same way as in Method 3, but charges the three hours of
overtime to a single timecard.
This table illustrates the number of hours included on the timecards before and after
processing:
8 7.43 Blank
10 9.34 Blank
9 8.37 Blank
8 7.43 Blank
8 7.43 Blank
Blank Blank 3
6.5.1.7 Setting Up Overtime Pay Type Exclusion Lists (Release 9.1 Update)
Use the overtime pay type exclusion lists to specify a list of pay types that are
excluded from the hours reduction process used with overtime accumulator rules
when you generate new overtime timecards.
You can set up pay type exclusion lists at three levels:
1. System exclusion list
2. Rule set exclusion list
3. Rule exclusion list
In the accumulator rule processing, the system uses a hierarchical search to determine
if a pay type is included in one of the three exclusion lists. The system first searches
the rule exclusion list for the current timecard's pay type. If the pay type is not found,
then the system searches the rule set exclusion list, and then the system exclusion list
as needed. If the pay type is found in any of these lists, then the overtime accumulator
rule will not modify any timecard assigned to this pay type. Otherwise, the
accumulator rule will modify these timecards as necessary when generating new
overtime timecards.

The accumulator rule calculates overtime hours based on all timecards processed by
the rule, including timecards assigned to a pay type listed in any of the exclusion lists.
The exclusion lists determine which original timecards should have their hours
reduced so the overtime hours can be allocated to new overtime timecards.
Figure 6–6 Overtime Rule Set Report
6.5.1.7.1 System Exclusion List The system exclusion list is defined using the Overtime
Pay Type Exclusion List program (P186411). You can access this program from Periodic
Processing menu (G18620). Any timecard using a pay type specified on this form will
be excluded from the overtime hours reduction process for all accumulator rules in the
system.
Figure 6–7 Overtime Pay Type Exclusion List
6.5.1.7.2 Rule Set Exclusion List You can access the Rule Set Exclusion list from the
Form menu on the Overtime Rule Set setup form. Any timecard using a pay type
specified on this form will be excluded from the overtime hours reduction process for
all accumulator rules within the rule set.

Figure 6–8 Overtime Rule Set Exclusion List
6.5.1.7.3 Rule Exclusion List You can access the Rule Exclusion List either from the
Form menu on the Timecard Accumulator Rule setup form or from the Row menu on
the Rule Set setup form. Any timecard using a pay type specified on this form will be
excluded from the overtime hours reduction process for the associated accumulator
rule.
Figure 6–9 Overtime Rule Exclusion List
6.5.1.8 Timecard Change Rule

You can use a timecard change rule to pay overtime, to change timecard information,
or both based on criteria that you enter. A timecard change rule changes original
timecards based on criteria that you enter; it does not create new timecards. Timecard
change rules can change current, unprocessed timecards only. Change rules cannot
change historical timecards.
You can use a timecard change rule to change values in one field in a timecard, based
on the value of other fields on the timecard. The rule consists of one or more IF
clauses, which the system uses to determine the timecards to change, and one or more
THEN clauses, which the system uses to determine what is to be changed. The Fields
and Functions program (P186101) determines which fields are available to use in the
process. For example, if you pay different rates of overtime for employees in different

states, you can have the system identify the employees affected by state and change
the hourly rate on the timecards.
You can use a timecard change rule to change a timecard field based on another field.
For example, if an employee's timecard is for regular time and the work date is a
company holiday, you can have the system change the pay type from regular pay to
holiday pay.
If you are creating a timecard change rule to change all regular time that is charged on
company holidays to holiday pay, the IF statement might look like this:
Value
Operator ( Field Alias Field Name Op Value Description )
IF Blank PDBA DBA Code EQ 1 Regular Blank
AND ( DWK Date-Worked EQ 01/01/05 Blank Blank
OR Blank DWK Date-Worked EQ 05/30/05 Blank Blank
OR Blank DWK Date-Worked EQ 12/25/05 Blank )
If you are creating a timecard change rule to change all regular time that is charged on
company holidays to holiday pay, the THEN statement might look like this:
Value
Operator Field Alias Field Name Op Value Description
THEN PDBA DBA Code EQ 110 Overtime 2.0
6.5.1.9 Call Rule Set Rule

You can use a call rule set rule to nest an overtime rule set within another overtime
rule set. You typically use a call rule set rule with an overtime rule that you use
regularly. If you include an overtime rule set within itself, the system ignores the
duplicate overtime rule set. For example, a rule set might verify and pay weekend and
holiday overtime pay. If you have an established overtime rule set for holiday pay, you
can call it from within another overtime rule set. You do not have to re-create the
holiday overtime rule set every time that you want to use it.
When you use an overtime rule set within another overtime rule set, you specify the
employee group, starting date, and ending date on the main overtime rule set. The
main rule set should not include information that is included in the embedded
overtime rule sets. If any conflicts exist between the information in the rule sets, the
information in the main overtime rule set overrides the information in the embedded
rule set.
6.5.1.10 Call Custom Rule

You can select a call custom rule to include a user-defined business function (BSFN) in
an overtime rule set. A call custom rule calls a user-defined BSFN. You create a custom
BSFN when you need to perform complex or unusual overtime calculations that are
not already provided with the software. For example, if the organization pays a meal
allowance of 8.00 USD to employees who work over nine-and-a-half hours per day,
you can use a custom BSFN to calculate the pay. The system can create timecards or

change existing timecards based on this overtime rule. The Fields and Functions
program determines which functions are available; therefore, after you have created
the custom BSFN, you must use the Fields and Functions program to register it for use
by the Timecard Automation module. After the BSFN has been registered, you can add
it to a rule set.
Note: If you need to create custom BSFN entries, contact the system
administrator for assistance.
6.5.1.11 User Parameters

After you define a call custom rule, you can define user parameters to specify static
values that the system passes to the business function. The user parameters enable you
to select specific string, numeric, integer, character, date, and Boolean fields into which
you can enter the value that you want to pass into the function. Before you can define
user parameters, you must create a call custom rule.
6.5.1.12 Processing Overtime Rule Sets

After you create an overtime rule set and attach and sequence the overtime rules, you
can submit the overtime rule set for processing. When you submit an overtime rule set
for processing, the system creates a batch of timecards for the employee group that is
associated with the overtime rule set. The timecards in this batch have a status of
Pending Approval. You should review these timecards and revise them, if necessary.
When you are satisfied that the timecards are correct, you can approve the batch. You
must approve the batch before you can process the timecards in a payroll cycle.
6.5.1.13 Overtime Rule Processing Reports

When you submit an overtime rule for processing, the system generates the Overtime
Rule Set Processing report (R186405) and the Overtime Rule Set Batch Review report
(R186404). Review these reports to verify that the calculations were completed as
expected, and that the system processed the overtime rule without any processing
errors.
You should investigate any errors or warnings on these reports, and make any
necessary corrections before you approve the batch. If all or most of the timecards are
incorrect, you might have entered incorrect information on the overtime rule set or the
associated employee group. In this case, you can cancel the batch of timecards, correct
the error, resubmit the overtime rule set, and then use the Reviewing and Approving
program (P186601) to review the newly created timecards. If only a few timecards
contain errors, you can use a time entry program, such as Speed Time Entry (P051121),
to review the errors and make corrections. In this case, you do not need to cancel and
resubmit the batch.
6.5.2 Prerequisite
Create one or more employee groups that contain the employees for whom you want
to process an overtime rule set.

6.5.3 Forms Used to Create Overtime Rule Sets

Work With Rule Sets W186401A Periodic Processing menu Review existing rule sets.
(G18620), Overtime
Rule Set W186401H Select a rule to review and Create a rule set or review an
click Select or click Add to existing rule set.
add a new rule set on the
Work With Rule Sets form.
Timecard W186401D On the Work With Rule Sets Create a timecard
Accumulator Rule form, select a rule to review accumulator rule and attach
and click Select. it to a rule set.
On the Rule Set form, select
Add Accum Rule from the
Form menu.
Timecard Change W186401C On the Work With Rule Sets Create a timecard change
Rule form, select a rule to review rule and attach it to a rule
and click Select. set.
Add Change Rule from the
Form menu.
Call Rule Set Rule W186401G On the Work With Rule Sets Create a call rule set rule and
form, select a rule to review attach it to a rule set.
and click Select.
Add Call Rule Set R from the
Form menu.
Call Custom Overtime W186401C On the Work With Rule Sets Create a call custom rule and
Rule form, select a rule to review, attach it to a rule set.
and click Select.
Add Call Custom from the
Form menu.
User-defined W186401J On the Rule Set form, select Define the user parameters
Parameter the call custom rule for for a specified call custom
Descriptions for which you want to define rule.
Custom Overtime user parameters, and then
Rule select Edit Rule from the
Row menu.
On the Call Custom
Overtime Rule form, select
User Params from the Form
menu.
6.5.4 Creating an Overtime Rule Set

Access the Rule Set form.

Figure 6–10 Rule Set form
Name
Enter a user-defined name for an overtime rule.
The name should describe the purpose of the overtime rule set. For example, an
overtime rule set name might be California Overtime Rules.
Time Entry MBF (time entry master business function)

Leave this field blank for the system to use the default version, ZJDE0001. If the Time
Entry MBF version has defined values for optional fields in the overtime rule set
definition, the Time Entry MBF version enters the appropriate values in the optional
fields that you leave blank.
Processing Order
After you have attached overtime rules to the rule set, you can change their processing
order by entering a numeric value in this field.
6.5.5 Creating a Timecard Accumulator Rule

Access the Timecard Accumulator Rule form.

Figure 6–11 Timecard Accumulator Rule form
Name
Describes the purpose of the accumulator rule. For example, if the rule is to calculate
overtime for time worked over eight hours per day, a descriptive name might be Daily
Over Eight.
Accumulation Period
Enter the number of days to add up hours on timecards for calculating overtime.
This field works with the Overtime Hours field. Enter the period of time, in days,
during which time can accumulate before overtime is calculated. Any time worked
during this period that is over the number of hours that you enter in the Overtime
Hours field is changed to overtime as a result of the rule. For example, if you are
creating an accumulator rule to pay employees time-and-a-half for time worked over
eight hours per day, the Accumulator Period field should contain a value of 1, and the
Overtime Hours field should contain a value of 8.
Note: Because accumulator rules accumulate time worked by day

before charging excess time to overtime, you track employee time on a
daily basis; otherwise, accumulator rules do not work correctly.
Overtime Hours
Enter a limit above which any hours accumulated will be considered overtime.
This field works with the Accumulation Period field to determine which hours are
considered overtime hours. Enter the number of accumulated hours over which any
excess time that is worked during the accumulation period is considered overtime. For
example, if you are creating an accumulator rule to pay employees time-and-a-half for
time worked over eight hours per day, the Overtime Hours field should contain a
value of 8, and the Accumulator Period field should contain a value of 1.
Charge To Method
Enter a code that identifies where the system will charge overtime.
The Charge To Method specifies how the system creates and changes timecards for
overtime. It does specify how the system directs overtime-related labor and expenses
to accounts within the general ledger. Unless the processing options are set to copy the
account information from the original timecards, the system uses the AAIs that have

been defined for the organization to determine general ledger account information and
instructions.
New Pay Type

pay type or retain the same pay type as the original timecard. The system uses this pay
type to create the overtime timecards. You might want to use a pay type with a
description that indicates the purpose of the payment. Values are:
1: Contains a new pay type.
0: Retains the same pay type as the original timecard.
New Hourly Rate

hourly rate or retain the same hourly rate as the original timecard. If you select this
option, enter a rate or a formula to calculate the hourly rate. If you do not select this
option, the new timecard retains the same hourly rate as the original timecard.
Pay Types
Select to enable the detail area. You must enter into the detail area the specific pay
types to include in the basis of calculation for the adjustment. For example, if the new
timecards should be based only on regular and overtime hours, you would enter the
pay types that you use for regular and overtime pay into the detail area.
Pay Type Categories

Select to enable the detail area below the inclusion options. You must enter into the
detail area the specific pay type to include in the basis of calculation for the
adjustment. For example, if you want only regular time hours to be included in the
calculation, and all of the regular pay types are in a pay type category called Regular,
you would enter Regular in the detail area.
All
Select this option for the system to create the adjustment using all eligible timecards
within the specified date range as the basis of calculation. The detail area after these
options is hidden if you select this option.
Select Group
Select this option to enable the detail area. You must enter the select statements to
determine the group of timecards to which the Overtime is to be applied.
6.5.6 Creating a Timecard Change Rule

Access the Timecard Change Rule form.
Figure 6–12 Timecard Change Rule form

To enter a new line of logic, click the New Line button on the tool bar or select New
Line from the Form menu.
Name
Create a name that describes the purpose of the change rule. For example, if the rule is
to change all regular time that is charged on a company holiday to a holiday pay type,
a descriptive name might be Company Holidays.
Operator
Enter a code that indicates that a specific mathematical process is to be carried out.
You use an operator to create formulas for calculating change rules.
The system automatically enters IF in the Operator field on the first line of the IF
statement. On subsequent lines of logic, you can select IF,AND,OR, or THEN for the
Operator field. Values are:
IF
AND
OR
THEN
(
Marks the beginning of a grouping. Use an open parenthesis in equations to determine
the order of operation.
If you are grouping components of the statement together (for example, if you are
using a string of IF operands), you might want to use this field to indicate the
beginning of the grouped components.
Field Alias
Enter a code that identifies and defines a unit of information. It is an alphanumeric
code up to 8 characters that does not allow blanks or special characters such as%, &, or
+. You create new data items using system codes 55 through 59. You cannot change the
alias.
If you want to use the Field Alias field but it is not available, select Show Alias from
the Form menu. If you use Field Alias, the system completes the Field Name field
automatically when you enter a field alias in this field. If the jde.ini file is set
appropriately, you can access field aliases for each data item by right-clicking the data
item.
Field Name
Enter an identifier that refers to and defines a unit of information. It is a 32-character,
alphabetic field that does not allow blanks or special characters such as%, &, or +.
The data item cannot be changed.
It forms the C-code data name (for example AddressNumber) that the system uses in
business functions, data structures, and event rules.
Also identify a data item by the alias or alpha description.
The system automatically enters a value in this field when you press Tab to move
through the field if you entered a value in the Field Alias field. If you are not using
aliases, you can use the search button to select a field name for the IF statement from a
list of valid fields. If you use the Field Name field and you want to hide the Field Alias
field, select Hide Field Alias from the Form menu.

Op (operand)
Enter a code that identifies the operands in Boolean logic. You can specify any of these
codes:
EQ: Equal to
LT: Less than
LE: Less than or equal to.
GT: Greater than.
GE: Greater than or equal to.
NE: Not equal to.
NL: Not less than.
NG: Not greater than.
Value
Enter the field value that the system should locate based on the selected operand. For
example, to search for all timecards with a pay type of 100, enter 100 in this field.
)
Marks the end of a grouping. Use a close parenthesis in equations to determine the
order of operation.
Complete this field only if you have entered a value in the Open Parenthesis field.
6.5.7 Creating a Call Rule Set Rule

Access the Call Rule Set Rule form.
Figure 6–13 Call Rule Set Rule form
Overtime Rule Set To Call

Enter a user-defined name for an overtime rule set.
(Processing Order)
Indicates the order in which the system processes a rule within a given rule set.
6.5.8 Creating a Call Custom Rule

Access the Call Custom Overtime Rule form.

Figure 6–14 Call Custom Overtime Rule form
Overtime Rule Name

Function Name
Indicates the actual name of the function. It must follow standard ANSI C naming
conventions (for example, no space between words).
All
Enter a code that specifies which method he system uses to determine which pay types
to include for processing. Values are:
0: Include all timecards.
1: Include only the timecards for which pay type is on the pay type list.
2: Include only the timecards for which pay type is on the pay type category list.
Pay Type Category

Indicates which method the system uses to determine which pay types to include for
processing. Values are:
0: Include all timecards.
1: Include only the timecards for which pay type is on the pay type list.
2: Include only the timecards for which pay type is on the pay type category list.
P C (pay type categories)

Enter a code from UDC table 07/PC that specifies the pay type categories that you
want to use:
■ For regular pay.
■ To generate overtime.

■ For reporting purposes on the Certified Payroll Register (U.S. only).
Processing Orders
Indicates the order in which the system processes a rule within a given rule set.
6.5.9 Defining the User Parameters

Access the User-defined Parameter Descriptions for Custom Overtime Rule form.
Data Dictionary String Alias

Indicates the alias of the data dictionary item that is associated with the user-defined
String field.
User-defined Description 3
Indicates the description that is associated with the user-defined String field.
6.5.10 Setting Processing Options for Overtime Rules (P186401)

Set these processing options before you process overtime rules.
These processing options are identical to the processing options for Retroactive Pay
(P186701) except where noted.
6.5.10.1 Defaults
Use these processing options to specify default information for processing overtime
rules.
1. Time Entry MBF Version

Specify whether the default version of the Time Entry MBF has to be used when
timecards are added as this rule set is processed.
2. Process Interims for overtime processing

Specify whether to include timecards that are associated with interim payments in the
calculation of a rule set. If you include interim payment timecards, you must process
those interim payments through a payroll cycle. Values are:
Y: Apply overtime rule.
N: Do not apply overtime rule.
3. Copy Account Information

Specify whether the system determines the account information (cost center, object
account, and subsidiary) for newly created timecards. This processing option does not
affect the account information for modified timecards.
4. Process Overtime Rule across multiple assignments

Specify whether to process overtime rules across multiple assignments. You might
process overtime rules across multiple assignments if the overtime calculations for
each assignment are the same. If you leave this processing option blank, the system
processes overtime rules across multiple assignments. Values are:
0: Process (default).
1: Do not process.
5. Copy Shift Code Information

Specify whether the system copies the shift code information from the original
timecard to the new overtime timecard or if the system automatically populates the
shift code information on the overtime timecard based on the employee's setup.

6.5.11 Processing Overtime Rule Sets

Access the Rule Set form.
From the Form menu, select Submit.
The system processes the overtime rule sets, and creates a new batch of timecards
based on the options that are specified in the overtime rule set (including employee
group). The system then generates the Overtime Rule Set Processing report (R186405)
and the Overtime Rule Set Batch Review report (R186404), which display the
processing details.
6.5.12 Setting Processing Options for the Overtime Rule Set Batch Review Report
(R186404)
Set this processing option before you process overtime rules.
6.5.12.1 Display
Specify whether piecework information appears on the report.
Display Piecework information

Determine whether the system displays piece work rates and the number of pieces
that an employee completes on the report. Values are:
Blank: Do not display.
1: Display.

7
Setting Up Functions and Formulas for
7
Timecard Automation

■ Section 7.1, "Understanding Functions and Formulas"
■ Section 7.2, "Registering a Function"
■ Section 7.3, "Creating and Testing Formulas"
7.1 Understanding Functions and Formulas

To pay employees correctly for exception pay such as overtime, retroactive pay,
holiday pay, or special allowance pay, many organizations require complex
calculations. Though many of these complex overtime calculations are included in the
software, you might need to create functions and formulas for more complex earnings
calculations.
7.2 Registering a Function

This section includes an overview of functions and discusses how to register functions.
7.2.1 Understanding Functions

The Fields and Functions program (P186101) enables programmers and consultants to
access field and function definitions that are used throughout the Timecard
Automation module. A field is an area in which the system displays a specific piece of
information. A field can be either an input-capable field or a display field, for which
the system retrieves the information from another part of the system. For example, the
TIN (taxpayer identification) field displays taxpayer identification numbers. A function
is a calculation with variables that the system uses to perform specific actions. For
example, you can use the timecard rate function on its own or in a formula to find
employees' timecard rates.
To use different fields and functions in the Timecard Automation module, you must
first register the field or the function in the Fields and Functions program. The fields in
the F060116, F06116, and F0618 tables are preregistered in the system. Several
additional functions have also been registered in the Fields and Functions program.
The system includes several functions for calculating common methods of
determining hourly rates and hours worked. When you create a timecard template,
overtime rule set, or retroactive pay rule, you can use one or more of these functions.
Because each function is specific to a field in a specific program, the system limits the
available functions to those that are applicable to the calling program. For example,
Setting Up Functions and Formulas for Timecard Automation 7-1

Registering a Function
the function that is available for calculating the hourly rate for a timecard template is
different from the function that is available for calculating the hourly rate for a
retroactive pay rule.
You can use a function alone, or you can create a formula that includes one or more
functions. Use the Fields and Functions program (P186101) to create custom formulas.
You can also use this program to validate and test a formula before you begin using it.
Occasionally, you might need a function that is not included with the system. In this
case, you can customize the system by adding a new function. Typically, you create
custom functions using named event rules through the Business Function Design Aid
tool, which you access from the Object Management Workbench (OMW). You can also
create custom business functions using C programming. Programmers or consultants
typically create custom business functions. Oracle recommends that you contact the
system administrator for assistance with creating custom functions. After you create a
custom function, you must register it for use in the applicable Timecard Automation
program. Registering the function enables you to access it from the applicable
program.
To simplify the process of creating formulas for calculating hourly rates and hours
worked, the Timecard Automation module includes several predefined functions. You
can use these functions alone or include them in formulas. These functions include:
■ Hours worked function for timecard templates.
■ Hours worked function for retroactive pay rules.
■ Hourly rate function for timecard templates.
■ Hourly rate functions for retroactive pay rules.
■ Hourly rate functions for overtime accumulator rules.
■ Custom overtime rules functions.
To meet the specific needs of the organization, you can also create custom functions.
Each function uses a data structure, which lists the data item name, the input or output
status, and a description of the data item.
7.2.1.1 Hours Worked Function for Timecard Templates

The hours worked function for timecard templates is included in the Template Hours
Worked Functions module (N1861312). This function uses data structure D186132. You
also use this data structure when you create a custom hours worked function for
timecard templates. This table illustrates input and output information about the data
items in this data structure:
Data Item Additional Information

LRSTTID Input: Timecard Template ID
AN8 Input: Address Number (Employee Number)
PHRW Output: Hours Worked
The predefined hours worked function for timecard templates is THWF_

8HoursIf8OnPrevWorkDate.
The 8 Hours if Employee Worked 8 or More Hours on a Previous Day function returns
eight hours worked if the employee worked eight or more hours, not including sick
pay, on the previous work date. Saturdays and Sundays are not considered work
dates. If the employee did not work at least eight hours, the returned value is zero. The

work date is identified on the timecard template in the Work Date Schedule. For
example, you might use this function if you want the timecard template to use eight
hours for the amount of work an employee is paid each day, based on the criteria
specified.
7.2.1.2 Hours Worked Function for Retroactive Pay Rules

The hours worked function for retroactive pay rules is included in the Retropay Hours
Worked Functions module (N1861712). This function uses data structure D186172. You
also use this data structure when you create a custom hours worked function for
retroactive pay rules. This table lists examples of input and output information about
the data items in this data structure:

LRSRRID Input: Retroactive Pay Rule ID
PRTR Input: Payroll Transaction No
LRSCHF Input: Current/History option. This option indicates
whether the payroll transaction number refers to a current
timecard in the F06116 table or a historical timecard in the
F0618 table.
PHRW Output: Hours Worked
AN8 Input: Address Number
DWK Input: Date - Worked
PDBA Input: PayDeductBenAccType
The predefined hours worked function for retroactive pay rules is RHRF_
TimecardHours.
The hours worked on timecard function returns the hours worked from the Rate
Hourly field on a timecard currently being processed by a retroactive pay rule for one
of the pay types that you identify. For example, you might use this function when you
pay employees retroactive pay for the hours worked, based on their original
timecards.
7.2.1.3 Hourly Rate Function for Timecard Templates

The hourly rate functions for timecard templates are included in the Template Hourly
Rate Functions module (N1861311). These functions use data structure D186131. You
also use this data structure when you create a custom hourly rate function for timecard
templates. This table lists examples of input and output information about the data
items in this data structure:

LRSTTID Input: Timecard Template ID
SHRT Output: Hourly Rate
TCTD Output: TimecardThruDate
EV01 Input: EverestEventPoint01
The predefined hourly rate function for timecard templates is THRF_

EmployeeMasterRate.

The Employee Master Rate function returns the rate from the Rate-Hourly field in the
F060116 table for the employee records that are processed using the timecard template.
For example, you might want to pay an employee based on the established master pay
rate.
7.2.1.4 Hourly Rate Functions for Retroactive Pay Rules

The hourly rate functions for retroactive pay rules are included in the Retropay Hourly
Rate Functions module (N1861711). These functions use data structure D186171. You
also use this data structure when you create a custom hourly rate function for
retroactive pay rules. This table lists examples of input and output information about
the data items in this data structure:

LRSRRID Input: Retroactive Pay Rule ID
whether the payroll transaction number refers to a current
timecard in F06116 or a historical timecard in F0618.
PDBA Input: PayDeductBenAccType
The predefined hourly rate functions for retroactive pay rules are:
■ RHRF_EmployeeMasterRate
The Employee Master Rate function returns the rate from the Rate-Hourly field in
the F060116 table for the employee on the current timecard that the system is
processing using the retroactive pay rule. For example, you might want to pay
employees retroactive pay based on the master hourly pay rate.
■ RHRF_MaxRate
The Maximum Rate from Timecard vs. Employee Master function returns the
greater rate of the timecard hourly rate from the Hourly Rate field or the employee
master hourly rate from the Rate-Hourly field. For example, you might want to
pay employees retroactive pay based on either the master hourly pay rate or the
timecard hourly rate. This function provides the larger of these two hourly rates.
■ RHRF_PayRateMultiplier
The Pay Rate Multiplier function returns the pay rate multiplier from the
Multiplier-Pay Type Multiplier field on the current timecard that the system is
processing using the retroactive pay rule.
■ RHRF_TimecardRate
The Timecard Rate function returns the hourly rate from the Hourly Rate field on
the current timecard that the system is processing using the retroactive pay rule.
For example, you might want to pay employees retroactive pay based on the rate
on the timecard instead of another rate.
■ RHRF_UnionRateX where X is A, B, C, D, or R

The Union Rate X function returns the rate for a chosen employee from a
particular column of the F069126 table. You identify the appropriate column. This
function returns the union rate by calling the Retrieve Union Rates function
(N0500015) and using fields on the current timecard that the system is processing
in the retroactive pay rule. For example, you might want to pay employees
retroactive pay based on a particular union rate. This function provides you with
the appropriate union rate.
■ RHRF_WeightedAverageHourlyRate
The Weighted Average of Employees' Timecards in Retroactive Pay Period
function returns an hourly rate weighted by hours worked. The function uses all
timecards in the overtime period for one of the pay types that you identify. For
example, you might want to pay employees retroactive pay based on an average of
the hourly pay rates received in the past.
7.2.1.5 Hourly Rate Functions for Overtime Accumulator Rules

The hourly rate functions for overtime accumulator rules are included in the Overtime
Hourly Rate Functions module (N1861411). These functions use data structure
D186141. You also use this data structure when you create a custom hourly rate
function for overtime accumulator rules. This table lists examples of input and output
information about the data items in this data structure:

LRSORSID Input: Overtime Rule Set ID
LRSORID Input: Overtime Rule ID
whether the payroll transaction number refers to a
current timecard in F06116 or a historical timecard in
F0618.
EV01 Input: EverestEventPoint01
GENLNG Input: GenericLong
The predefined hourly rate functions for overtime accumulator rules are:
■ OHRF_EmployeeMasterRate
The Employee Master Rate function returns the hourly rate from the Rate-Hourly
field (PHRT) in the F060116 table for the employee that the system is processing
using the overtime rule set. For example, you might want to pay employees
overtime pay based on the master hourly pay rate.
■ OHRF_HoursWorked
The Hours Worked on Timecard function returns the hours worked from the
PHRW field on the current timecard that the system is processing using the
overtime rule set. For example, you might want to pay employees overtime pay
based on the hours worked on the current timecards.
■ OHRF_MaxRate

The Maximum Rate from Timecard vs. Employee Master function returns the
greater rate of the timecard hourly rate from the Hourly Rate field (SHRT) or the
hourly rate in the Rate-Hourly field (PHRT) in the Employee Master table. For
example, you might want to pay employees overtime pay based on either the
master hourly pay rate or the timecard hourly rate. This function provides the
higher of these two hourly rates.
■ OHRF_PayFrequency
The Employee Master Pay Frequency function returns an employee's numeric pay
frequency (which is derived from the Description 2 field in UDC 07/PF) based on
the value in the PFRQ field (Pay Frequency) on an employee record. For example,
this function would convert a value of W (Weekly) in the PFRQ field to the
numeric value of 52, which can then be used in payroll calculations.
■ OHRF_PayRateMultiplier
The Pay Rate Multiplier function returns the pay rate multiplier from the
Multiplier-Pay Type Multiplier field (PAYM) on the current timecard that the
system is processing using the overtime rule set.
■ OHRF_Salary
The Employee Master Salary function returns the employee's salary from
Rate-Salary, Annual field (SAL) on an employee record for the employee being
processed by the overtime rule. For example, you might want to pay employees
overtime pay based on the master salary.
■ OHRF_TimecardRate
The Timecard Rate function returns the hourly rate from the Hourly Rate field on
the current timecard that the system is processing using the overtime rule set. For
example, you might want to pay employees overtime pay based on the rate on the
timecard instead of another rate.
■ OHRF_TotHoursWorked
The Total Hours Worked function returns the total hours worked by a given
employee within the overtime period for a pay type of one of the pay types that
you identify. For example, you might want to pay employees overtime pay based
on the total hours that each employee worked.
■ OHRF_UnionRateX where X is A, B, C, D, or R
The Union Rate X function returns the rate for a chosen employee from a
particular column of the Union Rates File table (F069126), where you identify the
appropriate column. This function returns the union rate by calling the Retrieve
Union Rates function (N0500015) using fields on the current timecard that the
system is processing using the overtime rule set. For example, you might want to
pay employees overtime pay based on a particular union rate. This function
provides you with the appropriate union rate.
■ OHRF_WeightedAverageHourlyRate
The Weighted Average of Employees' Regular Timecards in Overtime Period
function returns an hourly rate weighted by hours worked. The function uses all
timecards in the overtime period for a pay type of one of the pay types that you
identify. For example, you might want to pay employees overtime pay based on an
average of the hourly pay rates received in the past.

7.2.1.6 Custom Overtime Rules Functions

The predefined functions for custom overtime rules are included in the Custom
Overtime Rules module (N186405). These functions use data structure D186405A. You
also use this data structure when you create a custom hourly rate function for
overtime accumulator rules. This table lists examples of input and output information
about the data items in this data structure:

LRSORSID Input: Overtime Rule Set ID
AN8 Input: Address Number
LRSBAT Input: LRS Batch Number
GNUM0 Output: Timecards Processed
GNUM1 Output: Timecards Created
GNUM2 Output: Timecards Changed
GNUM3 Output: Errors
GNUM4 Output: Warnings
The predefined hourly rate functions for custom overtime rules are:
■ OCR_MealAllowance
The Meal Allowance custom rule pays a meal allowance of 8.00 USD for days on
which employees work 9.5 or more hours of regular time (pay type of 1). The
system creates a gross pay timecard with a pay type of 999 for 8.00 USD for that
day. For example, you might want to pay consultants a meal allowance when they
have worked a certain number of hours within a specific period.
■ OCR_SpreadOvertime
The Spread Employee's Salary custom rule spreads a salaried employee's salary
over all hours worked and does not generate overtime. For example, you might
want to pay salaried employees the same amount regardless of overtime worked.
With this function, you can spread employee overtime across all hours worked,
which in essence reduces the hourly rate, but pays employees the same amount.
■ OCR_SevenDaysWorked
The Seven Days Worked custom overtime rule applies to overtime worked in
California. An organization must first determine whether an employee worked
more than 30 hours in a week or over six hours in any day of the week. This
calculation determines whether the employee is entitled to overtime on the
seventh consecutive day. If an employee works seven consecutive days and has
worked at least 30 hours in the week, or six hours in a day, the employee is
entitled to overtime. The first eight hours of the seventh day are paid at 1.5 of the
regular rate of pay. Any hours over eight worked on the seventh day are paid at
2.0 of the regular rate.
New timecards are created with pay type 999.
■ OCR_MinWageAdjustment_1
The Minimum Wage Adjustment custom overtime rule checks to determine
whether an employee is being paid at least minimum wage based on the total pay
and hours worked on the timecards being processed. If not, this rule adds a
timecard for the employee to bring his or her hourly rate up to minimum wage.

7.2.1.7 Registering Functions

You must register functions to access them when you build a formula for the hourly
rate or hours worked fields in the Timecard Automation programs. Functions are
registered specifically for use with timecard templates, retroactive pay rules, or
overtime rule sets. The functions that are included with the Timecard Automation
module are already registered. Occasionally, you might need to use a function that is
not registered, such as any custom functions that you create. You can use functions
alone or in formulas.
When you register a function, you can define it as active or inactive. An active field or
function is one that other users can access from a Timecard Automation program. You
can use inactive mode to verify whether the function works properly before you make
it active for other users.
Before registering a function, you should identify the usage code that the system uses
to determine the program in which the function is used. Usage codes include:
■ THRF - Identifies a timecard template hourly rate function.
■ THWF - Identifies a timecard template hours worked function.
■ RHRF - Identifies a retroactive pay rule hourly rate function.
■ RHWF - Identifies a retroactive pay rule hours worked function.
■ OHRF - Identifies an overtime rule hourly rate function.
■ OCRI - Identifies an overtime change rules IF statement.
■ OCRT - Identifies an overtime change rules THEN statement.
■ OCR - Identifies a custom overtime rule that is created using a custom business
function.
In addition to specifying the usage codes for a function, you should also identify this
information for each function:
■ The source module, which is the object name to which the function belongs.
Object names that are associated with named event rule business functions begin
with N. For example, N1861411 is the object name (or source module) that contains
the various overtime hourly rate functions.
■ The function name within the source module.
Event rule logic and data structures are attached to individual functions within a
source module.
■ The status of the field availability (either active or inactive).
Note: You can use the Field/Function Definition form to revise

information about a function, such as its active status. The changes
that you make to functions affect all batches of timecards that use
changed fields and functions and that are processed after the change.
Changes do not affect timecards that have already been processed.
You can delete a function from the Fields and Functions program,
thereby making it unregistered in the Timecard Automation module.
Deleting a function removes it from the search list for the appropriate
Hourly Rate or Hours Worked field, but does not remove it from the
system.

Creating and Testing Formulas
7.2.2 Forms Used to Register a Function

Work With W186101A Advanced & Technical Select functions for review,
Field/Function (G18630), Fields and or access forms to create and
Definitions Functions register new functions.
Field/Function W186101B On Work With Register a function.
Definition Field/Function Definitions,
click Add.
7.2.3 Registering Functions

Access the Field/Function Definition form.
Usage Code
Enter a usage code that represents the purpose of the function. For example, if you are
registering a function that calculates a custom overtime rule, enter usage code OCR
(custom overtime rule). The value that you enter in this field determines whether you
can use the function in specific areas of the Timecard Automation module. For
example, if you enter OCR, the function is available for use in the call custom rule area
of overtime rule sets only.
Source Module
Enter the name of the object that contains the function that you are registering.
Multiple functions can be grouped within a single source module. For example, the
source module N1861411 - Overtime Hourly Rate Formulas might contain all of the
functions that retrieve various hourly rates to be used within overtime accumulator
rules.
Function Name
Enter the actual name of the function. It must follow standard ANSI C naming
conventions. For example, don't include spaces between words.
Active
Select to indicate that other users can access the field or function from the applicable
Timecard Automation program.
7.3 Creating and Testing Formulas

This section provides an overview of formulas, lists a prerequisite, and discusses how
to:
■ Create a formula
■ Test a formula for a timecard template.
■ Test a formula for a retroactive pay rule.
■ Test a formula for an overtime rule set.
7.3.1 Understanding Formulas

When you need to perform simple, complex, or unusual calculations to determine the
appropriate hourly rate or number of hours worked for a particular situation, you can
create a formula. The formula can use the standard functions that are included with
the system, or you can use custom functions that you have created. You can also use a
combination of both types of functions.

When you create a formula, you create it within a specific timecard template,
retroactive pay rule, or overtime rule set. Based on the program that you select, the
system provides you with a list of appropriate functions that are available for use in
the formula. You then create mathematical statements that include one or more of
these functions.
For example, assume that you need to average two different union rates to pay
warehouse employees retroactive pay. To calculate the correct rate, you enclose within
parentheses the multiple of the two union rates and divide the result by two. The
formula for the new rate is:
New Rate = (RHRF_UnionRateA × RHRF_UnionRateB) ÷ 2
You cannot use a formula outside of the initial timecard template, overtime rule set, or
retroactive pay rule for which it was created. You cannot save and reuse formulas;
however, if you need to use a formula often, you might consider asking the system
administrator to create a custom function. You can save and reuse the timecard
template, retroactive pay rule, or overtime rule set that contains the formula that you
created.
You use the Build Formula form to create custom formulas. You cannot access this
form from a menu; instead, you access it using the search button in the hours worked
and hourly rate fields in the Timecard Templates, Retroactive Pay Rules, and Overtime
Rule Sets programs.
This table shows the forms and fields from which you can access the Build Formula
form:
Form Name Field

Timecard Template form Hours Worked field (Main tab) and Hourly Rate field
(Rates tab)
Timecard Accumulator Rule form (within Overtime New Hourly Rate field
Rule Sets)
After you create the formula, but before you begin using it, test it to validate its
mathematical logic and to ensure that it calculates the appropriate results.
Depending on government regulations, industry standards, union contracts, and
company processes, different organizations calculate overtime rates using different
methods. Review the examples of the formulas for these overtime hourly rate
calculations. The functions that are used in these formulas are predefined in the
system and are available for use in the overtime rule type specified in the formula
description.
7.3.1.1 Time-and-a-Half Overtime Based on Average Hourly Rate

This formula averages the hourly rates of all of the regular timecards within the
specified accumulation period and multiplies the average rate by 1.5 to determine the
new hourly rate for overtime. You can use this formula in an overtime accumulator
rule within an overtime rule set.
New Hourly Rate = 1.5 x OHRF_WeightedAverageHourlyRate
7.3.1.2 Chinese Overtime

This formula calculates the new hourly rate for Chinese Overtime. You can use this
formula in an overtime accumulator rule within an overtime rule set.

New Hourly Rate = OHRF_TimcardRate + 1/2 OHRF_Salary/OHRF_

FrequencyOHRF_TotHoursWorked
7.3.1.3 Time-and-a-Half Overtime Based on Employee Master Rate

This formula multiplies the employee's rate, as specified in the F060116 table, by 1.5 to
determine the new hourly rate for overtime. You can use this formula in an overtime
accumulator rule within an overtime rule set.
New Hourly Rate = 1.5 x OHRF_EmployeeMasterRate
7.3.1.4 Time-and-a-Half Overtime Based on Union Rate

This formula multiplies the union rate of a specified column in the F069126 by 1.5 to
determine the new hourly rate for overtime.
OHRF_UnionRateA, OHRF_UnionRateB, OHRF_Union RateC, OHRF_UnionRateD,
or OHRF_UnionRateR should be substituted for OHRF_UnionRateX in the formula. A,
B, C, D, and R each specify particular columns in the F069126 from which to retrieve
the rate. You can use this formula in an overtime accumulator rule within an overtime
rule set.
New Hourly Rate = 1.5 x OHRF_UnionRateX
7.3.1.5 Regular Portion of Overtime Based on Employee Master Rate, and Premium
Portion of Overtime Based on Average Hourly Rate
This formula uses the employee's rate, as specified in the F060116 table, to derive the
regular portion of overtime. The system then multiplies the average hourly rate from
the timecards by .5 to determine the premium portion and adds the two rates together
to determine the new hourly rate for overtime. You can use this formula in an
overtime accumulator rule within an overtime rule set.
New Hourly Rate = OHRF_EmployeeMasterRate + (0.5 x OHRF_
WeightedAverageHourlyRate)
7.3.1.6 Spread Employee's Salary

This function does not calculate an overtime rate; rather, it calculates a new hourly rate
for salaried employees by spreading an employee's salary over all of the hours
worked.
Spread Employee's Salary is a predefined function that is available for use in the
custom rule set rule within an overtime rule set.
7.3.1.7 Overtime Rate Based on Timecard Rate and Pay Rate Multiplier
This function calculates the overtime rate by retrieving the hourly rate from the
original timecard and multiplying it by the pay rate multiplier that is specified on the
timecard. This method is typically used for employees in the United States who
receive tips. You can use this formula in an overtime accumulator rule within an
overtime rule set.
New Hourly Rate = OHRF_PayRateMultiplier x OHRF_TimecardRate
7.3.1.8 Testing Formulas

After you create a formula and before you process the timecard template, overtime
rule set, or retroactive pay rule to which it is attached, test the formula to verify that it
is mathematically valid and accurate. The system includes a feature that you can use to
automatically validate the formula. However, you need to confirm whether the

calculations produce the results that you expect. For example, for a formula that
averages two union pay rates, you should verify that it calculates the correct rate.
Using the formula testing functionality, you can automatically calculate the formula
for one record at a time. You can then review the results to determine whether they are
correct.
You can also test the formula by submitting the timecard template, retroactive pay
rule, or overtime rule set for processing, and then reviewing the new timecards to
ensure that they are correct. If the timecards are incorrect, you can cancel the batch.
7.3.2 Prerequisite
Create a timecard template, retroactive pay rule, or overtime rule set.
7.3.3 Forms Used to Create and Test Formulas

Work With Timecard W186301B Periodic Processing Select the timecard template
Templates (G18620), Timecard to which you want to add a
Templates formula.
Work With Retroactive W186701A Periodic Processing Select the retroactive pay
Pay Rules (G18620), Retroactive Pay rule to which you want to
add a formula.
Work With Rule Sets W186401A Periodic Processing Select the rule set to which
(G18620), Overtime you want to add a formula.
Build Formula W186101D On Work With Timecard Create a formula.
Templates, select a record in
the detail area, click Select,
and then search for the
Hours Worked field (Main
tab) or the Hourly Rate field
(Rates tab) on the Timecard
Template form.
On Work With Retroactive
Pay Rules, select a record in
the detail area, click Select,
and then search for the New
Hourly Rate field on the
Retroactive Pay Rule form.
On Work With Rule Sets,
select a record in the detail
area, click Select, and then
select Add Accum Rule
from the Form menu on the
Rule Set form. In the
Overrides area, select the
New Hourly Rate option to
turn activate it, and then
perform a search in the New
Hourly Rate field.


Formula Tester W186101E Select Test from the form Test a formula for a
menu on the Build Formula timecard template.
form.
Test a formula for a
retroactive pay rule.
Test a formula for an
overtime rule set.
7.3.4 Creating a Formula

Access the Build Formula form.
Figure 7–1 Build Formula form
To create a formula:
1. Select a record in the detail area, and then click the Insert Function button.
The system displays the function in the Rate Formula field.
2. Enter the appropriate characters in the Rate Formula field.
3. Select Validate from the Form menu.
If the formula is mathematically valid, the system displays a confirmation
message. If the formula is not mathematically valid, the system highlights the
Formula To Test area in red.
4. Revise the formula if it is not valid, and repeat step 3.
5. Click OK when the confirmation window appears.
6. Select Test from the Form menu to test the formula and ensure that the system
creates accurate timecards.
7. Complete the steps for testing a formula.
7.3.5 Testing a Formula for a Timecard Template

Access the Formula Tester form.

Figure 7–2 Formula Tester form
Employee Number
Enter the employee number that you want to use to test the formula.
Timecard Template Name

Enter a user-defined name for a timecard template.
Validate Formula
Select to verify that the syntax of the formula is mathematically valid. If it is not
mathematically valid, the system changes the Formula To Test area to a contrasting
color.
Calculate Formula
Select to calculate the formula and display the results in the Output hourly rate box.
7.3.6 Testing a Formula for a Retroactive Pay Rule

Timecard Transaction No (timecard transaction number)

A number that the system assigns to each timecard to uniquely identify it. You can use
this field in the Time Entry By Job program to retrieve a specific timecard for display.
This field is also used to associate a timecard with each actual burden audit record that
was created for the timecard during the Actual Burden Journaling process. If you do
not know the transaction number, you can use the search button to select a timecard
with which to test the formula.
Current
Indicates whether an entry in the Timecard Tag file refers to a current timecard or a
historical timecard. Select this option to test a formula using a timecard from F06116.
History
Indicates whether an entry in the Timecard Tag file refers to a current timecard or a
historical timecard. Select this option to test a formula using a timecard F0618.

Validate Formula
Select to verify that the syntax of the formula is mathematically valid. If it is not
mathematically valid, the system changes the Formula To Test area to a contrasting
color.
Calculate Formula
Select to calculate the formula and display the results in the output hourly rate box.
7.3.7 Testing a Formula for an Overtime Rule Set



8
Working with Timecards for Timecard
8
Automation

■ Section 8.1, "Understanding Timecard Automation Timecards"
■ Section 8.2, "Reviewing and Revising Timecards Created by Timecard
Automation"
■ Section 8.3, "Working with Timecard Batches"
■ Section 8.4, "Viewing the Timecard Batch File Audit History"
8.1 Understanding Timecard Automation Timecards

You can use the Reviewing and Approving program (P186601) to manage batches of
timecards that are created or changed by the Timecard Templates program (P186301),
the Retroactive Pay Rules program (P186701), or the Overtime Rules program
(P186401). For example, after you use a timecard template to create a batch of
timecards with which to pay the sales staff, you can review the batch of timecards to
ensure that they are accurate. When you are satisfied, you can approve the batch of
timecards and continue with pre-payroll processing.
After you submit a timecard template, overtime rule set, or retroactive pay rule for
processing, the system assigns a number and an initial status of Pending Approval to
the resulting batch of timecards. As long as the batch of timecards is pending
approval, you can review and revise it in the Reviewing and Approving program.
When you finish working with the batch of timecards, you can change its status by
either approving or canceling the batch.
For example, before you pay the sales staff, you review the accuracy of the batch of
timecards that was created using a timecard template. After reviewing the batch, you
realize that it does not cover the correct dates. You cancel the batch, thereby deleting
the timecards. You then return to the Timecard Templates program, update the
timecard template, and resubmit the batch. You then note that the batch of timecards is
acceptable, at which point you approve it and continue with pre-payroll processing.
The processes for reviewing, approving, and canceling timecards are the same
regardless of the program from which a batch of timecards originated. For example,
you can approve a batch of timecards that was created with an overtime rule set to pay
overtime to the warehouse staff. You can use the same process to approve a batch of
timecards that was created with a timecard template to pay consultants a bonus.
You can review new or changed timecards that are pending approval. The system
determines how you can review batches of timecards in the Reviewing and Approving
Working with Timecards for Timecard Automation 8-1

Reviewing and Revising Timecards Created by Timecard Automation
program based on the program in which the timecards originated. However, when
you access batches of timecards directly through the Timecard Templates program, the
Retroactive Pay Rules program, or the Overtime Rules program, the system displays
only those batches that originated in the particular program.
As long as a batch of timecards is pending approval, you can revise individual
timecards by selecting the batch of timecards and the appropriate timecard. You can
revise the status of batches of timecards by approving or canceling those that are
pending approval. You can also run reports that display the timecards in a specific
batch.
8.1.1 Prerequisite
Create timecards using the timecard automation process.
See Setting Up Timecard AutomationSetting Up Functions and Formulas for Timecard
Automation.
See Also:
■ Entering Timecards for Employees.
8.2 Reviewing and Revising Timecards Created by Timecard Automation

This section provides an overview of timecard review and revision and discusses the
forms used to review and revise timecards that are created by timecard automation.
8.2.1 Understanding Timecard Review and Revision

When a batch of timecards is pending approval, you can use the Reviewing and
Approving program (P186601) to review, approve, or cancel the batch. Within the
Timecard Automation module, when timecards are created in F06116, they are marked
as pending. You cannot process pending timecards in a payroll cycle.
When you approve a batch of timecards, the system removes the pending marker,
which enables the timecards to be included in a payroll cycle. When you cancel a batch
of timecards, the system removes the timecards that were created by the Timecard
Automation module from the F06116 table and returns to their original state any
timecards that were changed. For example, when you use a timecard template to pay
quarterly bonuses to the consulting staff, you might want to verify the accuracy of the
timecards. You must approve the batch before you can process the timecards in a
payroll cycle.
The Timecard Templates program (P186301), the Retroactive Pay Rules program
(P186701), and the Overtime Rules program (P186401) each manage timecards
differently. The view that you use to review batches of timecards might differ
depending on which process created the timecards. Timecard templates create new
timecards, retroactive pay rules create new timecards based on existing timecards, and
overtime rule sets can create new timecards and change existing timecards.
A view is the manner in which the Reviewing and Approving Timecards program
displays the header information, relationships between timecards, and information
that is specific to the originating program for a batch of timecards. A relationship
shows the connections between originating timecards and new or changed timecards.
The views that are available for each program include:
■ Timecard Templates: Basic.
■ Retroactive Pay Rules: Before, After, Both.

Reviewing and Revising Timecards Created by Timecard Automation
■ Overtime Rule Sets: Before, After.

The Timecard Templates program uses a timecard template to create new timecards.
You can review new timecards using a basic view. The term basic refers to the batch of
timecards that the system creates. No relationships exist among these timecards.
The Retroactive Pay Rules program uses a retroactive pay rule and original timecards
to create new timecards. You can review original and new timecards using before,
after, or both views:
View Description
Before The batch of original timecards that the system uses. These timecards provide
information for creating timecards. No relationship exists among these timecards.
After The batch of new timecards that the system creates. These timecards are based on
the original timecards that are displayed in the Before view. No original
timecards are displayed, and all timecards displayed are new.
Both The batch of timecards, including original timecards and timecards that the
system creates. These timecards include the original timecards that are displayed
in the Before view, and on which they are based. Original timecards are displayed
in bold text; new timecards are displayed in plain text.
The Overtime Rule Sets program uses an overtime rule set and original timecards to
create new timecards and change the original timecards. You can review new and
changed timecards in Before or After view:
View Description
Before The batch of original and unchanged timecards that the system uses. These
timecards provide information for creating or changing other timecards. No
relationships exist among these timecards.
After The batch of new and changed timecards that the system creates or changes.
These timecards are based on the original timecards that are displayed in the
Before view. Original timecards are displayed in bold text; new timecards are
displayed in plain text.
8.2.1.1 Revising Timecards Created by Timecard Automation

The Reviewing and Approving Timecards program (P186601) enables you to access
the Speed Time Entry program (P051121) to revise batches of timecards. You can revise
timecards from the Reviewing and Approving Timecards program only after the
system processes the batch of timecards and before you approve or cancel it. For
example, after you review a batch of timecards and discover that it uses an incorrect
value for paying overtime to employees in the warehouse, you can revise the batch of
timecards. You can revise timecards by employee or by batch number. You can also
revise the status of a batch of timecards.
You can revise current timecards that were created or changed for an employee
regardless of batch number. For example, assume that you pay a quarterly bonus to
employees who meet certain criteria on a project, such as being employed in the
quarters before and after the current quarter. After reviewing the batch of timecards,
you discover that one employee was not employed during the preceding quarter. The
system enables you to remove the employee instead of reprocessing the entire batch.
You can revise new timecards that are created in a specific batch of timecards. For
example, assume that the organization has a division that contains several
departments. If some of the employees in a department entered their time incorrectly
on their timecards, you can correct the specific timecards that require changes instead

Working with Timecard Batches
of canceling the entire batch. However, when you review batches of timecards that
were created by the Overtime Rules Sets program, the system displays only newly
created timecards. Changed timecards are part of an original batch and are not
included when you review timecards by batch. To change original timecards, you can
review the timecards by employee. Doing so shows you all of the current timecards for
each employee, regardless of batch number.
Note: You cannot revise historical timecards.
This table describes the batch approval statuses:
Status Description
Pending Approval Batches of timecards arrive in the Reviewing and Approving Timecards
program that are marked Pending Approval. Pending timecards cannot be
included in a payroll cycle. You can revise and approve, or cancel batches of
timecards or individual timecards.
Approved After you approve a batch of timecards, the system changes the status to
Approved and removes the Pending status from F06116. When you approve a
batch of timecards, the system marks as approved all changes that were made
after the timecards were generated, such as changed timecards and any new
timecards that have been created. After changing the status to Approved, the
system creates an Approval or Cancellation report and enables you to continue
the pre-payroll process. As long as a batch of timecards is approved or canceled,
you can delete the header record for the batch.
Canceled When you cancel a batch of timecards, you reject the changes that were made to
existing timecards and you reject the new timecards that were created. The
system removes newly created timecards from F06116 and restores changed
timecards to their original status. After changing the status of the batch to
Canceled, the system creates an Approval or Cancellation report and, as
appropriate, reverses the changes and deletes the new timecards. As long as a
batch of timecards is approved or canceled, you can delete the header record for
the batch.
8.2.2 Forms Used to Review and Revise Timecards Created by Timecard Automation

Work With Timecard W186601A Daily Processing (G18610), Select a batch of timecards
Automation Batches Reviewing and Approving for review or revision.
Select the template, rule, or
rule set to review after
submitting a timecard
template, retropay rule, or
overtime rule set for
processing.
Timecard Automation W186601B Select the batch of timecards Review or revise timecards
Batch with which you want to created by timecard
work, and then click Select automation.
on Work With Timecard
Automation Batches.
8.3 Working with Timecard Batches

This section provides an overview of timecard batches and lists the forms used to
revise the status of a batch of timecards.

Working with Timecard Batches
8.3.1 Understanding Timecard Batches

When you review the timecards that the system created from a timecard template, a
retroactive pay rule, or an overtime rule set, you might need to correct errors before
you approve the batch. You can access the Speed Time Entry program (P051121) from
the Timecard Automation module to revise batches of timecards or individual
timecards. You can revise timecards for only those batches that have not been
approved or canceled. You cannot revise historical timecards.
8.3.1.1 Revising the Status of a Batch of Timecards

After reviewing the batch of timecards and before continuing with pre-payroll
processing, you can approve the batch to accept the changes and newly created
timecards, or you can cancel the batch of timecards if it is incorrect, thereby rejecting
the changes and the newly created timecards.
After you change the status of the batch of timecards to Approved or Canceled, you
can no longer revise it or change its status.
You cannot delete the header record from the Reviewing and Approving Timecards
program for a batch of timecards pending approval. You can, however, delete the
header record for a batch of timecards after you have approved or canceled it.
8.3.1.2 The Labor Rules Batch Approval/Cancellation Report

When you approve or cancel a batch of timecards, the system generates the Labor
Rules Batch Approval/Cancellation report (R186602). Use this report to review
detailed information about the timecards in the batch. The report includes:
■ Header information, such as batch number, employee group name, start date, and
end date.
■ Individual timecard information, such as transaction number, batch number,
address name and number of each employee, PDBA code, work date, hours
worked, hourly rate, and gross pay.
8.3.2 Forms Used to Work with Timecard Batches

Work With Timecard W186601A Daily Processing (G18610), Select a batch of timecards
Automation Batches Reviewing and Approving for review or revision.
Select the template, rule, or
rule set to review after
submitting a timecard
template, retropay rule, or
overtime rule set for
processing.
Timecard Automation W186601B Select the batch of timecards Review or revise timecards
Batch with which you want to created by timecard
work, and then click Select automation.
on Work With Timecard
Automation Batches.

Viewing the Timecard Batch File Audit History

Confirmation W186601E Select the batch that you Approve or cancel a batch of
want to approve, and then timecards.
select Approve Batch from
the Form menu on Timecard
Automation Batch.
Select the batch that you
want to cancel, and then
select Cancel Batch from the
Form menu on Timecard
Automation Batch.
8.4 Viewing the Timecard Batch File Audit History

This section provides an overview of timecard batch file audit history and discusses
how to view a timecard batch file audit history.
8.4.1 Understanding Timecard Batch File Audit History

You use the Timecard Audit Details program (P05116Z2) to view the detailed history
information of the timecard batch files. The Timecard Audit Details program displays
the audit history records for each timecard selected in the sequential order. The
timecards that were last saved are displayed first. You can search for the timecards
based on employee number.
8.4.2 Form Used to View the Timecard Batch File Audit History

Timecard Audit W05116Z2A Time Entry (G05BT1), Review a timecard batch file
Details Timecard Audit Details audit history.
8.4.3 Viewing a Timecard Batch File Audit History

Access the Timecard Audit Details form.

Figure 8–1 Timecard Audit Details form
Employee Number
Enter the employee number of the employee for whom you want to view the timecard
audit details.
Pay Period Ending Date

Enter the last day of the pay period, as defined in the master pay cycles.
Labor Period Ending Date

Enter the last day of the labor distribution period.
TC Corrections Indicator (timecard corrections indicator)

Review the correction status of the timecard history records. Values are:
Blank: The timecard or historical timecard has not been corrected.
1: The timecard has been corrected.
2: The historical timecard has been corrected.
Timecard Trans Link (timecard transaction link)

Review the transaction number of the corresponding timecard in the F06116Z1, F06116,
or F0618 table.
EDI Trans Number (Electronic Data Interchange transaction number)

Review the number that an EDI transmitter assigns to a transaction.


9
Setting Up Global Leave Administration
9

■ Section 9.1, "Understanding Global Leave Administration Setup"
■ Section 9.2, "Setting Up Global Leave System Controls"
■ Section 9.3, "Setting Up Leave Types for Global Leave"
■ Section 9.4, "Setting Up Leave Verification Rules"
■ Section 9.6, "Setting Up the Leave Transactions Table"
■ Section 9.7, "Associating Pay Types with Activity Types"
■ Section 9.8, "Assigning Schedules to Employee Groups"
9.1 Understanding Global Leave Administration Setup

This section discusses:
■ System features
■ Employee schedules
9.1.1 System Features

Most organizations need to track the amount of time that employees are on leave.
Although various payroll software products can track basic accrual balances and
timecard history, many organizations need additional planning and tracking tools that
track more detail and enable managers to evaluate and act upon trends. Global leave
administration offers robust time reporting and payroll features that establish leave
eligibility, accruals, and balance tracking. Global leave administration enables you to
immediately validate leave availability during the time entry process. The system also
provides an automated workflow feature that enhances the management approval
process.
Global leave administration enables you to track medical and maternity leave (known
as Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA) for U.S. employers). The system tracks
advanced information that is necessary for medical leave approval. After medical
leave begins, the system continues to track the progress of each approved leave and to
gather additional information that is necessary to meet company and governmental
requirements.
Global leave administration includes Employee Self-Service and Manager Self-Service
features. You can use Employee Self-Service to:
■ View leave balances.
Setting Up Global Leave Administration 9-1

Understanding Global Leave Administration Setup
■ Request leave time.

■ Cancel or modify existing requests.
■ Submit FMLA requests and information for U.S. employees.
You can use the Manager Self-Service features to:
■ View leave requests and available balances.
■ Approve, modify, and reject leave requests.
■ View scheduled leave in the Work Order Employee Scheduling module.
The setup process for global leave administration includes entering appropriate
system settings to:
■ Enable features of the global leave administration programs.
■ Define medical leave policy.
■ Specify leave types.
■ Build the F07620 table.
■ Specify leave verification rules (P07602).
To support global leave administration and self-service leave planning, you may want
to populate your F07620 (leave transactions) table from historical timecards. You use
the Leave Transaction Update program (R0707620) to identify historical leave
timecards and populate the F07620.
After you complete these setup procedures and set the appropriate processing options
for the interactive programs, employees and mangers can enter leave requests, track
medical leave information, and review other leave-related information.
9.1.2 Employee Schedules

Begin setting up employee schedules by analyzing the calendars that exist in your
organization. Within the context of employee scheduling, you need to consider three
levels of planning information:
■ Activities
■ Calendars
■ Schedules
Items that you enter into a calendar for Human Capital Management (HCM) are
activities. Activities functionally parallel pay types. You need to set up activity types in
a user-defined code (UDC) table.
Employee scheduling uses three types of calendars:
■ Individual
■ Template (work patterns)
■ Holiday
Individual calendars might include such activities as individual work patterns that
involve multiple pay types and planned leave time. To avoid duplicating terms, use a
template rather than a work schedule to represent the repetitive blocks of time that an
employee normally works. Examples of templates include:
■ Part time.
■ Casual (day labor, contract).

Understanding Global Leave Administration Setup
■ Full time.
■ Weekend days.
■ Night shift.
Many organizations need to create multiple holiday calendars. Depending on
company rules about employee holidays, some groups of employees might receive
different holiday time off than others. For example, full-time employees might receive
a set of nationally recognized holidays as paid time off, while part-time employees
might receive the same holidays off but without pay. Another example is full-time
employees receive a set of paid holidays, but a union contract specifies a slightly
different set of paid holidays.
Because various holiday calendars can conflict, and conflicting holiday activity types
can exist, this hierarchy of calendars applies:
1. Union
2. Business unit
3. State
4. Company
When a conflict exists between a union calendar and any other assigned calendar, the
union calendar takes precedence. For example, if a company calendar specifies the
same time off for a particular employee's holiday, the system uses the union calendar.
Schedules include one or more calendars. For example, an employee schedule might
include individual, template and holiday calendars. In some instances, where
overlapping holiday calendars exist, an employee schedule might include four or more
calendars. Not only can different holiday calendars include conflicting days off, they
can also include different activity types that track to different pay rates.
When you have analyzed the calendars that exist in your organization, you are ready
to create activity types in a UDC table. You access the User Defined Codes Program
(P0004A) from a menu in the Associate Pay Types with Activity Types program
(P073111). When you have completed the activity types, you need to link them to
existing pay types. When the linking activity is complete, you are ready to set up
calendars. After defining calendars, you can create employee schedules by linking
calendars to employee groups.
9.1.2.1 Setting Up Activity Types for Employee Schedules

To set up employee schedules, you must use activity types. For employee schedule
templates, activity types functionally parallel pay types. Each activity that you enter
on a schedule must use an activity type. After creating activity types, you then link
them to corresponding pay types. Because of this link, your organization can leverage
schedule information to generate timecards. Although you can set up employee
schedule templates using only the activity types that are included in your software,
you might want to customize the existing data and enter additional activity types that
match the pay types that you already have in place. To enter or edit activity types, you
access the User Defined Codes program (P0004A) from a menu in the Associate Pay
Types with Activity Types program (P073111) and enter information in UDC 01/AC.
After you set up activity types, you need to link the activity types to the corresponding
pay types. To perform this linking function, use the Associate Pay Types with Activity
Types program.
You can automate linking pay types and activity types by displaying all of the pay
types in P073111 and then choosing Create Associations for All Pay Types from the

Setting Up Global Leave System Controls
menu. When you perform this function, the system reviews all of the pay types in the
F069116 table, creates an activity type for each, and links them. The system saves the
linked information in the F073111 table.
9.1.2.2 Setting Up Working Schedule Codes for Employee Schedules

When you use the Manage Employees Schedules program (P07311) and need to work
with employee calendars, you use one of several menu options to access the Search For
Calendar program (P01311). When you work with employee scheduling, you need to
select Work Schedule in the Calendar Type and Identifier Type fields. You also need to
select an appropriate Identifier code that identifies a schedule template. You need to
create an identifier code for each schedule template in UDC 01/WS.
9.1.2.3 Assigning Schedules to Employee Groups

Your organization can leverage features from the Employee Groups program
(P0186201) to assign schedules to employee groups. You use the Manage Schedules for
Employee Groups program (P07315) to link existing schedule templates to employee
groups. You can display employee groups and assign schedules to one at a time or you
can automatically assign a template schedule by selecting groups and then selecting
Assign Schedules to all Groups.
See Also:
■ "Using Foundation Calendar" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Address Book Implementation Guide.
9.2 Setting Up Global Leave System Controls

This section provides an overview of global leave system controls and discusses how
to set up global leave system controls.
9.2.1 Understanding Global Leave System Controls

You use the Leave Administration Setup program (P07600) to specify company
constants settings that are associated with leave processing and define the basic
parameters for the medical leave policy and leave by Family and Medical Leave Act
(FMLA) leave policy of the organization. This table describes the features:
Feature Description
Automatic creation of timecards for leave When you select automatic timecard creation, the system
requests generates a timecard for the leave period each time that an
employee leave request is approved by a manager.
Resource scheduling When you select resource scheduling, the system copies
approved leave requests into tables that are used by the
Resource Assignments module, which is part of the
EnterpriseOne Enterprise Asset Management system. You
can then use information that is associated with employee
leave to plan and schedule company resources.
Medical leave tracking When you select medical leave tracking, the system tracks
time entry and leave information that is required to comply
with the FMLA.
ESS FMLA Substitution (Release 9.1 Update) When you select this option, the
system enables you to substitute the employee FMLA with
other categories of leaves within the Employee Self-Service
Leave Planning And Request program (P07620).

If different companies within the organization have different leave policies, you can set
up company-specific information for leave system controls. Alternatively, you can
create a default set of leave system controls for Company 00000 that the system uses
for all of the companies within the organization. At a minimum, you must set up leave
system controls for Company 00000. You can then set up company-specific controls.
The system uses the leave system controls that you set up for Company 00000 to
process leave information for any company that does not have specific controls. Leave
administration setup information is stored in F07600.
When verifying leave balances for sick and vacation leave requests, the system
calculates the available balance using calendar, fiscal, or anniversary year, depending
on the sick and vacation leave policy of the organization.
If the leave policy is based upon a calendar year, the system uses information from the
F06146 table to calculate the number of leave hours that the employee has
accumulated. The system subtracts the amount of leave time taken from the amount of
leave time accumulated to determine the available leave balance.
If the leave policy is based upon a fiscal, anniversary, or other noncalendar year, the
system uses information from the F06147 table to calculate the number of leave hours
that the employee has accumulated. The system subtracts the amount of leave time
taken from the amount of leave time accumulated to determine the available leave
balance.
(Release 9.1 Update) When it verifies leave balances for medical or FMLA leave
requests, the system calculates the amount of medical leave time or FMLA leave time
that the employee has taken during the specified medical-leave time period using
information from the F06146 table. The system then subtracts the amount of medical or
FMLA leave that was taken from the value that you enter on the Leave Administration
Setup form.
Note: For a pay type to be considered a medical leave pay type, and
to include the time that is associated with that pay type in the
calculation for determining available medical leave balances, you
must set up the pay type for medical tracking using the Leave Type
Setup program (P07601).
9.2.2 Forms Used to Set Up Global Leave System Controls

Work With Leave W07600A Leave Administration Setup Access the Leave
Administration Setup (G07GLVA1), Leave Administration Setup form.
Administration Setup
Leave Administration W07600B Click Add on the Work With Set up global leave system
Setup Leave Administration Setup controls.
form.
9.2.3 Setting Up Global Leave System Controls

Access the Leave Administration Setup form.

Figure 9–1 Leave Administration Setup form
Available Balances
Enter a code that controls how the system responds when an employee enters a
request for leave or leave taken. If you enter any value other than 0 (zero), employees
can take only available leave. This value is in effect for all pay types that are set up to
use leave tracking. This information is stored in the F069116 table. Values are:
0: Do not verify available leave balances.
1: Verify available leave balances.
A hard error results if insufficient balances exist.
A warning message results if insufficient balances exist.
Employees can use available plus accrued balances. A hard error results if insufficient
balances exist.
Employees can use available plus accrued balances. A warning results if insufficient
balances exist.
Timecard Creation
Enter a code that specifies whether leave administration creates timecards for
approved leave requests. The system can automatically create timecards in either the
F06116Z1 or the F06116 table. The system uses the F06116Z1 table to upload timecards
into the systems' live time entry table. You would typically use this table with
employee self-service time entry programs. Values are:
0 or Blank: Do not automatically create timecards when leave requests are approved.
1: Automatically create timecards in the F06116Z1 table.
2: Automatically create timecards in the F06116 table.

Resource Scheduling
Enter a code that determines whether resource scheduling software is enabled. If
resource scheduling software is enabled, this value also controls whether approved
leave requests are copied into the resource scheduling module. Values are:
0: Resource scheduling is not active; do not update leave request information.
1: Resource scheduling is active; update leave request information.
Leave Validation Location

Enter a code that determines the table where the system verifies available leave
balances. Values are:
0: F06146 table.
1: F06147 table.
Medical Leave
Enter a code that the system uses to enable or disable medical leave software (FMLA
or an international equivalent). Enabling medical leave enables the human resources
department to use additional programs to track detailed information about employee
medical leave requests. If you do not enable this feature, employees can still enter
medical leave requests and managers can still review, approve, or decline those
requests. However, without the Medical Leave feature, company personnel will not
have access to these additional tracking programs. Values are:
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
Minimum Hours
Enter the number of hours an employee must work in a year before he or she is eligible
for medical leave.
FMLA Annual Limit (family medical leave act annual limit)

Indicates standard number of hours that are available for an employee to take as
FMLA leave within a one-year period, based on 2080 hours. Employees working less
than 2080 hours per year are allowed a portion of these hours.
ESS FMLA Substitution (employee self-service family medical leave act substitution)
(Release 9.1 Update) Enter a code that determines whether employees can use accrued
vacation and sick pay when taking medical (FMLA) leave. Values are:
0: Employees cannot use vacation and sick balance for FMLA.
1: Employees can use vacation and sick balances for FMLA.
Medical Leave Months

Indicates the number of months after initial employment that an employee must work
before he or she is eligible for medical leave. You should contact the Federal and State
department offices that are responsible for labor regulations to verify that the
information that you enter in this field is accurate.
Substitution Accrual Type

(Release 9.1 Update) Enter a value from UDC table 06/SV that identifies the accrual
type associated to the other substitution that you can specify in the FMLA Leave
Substitution Rules (P07603) program.

Setting Up Leave Types for Global Leave
Calendar Year,Defined Date Range, and 12 Month Revolving

Enter a code that specifies a date range for checking FMLA eligibility. You can base the
date on a calendar year, a fixed and defined date range, or a 12-month period before or
after leave begins as the 12-month period. Values are:
0: Calendar year (January 1 through December 31).
1: Fixed date range (defined by user).
2: 12-month revolving range (the previous 12- month period from the leave begin
date).
3: 12-month period forward from date of initial FMLA leave request date. If 12 months
passes between FMLA leave dates, the first day of the new request becomes the initial
leave date.
Defined Begin Date

Indicates the beginning date of leave time.
Defined End Date

Indicates the ending date of leave time.
9.3 Setting Up Leave Types for Global Leave

This section provides an overview of leave types and discusses how to set up leave
types.
9.3.1 Understanding Leave Types

You use the Leave Type Setup program (P07601) to define leave types. The system
stores setup information about leave types in the F07601 table. When you set up leave
types, you can:
■ Use existing leave types and define additional leave types.
■ Define the relationship of a leave type to a pay type.
■ Define medical leave types.
You can use any of the existing leave types that are included in UDC 07/LV and add
additional leave types to this table to meet the needs of the organization. When you
specify that a leave type is active, the system automatically displays the leave type for
the employee when they enter leave requests in the Employee Self-Service Leave
Planning And Request program (P07620).
You can also use this program to set up medical leave types. To ensure that the system
accurately calculates medical leave balances and processes medical leave requests, you
must set up all medical leave pay types for medical tracking. The system only
considers history for medical leave pay types that have been set up to track history.
Therefore, if an employee takes medical leave and uses a pay type that is not set up to
track medical leave, the system does not use the hours that the employee takes to
calculate the amount of medical leave time that is available to the employee.
See Administering Global Leave.

9.3.2 Forms Used to Set Up Leave Types

Work With Leave W07601A Leave Administration Setup Review leave type
Type Setup (G07GLVA1), Leave Type information.
Setup
Leave Type Setup W07601B Click Add on the Work With Set up leave types.
Revisions Leave Type Setup form.
9.3.3 Setting Up Leave Types

Access the Leave Type Setup Revisions form.
Figure 9–2 Leave Type Setup Revisions form
Figure 9–3 Leave Type Setup Revisions Form - Standard Leave Type

Figure 9–4 Leave Type Setup Revisions form - Substitute Leave Type
Leave Type
Enter a UDC from 07/LV that describes the leave time that an employee takes or
requests. You can use this information to report leave trends. Values might include:
C: Comp Time
S: Sick Time
M: Maternity Leave Time
F: FMLA
Active Leave
Select this option to specify a leave type as active. If the leave type is active, the system
enables the user to request this particular leave type through Employee Self-Service
Leave Planning and Request (P07620).
Benefit/Accrual Type
Enter a UDC from 06/SV that describes the leave time that an employee takes or
O: Comp time
S: Sick accruals
V: Vacation accruals
Medical Leave Type

Select this option to enable medical leave tracking (FMLA or an international
equivalent) for a specific leave type. If medical leave tracking is enabled, the system
activates additional information tracking when an employee requests leave time. The
system stores the medical leave tracking value (data item FMMB) in the F07600 table.
Primary Pay Type

Enter the main pay type with which a leave type is associated. When an employee
requests time off for a leave type, this pay type is recorded in F06116. Alternatively,
this pay type is recorded in F06116Z1 if the client automatically creates timecards.

Setting Up Leave Verification Rules
Secondary Pay Type

Enter the secondary pay type with which a leave type is associated. The secondary pay
type is an alternative value to which you can change a leave type without causing an
error. This field is reserved for future use, and is currently not functional.
Third Pay Type

Enter the third pay type to which a leave type is associated. This pay type is an
alternative value to which you can change a leave type without causing an error. This
field is reserved for future use, and is currently not functional.
9.4 Setting Up Leave Verification Rules

This section provides an overview of leave verification rules and discusses how to set
up a leave verification rule.
9.4.1 Understanding Leave Verification Rules

You define a set of rules as a leave validation set that the system uses as a processing
option to all programs that create leave time, such as the time entry programs and
global leave. When you create a leave set, you use employee groups to define the
individuals to whom the system applies the rule in each rule group. You use timecard
automation to create employee groups. For leave balance validation, you can assign an
error or warning for the user if balances are insufficient in the associated accrual. This
setting uses UDC table 07/L2.
The global leave administration module uses leave verification rules that you create
with the Leave Verification Rules program (P07602). Use this program to set up rules
about the usage of employee accrual balances. You can define whether employees are
allowed to create a negative paid time off balance and how they can take leave time.
For example, you might want to define whether partial days or only full days are
allowed. The system saves leave verification rule information in the F07602 table.
Employees can specify that they want the organization to pay them in advance for
leave time that they are planning. Administrators can also search for timecards that
include the pay in advance designation. Administrators can specify types of leave that
are available to employees for payment in advance requests. To allow employees to
enter time in advance of actual time worked, you need to set the value for Allow
Request Leave Pay Advance to Y (yes). To display the pay in advance option for time
entry, you must also set a processing option for the Time Entry Self Service Director
program to show the request pay in advance time entry link.
See "Setting Up Self-Service Time Entry, " in theJD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Human Capital Management Self-Service Implementation Guide.
"Setting Up the Time Entry Director Form" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Human Capital Management Self-Service Implementation Guide
" Setting Processing Options for Time Entry Self Service Director (P051125)", in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Human Capital Management Self-Service
To create leave verification rules that work for payroll administrators and employee
self-service applications, you can set up rules in two levels:
■ Leave validation set
■ Employee groups
You can define whether employees can take partial days of leave. The rule also
indicates whether the system displays a warning or hard error if partial days are not

allowed. If partial days are not allowed, the system checks the employee standard
hours per day from the F060116 table to verify that the employee is not requesting or
taking less than the standard work hours.
Organizations can set up leave verification rules that the system processes within time
entry. Depending on the setting for the sick certificate rules code, employees can be
paid based on whether they submit a sick certificate. The system uses these data items
to allow users to specify certification rules:
■ Definitions for a sick event.
■ Sick event time period.
■ Number of past months the system uses to calculate sick events.
■ Definition of the number of hours that constitute a sick event.
When you create sick certificate rules, you must adhere to these rules:
■ Enter a value for Sick Certificate Rule Code (1 or 2) if you enter a value in any of
these sick certificate fields:
– Sick Event Definition (SEVD)
– Sick Event Time Period (SEPD)
– Sick Event Past Months (SEPM)
– Sick Event Hours Definition (SEHD)
– Sick Certificate Rules Code (SCKR)
– Sick Certificate Total Events (SCTD)
– Sick Certificate Consecutive Events (SCCX)
■ If you enter a value for Sick Certificate Rules Code, then the system requires a
value for either Sick Certificate Total Events (SCTD) or Sick Certificate
Consecutive Events (SCCX).
■ If you enter a value for Sick Event Definition of 1 or 2, then the system requires a
value for Sick Event Hours Definition (SEHD).
■ If you enter 3 (Rolling Months) for Sick Event Time Period, then the system
requires a value for Sick Event Past Months (SEPM).
A processing option for the Time Entry MBF program specifies the leave verification
set that the system uses as validation rules. This processing option is also associated
with global leave administration, manager self-service leave approval, manager
self-service time entry, and employee self-service time entry programs that display
warning or error messages when users are entering leave time.
You use the timecard automation Employee Groups program (P186201) to define sets
of employees for leave management that you attach to leave verification sets. By
defining an employee group as a leave group, the system can automatically build the
F186206 table. The system uses this table to determine the employee group for
verifying leave requests. You must refresh this table when you add new employees to
the F060116 table.
The time entry programs search the F186206 to determine the group to which the
employee belongs. If no value is found for an employee, the system displays a
warning message to alert the user that the employee is not set up in the F186206 table.
This table lists the UDCs that the system uses with leave verification rules:

UDC Name Description

07/VS Sick Event Definition The system uses these values to identify
sick events.
07/TP Sick Event Time Period The system uses these values to identify the
time period definition for sick events.
07/S3 Sick Certificate Validation The system uses these values to define a
sick certificate rule code (SCKR).
07/S4 Sick Certificate Required The system uses these values to specify
whether a sick certificate is required.
07/S5 Sick Certificate Received The system uses these values to specify
whether an employee has supplied a sick
certificate.
9.4.2 Forms Used to Set Up Leave Verification Rules

Work With Leave W07602A Leave Administration Setup Click Add to create a new
Verification Rules (G07GLVA1), Leave rule.
Verification Rules
Leave Verification W07602B Click OK after you complete Create a new leave
Rule Setup a new rule. verification rule and assign
an appropriate system
warning value.
9.4.3 Setting Up a Leave Verification Rule

Access the Leave Verification Rule Setup form.
Figure 9–5 Leave Verification Rule Setup form

Leave Verification Set

Enter a code that identifies a group of leave verification rules that are grouped
together for processing on any given application that validates leave time entry.
Employee Group Name

Leave Type
(Release 9.1 Update) Enter a value that describes the leave time that an employee takes
or requests. The system allows you to select only non-medical type of leave or
substituted medical leave types such as Substituted Sick, Substituted Vacation and
Substituted Other.
Available Balances
Select an option that controls how the system responds when an employee enters a
request for leave or leave taken. If you enter any editing option, employees can take
only available leave. This value is in effect for all pay types that are set up to use leave
tracking. The system stores this information in the F069116 table. Values are:
Do Not Perform Editing: Do not verify available leave balances.
Edit Available, Error: Verify available leave balances. The system displays a hard error
if insufficient balances exist.
Edit Available, Warning: Verify available leave balances. The system displays a
warning message if insufficient balances exist.
Edit Avail + Accrued, Error: Verify available leave balances. Employees can use
available balances plus accrued balances. The system displays a hard error if
insufficient balances exist.
Edit Avail + Accrued, Warning: Verify available leave balances. Employees can use
available balances plus accrued balances. The system displays a warning if insufficient
balances exist.
Partial Days Allowed

Select an option that controls how the system responds when an employee enters time
on a timecard that is not equal to the employee's standard work hours per day. Values
are:
Partial Days Allowed: Partial days are allowed.
Hard Error for Partial Day: Partial days are not allowed. The system displays a hard
error results when an employee enters a partial day.
Warning for Partial Day: Partial days are not allowed. The system displays a warning
when an employee enters a partial day.
Note: (Release 9.1 Update) The system does not allow you to enter a
value in this field if you have selected leave types as FMLA sick,
vacation, or other.
Allow Leave Request Pay In Advance

Specify whether a particular leave type may be requested to be paid in advance
through Employee Self Service Time Entry or Employee Leave Request. If you select
this option, the system allows payment in advance.
(Release 9.1 Update) The system does not allow you to enter a value in this field if you
have selected leave types as FMLA Sick, Vacation, or Other.

Sick Certificate Rule Code

Enter a code (UDC 07/S3) that specifies how timecards that exceed sick certification
rules are validated and processed within the payroll system. Values are:
Blank: No sick certificate rules validation.
1: Process sick certificate rules validation.
If rules state that sick certificate requirements are met, mark timecard as requiring sick
certificate and pay timecards in payroll regardless of whether sick certificate has been
received.
2: Process sick certificate rules validation.
If rules state that sick certificate requirements are met, mark timecard as requiring sick
certificate and do not pay until timecard is updated that the sick certificate has been
received.
value in this field if you have selected leave types as FMLA Sick,
Vacation, or Other.
Sick Event Definition

Enter a code (UDC 07/VS) that defines a sick event for a given sick certificate rule.
Values are:
Blank: Any occurrence of leave time on a given day constitutes a sick event.
1: Any occurrence of leave time on a given day greater than or equal to X hours
constitutes a leave event.
Note: X is the number of hours set up in the data item Sick Event
Hours Definition (SEHD).
2: An aggregate number of hours constitutes a sick event.

To get a whole number representative of leave events, divide total hours of all sick
time by X hours.
Note: X is the number of hours set up in the SEHD data item.
3: An amount of hours greater than or equal to the employee's standard hours per day
constitutes a sick event.
4: An aggregate amount of hours equal to an employee's standard hours per day
constitutes a sick event.
To get a whole number representative of leave events, divide the total hours of all sick
time by the standard hours.
value in this field if you have selected leave types as FMLA Sick,
Vacation, or Other.

Setting Up FMLA Leave Substitution Rules (Release 9.1 Update)
Sick Event Hours Definition

Enter a numeric value that the system uses to define Sick Event Codes (SEVD) 1 and 2.
Values are:
Rule Code 1: Any occurrence of X number of hours in a day constitutes a sick event.
Rule Code 2: Every accumulation of sick leave time equal to X hours constitutes a
single leave event.
The system does not allow you to enter a value in this field if you have selected leave
types as FMLA Sick, Vacation, or Other.
Sick Event Time Period

Enter a code (UDC 07/TP) that defines a sick event for a given sick certificate rule.
Values are:
Blank: The current calendar year.
1: The current anniversary year.
2: The current fiscal year.
3: A number of rolling months.
Sick Event Past Months

Enter a numeric value that indicates the number of past months the system uses to
determine the number of sick events an employee has reported. To determine the total
number of sick events, the system takes the current evaluation date and searches past
the specified number of months.
Sick Certificate Total Events

Enter a number that specifies the total events in a year that the organization allows an
employee to take before requiring a sick certificate.
Sick Certificate Consecutive Events

Enter the number of consecutive sick days that an employee can take for a given leave
occurrence before the organization requires a sick leave certificate.
9.5 Setting Up FMLA Leave Substitution Rules (Release 9.1 Update)

This section provides an overview of FMLA leave substitution rules and discusses
how to set up a leave substitution rule for FMLA leave type.
9.5.1 Understanding FMLA Leave Substitution Rules

The global leave administration module uses leave substitution rules that you create
with the FMLA Leave Substitution Rules program (P07603). Use this program to set up
rules regarding the substitution of accrual balances during an FMLA leave request.

Setting Up FMLA Leave Substitution Rules (Release 9.1 Update)
Organizations can specify that they want their employees to substitute their accrual
balances during an FMLA leave request based on their FMLA leave policy.
To create leave verification rules that work for payroll administrators and employee
self-service applications, you can set up rules in two levels:
■ Leave validation set
■ Employee groups
You can define the order in which employees can substitute leaves while availing
FMLA.
9.5.2 Forms Used to Set Up FMLA Leave Substitution Rules

Work With W07603A Leave Administration Setup Review the existing leave
FMLA Leave (G07GLVA1), FMLA Leave substitution rules.
Substitution Substitution Rules
Rules
Revise FMLA W07603B Click Add on the Work With Create a new FMLA leave
Leave FMLA Leave Substitution substitution rule.
Substitution Rules form.
Rules
9.5.3 Setting Up a Leave Substitution Rule for FMLA Leave Type

Access the Revise FMLA Leave Substitution Rules form.
Figure 9–6 Revise FMLA Substitution Rules form
Leave Verification Set

Enter a code that identifies a group of leave verification rules that are grouped
together for processing on any given application that validates leave time entry.
Employee Group Name

Leave Type
Enter a value that describes the leave time that an employee takes or requests. Use this
form to select only medical type of leave.
Sick Substitution
Select an option to specify whether the system allows, requires, or does not allow
substitution of sick accrual balances when you submit an FMLA leave request.

Setting Up the Leave Transactions Table
Sick Substitution Restrictions

Select an option to specify the instruction that if an FMLA leave request is for someone
other than the employee, the system does not allow the employee to substitute sick
accrual balances for FMLA. The system allows you to select this option only when the
sick substitution is allowed or required.
Vacation Substitution
substitution of vacation accrual balances when you submit an FMLA leave request.
Other Substitution
substitution of other accrual balances when you submit an FMLA leave request.
Sick Substitution Order

Specify a value to indicate the order to adjust sick leave when sick substitution is
allowed or required.
Vacation Substitution Order

Specify a value to indicate the order to adjust vacation leave when vacation
substitution is allowed or required.
Other Substitution Order

Specify a value to indicate the order to adjust other types of leaves when vacation
substitution is allowed or required.
9.6 Setting Up the Leave Transactions Table

This section provides an overview of the Leave Transactions table and discusses how
to:
■ Run the Leave Transactions Update Report.
■ Set processing options for the Leave Transactions Update Report (R0707620).
9.6.1 Understanding the Leave Transactions Table

To support self-service leave planning, you may also run the Leave Transaction
Update report (R0707620) to copy historical leave information from the F0618 table
into the F07620 table. This report gathers leave event information from the F0618 table
and saves it in the F07620 table. You use this information for leave trending and
historical leave reports.
You normally run this program when you are either installing the software or
updating the software to a newer release. This update creates leave transaction records
that are based on timecard history.
You need to select data based on date so that the desired range of timecard history is
included. For example, you might include the two previous years of data. Then run the
program.
Select Processing Options from the Row menu and set the option to Proof or Update
mode.

Associating Pay Types with Activity Types
9.6.2 Form Used to Run the Leave Transactions Update Report

W986162B Printer Selection Advanced and Technical Set the appropriate output
Operations (G07BUSP3), and run the report.
Leave Transaction Update.
9.6.3 Setting Processing Options for the Leave Transaction Update Report (R0707620)
reports.
9.6.3.1 Default
1. Report Mode
Specify the Pay Basis. Values are:
0: Proof Mode
1: Update Mode
9.6.4 Running the Leave Transactions Update Report

Access the Printer Selection form and click OK to run the report.
9.7 Associating Pay Types with Activity Types

This section provides an overview of activity type linking and discusses how to
associate pay types with activity types.
9.7.1 Understanding Activity Type Linking

Employee schedules are composed of activities that specify the time, location, and
other aspects about how an employee anticipates spending time. Each activity in an
employee schedule must have an activity type.
The system uses activity types to specify what the activity represents. Examples of
activity types include:
■ Regular work time
■ Vacation time
■ Sick time
Administrators can generate timecards from an employee schedule. When generating
timecards from an employee schedule, the activity type of each activity is used to
determine the pay type of the corresponding timecard.
Before timecards can be generated, the link between each activity type used in an
employee schedule and its related pay type must be set up. Use the Associate Pay
Types with Activity Types program (P073111) link pay types to activity types.
Because you can use employee schedules to generate timecards, your system uses
activity types for employee scheduling that link to pay types. You can add activity
types in UDC 01/AC. You can use the Associate Pay Types with Activity Types
program (P073111) to link individual pay types to activity types. Alternately, you can
create activity types and then automatically link them to each pay type in the F069116

Assigning Schedules to Employee Groups
table. You use the Create Associations for All Pay Types menu option to automate the
assignment.
9.7.2 Form Used to Associate Pay Types with Activity Types

Work with Pay Type W073111A Employee Schedules Click Find to display
to Activity Type (G05BES1), Associate Pay existing pay types and then
Associations Types with Activity Types link appropriate activity
types to each pay type.
Alternatively, select Create
Associations for All Pay
Types from the menu.
9.7.3 Associate Pay Types with Activity Types

Access the Work with Pay Type to Activity Type Associations form.
Pay Type
Enter a code that defines the type of pay, deduction, benefit, or accrual. Pay types are
numbered from 1 to 999. Deductions and benefits are numbered from 1000 to 9999.
Activity Type
Enter a UDC from 01/AC that categorizes the type of activity.
Leave Type
Enter a UDC from 07/LV that describes the leave time that represented by the
specified pay type. Administrators can use this information to identify leave trends.
Values might include:
C: Comp Time
S: Sick Time
9.8 Assigning Schedules to Employee Groups

This section provides an overview of schedule assignment and discusses how to:
■ Set processing options for the Assign Schedules to Employee Groups program
(R07315).
■ Assign schedules to employee groups
9.8.1 Understanding Schedule Assignment

You can use employee schedules to quickly assign schedules to many employees. For
example, you can define generic patterns once such as Monday through Friday from
8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. and then assign that pattern to an group of employees with one
action. These generic patterns are called schedule templates.
After setting up calendars with activities that represent the desired schedule
templates, you need to assign an appropriate template to individual employees.
Although you can manually assign a schedule template to an employee, assigning the
schedule template to a group of employees is a more efficient approach. You use the
Manage Schedules for Employee Groups program (P07315) to enter these assignments.

In most implementations, employees should not appear in more than one employee
group. If one or more employees appear in multiple groups, you should create one or
more exception groups that include these employees. If an employee appears in more
than one group and you process the assignment, the system assigns the employee to
the last schedule template that you assigned to that employee.
Note: After you enter new values in the Work with Schedules for
Employee Groups form, you need to click Assign Schedules to
Selected Groups or Assign Schedules to All Groups. This action
launches the Assign Schedules to Employee Groups report (R07315)
and completes the new assignments. If you just click Save and Close,
the system does not complete the assignments.
9.8.2 Form Used to Assign Schedules to Employee Groups

Work with Schedules W07315A Periodic Processing Link schedule templates
for Employee Groups (G05BESPP), Manage with employee groups and
Schedules for Employee then click Assign Schedules
Groups to Selected Groups or Assign
Schedules to All Groups.
9.8.3 Assign Schedules to Employee Groups

Access the Work with Schedules for Employee Groups form.
Employee Group ID
Enter a number that uniquely identifies an employee group record in the F186201
table.
Schedule ID
Enter a code from UDC 01/WS that identifies a calendar. This is a morphic field that
identifies a calendar when the system combines a Calendar and Identifier Type. For
example, if you enter Work Schedule in the Calendar and Identifier Type fields, then
you use a code from UDC 01/WS for Schedule ID.


10
Creating Employee Assignments
01

■ Section 10.1, "Understanding Employee Assignments"
■ Section 10.2, "Prerequisites"
■ Section 10.3, "Setting Up Default Pay Type Cross-References"
■ Section 10.4, "Creating Employee Assignments"
■ Section 10.5, "Generating and Saving Timecard Templates"
■ Section 10.6, "Generating Timecard Corrections"
■ Section 10.7, "Archiving and Restoring Employee Assignments"
10.1 Understanding Employee Assignments

Companies that hire many different people to perform a wide range of tasks for
different departments, and companies that have divergent payment
arrangements-both need the ability to create flexible work assignments and payment
arrangements that are beyond the capability of many time entry and payroll systems.
For example, one employee might work on different assignments for different
companies during the same pay period. When you activate employee assignment to
work with the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system, factors that are
assignment-specific, such as pay and billing rates, Workers Compensation, and tax
basis are used to create employee timecard records.
Regardless of whether companies require the complexity to accommodate employees
who work on multiple assignments in the same pay period, companies can benefit
from the ability to use templates to automatically enter a variety of time entry
information collected from an employee's assignment.
10.2 Prerequisites
Before you enter new employee assignments and generate new time entry templates,
you need to set up information in the software to enable and automate the process.
You must set the employee assignment processing options in the Time Entry MBF
program (P050002A). The processing options that are specific to employee assignment
are located on the Pay Rates tab and the Processing tabs. You must also set up default
cross-references for pay types.
Set up overtime rules in UDC 07/OR.
Creating Employee Assignments 10-1

Setting Up Default Pay Type Cross-References
10.3 Setting Up Default Pay Type Cross-References

When you use the employee assignment program to create time entry templates, you
specify the payment method that you are using by specifying one of these payment
methods on the Basic tab of the Time Entry Template form:
■ Pay Basis
■ Pay Type
If you specify Pay Basis, then you need to use the EE Assignment Default Pay Types
program (P0716704) to create cross-reference records in the Employee Assignment
Default Pay Type table (F0716704) that the system uses when it processes time entry. If
you specify the Pay Type option instead of the Pay Basis option on the time entry
template form, then you do not need to use this setup procedure.
These pay bases currently exist in UDC 07/AB:
■ HR (Hourly)
■ LS (Lump Sum)
■ SAL (Salary)
You can create additional pay bases as required to meet the needs of the organization.
These pay bases are available options that you can select when you complete the TE
Template form in the EE Assignment program (P0716701). Choosing one of these
options determines the pay basis for an employee assignment.
10.3.1 Forms Used to Set Up Default Pay Type Cross-References

Work With EE W0716704A Employee Assignment Access the EE Assignment
Assignment Default (G05EA10), EE Assignment Default Pay Types form.
Pay Types Default Pay Type
EE Assignment W0716704B Click Add on Work With EE Set up default pay type
Default Pay Types Assignment Default Pay cross-references.
Types.
10.3.2 Setting Up Default Pay Type Cross-References

Access the EE Assignment Default Pay Types form.
Pay Basis
Enter a UDC Code (07/AB) to indicate the pay basis of an assignment (hourly, salary,
piece rate, and so forth.)
PDBA Code (pay type, deduction, benefit, and accrual code)

Enter a code that defines the type of pay, deduction, benefit, or accrual.
Pay types are numbered from 1 to 999. Deductions and benefits are numbered from
1000 to 9999.
Explanation
Enter a description, remark, explanation, name, or address.

10.4 Creating Employee Assignments

This section provides an overview of the employee assignment creation process, and
discusses how to:
■ Set processing options for the EE Assignment program.
■ Create employee assignments.
■ Define timecard templates for employee assignments.
■ Add a job description to an employee assignment.
■ Set up third-party payment information.
10.4.1 Understanding Employee Assignment Creation

You can use the EE Assignment program (P0716701) to create employee assignments
and to define time entry templates for each assignment. This assignment approach
enables a human resources administrator to create flexible employee assignments that
are specific to a range of work assignments that use various billing rates, recharge
arrangements, and so on. After all assignment and time entry template information is
complete, the administrator can use a batch process to automatically generate
semi-complete timecards that contain assignment-specific information. After you
create these templates, you can use the Speed Time Entry program (P051121) to locate
the timecards by batch number, and complete them with information that is specific to
the pay period, such as the number of hours worked.
To use the employee assignment process, you must:
■ Create employee assignments.
■ Define time entry templates for each assignment.
To begin, you must create an employee assignment record. After you create the
assignment, you can define the time entry template that is associated with each
assignment. When you define the time entry template, you specify the information
that you want to include on all timecards that are created for that assignment,
including the job description, pay rates, and billing rates.
When the system processes employee assignment information in Service Billing, the
job description is printed as an explanation on the bill.
When you define a time entry template for an assignment, you must set up at least one
pay rate for regular pay. The system automatically enters this rate on all timecards that
are associated with the specified assignment. For example, you might set up an
assignment that pays employees 10 USD per hour for regular time, and 15 USD for
overtime. When you enter this information on the assignment, the system
automatically uses these rates to create the employee's timecards. You must, at
minimum, enter a pay rate for regular pay; however, you can set up rates for
additional pay types, such as overtime, double-time, or holiday pay.
You might also need to enter billing rate information for the assignment. If you have
set up the system to derive billing rates using a markup table, or if you are not creating
billing records for the assignment, you can leave the billing rate blank. However, if
you are not using a markup table, you must set up a billing rate if you want to create
billing records for the time associated with an assignment.
If a job description is not entered and pay rate information is not set up, the system
does not create an assignment record.

The employee assignment number that the system creates for each record is a unique,
system-assigned number generated from the next numbers feature of the software.
This number is not accessible for manual changes.
On the T/E Template form, the fields on the series of tabs provide an opportunity for
you to temporarily override, but not permanently overwrite, information in the
F060116 table. For example, if you have set up the employee as part of Home
Company 100 in the F060116, but want to pay the employee under Home Company 50
for a specified assignment, you can override the Home Company at the assignment
level. If you want to use the information from the F060116 table when creating
timecards for the assignment, you do not need to enter values.
The tables that the system uses when you are setting up time entry templates with the
employee assignment program are:
■ F060116
■ F0716701
■ F48311
After you create employee assignments and define time entry templates for those
assignments, you might find that you want to change the information. For example, if
an employee continues to work in a specified assignment, but receives a pay rate
increase, you can update the existing assignment and template information, rather
than creating a new assignment with updated information.
10.4.1.1 Calculating Overtime for Employee Assignments

If you need to calculate overtime differently for different assignment records, you can
use the Timecard Automation module to perform the calculations. First, you must set
up an overtime rule and enter that rule in UDC 07/OR before you create employee
assignments. You then enter the overtime rule on each assignment. After you create
timecard templates, you can process the timecards through the Timecard Automation
module to calculate the correct overtime amounts for the timecards. When you process
the overtime rule, you must enter the overtime rule code in the data selection criteria
to ensure that only the timecards that are associated with the assignment records
which use that overtime rule are processed.
Alternatively, you can create an employee group, using the overtime rule as the data
selection criterion when you create the group. After the employee group exists, you
apply a specific overtime rule to the group. For example, assume that the company
pays union employees at an overtime rate that is different from nonunion employees.
To satisfy this distinction, you can create and assign overtime rule code 555 to union
employee assignments. You then create an employee group, based on overtime rule
code 555, and apply the overtime rule to this group.
Nonunion employees might receive a different overtime rate, so you apply a different
overtime rule to those employees by including them in a separate group with its own
overtime rule. Although this UDC is specific to Employee Assignment, you can use
this feature to separate employees or employee groups for overtime processing when
you create employee assignments.

Important: If you use the employee group method to calculate

overtime rules for timecards that are created using the Employee
Assignment module, be aware that the system calculates all of the
timecards for a single employee using the same overtime rule. For
example, if an employee is included in an employee group that is
associated with overtime rule 555, all of the timecards for that
employee are processed using overtime rule 555.
Therefore, if you want some of the employee's timecards to be
processed using overtime rule 555, and other timecards to be
processed using overtime rule 777, you cannot use the employee
group method to process overtime rules.
10.4.2 Forms Used to Create Employee Assignments

Work With EE W0716701A Employee Assignment Select an existing assignment
Assignment (G05EA10), Employee for revision, or access the EE
Assignment. Review the Assignment form.
processing options, and then
click OK
EE Assignment W0716701B Click Add on Work With EE Create an employee
Assignment. assignment.
TE Template W0716701C Click Find on Work With EE Define time entry templates
Assignment. for employee assignments.
Select an assignment record
and then select TE Template
(Time Entry Template) from
the Row menu.
EE Assignment Job W0716703B Select Job Desc from the Add job description
Description Form menu on TE Template. information to an employee
assignment.
EE Assignment W0716702B Select Pay Rates from the Add rates to the timecard
Pay/Bill Rates Form menu on TE Template. template that the system uses
when processing a payment
to a contracting entity.
10.4.3 Setting Processing Options for the EE Assignment Program (P0716701)

reports.
10.4.3.1 Defaults/Basic
1. Pay Basis
Specify the Pay Basis.
2. Pay Type
Specify the pay type.
3. Overtime Rule
Specify which overtime rule to apply to the timecard record when the timecard
automation process is used; UDC code (07/OR)

4. Recharge Code
Specify whether the Recharge processing option for the Payroll Journal Entry program
is used for the employee time; UDC code (07/RC). This value is assigned to the Record
Type (RCCD) in time entry. Values are:
1: Payroll Processing Only.
2: Payroll and Recharge Processing.
3: Recharge Processing Only (no effect on the employee wages).
5. Daily Time Entry Required

Specify a value that indicates whether daily time entry records are required. If this
value is blank or zero, then only one time entry record is required per pay period.
Values are:
0 or Blank: Only one time entry record is required per pay period.
1: Daily time entry records are required.
10.4.3.2 Defaults/Cat Codes P/R

1. Category Codes - Payroll1 through 4. Category Codes - Payroll4
Specify category codes for Payroll 1, Payroll 2, Payroll 3, and Payroll 4.
10.4.3.3 Defaults/Subledger
1. Subledger - G/L (subledger - general ledger)
Specify a value for Subledger - G/L.
2. Subledger Type
Specify the Subledger Type.
10.4.3.4 Manufacturing
1. Manufacturing (future use)
Specify a manufacturing value.
10.4.3.5 Recharge
1. Enable Multicurrency Functionality (future use)
Specify whether to enable multicurrency functionality. Values are:
0: Do not enable.
1: Enable.
2. Recharge Mode
Specify which amount, for recharge records, is the fixed amount and is not susceptible
to currency fluctuations. Values are:
0: The amount in the home business unit currency is the fixed amount.
1: The amount in the recharge job currency is the fixed amount.
Note: This code does not apply to other payroll records. For
example, for document type T2, the home business unit currency is
the fixed amount.

10.4.4 Creating Employee Assignments

Access the EE Assignment form.
Description Line 2
Enter a second, 30-character description, remark, or explanation.
If a work order or a charge out business unit exists for the assignment, leave this field
blank.
Order Number
If a chargeout business unit exists for the assignment, leave this field blank. You can
use either a work order number or a chargeout business unit to identify the employee
assignment, but not both.
The Order Number is not transferred to the timecard when time entry templates are
created, as the timecard does not have a Work Order field. This field is for
informational purposes only. Additionally, If the work assignment is outside the
employee business unit, the work order normally includes the business unit to which
the work is billed.
Chargeout Business Unit

different business unit. This value is used for deriving rates from the Union Pay Rate
table and is used exclusively by the Certified Payroll Register.
If a work order exists for the assignment, leave this field blank. You can use either a
work order number or a chargeout business unit to identify the employee assignment,
but not both.
A value in this field overrides the rates that are set up in the F069126 if the table is set
up by job or business unit.
The value that you enter in this field overrides the Job Location field on the timecard
when you generate timecard templates.
Operations Sequence Number

Enter a number that is used to indicate an order of succession.
In routing instructions, a number that sequences the fabrication or assembly steps in
the manufacture of an item. You can track costs and charge time by operation.
In bills of material, a number that designates the routing step in the fabrication or
assembly process that requires a specified component part. You define the operation
sequence after you create the routing instructions for the item. The JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Shop Floor Management system uses this number in the backflush and
preflush by operation process.
In engineering change orders, a number that sequences the assembly steps for the
engineering change.
For repetitive manufacturing, a number that identifies the sequence in which an item
is scheduled to be produced.
Skip To fields enable you to enter an operation sequence that you want to begin the
display of information.

You can use decimals to add steps between existing steps. For example, use 12.5 to add
a step between steps 12 and 13.
Type Operation Code

Enter a UDC (30/OT) that indicates the type of operation. Values include:
A: Alternate routing
TT: Travel time
IT: Idle time
T: Text
Copy WO or Chargeout BU description to Task Description (copy work order or

chargeout business unit description to task description)
Enter an option that specifies the type of processing for an event. If you enter an
existing work order number or chargeout business unit, check this option if you want
the system to populate the Description field.
Employee Identification
Enter the employee number, TAX ID, or Alternate number, depending on the
employee number mode that is set up in the Payroll Constants for company 00000.
Scheduled Start Date

Enter the calendar date that an employee assignment activity is scheduled to begin.
Scheduled End Date

Enter the calendar date that an employee assignment activity is scheduled to end.
Scheduled Start Time (HH/MM/SS)

Enter the time of day that an employee assignment activity is scheduled to begin.
Scheduled End Time (HH/MM/SS)

Enter the time of day that an employee assignment activity is scheduled to end.
Assigned Hours
Enter a number that indicates the hours that have been assigned to this task.
Assignment Percentage
Enter a percentage that indicates the proportion of a resource's time that will be
allocated to the task.
Date Assigned
Enter the date the person responsible for the work order receives the work order.
10.4.5 Defining Time Entry Templates for Employee Assignments

Access the TE Template form.
Pay Basis
Enter a code that identifies the pay basis. An error results if you enter values in both
the Pay Basis and Pay Type fields. The employee assignment must be based on either
the employee pay basis or pay type.
Overtime Rule
Enter a UDC code (07/OR) that indicates which overtime rule to apply to the timecard
record when the timecard automation process is used.

Complete this field only if you are using timecard automation to calculate overtime
rates. Also note that the overtime rate process is not automatically launched if you
complete this field. You must process overtime rule information using the Timecard
Automation module.
Recharge Code
Enter a UDC code (07/RC) that identifies whether the Recharge processing option for
the Payroll Journal Entry program is used for the employee time. This value is
assigned to the Record Type (RCCD) in time entry. Values are:
1: Payroll Processing Only
2: Payroll and Recharge Processing
3: Recharge Processing Only (no effect on the employee wages)
If you enter a 3 in this field, you should also enter a value in the Remit To Rate field on
the EE Assignment Pay/Bill Rates form. This form appears when you complete step 17
of this task. If you use recharge, then the assignment must be billed out, as opposed to
payment through the payroll system.
Daily T/E Req (daily time entry required)

Enter a value that indicates whether daily time entry records are required. If this value
is blank or zero, then only one time entry record is required per pay period.
When you select this option, daily time entry records are required. When you generate
new time card templates, the system generates daily time cards. If you leave this
option blank, only one time card is required for each time reporting period. Values are:
0 or Blank: Only one time entry record is required per pay period.
1: Daily time entry records are required.
10.4.5.1 CO/BU
Access the CO/BU tab.
Company - Home
Enter the company to which the employee is assigned. This code is used to store
historical payroll information and to determine accounts for some journal entries.
Customer Number
Enter the Address Book Number of customer.
Check Route Code

Enter a UDC (07/CR) that specifies the check routing or mail-stop code. Use this code
to sequence the printing of payroll checks to facilitate their handling and delivery.
10.4.5.2 Job/Pos
Access the Job/Pos tab.
Amount - Uprate
Enter an amount that the system adds to an employee's base hourly rate. For example,
you might enter a rate differential for equipment operators when they move from
operating one piece of equipment to another piece. The system adds the uprate
amount to the base pay rate to calculate gross wages before it performs any other rate
calculations, such as applying a shift differential or pay type multiplier.

Shift Differential
Enter an additional rate, expressed in dollars or percent, added to an employee's
hourly rate, depending on the shift worked. This rate can be applied in one of two
ways, as defined by the Shift Differential Calculation Sequence (data item CMTH).
Percent or Amount
Enter a code that specifies whether Shift Differential contains an hourly rate or a
percentage. Values are:
H: The system adds the amount in Shift Differential to the hourly rate.
%: The amount in Shift Differential is a percentage of the hourly rate that the system
adds to the hourly rate.
10.4.5.3 Cat Codes P/R

Access the Cat Codes P/R tab.
Category Code 01
Enter a category code that defines JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system needs.
You can define the use and description of this code to fit the organization. For
example, you can set up a category code for information such as Division, Supervisor,
Branch office, Health insurance plan, Stock plan, and so on.
Note: When setting up category codes in the JD Edwards

EnterpriseOne Workforce Management system, you should coordinate
information with the payroll department to insure that information is
not duplicated or overwritten.
10.4.5.4 Subledger
Access the Subledger tab.
Subledger
Enter a value such as equipment number or work order number that you can attach to
the end of an account number to further define an account and more easily track it.
Subledger Type
Enter a code identifying the type of subledger in the previous field. If you enter a
subledger, you must also enter a subledger type.
10.4.5.5 P/R Tax

Access the P/R Tax tab.
Tax Area (Work)

Enter a code that identifies a geographical location and the tax authorities for an
employee work site, including employee and employer statutory requirements. In the
Vertex payroll tax calculation software, the tax area code is synonymous with
GeoCode. To determine the valid codes for the location, refer to the documentation for
the tax calculation software that you are using.
Worker's Comp (worker's compensation)

Enter a code from UDC 00/W that represents a worker's compensation insurance
(WCI) code. This code should correspond to the classifications on the periodic
worker's compensation insurance reports.

Sub Class
Enter a code that specifies any special circumstances associated with the workers
compensation insurance (WCI) code, resulting in multiple rates for the same WCI code
due to location or risk, for example. The subclass should remain blank if multiple rates
do not exist. Default codes are:
Blank: There are no special circumstances associated with this code.
F: There are special circumstances associated with this code.
10.4.5.6 Sales Tax

Access the Sales Tax tab.
You can use these fields for information only. Unless custom modifications are made to
the service billing software, the system does not use this information.
Tax Expl Code (tax explanation code)

Enter a hard-coded UDC (00/EX) that controls the algorithm that the system uses to
calculate tax and general ledger distribution amounts. The system uses the tax
explanation code in conjunction with the tax rate area and tax rules to determine how
the tax is calculated. Each transaction pay item can be defined with a different tax
explanation code.
Tax Rate/Area
Enter a code that identifies a tax or geographic area that has common tax rates and tax
authorities. The system validates the code you enter against the Tax Areas table
(F4008). The system uses the tax rate area in conjunction with the tax explanation code
and tax rules to calculate tax and general ledger distribution amounts when you create
an invoice or voucher.
GeoCode Ship From

Enter the location (warehouse or store location) from which a product was shipped or
where a service is performed. This location is used by the Quantum calculating tax
engine to determine the appropriate taxing jurisdiction.
GeoCode Order Accept

Enter the jurisdiction where a sales transaction is approved or a contract is accepted by
the seller.
Vertex Transaction Type

Enter the Vertex Sales and Use Tax transaction type.
Vertex Product Category

Enter a UDC used in the Vertex Tax Decision Maker for products or services that are
nontaxable or are at a nonstandard rate.
10.4.5.7 Equipm Bill

Access the Equipm Bill tab.
Equipment Worked
Enter an identification code for an asset that you can enter in one of these formats:
1: Asset number (a computer-assigned, 8-digit, numeric control number).
2: Unit number (a 12 character alphanumeric field).
3: Serial number (a 25 character alphanumeric field).

Every asset has an asset number. You can use a unit number and a serial number to
further identify assets as needed.
If this is a data entry field, the first character that you enter indicates whether you are
entering the primary (default) format that is defined for the system or one of the other
formats. A special character (such as / or *) in the first position of this field indicates
the asset number format that you are using. You assign special characters to asset
number formats on the fixed assets system constants form.
Equipment Rate Code

Enter a UDC (00/RC) that indicates a billing rate, such as DY for daily, MO for
monthly, and WK for weekly. You can set up multiple billing rates for a piece of
equipment.
If you leave this field blank, the system searches for a valid billing rate in this
sequence:
1. F0901 table.
This table contains the most detailed rate information. You can assign multiple
rates for a job. For example, you can set up separate rates for different equipment
working conditions.
2. F08001 or F0006 tables.
This table contains less detailed rate information than the Account Ledger Master.
You can only set up a single rate for a job based on this table.
3. F1302 table.
This table contains the least detailed rate code information. The system searches
this table according to the criteria you establish when setting up the table.
Equipment Object Account

Enter a code that describes the equipment object account. Use this field to indicate the
object account to which you want the system to distribute equipment utilization
charges. If you leave this field blank, the system uses a default value from the Payroll
Accounting tables. You can override this value on individual timecards.
Billing Rate
Enter the dollar amount for the equipment billing rate. Each equipment item can have
numerous billing rates based on the rate code. The equipment billing rate can consist
of up to ten different rates. For example:
Billing Rate = 100 USD
■ 20 USD = Rate 1 (Ownership Component)
■ 50 USD = Rate 2 (Operating Component)
■ 25 USD = Rate 3 (Maintenance Component)
■ 5 USD = Rate 4 (Other Costs Component)
The Equipment Time Entry program provides for the entries of debits or charges to
specific cost accounts using the total billing rate (for example, 100 USD).
When these entries are posted to the general ledger, credits are recognized in revenue
accounts for each of the rate components. This enables you to separate portions of the
equipment billing by type of cost. You do not need to use the rate components concept
unless it is appropriate to the business. Also refer to data item ERC: Equipment Billing
Rate.

Generating and Saving Timecard Templates
10.4.6 Adding a Job Description to an Employee Assignment

Access the EE Assignment Job Description form.
Date Effective
Enter the date the assignment becomes effective.
Job Description
Enter the description of the job.
10.4.7 Setting Up Third-Party Payment Information

Access the EE Assignment Pay/Bill Rates form.
Date Effective
Enter the date the assignment becomes effective.

Enter the PDBA code used for the payment.
Description
Enter a description of the payment.
UM (unit of measure)
Enter a value that specifies the unit of measure.
Pay Rate
Enter the rate that the system uses to create the payment.
Billing Rate
Enter the rate that the system uses to create the billing rate on the payment.
Remit to Rate
Enter a value in this field when you need to manually pay a third party instead of an
employee. For example, if a temporary agency does not have the staff to fill an
assignment, they might need to contract with another temporary agency to fill the
assignment. The Remit To Rate field can be used to enter the rate that must be paid to
the third-party temporary agency for the use of their employee.
As the billing circumstances for each company might require different programming,
this field requires custom programming to function correctly. Additionally, you must
enter 3 for the Recharge Code on the Basic tab of the TE Template form that is
associated with this assignment record.
10.5 Generating and Saving Timecard Templates

This section provides an overview of processing timecard templates, and discusses
how to:
Set processing options for the Generate Timecard Template program.
10.5.1 Understanding Timecard Template Processing

You use the Generate Timecard Templates in F06116Z1 program (R0716711) to create
new employee time entry templates. When you generate new time entry templates, the
system creates the new template records in the F06116Z1 table. The system uses this
temporary table initially so that if employee self-service features are enabled,
employees can enter their time without affecting live tables.

After timecard information is stored in the F06116Z1, you use the Time Entry Batch
Processor program (R05116Z1I) to transfer the template records to the F06116 table. If
you use employee self-service, you run this program after employees complete their
time entry. If you are not using employee self-service, the system can automatically
process this program when you create the time entry templates. To run the Time Entry
Batch Processor program automatically, you enter the version number in a processing
option for the Generate Timecard Templates program. Then when you run the
Generate Timecard Templates program, the system automatically runs the Time Entry
Batch Processor program to move the template files to the F06116.
You can purge records from the F06116Z1 table after copying them to the F06116 table
by setting the Purge Flag processing options on the Time Entry Batch Processor
program.
After employee assignment records are created and the setup process for time entry
templates is complete, you need to create and save time entry templates. You use the
Generate Timecard Template program (R0716711) to automatically create time entry
templates that are ready for time entry.
The Generate Timecard Template program creates template records in the F06116Z1
table that you then need to record in the F06116 table If employee self-service time
entry is not implemented in the system, you can automatically move the processed
records to the F06116 table. After you run the Generate Timecard Template program, if
processing options are set appropriately, the system automatically runs the Time Entry
Batch Processor program (R05116Z1I). If you do not automate this process using
processing options, then you must run the Time Entry Batch Processor program
separately and specify a version each time that you run the program.
A human resources representative can then use the Speed Time Entry Revisions
program (P051121) to locate employee time cards by batch number and enter the time
worked.
The system uses these tables when creating time entry templates:
■ F06116Z1
■ F06116
■ F060116
■ F0716701
■ F48311
If you use a regular Payroll ID value in the processing options to identify a group of
employees for whom you are processing payroll, then you can set up the Generate
Timecard Template program on a scheduled basis to run automatically. If you do not
use a Payroll ID, then you must manually run the program.
10.5.2 Prerequisite
Create an employee assignment and define timecard template information.
10.5.3 Setting Processing Options for the Generate Timecard Template Program
(R0716711)
Employee Assignment menu (G05EA10), Generate Timecard Template.
reports.

10.5.3.1 Selection
Use these processing options to specify Payroll information that the system uses to
select records and generate the template.
1. Payroll ID (payroll identification)

Specify a regular payroll ID (pre-payroll version) that the program uses to select
records that are transferred. If this processing option is specified, then the system
ignores the values that might be entered in the Start Date, Stop Date, Pay Cycle Code,
and Pay Period Number processing options because the system retrieves and uses the
values that are associated with this payroll ID.
Use data selection of Payroll IDs Version

Specify the selection criteria defined in the specified Payroll ID version when selecting
assignment records to process. All of the assignment records will be compared to the
selection criteria that is associated with the Payroll ID that is defined in the Payroll ID
processing option on this tab. If this option is left blank then all active assignment
records will be processed through template generation. Values are:
Blank: Do not use data selection.
1: Use the data selection.
2. Pay Cycle Code

Specify the Pay Cycle Code. Values include:
W: Weekly
BW: Biweekly
SEMI: Semi-monthly
3. Pay Period Number

Specify the pay period number. If the pay period number is not specified, then the
system uses a pay period number that includes the system date. When the system uses
a pay period number that includes the system date, the start and stop dates are based
on values from the Master Pay Cycle.
Pay periods are sequentially numbered from the first of the year. For example, a
monthly payroll cycle beginning in January has a total of 12 periods, with October as
period number 010. Value ranges include:
001-052: (Weekly payroll cycle)
001-026: (Biweekly payroll cycle)
001-024: (Semi-monthly payroll cycle)
001-012: (Monthly payroll cycle)
001-004: (Quarterly payroll cycle)
001-001: (Annual payroll cycle)
Refer to the Master Pay Cycle settings to determine how pay periods are defined.
4. Pay Period Start Date

Specify whether to include records that have a date worked that is equal to or greater
than the current date.
5. Pay Period End Date

Specify whether to include records that have a date worked that is less than or equal to
the current date.

6. Generate Template(s)
Specify whether the system generates one template for each day of the pay period or
to generate one template per pay period. Values are:
Blank: One per pay period (the work date is the same as the pay period end date)
1: One template per day, within the pay period start and end dates
The Generate Timecard Template program can automatically override the Daily Time
Entry setting in the Employee Assignment program (P0716701) for this processing
option. If the system detects that a change in the rate or job description occurred
during the pay period, then the system automatically creates daily time entry
templates.
10.5.3.2 Time Entry

Use these processing options to specify whether the system creates assignment records
in the F06116 table and the version to use if the assignment records are created.
1. Create assignment records in EE Transaction Detail File F06116

Specify whether the system creates time entry records in the F06116 table. Values are:
Blank: Do not create.
You can create these records at a later time by running the Time Entry Batch Processor
program (R05116Z1I).
1: Automatically create.
In R05115Z1I, the Final Flag option in processing option number 2 must be set to 1.
2. Batch Time Entry Processor Version to Submit, if records are to be created in EE

Transaction Detail File F06116
Specify a time entry batch processor version (R05116Z1I). The system uses the default
version (XJDE0001) if you leave this processing option blank.
To create time entry records automatically in the F06116 table, you must set the Final
Flag to 1 in processing option number 2.
10.5.3.3 Edits
Specify the assignment records that the system displays.
Print All or Print only Exceptions

Specify whether the system displays only exceptions or displays all assignment
records that are processed. If you leave this processing option blank, the system
displays only exceptions. The system does not process records with exceptions. You
need to correct all errors and then run this program again. Values are:
Blank: Exceptions only.
1: All processed records.
10.5.3.4 Resource Assignment

Specify the table resource.
1. Pay Code Source

Specify the tables that you want the system to search to retrieve a pay code for
timecard template. Values are:
Blank: Use a pay code from the F0716704 table.

Archiving and Restoring Employee Assignments
1: Use a pay code from the F060116 table.

If the default pay type on the F060116 table is blank, the system uses 1 as a default pay
code.
10.6 Generating Timecard Corrections

This section provides an overview of timecard corrections and discusses how to:
■ Set processing options for Generate Timecard Corrections (R05602).
■ Generate the timecard corrections.
10.6.1 Understanding Timecard Corrections

Timecard corrections are required when a timecard is accidentally entered with an
incorrect number of hours, pay type, rate, or any other data. You use the Generate
Timecard Corrections program (R05602) to display the positive entries for the F06116,
F07241, F0618, and the F0724 tables.
The Generate Timecard Corrections program processes each corrected F06116 record,
generates the reversing entries for the original F0618 record, and generates correcting
or reversing entries for any associated burden in the F0724 table.
10.6.2 Setting Processing Options for Generating Timecard Corrections (R05602)

reports.
10.6.2.1 Processing
1. Proof or Final Mode
Specify whether to run the program in proof or final mode.
Blank: Proof mode.
1: Final mode.
10.6.3 Generating the Timecard Corrections

Select Timecard Post/History Update (G05BT11), Generate Timecard Corrections.
10.7 Archiving and Restoring Employee Assignments

This section includes an overview of archiving and restoring employee assignments,
■ Set processing options for the Archive EE Assignment T/E Information program.
■ Restore employee assignments.
10.7.1 Understanding Employee Assignment Archiving and Restoration

You can use the Archive EE Assignment T/E Info program (R0716709) to store old,
closed assignments in a history file.
You can use the Restore History option in the EE Assignment program (P0716701) if
you need to view the historical records. The Restore History option copies the
historical records into the live table.

The system uses these tables when archiving historical records:

■ Employee Assignment T/E Template Information (F0716701).
■ Resource Assignments (F48311).
You can use the EE Assignment program (P0716701) to view historical assignment
records. When you select the Restore History option, the system copies the historical
records into a live table. You can review, change, and reprocess these records.
10.7.2 Forms Used to Archive and Restore Employee Assignments

Work With EE W0716701A Employee Assignment Access Employee
Assignment (G05EA10), Employee Assignments that you want
Assignment. Review the to archive or restore.
processing options and then
click OK
EE Assignment T/E W0716709A Select the records that you Restore employee
Template Info History want to process and then assignments.
select Restore History from
the Row menu on Work
With EE Assignment.
10.7.3 Setting Processing Options for the Archive EE Assignment T/E Information
Program (R0716709)
Employee Assignment menu (G05EA10), Archive EE Assignment T/E Information.
reports.
10.7.3.1 Dates
Use these processing options to specify an ending date or a number of days prior to
the current system date.
1. Prior To Date
Specify an ending date. You normally use this option when you run the program
manually. The system archives all records with a scheduled end date that is less than
the date entered. If you specify a date, then do not enter a value for the Prior To
Number Of Days option.
2. Prior To Number Of Days

Specify a number of days prior to the current system date. You normally use this
option when you run the program using the scheduler. The system calculates a date by
subtracting the number of days that you enter from the current system date and then
archives all records prior to this date. If you specify a value for the number of days,
then do not enter a value for the Prior To Date option.
10.7.4 Restoring Employee Assignments

Access the Employee Assignment T/E Template History form.

Arch Flag (archived flag)

Enter a value that indicates whether the corresponding record in the Employee
Assignment T/E Template Information file (F0716701) is archived in the history file
(F0716709). Values are:
0: The record does not exist.
1: The record is archived.


11
Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions
11
for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Human Capital

Management

■ Section 11.1, "Understanding AAIs for Human Capital Management"
■ Section 11.2, "Setting Up AAIs for Labor, Billings, and Equipment Distribution"
■ Section 11.3, "Setting Up AAIs for Burden and Premium Labor Distribution"
■ Section 11.4, "Setting Up AAIs for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution"
■ Section 11.5, "Setting Up AAIs for Liabilities"
■ Section 11.6, "Setting Up AAIs for Labor Billings"
■ Section 11.7, "Setting Up AAIs for Accruals and Clearing"
■ Section 11.8, "Setting Up Journal Summarization Rules"
11.1 Understanding AAIs for Human Capital Management

You set up automatic accounting instructions (AAIs) to assign account numbers to
journal entries. These account numbers enable the system to distribute labor and
equipment billings, payroll disbursement, and actual burden journal entries to
specified accounts in the general ledger.
During the payroll cycle, the system creates a journal entry of every calculation for
every employee. These calculations include salary and wage expenses, burden, cash
disbursements, and liabilities. You can create journal entries for labor and equipment
billings and accruals for payrolls that cross accounting periods. After the journal
entries are created and assigned account numbers, the system summarizes the entries
and passes them to the general ledger.
You can set up rules to summarize journal entries. For example, because full detail
exists in payroll, you might not need to track full detail in the general ledger. You can
set up rules to summarize account ranges and business units.
You can set up AAIs for each company and for the default company (Company 00000).
You should set up AAIs for Company 00000 first so that the system can use these AAIs
if it cannot find AAIs for a specific company. However, you cannot set up a business
unit for Company 00000 because each business unit can be attached to a different
company.
The rules are flexible and changeable within the payroll cycle. For example, labor
distribution account numbers can be assigned by company, business unit, group
Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Human Capital Management 11-1
Understanding AAIs for Human Capital Management
(union), job type, job step, and pay type. You can also define instructions for labor
distribution at the employee level for certain employees that need separate
instructions.
Every AAI table includes the Journal Type field, which contains one or more codes to
identify the type of journal entry. Each table has a hard-coded set of journal types.
Rules for some journal types must be set up. Other rules are optional.
Depending on how you set the processing options, you can use either of two formats
to set up and edit AAIs: use the multiple edit format to set up and edit a group of
AAIs, or set up and edit a single AAI by using the single edit format.
11.1.1 When to Create Journal Entries

The system can create journal entries during any of these processes:
■ A regular payroll cycle.
■ The processing of interim checks in a regular payroll cycle.
■ The generation of journal entries for timecards using the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Time Entry system.
■ You can also generate journal entries for timecards when you need to post
in-between payroll cycles.
If you use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system, the system initially creates
pro forma journal entries during the journal entry step of the payroll cycle. The pro
forma journal entries are created in the Payroll Journal (Compressed) File table
(F063951), at which point they become part of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll
system.
During the final update, the system posts actual journal entries to the F0911 table. At
this point, the journal entries are part of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General
Accounting system.
If you use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time Entry system, the system creates
journal entries when you generate journal entries for timecards using the Generate
Timecard Entries program (R052901). You can then review, revise, and approve journal
batches for posting to the general ledger.
Note: For Release 9.1 Update, the system also copies the cost object
values from the F06116 timecard records to the payroll journal entry
records in the F063951 table. This ensures that the cost object values
are included on entries posted to the F0911 table. This change affects
the journal entries generated from the timecard records, including T2,
T3, T4, T5, and T6 entries. T1 entries are not based on timecard
amounts and therefore, the system will not assign them cost object
values.
11.1.2 The General Ledger Account Structure

The system uses the standard business-unit object-subsidiary and subledger account
structure. The general ledger account structure is composed of two parts:
■ Where - business unit
■ What - account number

Business unit is a 12-character, alphanumeric field that is the lowest level of

organizational reporting. Each business unit is assigned to a company and can be
associated with 20 category codes for higher-level reporting. For example:
■ Department
■ Branch
■ Asset (revenue and maintenance expense)
The account number identifies whether the account is an asset, liability, or expense.
The account number contains two parts:
■ Object account, a 6-character, alphanumeric field that is required on all journal
entries.
■ Subsidiary, an 8-character, alphanumeric field that is optional on journal entries.
For example, use this field to identify an employee number, equipment number, or
asset number.
11.1.3 Dates That You Associate With Journal Entries

This chart shows the timing relationships that are important to payroll journal entries:
Figure 11–1 Dates associated with journal entries
These definitions are important in understanding payroll and time and labor journal
entries:
General ledger date

Enter the date that the system uses for posting to the proper general ledger. The table
that defines date ranges for each accounting period is in the Date Fiscal Patterns table
(F0008) for the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Accounting system.
For payroll, the system always uses the general ledger date.
For stand-alone time and labor, the system uses either the general ledger date or the
system date, as set up in the processing options for Generate Timecard Entries
(R052901).
Pay period ending date

Enter the last day of the pay period, as defined in the master pay cycles.
Payment date
Enter the payment date of the pay period, as defined in the master pay cycles.
Work date
Enter the actual date entered on a timecard.
Transition period
Indicates any pay period that has working days in two accounting periods.
Accounting period ending date

Enter the last day of the general accounting period.
Cost period
Enter the pay period that can be used with the creation of payroll journal entries for a
transition period. Journal entries for those timecards with work dates that fall into the
preceding accounting period are assigned a general ledger date equal to the last day of
the preceding accounting period. Journal entries for those timecards with work dates
in the succeeding period are assigned a general ledger date equal to the pay period
ending date in pre-payroll processing.
Override date
Indicates the date that is used as the general ledger date for all payroll journals when
defined in the journal entries step of the payroll cycle.
11.1.4 Payroll Journal Entries

When journal entries are created in the payroll cycle, the system assigns a general
ledger date using a date associated with the payroll, such as pay period ending date or
payment date. You define the general ledger date to be used for labor distribution and
burden journals (T2, T3, T4, and T5) in the payroll journal entries step of the payroll
cycle. Cash disbursement and liability journals (T1 and T7) use the payment date as
the general ledger date. The accrual factor, a method for allocating a percentage of the
T1s, T2s, and T3s back to a prior month, creates an accrual entry (T6).
The Pay Cycle Review tracks the general ledger date for labor distribution to reference
when you submit the next payroll.
You can define an override date when you submit the journal entry creation job. The
override date that you define becomes the general ledger date for all journal entries
created for all document types.
You can also use an accrual factor to allocate a portion of the T1, T2, and T3 entries
back to a prior month. For example, if 40 per cent of the pay period occurs in one
month, and 60 per cent of the pay period occurs in the next month, you can enter an
accrual factor of 40 to accrue 40 per cent of the T1, T2, and T3 journal entries to the
previous month and 60 per cent to the current month. Journal entries that are
generated for the previous month use the ending date of that month and entries
generated for the current month use the pay period ending date. When you use an
accrual factor to create journal entries, the system generates T6 journal entries.
11.1.5 Time and Labor Journal Entries

When you use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system to create journal
entries, the system can post the entries by the general ledger date that is associated
with the journal entries, or by the system date on which the journal entries were
created. You can specify which of these dates you want to use in the processing
options for Generate Timecard Entries program (R052901). You can also use this
program to post timecard journal entries between payroll cycles.

11.1.6 Default Journal Types

Each AAI table can have a default journal type. For example, LD is the default journal
type for the labor distribution table. When the timecard or employee criteria do not
match up to any instructions, the system uses the instructions assigned to the default
journal type. You can use a default journal type for a specific company and for
Company 00000.
This table lists the default journal types and a description of how each is used:
Journal Type Description

LD and RD Use in labor, billings, and equipment distribution tables.
SD Use in labor, billing, and equipment distribution tables to
set up suspense accounts.
PR Use in premium labor tables.
RO Use in labor billings tables.
AW Use in accrued wages in accruals and clearing tables.
IC Use in intercompany settlements in accruals and clearing
tables
BF and BT Use in actual burden tables.
AL and AT Use in liabilities tables.
You can also use a default journal type to indicate that you are missing instructions
from a table.
If you set up a default value with an invalid account number, the system prints a
warning on the Journal Proof report.
11.1.7 Example: Payroll Journal Entry

This example of a Payroll Cycle Journal is based on a simple payroll:
1. Employee: Home Company = 1, Home Business Unit = 25, Union = 1000
2. Time Card: January 28, 1998 (Pay Code 001) 1,000 USD
3. Payroll Taxes and Insurance (P.T.I.): FICA (Tax Type D & E) 70 USD
4. Payroll Taxes and Insurance (P.T.I.): UIC (Tax Type CC & CD) 70 USD
5. Deductions: Savings Bond (Ded Code 2000) 50 USD
6. Benefits: Union 1000 (Ben Code 6000) 30 USD
7. Payment Date: February 5, 1998
This table lists examples of the journal entries:
Date Account Description DR CR

01/28/98 1.4205 Wages Payable Blank 1000
01/28/98 25.8115 Labor Expenses 1000 Blank
Blank Blank TOTALS 1000 1000
This table lists examples of the actual burden journal entries:

01/28/98 25.8146 Union Fringe 30 Blank
01/28/98 25.8135 FICA Burden 70 Blank
01/28/98 25.8135 UIC Burden 70 Blank
01/28/98 1.4333.FR Burden Clearing - Blank 30
Fringe
01/28/98 1.4333.TX Burden Clearing - Blank 140
Tax
This table lists examples of the disbursement journal entries:

02/05/98 1.4205 Wages Payable 1000 Blank
02/05/98 1.1110.PAY Cash in Bank Blank 880
02/05/98 1.4316 Savings Bonds Blank 50
02/05/98 1.4332 Union Fringe Blank 30
02/05/98 1.4212.EE FICA Employee Blank 70
02/05/98 1.4212.ER FICA Employer Blank 70
02/05/98 1.4212.EE UIC Employee Blank 70
02/05/98 1.4212.ER UIC Employer Blank 70
02/05/98 1.4333.FR Burden Clearing - 30 Blank
Fringe
02/05/98 1.4333.TX Burden Clearing - 70 Blank
Tax
11.1.8 Codes That Are Used to Identify Journal Entries

When the system creates a journal entry for the general ledger, it assigns to the journal
entry a document type and a reference number. The document type code is a
two-character code that classifies journal entries into one of seven document types:
■ T1: Payroll disbursement
■ T2: Labor distribution and flat burden
■ T3: Actual burden
■ T4: Labor billing distribution
■ T5: Equipment distribution
■ T6: Payroll accruals and deferrals
■ T7: Payroll vouchers
You can create journal entries for these document types using the payroll or time and
labor system:

System Document Types

Document types for payroll T1: Payroll disbursement
T2: Payroll labor distribution
T3: Actual burden
T4: Labor billing distribution
T5: Equipment distribution
T6: Payroll accruals and deferrals
T7: Payroll vouchers
Document types for time and labor T2: Payroll labor distribution
T3: Actual burden (when you calculate monthly benefits)
The reference number, composed of journal type and the general ledger date (or
another date used on journal entries), further identifies the source of each journal entry
within a document type.
The reference number of a journal entry becomes the Reference 2 value in the F0911
table.
11.1.9 Document Type T1 - Payroll Disbursement Journal Entries

Document type T1 contains all journal entries associated with the writing of payments.
The journal entries include cash-in-bank, relief of accrued wages, deduction, tax and
benefit liabilities, and burden clearing entries.
The system creates T1 journal entries in the payroll cycle only. All T1 journal entries
carry the same general ledger date, that is, the payment date or the override date. The
specific journal types used for these journal entries include:
■ AL: Accrued liabilities (deductions, benefits)
■ AT: Accrued liabilities (taxes)
■ AW: Accrued wages - debit entry
■ CF: Burden offset (clearing) - Fringe - debit entry
■ CT: Burden offset (clearing) - Taxes - debit entry
■ DA: Auto-deposit amount
■ DP: Printed computer payments
■ IC: Intercompany settlements
11.1.10 Document Type T2 - Labor Distribution Journal Entries

The system creates journal entries for document type T2 directly from timecards for
labor expenses and associated offsets for accrued wages. You can also generate journal
entries to allocate an estimated or flat burden expense.
The system creates T2 journal entries during the payroll cycle or when you generate
timecard journal entries using the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time Entry system.
Four possible general ledger dates exist for journal entries created during the payroll
cycle:
■ The work date, which is the work date on the timecard.

■ The period ending date, which is the pay period ending date.
■ The cost period can be used with the creation of payroll journal entries for a
transition period.
Journal entries for those timecards with work dates falling into the preceding
accounting period are assigned a general ledger date equal to the last day of the
preceding accounting period. Journal entries for those timecards with work dates
in the succeeding period are assigned a general ledger date equal to the
pay-period ending date in pre-payroll processing.
■ An override date can be used when you submit the journal entry creation job.
The date that you define becomes the general ledger date for all journal entries.
If you use Payroll, define which general ledger date to use for T2s in the payroll
journal entry step of the payroll cycle. When you generate timecard journal entries
using the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time Entry system, you must specify whether
the system uses the general ledger date or the system date in the processing options
for the Generate Timecard Entries program (R052901).
The specific journal types used for labor distribution journal entries are as follows:
■ AW: Accrued wages - credit entry
■ FB: Flat burden expense - debit entry
■ FC: Flat burden offset (Clearing) - credit entry
■ LD: Labor distribution straight time - debit entry
■ PR: Labor distribution premium time - debit entry
11.1.11 Document Type T3 - Actual Burden Journal Entries

The system calculates company-paid payroll taxes, insurance, and benefits on an
employee-by-employee basis. These expenses are collectively referred to as burden.
Actual burden journal entries are created when the employee burden expenses are
allocated to expense accounts based on the individual timecards entered for each
employee.
The system generates journal entries for document type T3 either during the payroll
cycle or when you generate timecard journal entries using the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Time Entry system. Actual burden journal entries have the same
general ledger date as the associated labor expense. The specific journal entry types
used for actual burden journal entries are as follows:
■ BF: Fringe burden (benefits and accruals) - debit entry
■ BT: Payroll tax and insurance burden (PTI) - debit entry
■ CF: Burden offset (clearing) - Fringe - credit entry
■ CT: Burden offset (clearing) - Taxes - credit entry
11.1.12 Document Type T4 - Labor Billing Distribution Journal Entries

Document type T4 journal entries are for labor billings (also known as recharge) and
associated revenue offsets.

You use T4 labor billings for:

■ Billing internally
For example, charging other departments for maintenance people or charging a
supervisor's billing rate to a job
■ Billing externally
For example, service billing for consulting services
The system creates these journal entries from the billing rate value. To create T4s for an
associated timecard, you must set Record Type (originally set up in the Employee
Master table) on the timecard to one of these settings:
2:Payroll and recharge processing
3:Recharge processing only
The system creates journal entries for labor billing distribution from timecards during
the payroll cycle or when you generate timecard journal entries using the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Time Entry system.
Four possible general ledger dates exist for journal entries that are created during the
payroll cycle:
transition period.
If you use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system, define which general ledger
date to use for T4s in the payroll journal entry step of the payroll cycle. When you
generate timecard journal entries using the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time Entry
system, you must specify whether the system uses the general ledger date or the
system date in the processing options for the Generate Timecard Entries program
(R052901).
The specific journal types used for labor-billing distribution journal entries are as
follows:
■ RD: Labor billing (recharge) distribution - debit entry
■ RO: Labor billing (revenue) offset - credit entry
11.1.13 Document Type T5 - Equipment Distribution Journal Entries

Document type T5 journal entries designate billings associated with the use of
equipment and the offsets for equipment revenue.
The system creates journal entries for equipment distribution from timecards.
Equipment distribution journal entries can be generated during either the payroll cycle
or when you generate timecard journal entries in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time
and Labor system.
Four possible general ledger dates exist for journal entries created during the payroll
cycle:
transition period.
If you use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system, define which general ledger
date to use for T5s in the payroll journal entry step of the payroll cycle. When you
generate timecard journal entries using the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and
Labor system, you must specify whether the system uses the general ledger date or the
system date in the processing options for Generate Timecard Entries program
(R052901).
The specific journal entry types used for equipment distribution journal entries are as
follows:
■ ED: Equipment billing distribution - debit entry
■ EO: Equipment billing (revenue) offset - credit entry
Note: You must set up the credit entry in the equipment AAIs. See
Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions for Fixed Assets in the
Equipment Billing Guide for instructions.
11.1.14 Document Type T6 - Payroll Accruals and Deferrals

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system enables you to specify an accrual factor
for transition pay periods instead of using the cost-period option of creating payroll
journal entries. This feature enables you to use the accrual factor to accrue a portion of
payroll expenses in the previous month and defer the expense to the next month. Prior
period entries are made to the last day of the prior accounting period.
The journal entry types for T6 are the same as those for T2, T3, T4, and T5.
The system creates journal entries for document-type T6 during the payroll cycle. You
enter the accrual factor (percentage) in the journal entries step of the payroll cycle.
The accrual entries have a general ledger date that is equal to the last date of the prior
accounting period. The reference number is equal to the journal entry type plus the
original general ledger date.
The deferred entries have a general ledger date that is equal to the date of the original
entries.

11.1.15 Document Type T7 - Payroll Vouchers

Document-type T7 journal entries designate accounts payable vouchers.
Document-type T7s are created during the payroll cycle. All T7 journal entries have
the same general ledger date, which is the payment date.
The specific journal-entry types used for payroll voucher journal entries are:
■ AL: Accrued liabilities - Credit entry
■ AT: Accrued taxes - Credit entry
Note: No AAIs exist for T7s. The account numbers are assigned the
same way that T1 account numbers are assigned.
11.1.16 Example: Journal Entry with Document and Journal-Entry Types

This example of a payroll cycle journal entry is based on these simple payroll
conditions:
■ Employee: Home Company = 1, Home Business Unit = 25, Union = 1000
■ Timecard: January 28, 1998 (Pay Code 001) 1,000 USD
■ Payroll Taxes and Insurance (P.T.I.): FICA (Tax Type D & E) 70 USD
■ Deductions: Savings Bond (Ded Code 2000) 50 USD
■ Benefits: Union 1000 (Ben Code 6000) 30 USD
■ Payment Date: February 5, 1998
Type T2 - Labor Distribution Journal Entries:
Journal-Entry
Type Type Date Account Description DR CR
T2 AW 01/28/98 1.4205 Wages Payable 0 1000
T2 LD 01/28/98 25.8115 Labor Expenses 1000 Blank
Labor Expenses
Blank Blank Blank Blank TOTALS 1000 1000
Type T3 - Actual Burden Journal Entries:
Journal-Entry
T3 BF 01/28/98 25.8146 Union Fringe 30 Blank
T3 BT 01/28/98 25.8135 FICA Burden 70 Blank
T3 CF 01/28/98 1.4333.FR Burden Clearing - 0 30
Fringe
T3 CT 01/28/98 1.4333.TX Burden Clearing - 0 70
Tax
Type T1 - Disbursement Journal Entries:
Journal-Entry
T1 AW 02/05/98 1.4205 Wages Payable 1000 Blank
T1 DA 02/05/98 1.1110.PAY Cash in Bank 0 880
T1 AL 02/05/98 1.4316 Savings Bonds 0 50
T1 AL 02/05/98 1.4332 Union Fringe 0 30
T1 AT 02/05/98 1.4212.EE FICA Employee 0 70
T1 AT 02/05/98 1.4212.ER FICA Employer 0 70
T1 CF 02/05/98 1.4333.FR Burden Clearing - 30 Blank
Fringe
T1 CT 02/05/98 1.4333.TX Burden Clearing - Tax 70 Blank
11.1.17 The Search Criteria That the System Uses

Each time that the system creates a journal entry, it follows a hierarchy of search
criteria to determine which distribution account to debit or credit. The system begins
the search with basic data related to the type of accounting entry, referred to as the
search argument. The system creates a search argument from the system data, such as
the timecard, and searches the accounting rules tables for the table entry that best
matches the search argument information.
On the first search, the system uses data appropriate for that table and looks for a
match on all fields in the search criteria section of the form (the entire search
argument). Then one by one, the system drops elements from the search argument
until it finds a matching table entry. At the lowest level, the system tries to match only
the journal type. In addition, you can have a line in an accounting instruction table
that has no search criteria other than the journal type. This is the default line.
The system first searches the rules for a specific company. If it finds no applicable rules
(matches) for that company, it continues with the rules for Company 00000.
Company 00000 is the default company in all of the AAI tables. Always start by setting
up generic entries in Company 00000. Such entries provide a source for default
accounts for all of the various types of journal entries. After you complete table entries
for Company 00000, you can set up other companies. Entries for other companies
should only be exceptions to the generic rules set up under Company 00000.
Every AAI table includes the Journal Type field, which contains one or more codes
identifying the type of journal entry. Each table has a hard-coded set of journal types.
Rules for some journal types must be set up. Other rules are optional.
11.1.18 Intercompany Settlements

If the organization consists of multiple companies and employees sometimes work in
companies other than their home companies, intercompany settlements enable you to
expense labor to one company and the associated liabilities to the home company.
Intercompany settlements keep the payroll journal entries for each company in balance
by document type. These journal entries ensure that each company's net balance
equals zero or that the debits equal the credits.
Before you can set up AAIs for intercompany settlements, you should verify that the
chart of accounts contains intercompany settlement accounts. After verifying the chart

of accounts, you set up AAIs for intercompany settlements. After you set up AAIs for
intercompany settlements, you should create a payroll ID that generates intercompany
settlements in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system rather than in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne General Accounting system.
11.1.19 Example: Intercompany Settlements Using Document Type T2

In this example, assume that an employee, whose home company is Company 1,
works in Company 50, business unit 501. The employee's gross wages are 1,000.00. All
liabilities are posted to the home company.
11.1.20 Intercompany Settlements: Scenario One

Assuming that you have not set up intercompany settlements in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Payroll system, the journal entries for the employee are:
■ In balance by document type across all companies
■ Out of balance by company
■ Out of balance by document type within a company
These tables illustrate the document type T2 (labor distribution) journal entries for the
employee.
Company 1:
Document
Type Journal Type Account Description Debit Credit
T2 AW 1.4205 Wages Payable 0 1000
Company 50:
Document
T2 LD 501.8115 Labor Expense 1000 0
11.1.21 Intercompany Settlements: Scenario Two

Assuming that you have set up intercompany settlements in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Payroll system, the entries for the employee are:
■ In balance by company
■ In balance by document type within a company
These tables illustrate document type T2 (labor distribution) journal entries for the
employees in each company.
Company 1:
Document
T2 AW 1.4205 Wages Payable 0 1000
T2 IC 1.1291.00050 Intercompany 1000 0
Company 50:
Document
T2 LD 501.8115 Labor Expense 1000 0
T2 IC 50.1291.00001 Intercompany 0 1000
11.1.22 How Do You Generate Intercompany Settlements?

To generate intercompany settlements for payroll transactions, the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Payroll system must be integrated with the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
General Accounting system. You can set up either of these systems to generate
intercompany settlements for payroll transactions. You select the method that works
best for the environment.
When you use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Accounting system to generate
intercompany settlements, the system processes all of the balancing journal entries
through a single hub (main) company. The hub company is the same for all employees.
You can designate the hub company in the intercompany constants for the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne General Accounting system. If you do not designate a hub company,
the post program uses the first company that it encounters as the hub company.
Therefore, the hub company might not be the employee's home company.
When you use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system to generate
intercompany settlements for payroll transactions, the system creates the balancing
entries before posting journal entries to the general ledger. The JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Payroll system ignores the intercompany constants for the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne General Accounting system and designates the employee's home
company as the hub (main) company for processing balancing entries.
Note: Intercompany settlements in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne

Payroll system apply to document types T1, T2, T3, T4, and T6. They
do not apply to document types T5 and T7.
11.1.23 Verifying the Chart of Accounts

Before you can set up AAIs for intercompany settlements, you should verify that the
chart of accounts contains intercompany accounts.
All intercompany accounts must use the same object number. The subsidiary (the third
part of the account number) can represent either the company from or the company to
which intercompany amounts are due.
For example, this table shows intercompany accounts for companies 1, 7, and 50,
where 1291 is the object account for intercompany settlements:
Company 1 Company 7 Company 50

1.1291.00007 7.1291.00001 50.1291.00001
1.1291.00050 7.1291.00050 50.1291.00007
You must use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Accounting system to set up the
accounts. Typically, you verify the chart of accounts from the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne General Accounting system. If you do not have access to the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne General Accounting system, you can verify the chart of
accounts from the AAI tables in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system. To

verify the chart of accounts from the AAI tables, select the Help function for the
business unit, object, or subsidiary fields.
11.1.24 Setting Up AAIs for Intercompany Settlements

You use the Dr/Cr - Accruals/Clearing AAI table to set up the AAIs for generating
intercompany settlements. You define journal types for intercompany settlements so
that the system tracks intercompany transactions for each company in the
organization. You should set up intercompany settlements for Company 00000 only.
When you set up AAIs for intercompany settlements, you do not enter a business unit.
When the system creates journal entries for intercompany accounts, it enters Company
00000, in which the journal entry is created as the business unit.
11.1.25 Setting Up a Payroll ID for Intercompany Settlements

After you set up AAIs for intercompany settlements, you should set up a payroll ID
for intercompany settlements. When you use this payroll ID to process a payroll cycle,
the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system, rather than the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne General Accounting system, generates intercompany settlements before
posting them to the general ledger.
Use this payroll ID to process payroll for employees who worked in companies other
than their home companies. When you process this payroll ID, the system
automatically creates balancing journal entries for intercompany settlements.
11.1.26 Journal Entry Setup by AAI Table

For journal entries to be calculated correctly, you must set up the correct journal types
in each Automatic Accounting Instruction (AAI) table. These tables list all of the
journal types that you must set up to process time and labor journal entries
completely.
This table lists all of the AAI tables, and their corresponding numbers. For example,
the Debit-Labor/Billing/Equipment table is table 1. These numbers are used in the
subsequent tables to specify the AAI table in which you must set up each journal type.
AAI table numbers are:
AAI Application Name Application Number

Debit-Labor/Billing/Equipment Table 1
Debit-Burden/Premium - Labor Dist Table 2
Credit-Cash Bank Account Table 3
Credit-Liabilities Table 4
Credit-Labor Billings Table 5
Dr/Cr - Accruals/Clearing Table 6
These tables list the journal types that must be set up for each type of payroll journal
entry. The tables are organized by journal entry document type (T1 though T7), and
include this information for each journal type:
■ Description - The name of the journal type.
■ AAI Table - The specific AAI table where you must set up the journal type.
■ Entry - This specifies whether the journal type is used to create debit or credit
journal entries.
This table lists the T-1 payroll disbursement journal entries:
Journal Type Description AAI Table Entry

AL Actual Liabilities 4 Credit
(Deductions, Benefits)
AT Actual Taxes 4 Credit
AW Accrued Wages 6 Debit
CF Burden Offset (Clearing) - 6 Debit
Fringe
CT Burden Offset (Clearing) - 6 Debit
Taxes
DP Disbursed Amount 3 Credit
(Computer Checks)
DA Disbursed Amount (Auto 3 Credit
Deposit)
This table lists the T-2 payroll distribution journal entries:

AW Accrued Wages 6 Credit
FB Flat Burden Expense 2 Debit
FC Flat Burden Offset 6 Credit
(Clearing)
LD Labor Distribution 1 Debit
Straight Time
PR Labor Distribution 2 Debit
Premium Time
This table lists the T-3 actual burden journal entries:

CF Burden Offset (Clearing) - 6 Credit
Fringe
CT Burden Offset (Clearing) - 6 Credit
Taxes
BF Fringe Burden (Benefits & 2 Debit
Accruals)
BT Tax and Insurance 2 Debit
Burden
This table lists the T-4 labor billing distribution journal entries:

RD Labor Billing (Recharge) 1 Debit
Distribution


RO Labor Billing (Revenue) 5 Credit
Offset
This table lists the T-5 equipment distribution journal entries:

ED Equipment Billing 1 Debit
Distribution
EO Equipment Billing See note. Credit
(Revenue) Offset
Note: EO can be set up as the Revenue Credit on the Depreciation

Information Form in the Equipment Master or the General Ledger
AAIs or both.
This table lists the T-6 payroll accruals/deferrals entries:

AW Accrued Wages 6 Credit
CF Burden Clearing - Fringe 6 Debit
CT Burden Clearing - Taxes 6 Debit
FC Flat Burden Clearing 6 Credit
IC Inter-Company 6 Debit & Credit
Settlements
This table lists the T-7 payroll voucher journal entries:

AL Actual Liabilities 4 Debit
(Deductions, Benefits,
and so on)
AT Actual Taxes 4 Debit
11.1.27 Prerequisite
Set up intercompany accounts in the chart of accounts.
See Also: Processing Journal Entries.

■
■ "Working with the Payroll Cycle, Working with Pro Forma Journal
Entries" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Payroll
■ Setting Up AAIs for Accruals and Clearing.
■ "Setting Up Payroll Cycle Information, Setting Up the Payroll
Cycle Workbench, Creating a Payroll ID" in the JD Edwards
Setting Up AAIs for Labor, Billings, and Equipment Distribution
11.2 Setting Up AAIs for Labor, Billings, and Equipment Distribution

This section includes an overview of labor, billing, and equipment distribution AAIs,
■ Set processing options for the Debit-Labor/Billing/Equipment program.
■ Set up AAIs for labor, billing, and equipment distribution.
11.2.1 Understanding AAIs for Labor, Billings, and Equipment Distribution

You set up AAIs for direct labor, billings, and equipment distribution to define
accounts for transactions related to labor, labor billing (recharge), and the use of
equipment. You do this by defining search criteria for employee or timecard
information and the account number information for the system to use in making the
labor, billings, and equipment journal entries. All of these transactions are related
directly to timecard entries.
You can set up AAIs separately for each company. Always set up generic instructions
in Company 00000 first. When searching for AAIs, the system searches for a specific
company. If it finds no AAIs for the specific company, it uses the AAIs defined for
Company 00000.
The minimum information that you need to set up an AAI is the journal type. When
you set up direct labor, billings, and equipment distribution AAIs, these items are the
minimum setup requirements for journal types:
■ Payroll labor distribution (LD) is required if you use employee hourly and salary
rates.
■ Labor billing distribution (RD) is required if you use billing (recharge) rates.
■ Equipment distribution (ED) is required if you use equipment rates.
The system accesses this AAI table during time entry as well as during pre-payroll
when it creates timecards for autopay employees. The system uses the values from the
timecard, which obtains the values from the Employee Master table (F060116), other
sources, or the overrides that you supply. You use these search criteria fields to assign
account numbers based on the specific timecard information.
Note: If you enter an account number in an AAI table, you must first
set up that account number in the chart of accounts. When you enter
timecards for employees, the system enables you to enter any account
number that is set up in the chart of accounts, regardless of whether
the account is set up in the AAI tables. When you run the journal
entries step of the payroll cycle process, you will receive errors on the
Journal Batch Proof Report for any timecards that contain account
numbers that were not set up in the AAI tables. You must either
change the account number on the timecard to reflect an account
number that is set up in the AAI table, or you must add the account
number to the AAI table. After you make the account number
corrections, you must reprocess the timecards through pre-payroll.
11.2.1.1 Search Criteria for Labor Distribution

The system uses certain fields as search criteria to determine a valid account for
distribution of labor, billings, and equipment entries. The system searches these AAIs
for a specific company:

■ On the first pass, the system compares the time entry record's business unit, union,
job type, job step, and pay type to the search criteria defined in the AAI for labor
distribution and attempts to match the AAI search criteria to the appropriate
journal type.
■ On each successive pass the system drops a value and uses a different combination
of data fields for the search criteria.
■ Finally, if no matches exist in the rules for the specific company, the system
searches the rules for Company 00000.
This example identifies the search criteria that the system uses to match information
from the timecard for a specific company:
Business Unit Union Job Type Job Step Pay Type Journal Type
100 3000 CARP APPR 1 LD
100 3000 CARP APPR (omitted) LD
100 3000 CARP (omitted) 1 LD
100 3000 CARP (omitted) (omitted) LD
100 3000 (omitted) (omitted) 1 LD
100 3000 (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) LD
100 (omitted) CARP APPR 1 LD
100 (omitted) CARP APPR (omitted) LD
100 (omitted) CARP (omitted) 1 LD
100 (omitted) CARP (omitted) (omitted) LD
100 (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) 1 LD
100 (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) LD
(omitted) 3000 CARP APPR 1 LD
(omitted) 3000 CARP APPR (omitted) LD
(omitted) 3000 CARP (omitted) 1 LD
(omitted) 3000 CARP (omitted) (omitted) LD
(omitted) 3000 (omitted) (omitted) 1 LD
(omitted) 3000 (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) LD
(omitted) (omitted) CARP APPR 1 LD
(omitted) (omitted) CARP APPR (omitted) LD
(omitted) (omitted) CARP (omitted) 1 LD
(omitted) (omitted) CARP (omitted) (omitted) LD
(omitted) (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) 1 LD
(omitted) (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) LD
This example identifies additional search criteria that the system can use to match
information from the timecard for Company 00000:
■ On the first pass, the system compares the time entry record's business unit, union,
job type, job step, and pay type to the rule's search criteria and attempts to match
these search criteria fields to the appropriate journal type.
■ On each successive pass, the system drops a value and uses a different
combination of data fields as search criteria.
searches the rules for the default journal type, LD.
Business Unit Union Job Type Job Step Payment Type Journal Type
(omitted) 3000 CARP APPR 1 LD
(omitted) 3000 CARP APPR (omitted) LD
(omitted) 3000 CARP (omitted) 1 LD
(omitted) 3000 CARP (omitted) (omitted) LD
(omitted) 3000 (omitted) (omitted) 1 LD
(omitted) 3000 (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) LD
(omitted) (omitted) CARP APPR 1 LD
(omitted) (omitted) CARP APPR (omitted) LD
(omitted) (omitted) CARP (omitted) 1 LD
(omitted) (omitted) CARP (omitted) (omitted) LD
(omitted) (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) 1 LD
(omitted) (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) (omitted) LD
11.2.2 Prerequisite
Set up the processing options to add a single account or multiple accounts at a time.
You use the same steps to set up AAIs whether you are adding single or multiple
accounts. This task demonstrates how to set up AAIs for multiple accounts.
11.2.3 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Labor, Billing, and Equipment Distribution

Work With Accounting JE W069043B Automatic Accounting Review existing AAI
Rules - Instruction Setup menu table entries.
Labor/Billing/Equipmen (G05BT4), Debit -
t Labor/Billing/Equipmen
t
Revise Multiple W069043C Click Add on Work With Set up AAIs for Labor,
Labor/Billing/Equipmen Accounting JE Billing, and Equipment
t Rules-Labor/Billing/Equ Distribution.
ipment.
11.2.4 Setting Processing Options for the Debit-Labor/Billing/Equipment Program

(P069043)
reports.

Setting Up AAIs for Burden and Premium Labor Distribution
11.2.4.1 Default
1. Select an entry form.
Specify the form that the system uses when you select a record or select the Add
button. Values are:
1: Multiple Entry
Blank: Single Entry
11.2.5 Setting Up AAIs for Labor, Billing, and Equipment Distribution

Access the Revise Multiple Labor/Billing/Equipment form.
Journal Type
Enter a code that represents the type of transaction for which an account is to be
derived.
Obj Acct (object account)

Enter the portion of a general ledger account that refers to the division of the Cost
Code (for example, labor, materials, and equipment) into subcategories. For example,
you can divide the Cost Code for labor into regular time, premium time, and burden.
Note: If you use a flexible chart of accounts and the object account is
set to 6 digits, you should normally use all 6 digits. For example,
entering 000456 is not the same as entering 456 because if you enter
456 the system enters three blank spaces to fill a 6-digit object.
Job Type
Enter a UDC (07/G) that defines the jobs within the organization. You can associate
pay and benefit information with a job type and apply that information to the
employees who are linked to that job type.

1000 to 9999.
Sub (subset)
Indicates a subset of an object account. Subsidiary accounts include detailed records of
the accounting activity for an object account.
Note: If you are using a flexible chart of accounts and the object
account is set to six digits, you must use all six digits. For example,
entering 000456 is not the same as entering 456 because, if you enter
456, the system enters three blank spaces to fill a six-digit object.
11.3 Setting Up AAIs for Burden and Premium Labor Distribution

This section includes an overview of burden and premium labor AAIs, and discusses
how to:
■ Set processing options for Processing Options for Debit-Burden/Premium-Labor
Dist program.
■ Set up AAIs for burden and premium labor.

■ Set up company burden rules.
■ Set up business unit burden rules.
11.3.1 Understanding AAIs for Burden and Premium Labor Distribution

You set up AAIs to define accounts for actual burden, flat burden, and premium time
transactions for labor distribution. You can select a hierarchy method that controls the
search criteria by which the system searches for accounts.
You can set up AAIs separately for each company. The system searches first for a
specific company. If it finds no instructions for the specific company, it searches for
Company 00000. Always set up generic instructions in Company 00000.
Burden is defined as the direct expenses that a company incurs for an employee in
addition to wages. These expenses include:
■ Payroll taxes and insurance (PTI) - Company-paid taxes and insurance, such as
workers compensation insurance
■ Fringe benefits - Company-paid benefits, such as health insurance and company
contributions to a 401(k) or RRSP plan
This table provides information that you should consider before you set up AAIs that
are associated with burden:
Considerations Additional Information

Flat burden: ■ Is an estimate that is a predetermined percentage of an
employee's gross wages. This estimate is approximate
to actual burden costs.
■ Distributes the expense in the same amount throughout
the entire year.
■ Can be calculated per employee, union, or business
unit for each timecard during time entry.
■ Is not calculated for lump sum amounts.
■ Is a median calculation of actual burden for the year.
Actual burden: ■ Is heavier at the beginning of the year until limits are
reached. Examples in the U.S. are FICA, FUI, SUI, and
SDI.
■ Can be turned on and off by company to complete the
calculation.

Considerations Additional Information

Burden considerations for Time and Labor Time and Labor calculates flat burden instead of actual
burden.
When you set up flat burden distribution debit instructions,
you must, at a minimum, include the FB (Flat Burden)
journal type code.
When you set up premium labor debit instructions, you
must, at a minimum, include the PR (Payroll premium labor
distribution) journal type code. You can specify whether the
system splits the premium portion of overtime and creates
separate journal entries for straight time versus premium
time.
When you set up actual burden distribution debit
instructions, you must, at a minimum, include these default
journal type codes:
■ BF: Burden fringe benefits for actual burden
Use this journal type for the burden fringe benefits that
you do not want to distribute separately. The system
uses the account number associated with this journal
type when it does not find an entry for a specific fringe
benefit.
■ BT: Burden taxes for actual burden
Use this journal type for the burden taxes that you do
not want to distribute separately. The system uses the
account number associated with this journal type when
it does not find an entry for a specific tax.
11.3.1.1 Search Criteria for Burden Fringe

The system uses certain fields as search criteria to determine a valid account for the
distribution of burden fringe entries. The system searches the AAIs for a specific
company according to this sequence:
1. On the first pass, the system compares the time entry record's business unit, object,
subsidiary, PDBA code, and journal type to the search criteria defined in the AAI
for burden fringe, and attempts to match the AAI search criteria to the appropriate
journal type.
2. On the second pass, the system searches for business unit, object, subsidiary, and
journal type.
3. On each successive pass, the system drops a value and uses a different
combination of data fields for the search criteria.
4. Finally, if no matches exist in the rules for the specific company, the system
This table illustrates how the system can match information from a timecard for a
specific company for burden fringe:
Timecard Timecard
Business Unit Timecard Object Subsidiary PDBA Code Journal Type
1 1340 02200 1000 Blank
1 1340 02200 Blank BF
1 1340 Blank 1000 Blank
1 1340 Blank Blank BF
Timecard Timecard
Blank 1340 Blank 1000 Blank
Blank 1340 Blank Blank BF
This table illustrates how the system can match information from a timecard for
Company 00000.
Timecard Timecard
Blank 1340 02200 1000 Blank
Blank 1340 02200 Blank BF
11.3.1.2 Company Burden Rules

You can set up company burden rules to split the premium portion of overtime into a
separate journal entry. You must set up company burden rules for a specific company.
You cannot use Company 00000.
11.3.1.3 Business Unit Burden Rules

If you do not set up burden rules, the system creates T3s, but it does not write records
to the Burden Distribution worktable (F07241) during the payroll process. If you set up
burden rules, the system populates the Burden Distribution worktable (F07241), and
updates the Burden Distribution table (F0724) during the final update step of the
payroll process.
11.3.2 Prerequisite
accounts. This task demonstrates how to set up AAIs for multiple accounts.
To set up business unit burden rules, you must set up each business unit for which you
want to track burden information. You set up this information in the Business Unit
Constants program (P059051A).
See "Setting Up System Options" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Human
Capital Management Fundamentals Implementation Guide.
"Setting Up Business Unit Information" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Human Capital Management Fundamentals Implementation Guide

11.3.3 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Burden and Premium Labor Distribution

Work With Burden W069043B Automatic Accounting Review existing AAI
Distribution AAIs Instruction Setup entries.
(G05BT4), Debit -
Burden/Premium-Labor
Dist.
Revise Multiple Burden W069043C Click Add on Work With Set up AAIs for Burden
Distribution AAIs Burden Distribution and Premium Labor.
AAIs.
Revise Company Burden W069042E Select a company in the Set up company burden
Distribution Rules detail area and then select rules.
CO Burden Rules from
the Row menu on Work
With Burden Distribution
AAIs.
Revise Business Unit W069042D Select BU Burden Rules Set up business unit
Burden Rules from the Form menu on burden rules.
Work With Burden
Distribution AAIs.
11.3.4 Setting Processing Options for the Debit-Burden/Premium-Labor Dist Program

(P069042)
reports.
These processing options are identical to the processing options for
Debit-Labor/Billing/Equipment Program (P069043).
11.3.5 Setting Up AAIs for Burden and Premium Labor Distribution

Access the Revise Multiple Burden Distribution AAIs form.
HM (hierarchy method)
This code is used to retrieve the business unit and subsidiary accounts for burden
distribution. The Hierarchy Method controls the Business Unit and the Subsidiary
values.
The available methods are:
■ Business unit: Employee Home Business Unit unless a table override exists
Subsidiary: No Subsidiary.
Subledger/Type: No Subledger or Subledger Type.
Subsidiary: Labor Distribution Subsidiary unless a table override.
Subledger/Type: Labor Distribution Subledger and Type.
■ Business unit: Labor Business Unit unless a table override exists.
Subsidiary: No Subsidiary.

Obj (object)
Indicates portion of a general ledger account that refers to the division of the Cost
Timecard Obj (timecard object)

Indicates object account where labor is posted. All object accounts which might have
wages posted to them must be entered into this field. This is the major element in
determining where the corresponding burden is to be posted. If a business unit is
defined, this field represents the unique labor object accounts associated to the job
To set up Company 00000, type 00000 in this field; otherwise, to set up a specific
company, enter a valid object.
Timecard Bus. Unit (timecard business unit)

Identifies the Business Unit the system searches to determine the accounting
distribution. When defining the default rules (Company 00000), leave the Business
Unit blank for the system to retrieve the Business Unit number entered on the
Employee timecard, or from the Employee's Home Business Unit.
You can use the Skip to Business Unit field in the header part of the screen to specify
the Business Unit to be displayed first in the lower part of the screen.
Timecard Sub (timecard subsidiary)

Identifies subsidiary account associated with the labor object account. If both a Labor
object and subsidiary account are defined, the combination may determine the burden
accounts to be used in creating the distribution. This method will accommodate
unconventional coding of the cost codes in a job cost environment, for example, the
usage of cost codes to define a type of labor, versus using just the object account.
Sub (subset)
Indicates subset of an object account. Subsidiary accounts include detailed records of

11.3.6 Setting Up Company Burden Rules

Access the Revise Company Burden Distribution Rules form.
Figure 11–2 Revise Company Burden Distribution Rules form
Do you wish to split the premium portion of overtime on labor entries?

Specify whether you wish to split the premium portion of overtime on labor entries.
Values are:
Y: Yes
N: No
Do you wish to omit Actual Burden Distribution Journal Entries (Type T3)?
Specify whether you wish to omit Actual Burden Distribution Journal Entries (Type
T3). Values are:
Y: Yes
N: No
11.3.7 Setting Up Business Unit Burden Rules

Access the Revise Business Unit Burden Rules form.
Setting Up AAIs for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution
Figure 11–3 Revise Business Unit Burden Rules form
Burden Rule
Enter a code that determines how the system handles burden journal entries. Actual
burden expenses are initially grouped into burden clearing accounts in the T1 section
of the P/R journals. The user has the option of relieving these clearing entries and
distributing burden expense based on where the direct labor was charged. This
distribution of burden expense is done in the T3 section of the P/R journals. The user
also has the option of creating a fixed audit trail for how each component of burden
was distributed per individual timecard. This detail audit trail is maintained in the
F0624 file, which is used by the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system to produce
Job Billing Registers. These rule codes control the process:
0: Do not create T3 Burden Expense entries for the Business Unit.
1: Create T3 Burden Expense entries but not the F0624 audit records.
2: Create T3 Burden Expense entries and associated F0624 audit records.
3: Same as 1 but reverse out the Flat Burden posted thru Daily Post.
4: Same as 2 but reverse out the Flat Burden posted thru Daily Post.
11.4 Setting Up AAIs for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution

This section includes an overview of cash-in-bank account AAIs, and discusses how to
set them up.
11.4.1 Understanding AAIs for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution

You set up AAIs for cash-in-bank account distribution to define accounts for payroll
disbursements. You can define different accounts for these types of disbursements:
■ Cash disbursements
■ Computer checks
■ Automatic deposits

■ Interim manual checks

■ Interim computer checks
When you set up cash-in-bank account distribution instructions, you must, at a
minimum, set up the default journal type DP. You can use other journal types when
other types of payments are drawn on different bank accounts.
If you create automatic deposits for interim payments, you must set up journal type
DD. The Payroll Journal Proof/Edit Report (R05229) lists payments processed with
journal type DD as journal type DI. These payments are also created in the F0911 table
under journal type DI.
The system derives cash-in-bank account numbers during pre-payroll processing. If
the cash account is incorrect, after correcting the cash account, you must rerun
pre-payroll.
This table lists the various journal types and their purpose (the journal type represents
the type of payment):
Journal Type Purpose

DA Automatic deposits
DC Currency disbursement (cash)
DD Interim automatic deposits
DI Interim computer checks
DM Interim manual checks
DP Printed computer checks from payroll cycle
DF Create separate payments by business unit
You set up DF entries only if you want the system to create separate payments for each
business unit in which an employee works. To generate separate payments for each
business unit, you must create an AAI entry using the DF journal type for each
business unit in the organization. Each of these entries must also have a unique
account number. Journal type DF is not used to derive the account number for payroll
payments. Journal type DF is used to derive temporary account numbers that are
unique for each business unit.
For example, if an employee works in two different business units during a pay
period, you would set up an entry in the Cash-in-Bank Account AAI table for each
business unit using journal type DF. You would also assign a unique account number
to each of these entries. Then by referencing the business unit on each of the
employee's timecards, the system would create two separate payments for the
employee.
Temporary account numbers from the DF entries are used to create separate payments
in one of these ways:
■ Using the Time Entry Interim Generator, the DF account number is assigned to the
GL Bank Account field (GLBA) on the payment record in the Payment File table
(F07350) when the timecard is added to the F06116 table.
■ Separate payments are generated for payment records with different DF account
numbers.
■ When processing regular timecards, the DF account number is assigned to the GL

Bank Account field (GLBA) on the payment record in the Payment File table
(F07350) during pre-payroll.
■ Separate payments are generated for payment records with different DF account
numbers.
These account numbers are used only during pre-payroll to determine whether
separate payments are necessary. The actual cash-in-bank account for the payments is
created using the DA, DC, DD, DI, DM, and DP entries in the AAI table.
11.4.1.1 Search Criteria for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution

distribution of Cash-in-Bank during pre-payroll processing. The system uses this
sequence to search for AAIs for a specific company:
1. On the first pass, the system compares the time entry record's business unit and
journal type to the search criteria defined in the AAI for Cash-in-Bank accounts
and attempts to match the AAI search criteria to the appropriate journal type.
2. On each successive pass, the system locates either the business unit or the journal
type.
This table illustrates how the system matches the type of payment and the home
business unit for a specific company:
Business Unit Journal Type

1 DA
1 DP
Blank DA
Blank DP
This table illustrates how the system can match the type of payment for Company
00000:
Business Unit Journal Type

Blank DA
Blank DP
When the Business unit = none, the journal type can be DA or DP.
11.4.2 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution

Work With W069040A Automatic Accounting Review existing AAI entries.
Accounting JE Rules - Instruction Setup (G05BT4),
Cash/Bank Account Credit-Cash Bank Account.

Setting Up AAIs for Liabilities

Revise Multiple W069040C Click Add from Work With Set up AAIs for
Cash/Bank Account Accounting JE Cash-in-Bank Account
Rules-Cash/Bank Account. Distribution.
11.4.3 Setting Up AAIs for Cash-in-Bank Account Distribution

Access the Revise Multiple Cash/Bank Account form.
Company
Enter a code that identifies a specific organization, fund, or other reporting entity. The
company code must already exist in the Company Constants table (F0010) and must
identify a reporting entity that has a complete balance sheet. At this level, you can
have intercompany transactions.
Note: You can use company 00000 for default values such as dates
and automatic accounting instructions. You cannot use company
00000 for transaction entries.
Journal Type
Enter a code that represents the type of transaction for which an account is to be
derived.
Obj Acct (object account)

Indicates portion of a general ledger account that refers to the division of the Cost
Sub (subset)
Indicates subset of an object account. Subsidiary accounts include detailed records of
11.5 Setting Up AAIs for Liabilities

This section includes an overview of liabilities and discusses how to set up AAIs for
liabilities.
11.5.1 Understanding AAIs for Liabilities

You set up AAIs for liabilities to define accounts for the payroll disbursements journal.
At a minimum, you must set up these default journal type codes when you set up
AAIs for liabilities:
■ AL - Accrued liabilities for deductions and benefits
■ AT - Accrued liabilities for payroll taxes
11.5.1.1 Search Criteria for Liabilities

distribution of liabilities. The system uses this sequence to search for AAIs for a
specific company:
1. On the first pass, the system compares the home business unit PDBA code and
journal type of the time entry record to the search criteria defined in the AAI for
Liabilities and attempts to match the AAI search criteria to the appropriate journal
type.
2. On each successive pass, the system uses the business unit or the journal type.
This table illustrates the fields that the system uses as search criteria for a specific
company. For tax liabilities, the system matches the journal type and, optionally, the
employee's business unit. For PDBA liabilities, the system matches the PDBA code
and, optionally, the employee's business unit.
Business Unit PDBA Code Journal Type

1 Blank H
1 Blank AT
Blank Blank H
Blank Blank AT
1 5000 Blank
1 Blank AL
Blank 5000 Blank
Blank Blank AL
This table illustrates the fields that the system uses as search criteria for Company
00000. The system matches the PDBA code; if it does not locate a match, it uses the
default journal type.

Blank Blank H
Blank Blank AT
Blank 5000 Blank
Blank Blank AL
11.5.1.2 Understanding Distribution Account Fields for Liabilities

You can override the value, or use one of these constants in the Subsidiary field so that
the system can designate distribution account information. You must have valid
general ledger account numbers set up.

Constant Description
*STAT To move the statutory code to the Subsidiary field for a tax.
Use *STAT to charge taxes to specific accounts without
having to define each account in the table. For example, the
system uses CA for California.
*EMP To move the employee number to the Subsidiary field for a
DBA.
*PAY To move the pay or DBA code to the Subsidiary field.
*UNION To move the union code to the Subsidiary field for a DBA.
You can use these constants in the Subledger field:
Constant Description
*SBLE To move the employee number to the
Subledger field.
*SBLP To move the DBA code to the Subledger field.
11.5.2 Prerequisite
Create accounts in the chart of accounts before you add them to the payroll AAIs. See
Account Setup in the General Accounting Guide.
accounts. This task demonstrates setting up multiple accounts.
11.5.3 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Liabilities

Work With W069045A Automatic Accounting Review existing AAI entries.
Liabilities Credit-Liabilities
Revise Multiple W069045C Click Add on Work With Set up AAIs for liabilities.
Liabilities Accounting JE Rules -
Liabilities.
11.5.4 Setting Up AAIs for Liabilities

Access the Revise Multiple Liabilities form.
Subledger
Sub Type
Enter a UDC (00/ST) that is used with the Subledger field to identify the subledger
type and how the system performs subledger editing. On the User Defined Codes
form, the second line of the description controls how the system performs editing.
These values are either hard-coded or user-defined. Values include:
A: Alphanumeric field, do not edit.
Setting Up AAIs for Labor Billings
N: Numeric field, right justify and zero fill.

C: Alphanumeric field, right justify and blank fill.
11.6 Setting Up AAIs for Labor Billings

This section includes an overview of labor billing AAIs and discusses how to:
■ Set processing options for the Credit-Labor Billings program.
■ Set up AAIs for labor billings.
11.6.1 Understanding AAIs for Labor Billings

You set up AAIs for labor billings to define accounts for labor billing offsets. These
offsets are natural credit or revenue entries that offset labor billing charges or debits.
Entries for labor billings are generally credit entries. If the company does not use labor
billings, you do not need to set up these AAIs.
For the most common account distribution, you can use the journal type RO with the
appropriate account information to define a default rule for labor billings. The system
uses the default rule when it does not find a rule for a specific business unit in a
specific company.
11.6.1.1 Search Criteria for Labor Billings

distribution of labor billings. The system searches these AAIs for a specific company:
■ On the first pass, the system compares the time entry record's home business unit,
charge to unit, PDBA code, and journal type to the search criteria defined in the
AAI for Labor Billings and attempts to match the AAI search criteria to the
appropriate Journal Type.
■ On each successive pass, the system drops a value and uses a different
combination of data fields for the search criteria.
searches the rules for the default company (Company 00000).
This table illustrates the search sequence:
Home Business Unit Charge to Unit PDBA Code Journal Type

9 501 1 RO
9 501 Blank RO
9 Blank 1 RO
9 Blank Blank RO
Blank 501 1 RO
Blank 501 Blank RO
Blank Blank 1 RO
Blank Blank Blank RO
This table identifies the fields that the system uses as search criteria to match
information from the timecard to the default company (Company 00000):

Setting Up AAIs for Accruals and Clearing
Home Business Unit Charge to Unit PDBA Code Journal Type

Blank 501 1 RO
Blank 501 Blank RO
Blank Blank 1 RO
Blank Blank Blank RO
11.6.2 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Labor Billings

Work With W069044B Automatic Accounting Review existing AAI entries.
Labor Billing Credits Credit-Labor Billings
Revise Multiple Labor W069044C Click Add on Work With JE Set up AAIs for
Billing Credits Accounting Rules - Labor Cash-in-Bank Account
Billing Credits. Distribution.
11.6.3 Setting Processing Options for Credit-Labor Billings (P069044)

reports.
These processing options are identical to those for Debit-Labor/Billing/Equipment
Program (P069043).
11.6.4 Setting Up AAIs for Labor Billings

Access the Revise Multiple Labor Billing Credits form.
Figure 11–4 Revise Multiple Labor Billing Credits form
11.7 Setting Up AAIs for Accruals and Clearing

This section includes an overview of accrual and clearing accounts, and discusses how
to set up AAIs for accruals and clearing.
11.7.1 Understanding Accruals and Clearing

For the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system, you set up AAIs for accruals and
clearing to define accounts for:
■ Accrued wages (T1, T2)
■ Flat burden clearing (T2)
■ Recharge flat burden clearing

■ Intercompany settlements (T1-T6)
■ Actual burden clearing (T1-T3)
For the time and labor process, you set up AAIs for accruals and clearing to define
accounts for:
■ Accrued wages (T2)
■ Flat burden clearing (T2)
When you set up the accrued wages account, you must, at a minimum, include the
AW journal type code to record labor distribution and payroll disbursements journals.
When you set up the flat burden clearing account, you must, at a minimum, include
the FC, flat burden clearing journal type code for labor distribution.
When you set up intercompany settlement accounts, you must, at a minimum, include
IC journal type code to record the actual burden expense, labor distribution, and
payroll disbursements journals.
When you set up the recharge flat burden clearing account, you must, at a minimum,
include the RC (recharge burden relief) journal type code for the actual burden
expense and payroll disbursements journals.
When you set up actual burden clearing accounts, you must, at a minimum, include
these journal type codes:
■ CF: Burden clearing fringe for the actual burden expense and payroll
disbursements journals
■ CT: Burden clearing tax for the actual burden expense and payroll disbursements
journals
11.7.1.1 Search Criteria for Accruals and Clearing

distribution of accrued wages, flat burden clearing, intercompany settlements, and
recharge flat burden clearing. The system searches these AAIs for a specific company:
■ On the first pass, the system compares the time entry record's business unit and
journal type to the search criteria defined in the AAI for Accruals and Clearing
and attempts to match the AAI search criteria to the appropriate journal type.
■ On the next pass, the system looks only at journal type.
This table identifies the search criteria that the system uses to match information from
the timecard for a specific company for clearing tax burden:

1 Blank H
Blank Blank H
1 Blank CT
Blank Blank CT

This table identifies the search criteria that the system can use to match information
from the timecard for Company 00000 for clearing tax burden:

Blank Blank H
Blank Blank CT
from the timecard for a specific company for clearing fringe burden:

1 1000 Blank
Blank 1000 Blank
1 Blank CF
Blank Blank CF
from the timecard for Company 00000 for clearing fringe burden:

Blank 1000 Blank
Blank Blank CF
from the timecard for a specific company for accrued wages, flat burden clearing,
intercompany settlements, or recharge flat burden clearing:

1 Blank AW, FC, IC, or RC
Blank Blank AW, FC, IC, or RC
from the timecard for Company 00000 for accrued wages, flat burden clearing,
intercompany settlements, or recharge flat burden clearing:

Blank Blank AW, FC, IC, or RC
11.7.1.2 Understanding Distribution Account Fields for Accruals and Clearing

You can enter values in the Business Unit and Subsidiary fields when you create AAI
tables. However, if you enter an actual value, that value is used in the account number
for all journal entries that are created using that entry in the AAI table. You can enter
wildcard values in the Business Unit and Subsidiary fields so that the system creates
more detailed account information for certain journal entries. Distribution account
fields
Setting Up Journal Summarization Rules
This information can help you determine what values to enter in the account number
fields when you set up the AAI tables so that the system can automatically derive
detailed account information.
■ Business Unit
Enter *LABOR in the Business Unit field if you want the business unit for all FC
journal entries to use the same business unit as the associated labor, even if the
employee's home business unit is different.
■ Subsidiary
Enter *PAY in the Subsidiary field if you want the subsidiary for all CF journal
types to be the DBA associated with the journal entry. This feature works for
benefits and accrual DBAs only.
If you are creating intercompany settlements during the payroll cycle, enter *CO
in the subsidiary field if you want the company associated with the intercompany
settlement to be used as the subsidiary for all IC journal types.
Note: If you enter a subledger in the AAI table, you must also enter a
subledger type.
11.7.2 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Accruals and Clearing

Work With W069041B Automatic Accounting Review existing AAI entries.
Accruals/Clearing Dr/Cr-Accruals/Clearing
Revise Multiple W069041D Click Add on Work With Set up AAIs for Accruals and
Accruals/Clearing Accounting JE Clearing.
Rules-Accruals/Clearing.
11.8 Setting Up Journal Summarization Rules

This section provides and overview and instructions about how to set up journal
summarization rules.
11.8.1 Understanding Journal Summarization Rules

You set up journal summarization rules to define how the Payroll system summarizes
pro forma journal entries before it creates actual journal entries in the general ledger.
Summarizing journal entries reduces the number of transactions in the general ledger.
Note: If you use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor

system to generate journal entries, you can set a processing option in
the Generate Timecard Journals program (R052901) to override the
journal summarization rules that you set up in this task.
Defining journal summarization rules enables you to:

■ Summarize journal entries for specific companies and for Company 00000.
■ Create both summarized and detail journals.

■ Define up to six different summarization rules for a specific range of object

accounts and for a specific business unit.
If the system does not find summarization rules for a specific company, it uses those
that are set up for Company 00000. If it finds no summarization rules for an account, it
assumes full summarization.
Each additional variable (company, business unit, or summarization code) that you
define requires additional computer resources, which increases processing time.
Therefore, we recommend that you:
■ Set up summarization rules for Company 00000.
■ Avoid setting up summarization rules at the business unit level.
■ Whenever possible, define the same summarization code for each object account
range.
11.8.2 Forms Used to Set Up AAIs for Accruals and Clearing

Work With Payroll JE W06914C Automatic Accounting Review existing journal
Summarization Rules Instruction Setup (G05BT4), summarization rules.
Journal Summarization Rules
Revise Payroll JE W06914A Click Add on Work With Set up or revise journal
Summarization Rules Payroll JE Summarization summarization rules.
Rules.
11.8.3 Setting Up Journal Summarization Rules

Access the Revise Payroll JE Summarization Rules form.
Object Account
Enter the Object account number where summarization is to begin within the Business
Unit or Company specified.
Beginning Obj. Acct. (beginning object account)

Enter the Object account number where summarization is to begin within the Business
Ending Obj. Acct. (ending object account)

Enter the Object account number where summarization is to end within the Business
Sum. Code (summary code)

Enter a value for a rule. The rules tell the system how to summarize the pro forma
entries before creating the actual journal entries. The system looks for all documents
that have the same value and summarizes them into one journal. Values are:
1: Full summary
The system looks for the same values for:
■ Business unit
■ Object
■ Subsidiary
■ Subledger
■ Subledger type
■ Fiscal year
■ General accounting period number
■ Equipment or asset number
■ Document type
■ Journal reference
Also consider data item PRJE.
First description in the journal entry: Document description
Second description in the journal entry: Blank
2: Same as Rule 1 and include pay type.
First description in the journal entry: Document description.
Second description in the journal entry: Pay type.
3: Same as Rule 1 and include pay type, job type, and job step.
4: Same as Rule 1 and include pay type, job type, job step, and employee.
First description in the journal entry: Employee name.
5: Do not summarize
Second description in the journal entry: Time entry comment and pay type.
6: Do not summarize and include employee name.
First description in the journal entry: Employee name.
Second description in the journal entry: Time entry comment and pay type.

12
Entering Timecards for Employees
21

■ Section 12.1, "Understanding Employee Timecards"
■ Section 12.2, "Selecting Employees for Time Entry"
■ Section 12.3, "Entering Timecards for Employees"
■ Section 12.4, "Entering Timecards Using Speed Time Entry"
■ Section 12.5, "Entering Piece Rate Timecards"
■ Section 12.6, "Reviewing Timecard History for Standalone Time and Labor"
12.1 Understanding Employee Timecards

You use time entry to record and track the amount of time that employees spend
working on different jobs, equipment, tasks, and so on. Within the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system, you can select several programs to enter
timecard information. You can also select batch processing for uploading timecard
information from third-party software. The time entry programs that you select
depend on the structure of the company and the type of information that you want to
track.
For example, you can enter time daily or enter time per pay periods for a group of
employees. If you have many sites at which employees enter their time into a
third-party source, you can use time entry batch processing to upload the timecard
information into the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system to create
timecards.
In all of the time entry programs, the system can automatically supply predefined
values for certain fields on each timecard that you enter. You can also specify that the
system automatically enter employee-specific information on each timecard. Using
default information on timecards can save data entry time and can reduce the number
of data entry errors that might occur if you enter all information manually.
After you enter timecards into the system, you can process journal entries to update
the general ledger with labor, payroll burden, and equipment expenses. The way in
which you process journal entries depends on whether you use the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Payroll system.
To facilitate the process for entering timecards, you can group and select employees for
whom you need to enter time based on shared information such as business unit and
supervisor. After selecting the employees, you can review the information and enter
timecards for the employees.
Entering Timecards for Employees 12-1

Understanding Employee Timecards
You can enter timecards manually or enable the system to generate them automatically
during payroll cycle processing. The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor
system helps reduce data entry time and typing errors by automatically creating
timecards for these types of employees:
■ Salaried employees
■ Hourly employees for whom you entered standard hours when you entered their
pay and tax information
The system classifies employees whose timecards are automatically generated as
autopay employees. For autopay employees, you must enter exception timecards for
time other than regular work hours, such as holiday and vacation time. You can also
override the default timecard information for an employee. After you enter timecards
for exception pay, you process the employee through the payroll cycle. During
pre-payroll, the system automatically creates the appropriate timecards for regular pay
for all autopay employees.
You can select various methods to enter employee timecards into the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system. Consider these questions when you decide
which process to use:
■ For how many employees will I be entering timecards?
■ Do any existing autopay timecards need modification?
■ Will I be entering timecards for groups of employees who work in the same
location?
■ Will I be uploading timecard information from another source, such as a separate
time and attendance system or a spreadsheet?
■ Do I need to refer to a timecard that has already been processed for an employee to
enter a timecard in the current period?
■ Do I need to refer to a timecard that has already been entered but has not yet been
processed for an employee in the current period?
■ Will I be entering a timecard for a lump sum, such as a bonus, pay advance, or pay
adjustment?
■ Will I be entering timecards on a daily basis?
■ Will I be entering information about equipment?
■ Do I want the system to display the timecard to the employee?
The time entry method that you select depends on the criteria that you use to select
employees before entering timecards.
To manually enter timecards into the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor
system, you can use any of these time entry programs:
■ Daily Time Entry
■ Time Entry By Individual
■ Time Entry by Time Sheet Group
■ Speed Time Entry (P051121)
To enter daily timecards, timecards for time sheet groups, or timecards per pay period,
you must first select employees for whom you want to enter timecards using time
entry filters. You can select employees from the F060116 table, employees who have
unprocessed timecards using the F06116 table, or employees with processed timecards
from the F0618 table.

After you have selected the employees, you can enter timecards for them using the
Daily Time Entry program or the Time Entry By Individual program. As you save each
timecard for an employee, the system displays a blank timecard for the next employee
in the group. You can also enter time using the Time Entry by Time Sheet Groups
program. By entering time using time sheet groups, you can automatically enter
information into a single timecard for each employee in the group with information
that is similar for the group, such as work date, batch number, pay type, number of
hours, or lump sum amount. The system creates batch totals automatically to validate
the number of employees and hours that were entered for each batch of timecards. You
use Speed Time Entry to enter timecards for employees in a batch or to enter timecards
for employees individually, based on their employee number.
When a processing option is set appropriately in the Time Entry MBF Processing
Options program (P050002A), you can specify whether the system displays a timecard
to the employee in self-service applications. To allow an employee to view the
timecard, you set the value for Public Timecards to Y. Although employees cannot edit
a timecard that is created by an administrator, they can view them when the timecard
is defined as public. An employee's manager is also able to see public timecards.
Use the Time Entry By Individual program to enter timecards for one employee at a
time. This method is useful when you are entering time for an employee with multiple
timecards or multiple pay types. The system allows only one pay type per line of time
entry. If you have set the processing options to automatically supply the address
number and pay types, you can increase efficiency and avoid duplication of data entry.
The Speed Time Entry and Time Entry by Time Sheet Groups programs differ from
Time Entry By Individual program in that they enable you to enter multiple employees
per form. You can use the Speed Time Entry and Time Entry by Time Sheet Groups
programs when entering timecards for groups of employees who have similar
timecard data, such as a group of employees who worked the same number of hours,
charged to the same pay type, and worked in the same location during the period. As
with time entry by individual, you can set the processing options to copy the address
number and pay type from the previous timecard to increase efficiency. You cannot use
time entry filters to select employees for time entry if you are using the Speed Time
Entry program.
For all four methods of entering time, each line in the time entry grid represents one
timecard. If you are paying an employee multiple pay types, then the employee must
enter each line of time in its own line in the time entry grid. This is because the system
associates only one pay type with each line of time entry.
The first step in entering timecards for a group of employees is to select the employees
for whom time is to be entered. Three filters are available from which to select
employees. The Employee Master filter enables you to select from all employees,
active or inactive. The Current Transactions filter enables you to select from employees
for whom a timecard that has been entered but not yet processed. The Historical
Transactions filter enables you to select from employees for whom a timecard has been
posted to history. Each of these filters enables you to search for and select employees
based on information that they have in common, such as employees who reside in the
same business unit or employees who share the same work location. You can also
update or correct the timecard history by selecting Timecard Corrections from the Row
menu of the Historical Transactions form.
For a group of employees, you can enter timecards daily or enter timecards per pay
period. You can also use the Speed Time Entry or Time Entry by Time Sheet Group
programs to enter timecards for employees in a certain batch or enter timecards for
individual employees based on their employee numbers. Speed Time Entry enables

you to enter timecards per pay period only. If you need to enter daily time for
employees, you cannot use Speed Time Entry.
When you enter timecards with Speed Time Entry, you do not need to select a group of
employees first, although you can select employees by batch number or by individual
employee number on the Speed Time Entry form.
For all time entry programs, you can complete fields in the tabbed areas of the form so
that the system automatically supplies certain values, such as shift code or job
location, for each timecard that you create. Completing these fields saves you from
entering the same information for each timecard.
You can set the processing options to automatically copy information from one
timecard to the next to facilitate timecard entry. If you are entering time either by
individual or by using Speed Time Entry, the system automatically supplies the
address number and pay type from the previous line of time entry after you have
entered the first timecard. You can use this feature when you enter multiple timecards
for the same employee or when you enter timecards for multiple employees with the
same pay type.
In certain countries, such as Australia and New Zealand, employees can specify that
they want the organization to pay them in advance for leave time that they are
planning. Administrators can also search for timecards that include the pay in advance
designation. Administrators can specify types of leave that are available to employees
for payment in advance requests.
You can also define system-supplied values for timecards when you set up the
processing options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options program (P050002A).
12.1.1 Multicurrency Timecards

The basic procedures for multicurrency time and labor tracking are the same as for
normal time entry. This topic provides the additional steps that are required to use
multicurrency features.
In the processing options for the Speed Time Entry program (P051121), enter the
version that you set up for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options program
(P050002A) in the Time Entry Version processing option on the Time Entry tab.
After you enable multicurrency time and labor tacking, these additional fields appear
in each of the time entry programs:
■ Base Currency Code
The system obtains base currency information from the currency designation for
the home company in the F0010 table.
■ Recharge Currency code
■ Foreign Bill Rate
If you use the recharge business unit to determine the fixed currency, enter a value
in this field. Otherwise, the system generates the foreign billing rate from the rate
information that is established in the F48096 table or the F0015 table.
When you enter timecard information, you can enter account numbers that identify
multicurrency accounts. You can access the F48096 table during time entry to locate
these account numbers. Each attempt to look up rate information for these accounts is
date-sensitive. If you encounter an error in one of the listed fields, check the effective
dates in the F48096 table. The date that you enter on each timecard must be within the
effective dates of the account number. If you are not using the F48096 table to

determine currency rates, the system uses the rates that are set up in the F0015 table.
These currency rates are also date-sensitive.
After you enter timecards, you can review the Foreign Bill Rate,Bill Rate,Base Cur
Code (base currency code), and Rech Cur Code (recharge currency code) fields to
verify that the values are correct. The system generates the billing rate from the rate
information established in the F48096 table or the F0015 table based on:
■ The processing options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options program.
■ The currencies of the home business unit from the F060116 table record.
■ The business unit that is associated with the charges.
In this example, the system converts the currency from CAD to USD. The Company
Constant Multi Currency Conversion flag is set to use the divisor of.66666667 in this
calculation:
250.00 ÷ .66666667 = 375.00.
Bill Rate Foreign Bill Rate Base Cur Code Rech Cur Code
375.000 250.000 USD CAD
Note: If you are processing multicurrency timecards using only the

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system, you can enter
employees from different countries in one batch. However, if you are
processing multicurrency timecards through a payroll cycle, all of the
employees that are included in a batch must have the same country
code. The system bases payroll data selection on country code, and
entering employees with different country codes in a single batch
might cause the system to process incorrect information.
12.1.2 Prerequisites
■ Enter labor distribution instructions for the employee.
See "Entering Employee Instructions" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Human Capital Management Fundamentals Implementation Guide.
■ "Entering Labor Distribution Instructions" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Human Capital Management Fundamentals Implementation Guide
■ Define the Master Business Function processing options for Time Entry.
■ Set up equipment numbers on the Equipment Master form.
See "Creating Equipment Master Records" in theJD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Capital Asset Management Implementation Guide.
■ Set up equipment-rate tables and equipment-rate groups in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Job Cost system.
See "Setting Up Equipment Billing, Setting Up the Billing Rate Code Hierarchy" in
the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Capital Asset Management Implementation
Guide.
■ Set up an automatic accounting instruction (AAI) table for all journal types.

Selecting Employees for Time Entry
See Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne

Human Capital Management.
See Also: ■Overview of Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking.
12.2 Selecting Employees for Time Entry

This section includes an overview of the employee selection process and discusses
how to:
■ Select employees for time entry from the Employee Master Information table
(F060116).
■ Select employees for time entry who have unprocessed timecards.
■ Select employees for time entry who have processed timecards.
12.2.1 Understanding the Employee Selection Process for Time Entry

You can use any one of these methods to select a group of employees for time entry:
■ Selecting employees from the F060116 table.
■ Selecting employees who have unprocessed timecards.
■ Selecting employees who have processed timecards.
All of these selection methods use inquiry forms that might include tabs with
job-related, organization, and category code fields to narrow the employee search.
Using any of these methods, you can filter for employees who have requested
payment in advance for schedule leave time.
To search for employees who have timecards that include sick certification issues, you
can use the Time Entry Floods program and search on these items:
■ Sick Certificate Required
■ Sick Certificate Received
■ T/E Lock (Time Entry Lock)
Selecting employees from the F060116 table enables you to select a group of employees
who have common information, such as a home business unit, supervisor, category
code, work schedule, job type, and check route code.
Selecting employees who have unprocessed timecards enables you to select a group of
employees from the F06116 table who have timecards that have not yet been through
payroll. A Subledger tab with fields for subledger and subledger type narrows the
search.
You might want to use this method to select a group of employees for whom you enter
timecards each day. For example, as part of the daily tasks, you might need to enter
time for a group of employees in Business Unit 9. After completing the Business Unit
field, the system displays all the employees in Business Unit 9 who already have
timecards in the F06116 table.
Selecting employees who have processed timecards enables you to select employees
whose timecards have already been processed and posted to the F0618 table. You
might want to use this method if you want to review employee timecard history before
entering time.
You must set the processing options for Selecting Employees for Time Entry (P051191)
for the tabs to appear on the associated forms.

After selecting employees for time entry, you can enter timecards using time sheet
groups, daily timecards, or timecards per pay period. You access daily and per pay
period time entry from a row menu and time sheet group time entry from a form
menu.
To facilitate timecard entry, you can set the processing options so that the system
copies certain information from one timecard to the next. For example, the system can
supply the address number and pay type from the timecard that you previously
entered.
You can also set the processing options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options
program (P050002A) to enter default pay information onto each employee's time entry
form. For example, you can set the processing options to assign a next number to the
Batch field and to supply a pay rate.
12.2.2 Forms Used to Select Employees for Time Entry

Work With Time Entry by W051191B Time Entry (G05BT1), Select employees for time
Employee Master Employee Master Filter entry using the Employee
Master Information table
(F060116).
Work With Time Entry by W051191C Time Entry (G05BT1), Select employees for time
EE Transaction Current Current Transactions entry who have
Filter unprocessed timecards.
Work With Time Entry by W051191E Time Entry menu Select employees for time
EE Transaction History (G05BT1), Historical entry who have processed
Transactions Filter timecards.
12.2.3 Selecting Employees for Time Entry from the Employee Master Information Table
Access the Work With Time Entry by Employee Master form.
Complete these fields to select employees from the F060116 table, and then click Find
to display the selected employees.
12.2.3.1 Form Header Information

All Employees
Select this option to select any active employee in the system.
Employees With Timecards

Select to narrow the selection criteria to only active employees with existing,
unprocessed timecards.
Employees Without Timecards

Select to narrow the selection criteria to only active employees who do not have
unprocessed timecards.
Employees With Pay In Advance Timecards

Select to narrow the selection criteria to only active employees who have unprocessed
timecards that include a request for payment in advance of scheduled leave.
12.2.3.2 1-8
Access the 1-8 tab.

To access additional category codes, select the other category code tabs.
Cat Code 1 (category code 1)

This field refers to Superintendent.

This field refers to General Foreman.

This field refers to Foreman.

This field refers to Work Area.
Access the Organization tab.
Home Company
Enter the company to which the employee is assigned. The system uses this code to
store historical payroll information and to determine accounts for some journal entries.
Supervisor
Enter the address book number of the supervisor.
Security Business Unit

Enter an alphanumeric code that identifies a separate entity within a business for
which you want to track costs. For example, a business unit might be a warehouse
location, job, project, work center, branch, or plant.
You can assign a business unit to a document, entity, or person for purposes of
responsibility reporting. For example, the system provides reports of open accounts
payable and accounts receivable by business unit to track equipment by responsible
department.
Business unit security might prevent you from viewing information about business
units for which you have no authority.
Check Route Code

Enter a code from user-defined code (UDC) 07/CR that specifies the check routing or
mail-stop code. Use this code to sequence the printing of payroll checks to facilitate
their handling and delivery.
12.2.3.4 Other
Access the Other tab.
Business Unit - Last Worked

Enter the last business unit (job) number that was associated with this employee. The
system uses this field for distribution of paychecks and in the generation of journal
entries. When you process a payroll cycle that includes the employee, the system
automatically updates this field.
Benefit Group
Enter the benefit group to which the employee is assigned. Benefit groups facilitate
employee enrollment by categorizing benefit plans and enabling enrollment rules for
those categories. For example, assigning an employee to an executive (EXEC) benefit
group automatically links the employee to the benefits available to executives in the
organization.

Pay Class (H/S/P) (pay class hourly/salaried/piecework)

Enter a code that specifies how an employee is paid. Values are:
H: Hourly
S: Salaried
P: Piecework
Work Schedule
Enter a UDC to designate intrapay period work schedules. The system uses this code
for reporting and to select employees to include in a payroll run. For example:
A: Monday through Friday
B: Saturday through Wednesday
C: Monday through Thursday (4 × 10 hours)
12.2.4 Selecting Employees for Time Entry Who Have Unprocessed Timecards
Access the Work With Time Entry by EE Transaction Current form.
Complete these fields to select employees who have unprocessed timecards, and then
click Find to display the selected employees.
Pay Class
Enter a value to select only those employees who have a current, unprocessed
timecard with this pay class value.
Work Date
Enter a date to select only those employees who have a current, unprocessed timecard
that includes this work date.

Check Route Code

Batch Number
Enter a value to select only those employees who have a current, unprocessed
timecard that includes this batch number.
This is a number that identifies a group of transactions that the system processes and
balances as a unit. When you enter a batch, you can either assign a batch number or let
the system assign it using the Next Numbers program.

Access the Category Codes tab.

Cat Code 1
Cat Code 2
Cat Code 3
Cat Code 4
12.2.4.4 Subledger
Subledger
Enter a value in this field to select only those employees who have a current,
unprocessed timecard that is associated with a specific general ledger account. If you
enter a value in this field, you must also complete the Subledger Type field.
Subledger Type
Enter a value from UDC 00/ST to select only those employees who have a current,
unprocessed timecard that is associated with a specific general ledger account. If you
enter a value in this field, you must also complete the Subledger field.
The system uses this value with the Subledger field to identify the subledger type and
how the system performs subledger editing. On the User Defined Codes form, the
second line of the description controls how the system performs editing. This is either
hard-coded or user-defined. Values are:
A: Alphanumeric field. Do not edit.
N: Numeric field. Right-justify and zero fill.
C: Alphanumeric field. Right-justify and blank fill.
12.2.5 Selecting Employees for Time Entry Who Have Processed Timecards
Access the Work With Time Entry by EE Transaction History form.
Complete these fields to select employees from the (F060116 table, and then click Find
to display the selected employees.
All Employees
Select this option to select any active employee in the system.
Employees With Timecards

Select to narrow the selection criteria to only active employees with existing, processed
timecards.

Employees Without Timecards

Select to narrow the selection criteria to only active employees who do not have
processed timecards.

Job Location
different business unit. The system uses this value for deriving rates from the Union
Pay Rate table and exclusively by the Certified Payroll Register.
A value in this field overrides the rates that are set up in the F069126 table if the table
is set up by job or business unit.
12.2.5.3 Subledger
Subledger
Enter a value to select only those employees who have a processed timecard that is
associated with a specific general ledger account. If you enter a value in this field, you
must also complete the Subledger Type field.
This is a code that identifies a detailed, auxiliary account within a general ledger
Subledger Type
Enter a value from UDC 00/ST to select only those employees who have a processed
timecard that is associated with a specific general ledger account. If you enter a value
in this field, you must also complete the Subledger field.
The system uses this value with the Subledger field to identify the subledger type and
how the system performs subledger editing. On the User Defined Codes form, the
second line of the description controls how the system performs editing. This is either
hard-coded or user-defined. Values are:

Access the Category Codes tab.
Cat Code 1
Cat Code 2

Cat Code 3
Cat Code 4
12.2.5.5 Other
Access the Other tab.
Pay Period Ending Date

Enter the last day of a processing period (pay period, month, quarter, or year).
12.3 Entering Timecards for Employees

This section includes an overview of timecard entry, lists a prerequisite, and discusses
how to:
■ Enter timecards per pay period for employees.
■ Enter daily timecards for employees.
■ Enter timecards using time sheet groups.
12.3.1 Understanding Timecard Entry

After you select employees for whom you want to enter time using the time entry
filters, you can enter timecards for those employees. Each row in which you enter
information in the detail area of a time entry form corresponds to one timecard. The
minimum information that is required to create a timecard for a nonautopay employee
consists of:
■ Date and Batch
■ Pay
■ Hours
After you have selected the employees for whom you want to enter timecard
information, you must select one of these methods for entering timecards:
Method Description
Per pay period time entry Use this method to summarize an employee's hours with
each row (timecard) that you enter in the detail area of the
form.
Daily time entry Use this method to enter hours for each day of the week on
one row of the Daily Time Entry form.
Time sheet group time entry Use this method to enter timecards for multiple employees
on the same form.
TableRowHeading
You can use all of these time entry methods to track various equipment information,
including:
■ Equipment ID number
■ Hours that the employee used the equipment
■ Equipment billing rates

■ Equipment costs and expenses

When you enter timecards, the system updates the F06116 table. After you enter
timecards into the system, you might need to override information that is on or
associated with the timecards.
In all of the time entry programs, you can enter a comment during the time entry
process to save information about the timecard. The system saves this information in
the F07630 table. You can remove or edit comments by updating a timecard. When you
are working with timecards that have been entered by employees, you cannot override
employee and manager comments.
Note: When you enter or review employee timecards, note that the
system displays the pay rate on some timecards, but displays the
word secured on other timecards. The system determines whether to
display the employee's pay rate based on the location from which the
pay rate is retrieved.
If the system retrieves the pay rate directly from the F060116 table, the
timecard displays the employee's pay rate as secured. This action
enables you to keep confidential pay rates for specific employees.
If the system retrieves pay rate information from a union or pay rate
table, the system displays the actual rate on the timecard. Typically,
pay rates are common knowledge for union employees or employees
whose pay rate is based solely on their job ID, and thus do not require
the same level of confidentiality.
Additionally, if you enter timecards one after another, you can save
time and reduce typing errors in the Account Number field by using
certain formulas.
12.3.1.1 Entering Timecards Per Pay Period for Employees

Entering timecards per pay period helps you summarize an employee's hours with
each row (timecard) that you enter in the detail area of the form. Nothing prevents you
from entering daily time on the Time Entry Revisions form. However, you would need
to enter a row for each day of the week, and this might result in reduced system
performance when you run a payroll.
When you enter time per pay period, you can select an option from the Form menu on
the Time Entry Revisions form to copy labor distribution instructions for an employee.
After you enter the essential timecard information, you can copy an employee's labor
distribution instructions to avoid entering timecard information, such as the associated
account number, job type, and business unit. The system automatically copies the
employee's labor distribution rules that you entered in Labor Distribution Instructions
(P050151). You might enter labor distribution instructions for employees who typically
charge time to the same pay types and accounts for each pay period.
If you need to enter a separate timecard for a bonus or a lump sum amount, you must
create an additional timecard. You can also override system-supplied information. For
example, you might need to override the account number and job location when an
employee works at an additional job. The system uses this override information only
once for the pay period.
To enter time for which an employee is paid in advance, you must select the Pay In
Advance option.

12.3.1.2 Entering Daily Timecards for Employees

You can enter daily timecards for employees by entering hours for each day of the
week on an individual row of the Daily Time Entry form. Use this method if the
company needs to post labor to the general ledger every day.
To enter a separate timecard for a bonus or a lump sum amount, you must create an
additional timecard. You can also override system-supplied information. For example,
you might need to override the account number and job location when an employee
works a job other than his or her regular job. The system uses this override
information only once for the pay period.
Advance option.
12.3.1.3 Entering Timecards Using Time Sheet Groups

You can use Time Entry Time Sheet Groups (P051122) to enter timecards for groups of
employees on the same time entry form. Using time sheet groups is a useful method
for entering timecards if you need to enter similar timecards for multiple employees.
For example, if you have a group of employees for whom you would need to enter
timecards that include the same pay type and number of hours, you can do so using
time sheet groups.
The Time Entry Time Sheet Groups program creates one time entry record for each
employee that you select. To use this time entry method, you must first use the time
entry filters to select employees for whom you want to enter timecards because this
program is accessible only from a Form menu option from the time entry filter
programs. You can use either of these methods to enter timecards:
■ Time Sheet All
■ Time Sheet Select
After you have created a list of employees using a time entry filter, you can enter
timecards for all of the employees on the list, or you can create timecards for selected
employees within the list by selecting different menu options.
Advance option.
If you need to enter information about a bonus or a lump sum amount, you must
create an additional timecard. You can also override information that the system
supplies. For example, you might need to override the account number and job
location when an employee works a job other than his or her regular job. The system
uses this override information only once for the pay period.
12.3.2 Prerequisite
Select the employees for whom you want to enter timecards.
See Entering Timecards for Employees.
See Also: ■"Setting Up Employee Self-Service" in theJD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Human Capital Management Self-Service

■ "Entering Timecards Using Self Service" in theJD Edwards

12.3.3 Forms Used to Enter Timecards for Employees

Work With Time Entry W051191B Time Entry (G05BT1), Select employees for time
by Employee Master Employee Master Filter entry using the Employee
Master Information table.
Work With Time Entry W051191C Time Entry (G05BT1), Select employees for time
by EE Transaction Current Transactions Filter entry who have unprocessed
Current timecards.
Work With Time Entry W051191E Time Entry (G05BT1), Select employees for time
by EE Transaction Historical Transactions Filter entry who have processed
History timecards.
Time Entry Revisions W051131A Select the employees for Enter timecards per pay
whom you want to enter period.
time, and then select Line
Detail from the Row menu
from any one of these forms:
Work With Time Entry by
Employee Master
Work With Time Entry by EE
Transaction Current
Transaction History
Daily Time Entry W051141A Select the employees for Enter daily timecards for
whom you want to enter employees.
time, and then select Daily
from the Row menu from
any one of these forms:
Employee Master
Transaction Current
Transaction History
Time Entry Time W051122B Select a single employee, and Enter timecards using time
Sheet Revisions then select Time Sheet Select sheet groups.
from the Form menu; or to
enter time for all selected
employees, select Time Sheet
All from the Form menu
from any one of these forms:
Employee Master
Transaction Current
Transaction History
12.3.4 Entering Timecards Per Pay Period for Employees

Access the Time Entry Revisions form.

Figure 12–1 Time Entry Revisions form
The system automatically adds the time entry record when you click OK and displays
the next employee in the group when you click Next. You must click OK to save the
time entry information before continuing to the next employee. You can click Previous
to display the previous employee in the group.
The system automatically enters the values in the tabbed fields in the next employee's
timecard record.
Public Timecards
Specify whether the timecard is public or private. If the timecard is public, then the
employee can view the timecard. Values are:
Y: The employee can view the timecard.
N: The employee cannot view the timecard.
Job Location
different business unit. The system uses this value to derive rates from the Union Pay
Rate and also for the Certified Payroll Register.
Check Route Code

Enter a code from UDC 07/CR that specifies the check routing or mail-stop code. Use
this code to sequence the printing of payroll checks and facilitate their handling and
delivery.
Subledger
Subledger Type
Enter a code from UDC 00/ST that the system uses with the Subledger field to identify
the subledger type and how the system performs subledger editing. On the User

Defined Codes form, the second line of the description controls how the system
performs editing. This is either hard-coded or user-defined. Values include:
Work Order
Date / Batch
Enter the date that the system uses as the actual work date or pay-period ending date.
Batch
Enter a number that identifies a group of transactions that the system processes and
Pay
1000 to 9999.
Hours
Enter the number of hours that are associated with each transaction.
LSAmnt (lump sum amount)

system normally performs.
Override Rate
Enter the override rate for the employee. As an update to Release 9.1, the override rate
that the system assigns to a timecard is based on the value of the Override Rate
Assignment MBF Time Entry processing option. If you choose to use the override rate
as the base hourly rate, the system initially assigns the specified rate to the base hourly
rate (BHRT). Then, the system modifies the base hourly rate to include the pay type
multiplier and assigns it to the hourly rate (PHRT). Finally, the system applies any
shift or uprate amounts on the timecard to the hourly rate and assigns it to the
extended hourly rate (SHRT). If you choose to use the override rate as the final hourly
rate, the system assigns the specified rate to the base hourly rate, hourly rate, and
extended hourly rate without making any modifications.
Uprate
Shift Diff. (shift differential)

Enter an additional rate, expressed in dollars or percent, that the system adds to an
employee's hourly rate, depending on the shift that the employee worked. This rate
can be applied in one of two ways, as defined by the Shift Differential Calculation
Sequence (data item CMTH).

%/ Amt (percentage/amount)
Enter a code that specifies whether shift differential contains an hourly rate or a
H: The system adds the amount in shift differential to the hourly rate.
%: The amount in shift differential is a percentage of the hourly rate that the system
Billing Rate
Enter the rate for the billing of labor services. This rate is often referred to as the billing
or recharge rate. The system charges the extended amount based on this rate to the
primary distribution account on the timecard and makes an offset entry to an account
that is derived from the Accounting Rules table. This rate will not affect the
employee's payroll. To enable billing rates in time entry, you must set the employee's
record type as either 2 or 3 on the Basic Employee Entry form.
Enter a rate on any of these forms to override the rate in the F060118 table:
■ Pay Rate Information
■ Employee Labor Distribution
■ Occupational Pay Rates
■ Time Entry by Employee
■ Time Entry by Job or Business Unit
■ Daily Timecard Entry
■ Time Entry by Employee with Equipment
■ Time Entry by Shop Floor Control
Work Date
Home Co (home company)

Home BU (home business unit)

Enter the number of the business unit in which the employee generally resides.
Tax Area
Piece Rate Item Number

Enter an inventory item number. The system provides three separate item numbers
plus an extensive cross-reference capability to other item numbers (see data item XRT)
to accommodate substitute item numbers, replacements, bar codes, customer numbers,
supplier numbers, and so forth. The item numbers are:
■ Item Number (short): An eight-digit, computer-assigned item number.
■ 2nd Item Number: The 25-digit, free-form, user-defined alphanumeric item
number.

■ 3rd Item Number: Another 25-digit, free-form, user-defined alphanumeric item

number.
Pce/Rt (piece rate)

Enter the rate paid for the type of component (piece) that you produce. If you enter a
rate in this field, this rate overrides the rate in the F060116 table.
Pieces
Enter the number of pieces for piecework or any other unit of measure that you want
to track for this employee. For example, you can track miles driven for drivers of
company vehicles, cubic yards of concrete, feet drilled, miles flown, and so forth.
Phase
Enter a UDC (00/W1) that indicates the current stage or phase of development for a
work order. You can assign a work order to only one phase code at a time.
Note: Certain forms contain a processing option that enables you to

enter a default value for this field. If you enter a default value on a
form for which you have set this processing option, the system
displays the value in the appropriate fields on any work orders that
you create. The system also displays the value on the Project Setup
form. You can either accept or override the default value.
Explanation
Enter a name or remark that describes the purpose for using an account or conveys
any other information that the user wants about the transaction.
Record Type
Enter a code that identifies whether the employee is handled through the Recharge
processing option for the Payroll Journal Entry program. Values are:
3: Recharge Processing Only
Note: After you have added a timecard, you cannot change its record
type.
WCI Code (worker's compensation insurance code)

Enter a code from UDC 00/W that represents a worker's compensation insurance
(WCI) code. This code should correspond to the classifications on the periodic
worker's compensation insurance reports.
SC/ WC (special circumstances/worker's compensation)

Enter a code that specifies any special circumstances that are associated with the WCI
code, which can result in multiple rates for the same WCI code due to location or risk.
Omit the subclass if multiple rates do not exist. Default codes are:
Blank: No special circumstances exist.
F: Special circumstances exist.

Transaction Number
Enter a number that the system assigns to each timecard to uniquely identify it. You
can use this field in the Time Entry By Job program to retrieve a specific timecard for
display. The system also uses this field to associate a timecard with each Actual
Burden audit record that was created for the timecard during the Actual Burden
Journaling process.
Hours Equipment
Enter the number of hours that the equipment was operated. If you leave this field
blank, the system uses the hours from employee time entry when you enter an
equipment number. If you do not enter employee hours, you must complete this field.
Equip Obj (equipment object)

Indicate the object account to which you want the system to distribute equipment
utilization charges. If you leave this field blank, the system uses a default value from
the Payroll Accounting tables. You can override this value on individual timecards.
Bill RtCd (billing rate code)

Enter a code from UDC 00/RC that indicates a billing rate, such as DY for daily, MO
for monthly, and WK for weekly. You can set up multiple billing rates for a piece of
equipment.
sequence:
1. F0901 table
working conditions.
2. F0006 table
This table contains less detailed rate information than the F0901 table. You can set
up only a single rate for a job based on this table.
3. F1302 table
this table according to the criteria that you establish when setting up the table.
Equipment Billing Rate

numerous billing rates based on the rate code (see Equipment Billing Rate - ERC). The
equipment billing rate can consist of up to ten different rates. For example:
Billing Rate = 100 USD
20 USD = Rate 1 (Ownership Component)
50 USD = Rate 2 (Operating Component)
25 USD = Rate 3 (Maintenance Component)
5 USD = Rate 4 (Other Costs Component)
When these entries are posted to the general ledger, the system recognizes credits in
revenue accounts for each of the rate components. In this way, you can separate
portions of the equipment billing by type of cost. You do not need to use the rate
components concept unless it is appropriate to the business.

Timecard From Date

Specify the beginning date for a range of dates being entered as a summary timecard.
Timecard Thru Date

Specify the ending date for a range of dates being entered as a summary timecard.
Hours Worked Per Day

Specify the hours worked per day for a summary timecard. Date ranges entered on the
timecard begin with Timecard From Date (TCFD) and end with Timecard Thru Date
(TCTD).
Offsite Timecard (Release 9.1 Update)

Specify whether the timecard is an offsite timecard, which is still billed to the job but
not paid at the job rate from the Union Rates File table (F069126). If you select this
option, the system excludes the timecard from prevailing wage calculations, and the
timecard's base hourly rate is assigned from either the Occupational Pay Rates table
(F060146) or the Employee Master File table (F060116), depending on the value of the
Offsite Hourly Rate Source time entry MBF processing option.
12.3.5 Entering Daily Timecards for Employees

Access the Daily Time Entry form.
Figure 12–2 Daily Time Entry form
field on the Daily Time Entry form.
Cost Code
Indicates a subset of an object account. Subsidiary accounts include detailed records of

account is set to 6 digits, you must use all 6 digits. For example,
456, the system enters three blank spaces to fill a 6-digit object.
Week Start Date

Work Order
To enter work order information, you must complete the Subledger and Work Order
fields. You can override this information in the detail area of the form for individuals
who have different work order information.

Monday Billing Rate

Indicates a rate that the system uses for the billing of labor services. This rate is often
referred to as the billing or recharge rate. The system charges the extended amount
based on this rate to the primary distribution account on the timecard and makes an
offset entry to an account derived from the Accounting Rules table. This rate will not
affect the employee's payroll. To enable billing rates in time entry, you must set the
employee's record type as either 2 or 3 on the Basic Employee Entry form.
When you click OK, the system automatically adds the time entry record. You must
click OK before you continue to the next employee to save time entry information. You
can click Previous to display the last employee for whom you entered time.
The system automatically supplies the values in the tabbed fields to the next
employee's timecard record.
12.3.6 Entering Timecards Using Time Sheet Groups

Access the Time Entry Time Sheet Revisions form.

Entering Timecards Using Speed Time Entry
Figure 12–3 Time Entry Time Sheet Revisions form
If you have selected the Project and Gov Contract Accounting Used check box in the
Service Billing Constants program (P48091), the system displays the Contract Labor
Category field on the Time Entry Time Sheet Revisions form.
Populate Grid With Employees

Click to create timecards for all of the selected employees after you enter values in all
the necessary fields on the Time Entry Time Sheets Revisions form. You can then revise
any of the timecards that the system displays in the detail area of the form.
12.4 Entering Timecards Using Speed Time Entry

This section includes an overview of speed time entry and discusses how to:
■ Select employees for speed time entry by individual.
■ Select employees for speed time entry by batch number.
■ Enter timecards using speed time entry.
12.4.1 Understanding Speed Time Entry

Use Speed Time Entry (P051121) to enter timecards for multiple employees per pay
period. If you need to enter daily timecards, you cannot use this program. The system
does not require you to select employees for Speed Time Entry before entering
timecards. However, selecting employees is beneficial if you need to review
information before you enter timecards.
12.4.1.1 Selecting Employees

You must use one of these methods to select employees for Speed Time Entry:
■ Selecting employees by employee number.
■ Selecting employees by batch number.
Selecting employees by employee number is preferable if you need to review certain
timecard information before entering another timecard for that employee. When you
select employees by employee number, the system displays all the employee's
timecards from the F06116 table by batch number. You can review certain timecard

information such as work date, home business unit, home company, pay, hours, lump
sum amount, subledger, and subledger type.
Selecting employees by batch number is preferable if you always enter timecards
according to a batch number. The system displays the batch number and batch
information, such as the number of timecards in the batch, the number of employees in
the batch, batch hours, and the batch lump sum amount.
Regardless of which method you select, the system accesses the same Speed Time
Entry Revisions form (W051121C). You can enter all timecards on this form. Each row
on the form represents one timecard per employee.
The system locates information for Speed Time Entry in the F06116 table.
12.4.1.2 Entering Timecards Using Speed Time Entry

After you have selected employees for speed time entry, you can use Speed Time Entry
to enter timecards. If you do not want to select employees before entering their
timecards, you must enter timecards from either the By Individual or Speed Time
Entry menu selections, both of which supply the same time entry form.
Use Speed Time Entry to enter all of the employee's timecards on the same form, using
each row as a timecard.
You can track this equipment information for employees who work with equipment:
■ Equipment ID number.
■ Number of hours that the employee used the equipment.
■ Equipment billing rates.
■ Equipment costs and expenses.
To facilitate more efficient timecard entry, you can set the processing options so that
the system copies certain information from one timecard to the next. For example, after
you enter the minimum amount of information that the system requires to create a
timecard, the system can supply the business unit, work order number, and account
number from the timecard that you previously entered.
You can also set processing options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options
program (P050002A) to direct the system to enter certain pay information
automatically on each employee's time entry form. For example, you can specify that
the system assign a next number to the Batch field and to supply a pay rate.
12.4.2 Forms Used to Enter Timecards with Speed Time Entry

Work With Speed W051121E Time Entry (G05BT1), Speed Select employees by batch
Time Entry Time Entry for speed time entry.
Speed Time Entry W051121C Click Add or select a record Enter timecards using speed
Revisions and click Select on either of time entry.
these forms:
Work with Time Entry by
Individual
Work With Speed Time Entry

12.4.3 Selecting Employees For Speed Time Entry by Individual

Access the Work With Time Entry by Individual form.
Employee No (employee number)

Select the employee for whom you want to enter timecards using speed time entry.
12.4.4 Selecting Employees for Speed Time Entry by Batch

Access the Work With Speed Time Entry form.
Batch
Select the batch for which you want to enter timecards using speed time entry.
12.4.5 Entering Timecards Using Speed Time Entry

Access the Speed Time Entry Revisions form.
Figure 12–4 Speed Time Entry Revisions form
If you have selected the Project and Gov Contract Accounting Used check box in the
Service Billing Constants program (P48091), the system displays the Contract Labor
Category field on the Speed Time Entry Revisions form.
Job Location
different business unit. The system uses the values to derive rates from the F069126
table and for the Certified Payroll Register.

Check Route Code

Subledger
Subledger Type
Enter a UDC (00/ST) that the system uses with the Subledger field to identify the
subledger type and how the system performs subledger editing. On the User Defined
Codes form, the second line of the description controls how the system performs
editing. This is either hard-coded or user-defined. Values are:
Work Order
Date / Batch
Batch
Enter a number that identifies a group of transactions that the system processes and
Pay
1000 to 9999.
Hours
LSAmnt (lump sum amount)

system normally performs.
Override Rate

Job Type
Enter a code from UDC 07/G that defines the jobs within the organization. You can
associate pay and benefit information with a job type and apply that information to
the employees who are linked to that job type.
Uprate

Enter an additional rate, expressed in dollars or percent, that the system adds to an
employee's hourly rate, depending on the shift worked. This rate can be applied in one
of two ways, as defined by the Shift Differential Calculation Sequence (data item
CMTH).
%/ Amt (percentage amount)

Enter a code that specifies whether the shift differential contains an hourly rate or a
H: The system adds the amount in shift differential to the hourly rate.
%: The amount in shift differential is a percentage of the hourly rate that the system
Billing Rate
Enter a rate that the system uses for the billing of labor services. This rate is often
referred to as the billing or recharge rate. The system charges the extended amount
based on this rate to the primary distribution account on the timecard and makes an
offset entry to an account that is derived from the Accounting Rules table. This rate
will not affect the employee's payroll. To enable billing rates in time entry, you must
set the employee's record type as either 2 or 3 on the Basic Employee Entry form.
Work Date
Home Co (home company)

Home BU (home business unit)


Tax Area
Piece Rate Item Number

supplier numbers, and so forth. The item numbers are:
■ Item Number (short): An 8-digit, computer-assigned item number.
number.
number.
Pce/Rt (piece rate)

Enter the rate that you pay for the type of component (piece) that is produced. If you
enter a rate in this field, this rate overrides the rate in the F060116 table.
Pieces
Enter the number of pieces for piecework or any other unit of measure that you want
to track for this employee. For example, you can track the miles driven for drivers of
company vehicles, cubic yards of concrete, feet drilled, miles flown, and so forth.
Phase
Enter a code from UDC 00/W1 that indicates the current stage or phase of
development for a work order. You can assign a work order to only one phase code at
a time.
Note: Certain forms contain a processing option that enables you to

enter a default value for this field. If you enter a default value on a
form for which you have set this processing option, the system
displays the value in the appropriate fields on any work orders that
you create. The system also displays the value on the Project Setup
form. You can either accept or override the default value.
Explanation
Enter a name or remark that describes the purpose for using an account or conveys
any other information that you need about the transaction.
Record Type
Enter a code that identifies whether the employee is to be handled through the
Recharge processing option for the Payroll Journal Entry program. Values are:
3: Recharge Processing Only
After you have added a timecard, you cannot change its record type.

WCI Code (worker's compensation insurance Code)

Enter a UDC (00/W) that represents a worker's compensation insurance (WCI) code.
This code should correspond to the classifications on the periodic worker's
compensation insurance reports.
SC/ WC (special circumstances/worker's compensation)

Enter a code that specifies any special circumstances that are associated with the
workers compensation insurance (WCI) code, which might result in multiple rates for
the same WCI code due to location or risk. Omit the subclass if multiple rates do not
exist. Default codes are:
Blank: No special circumstances exist.
F: Special circumstances exist.
Transaction Number
Enter a number that the system assigns to each timecard to uniquely identify it. You
can use this field in the Time Entry By Job program to retrieve a specific timecard for
display. The system also uses this field to associate a timecard with each Actual
Burden audit record that you created for the timecard during the Actual Burden
Journaling process.
Hours Equipment
Enter the number of hours that the equipment was operated. If you leave this field
blank, the system uses the hours from employee time entry when you enter an
equipment number. If you do not enter employee hours, you must complete this field.
Equip Obj (equipment object)

Indicate the object account to which you want the system to distribute equipment
utilization charges. If you leave this field blank, the system uses a default value from
the Payroll Accounting tables. You can override this value on individual timecards.
Bill RtCd (billing rate code)

Enter a code from UDC 00/RC that indicates a billing rate, such as DY for daily, MO
for monthly, and WK for weekly. You can set up multiple billing rates for a piece of
equipment.
sequence:
1. F0901 table
working conditions.
2. F0006 table
This table contains less detailed rate information than the F0901 table. You can set
up only a single rate for a job based on this table.
3. F1302 table
this table according to the criteria that you establish when setting up the table.
Equipment Billing Rate

numerous billing rates based on the rate code (see Equipment Billing Rate - ERC). The
equipment billing rate can consist of up to ten different rates. For example:

Billing Rate = 100 USD.

20 USD = Rate 1 (Ownership Component).
50 USD = Rate 2 (Operating Component).
25 USD = Rate 3 (Maintenance Component).
5 USD = Rate 4 (Other Costs Component).
When these entries are posted to the general ledger, the system recognizes credits in
revenue accounts for each of the rate components. You can separate portions of the
equipment billing by type of cost. You do not need to use the rate components concept
unless it is appropriate to the business.
Sick Certificate Required

Review the value. The system automatically enters a value that is based on a business
function. This field is not accessible for input. Values are:
0 (or blank): No Sick certificate required.
1: Sick certificate required.
Sick Certificate Received

Enter a code that indicates whether a sick certificate has been received for the leave
occurrence. Values are:
0: No sick certificate received.
1: Sick certificate received.
Pay In Advance
Enter a code that indicates whether a time entry record is paid in advance. Values are:
Y: Pay In Advance Timecard
N: Not a Pay In Advance Timecard
Timecard From Date

Specify the beginning date for a range of dates being entered as a summary timecard.
Timecard Thru Date

Specify the ending date for a range of dates being entered as a summary timecard.
Hours Worked Per Day

Specify the hours worked per day for a summary timecard. Date ranges entered on the
timecard begin with Timecard From Date (TCFD) and end with Timecard Thru Date
(TCTD).
Labor Period Ending Date

Specify the ending date of the labor distribution period for a labor distribution
employee.


Entering Piece Rate Timecards
12.5 Entering Piece Rate Timecards

This section includes an overview of piece rate processing setup, lists prerequisites,
■ Review piece rate history online.
■ Set processing options for the Piecework Register (R078001).
12.5.1 Understanding Piece Rate Processing Setup

You use piece rate processing to pay employees in the organization by the number of
units that they produce or complete, rather than paying them by the number of hours
that they work or on a salaried basis.
You can enter timecards for piece rate employees into the system by using any of the
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne time entry programs. Depending on how you set the
processing options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options program, the system
derives the piece rate from either the F060116 table or the F07918 table.
After you enter the timecards, you can process the timecard automation rule sets to
calculate minimum wage and overtime adjustments, and then you can process the
piece rate timecards through a regular payroll cycle. During the payroll cycle, you can
review piece rate information on payroll reports. In addition, you can print payments
that include piece rate information, or you can review the piece rate information
online.
After you process the timecards through the final update step of the payroll cycle, you
can review piece rate history for all employees that have been processed using piece
rate information.
12.5.1.1 Entering Piece Rate Timecards

After you set up the system to process piece rate information, you can enter employee
timecards that include pieces, piece rates and unit of measure. You can enter piece rate
information using any of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne time entry programs.
Regardless of which program you use to enter employee timecards, you must include
this information on each timecard that you enter for piece rate employees for the
system to correctly process piece rate information:
■ Pay type (which you should set up as a piece-rate pay type).
■ Hours.
■ Item number.
■ Unit of Measure
■ Number of pieces.
Note: If you set up multiple piece rates for a single item, you must
include additional information on the timecards to ensure that the
system retrieves the correct piece rate.
For example, if you set up a piece rate of 10 USD for item 100 and job
type A, and you set up a piece rate of 12 USD for item 100 and job
type B, you must include job type information on timecards that are
entered for item 100. The system uses the item number and the job
type on the timecard to determine which piece rate to use for the
employee.

12.5.1.2 Processing Overtime and Minimum Wage Requirements for Piecework

When you pay employees by the number of pieces that they complete, you must
ensure that the pay that they receive meets federal and state minimum wage
requirements. You must also determine what the employee's average hourly rate is to
pay the correct rate for any overtime that is worked.
Using the Timecard Automation module, you can automatically change existing
timecards and create additional timecards to make sure that the employee is paid at
the correct rate and according to legal requirements. To process timecard automation
rules for overtime and minimum wage requirements, you must first create employee
groups that include all of the piecework employees that you want to process. After
you create the employee groups, you must process the groups using the piece rate
overtime rule and the minimum wage requirement rule.
You use these functions to set up the rule sets that you use to process overtime and
minimum wage requirements for piecework:
■ OCR_MinWageAdjustment_1
■ OHRF_AverageRateBasedOnLumpSum
After you process these rule sets, you can review the timecards that the system
automatically creates for the employees before you process the timecards through a
payroll cycle.
12.5.1.3 Reviewing Piece Rate History

After you process piece rate information through a payroll cycle, the system updates
piece rate history to the F0623 table. Using the Piecework History program (P0623),
you can review online piece rate history by employee, business unit, item number, and
unit of measure. You can also create the Time and Pay Piecework Register (R078001) to
review piece rate history. You can set up the Time and Pay Piecework Register to run
during the final update step of the payroll cycle or run it directly from the Piece Rate
menu (G07BPR).
12.5.2 Prerequisites
■ Set the Pay Class field on the Basic Compensation form to P for employees who
are paid using piece rate processing.
■ Set up the processing options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options program
(P050002A) to specify how the system retrieves rates for piece rate employees.
■ Set up pay types for piece rate processing.
See "Setting Up Pay Types" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Human
■ Create employee groups that include all of the employees for whom you want to
process piece rate information.
■ Create timecard automation rule sets to process minimum wage and overtime
requirements.


■ Set up piece rate processing in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor
system.
See Setting Up Piece Rate Processing.
■ Create timecard automation employee groups to process overtime and minimum
wage calculations.
See Forms Used to Create Employee Groups.
See Also: ■"Working with the Payroll Cycle" in the JD Edwards
12.5.3 Forms Used to Review Piece Rate History Online

Work with Piecework W0623A Piece Rate (G07BPR), Piece Review piece rate history for
History Rate History employees.
Piecework by Payroll W0623B Select a record and click Review piece rate history
Month Select on Work with online.
Piecework History.
12.5.4 Reviewing Piece Rate History Online

Access the Piecework by Payroll Month form.
Figure 12–5 Piecework by Payroll Month form

Reviewing Timecard History for Standalone Time and Labor
Item Number
supplier numbers, and so forth. The item numbers include:
■ Item Number (short): An 8t-digit, computer-assigned item number.
number.
number.
Unit of Measure
Enter a code from UDC 00/UM that designates any unit of measure that is appropriate
for an employee's time and pay.
Year
Enter a two-digit number that specifies the applicable year. If you leave this field
blank, the program uses the system date.
12.5.5 Setting Processing Options for the Piecework Register (R078001)

Select Piece Rate menu (G07BPR), Piecework Register.
12.5.5.1 Defaults
1. Type of Timecards
Specify the type of timecards.
Blank: Piecework and Labor Timecards
P: Piecework Timecards
L: Labor Timecards
2. Employee Number
Specify the employee number.
A: Address Number
S: Social Security Number
T: Third Employee Number
3. Print the General Ledger Account Number.

Specify whether to print the general ledger account number.
Y: Yes
N: No
12.6 Reviewing Timecard History for Standalone Time and Labor

This section provides an overview of timecard history for standalone time and labor,
lists a prerequisite, and lists the forms used to review history for types 1, 2, and 3
timecards.

12.6.1 Understanding Timecard History for Standalone Time and Labor

When you run the General Ledger Post Report program (R09801) without processing
payroll, the system creates timecard history records in the F0618 table for all of the
timecards that you process. After records have been created in the F0618 table, you can
view them online. If the timecards are type 1 (payroll only) timecards, you can review
them using the PDBA History Review program (P079951). If you process type 2
(payroll and recharge) or type 3 (recharge only) timecards, you can review them using
the Recharge History program (P059951).
You use the Timecard Correction program (P05602) to review and update the timecard
history details.
To update tables in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Accounting system, you
must enter T in the General Ledger Integration field in the Company Options for
Company 00000.
12.6.2 Prerequisite
If necessary, set up company options to update the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General
Accounting system.
See "Setting Up System Options "in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Human
"Setting Up Company Options" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Human
Capital Management Fundamentals Implementation Guide
12.6.3 Forms Used to Review Timecard History for Standalone Time and Labor

Work With DBAs W079951A U.S. History Inquiries Review existing history
History (Payroll (G07BUSP14), PDBA History records.
Month)
Canada History Inquiries
(G77BCAP14), PDBA
History
Work With Recharge W059951A Timecard Post/History Update timecard history
History Update (G05BT11), Recharge details.
History
Pay Detail W079951E Select a record and select Pay Review type 1 timecard
Detail from the Row menu history.
from either of these forms:
Review type 2 and 3
Work With DBAs History recharge history.
(Payroll Month)
Work With Recharge History
Work With Time Entry W051191E Time Entry menu (G05BT1), Select employees for time
by EE Transaction Historical Transactions Filter entry who have processed
History timecards.
Reclassify/Correct W05602B Select a record and select Review and update the
Historical Timecards Timecard Correction from necessary details of the
the Row menu in the Work timecard history.
With Time Entry by EE
Transaction History form.


13
Overriding Timecard Information
13

■ Section 13.1, "Understanding Timecard Overrides"
■ Section 13.2, "Overriding an Hourly Rate for an Employee"
■ Section 13.3, "Entering DBA Overrides"
13.1 Understanding Timecard Overrides

When you enter information into the system that is needed to create a timecard, you
do not necessarily need to complete every field on the time entry form. Depending on
how you set the processing options and other system parameters, the system can
automatically complete many time entry fields. For example, the system might derive
the employee's pay rate from the F060146 table, and the account number from the
automatic accounting instructions (AAIs). However, you might occasionally need to
override system-supplied information on an employee's timecard. For example, if you
wanted to pay an employee a higher hourly rate because the employee worked on a
job other than her regular job during that pay period, you could override the hourly
rate that the system automatically enters on the timecard.
In addition to overriding information on the timecard, you can also override DBA
amounts that the system normally calculates. For example, if an employee begins
employment in the middle of a pay period, you can reduce the amount of the medical
insurance deduction so that the deduction covers only the portion of the pay period in
which the employee actually works. Similarly, you can change the amount of a
company-paid benefit, such as a meal allowance, so that the amount reflects only the
portion of the pay period in which the employee works.
When you override DBA information, you can attach the override amounts to a
timecard, or you can enter standalone overrides that are not attached to timecards.
When DBA overrides are attached to a timecard, the system uses the information on
that timecard to derive the account numbers that are associated with the DBA. When
you enter a standalone DBA override, the system first tries to associate it with any
existing timecards that the employee has, prorating the amount across the multiple
timecards, if necessary. If the employee does not have any existing timecards, and no
autopay timecards are created for the employee during pre-payroll, the system
automatically generates a timecard with no hours or gross pay using information from
the (F060116) table. The system then uses this timecard to derive the account numbers
for the DBA.
Overriding Timecard Information 13-1

Overriding an Hourly Rate for an Employee
13.2 Overriding an Hourly Rate for an Employee

This section includes an overview of employee rates on timecards, lists a prerequisite,
and discusses how to override an hourly rate for an employee.
13.2.1 Understanding Employee Rates on Timecards

When you enter time for an employee, you typically do not need to enter an hourly
pay rate. The system derives the hourly rate in this sequence using the information
that is entered and stored in these programs and tables:
1. Speed Time Entry and Time Entry Floods (P051121 and P051191, respectively) -
Hourly rate
The value in the Hourly Rate field is used as it is entered on the time entry forms
for P051121 and P051191.
2. Union Rates Master Revisions (P059121) - Union and Job type
This information is stored in the F069126 table.
3. Employee Occupational Pay Rates (P050231) - Job type and Job step
4. Employee Master (P0801) - Hourly rate
Unless you set up the processing options differently, the system uses this sequence to
derive an employee's hourly rate. For each employee, the system begins its search with
the time entry programs and stops when it finds an hourly rate. To override an
employee's system-supplied hourly rate for a timecard, you can enter the hourly rate
on a time entry form.
If you change the pay rate for an employee on the Employee Information form after
entering time for that employee, you must revise the timecard and remove the value
from the Override/Rate field. The system obtains the new rate and recalculates the
gross pay for that timecard.
13.2.2 Prerequisite
If necessary, enter timecards for the employee for whom you want to override
timecard information.
See Entering Timecards for Employees.

Overriding an Hourly Rate for an Employee
See Also: ■"Entering Employee Instructions" in the JD Edwards

Fundamentals Implementation Guide.
■ "Entering Labor Distribution Instructions" in the JD Edwards
■ "Working with the Payroll Cycle, Processing Pre-Payroll" in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Payroll Implementation Guide.
■ "Working with the Payroll Cycle, Resetting Payroll Cycle Steps" in
the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Payroll Implementation
Guide.
■ "Working with the Payroll Cycle, Reviewing Payroll Cycle
Reports" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Payroll
13.2.3 Forms Used to Override an Hourly Rate for an Employee

Work With Speed W051121E Time Entry (G05BT1), Speed Override the hourly rate for
Time Entry Time Entry an employee.
Time Entry Revisions W051131A Select an employee, and then Override the hourly rate for
click Select on Work With an employee.
Speed Time Entry.
Speed Time Entry W051121C Select an employee, and then Override the hourly rate for
Revisions click Add on Work With an employee.
Speed Time Entry.
13.2.4 Overriding an Hourly Rate for an Employee

Access the Speed Time Entry Revisions form or the Time Entry Revisions form.
field on the Speed Time Entry Revisions form or the Time Entry Revisions form.
See " Processing Timecards Using Contract-Specific Labor Categories" in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Project and Government Contract Accounting
Override Rate

Entering DBA Overrides
Uprate

Enter an additional rate, expressed in dollars or percent, added to an employee's
hourly rate, depending on the shift worked. This rate can be applied in one of two
ways, as defined by the Shift Differential Calculation Sequence (data item CMTH).
%/ Amt (percentage amount)

Enter a code that specifies whether Shift Differential contains an hourly rate or a
H: The system adds the amount in Shift Differential to the hourly rate.
%: The amount in Shift Differential is a percentage of the hourly rate that the system
13.3 Entering DBA Overrides

This section provides an overview of DBA overrides and discusses how to:
■ Attach a DBA override to an existing timecard.
■ Enter a standalone DBA override.
13.3.1 Understanding DBA Overrides

When an employee is processed through a payroll cycle, the system uses the
information on the employee's timecards to calculate DBA amounts. Sometimes you
must override the monetary amounts associated with a deduction or a benefit, or
override the amount of hours for an hourly accrual. For example, if an employee
begins employment during the middle of a pay period, you might override DBA
amounts so that they reflect only the portion of the pay period in which the employee
actually worked. You can attach these DBA overrides to the employee's timecards.
Occasionally, you might need to override DBA amounts when an employee does not
have any timecard records to process through a payroll cycle. For example, if an
employee is on unpaid leave and does not have any timecards to process, you might
still want to calculate a benefit for the employee.
You might also want to enter DBA overrides without attaching them to timecards,
even if the employees have timecards, or timecards will be created for them during the
payroll cycle. For example, if you want to override the amount of a DBA for a group of
autopay employees, you can enter the DBA overrides without entering timecards for
those employees.
When you enter an override that is attached to an existing timecard, the system uses
the information on that timecard to derive account information that is used to create
journal entries for the DBAs. When you enter standalone overrides, the system uses
one of these scenarios to determine how to prorate and attach the DBA override
amount across the employee's timecards.

13.3.1.1 Scenario One

If the employee is an autopay employee who does not have any additional timecards,
the system generates autopay timecards for the employee during the payroll cycle. The
system then prorates the DBA override amount across all of the timecards that are
created using the autopay pay type, and uses the information on the timecards to
derive account information for the DBAs.
Note: The system prorates only benefits and accruals; it does not
prorate the amount of a deduction override across multiple timecards.
Deductions are prorated only during transition periods.
13.3.1.2 Scenario Two

If the employee is not an autopay employee and does not have any timecards to
process in the payroll cycle, the system generates a timecard with no hours and no
gross pay, using the autopay pay type that is assigned on the employee's F060116
record. The system also enters this information from the F060116 table on the timecard.
■ Job Type
■ Job Step
■ Business Unit
■ Company
■ Tax Area
■ Union
The system uses the DBA override amount that is linked to this timecard and uses this
information to derive account information for the DBAs.
Important: When you add a new override to the system, or when

you change an existing override, the system displays the employee's
Payroll Lockout Code. If an employee is currently being processed in a
payroll cycle, you might need to reset the payroll and reprocess it, or
run a changes-only payroll to include the new or changed DBA
override information.
13.3.1.3 Scenario Three

If the employee has existing timecards that do not use the autopay pay type, the
system uses the basis of calculation of the DBA that you are overriding to determine
whether to create zero-amount timecards. If the timecards that exist for the employee
use pay types that are included in the basis of calculation for the DBA, the system
prorates the DBA override amount across those timecards. This example illustrates
how the system uses the basis of calculation to determine how to attach the DBA
override to a timecard:
You enter a standalone override of 100 USD for a DBA for which the basis of
calculation includes pay types 1 through 100. The employee, who is not an autopay
employee, has these timecards in the system at the time you process the override
through a payroll cycle:
■ Timecard 1: 15 hours using pay type 2


The system prorates the amount of the DBA override across the existing timecards
for which the pay type is included in the DBA basis of calculation. The DBA
override amount is prorated and attached to the employee's timecard in this way:
– 50 USD of the DBA override is attached to timecard 1.
– 50 USD of the DBA override is attached to timecard 2.
– None of the DBA override is attached to timecard 3, because pay type 150 is
not included in the DBA basis of calculation.
If no timecards use pay types that are included in the DBA basis of calculation, the
system creates a zero-amount timecard using the autopay pay type that is assigned on
the employee's F060116 record. This example illustrates how the system uses the basis
of calculation to determine how to attach the DBA override to a timecard:
You enter a standalone override of 100 USD for a DBA for which the basis of
calculation includes pay types 200 through 210. The employee, who is not an autopay
employee, has these timecards in the system at the time you process the override
through a payroll cycle:
Because the employee does not have any existing timecards for which the pay type
is included in the DBA basis of calculation, and the employee is not an autopay
employee, the system creates a zero-amount timecard using the autopay pay type
that is assigned on the employee's F060116 record. The DBA override amount is
prorated and attached to the employee's timecards in this way:
– None of the DBA override is attached to timecard 1, 2, or 3, because none of
the pay types associated with those timecards are included in the DBA basis of
calculation.
– 100 USD of the DBA override is attached to a zero-amount timecard that the
system creates during the payroll cycle.
13.3.1.4 Timecard Transaction Numbers

The system uses timecard transaction numbers to determine how the account
information for the DBAs is derived. When you enter a DBA override, the system
updates the F0709 table. When you enter an override that is attached to a timecard, the
system enters the transaction number of the associated timecard in the Transaction
Number field in the F0709 table. When you enter a standalone override, the system
does not populate the Transaction Number field in the F0709 table until the override is
processed through the payroll cycle.
13.3.1.5 Example 1: DBA Overrides That Are Attached to Timecards

When you enter a DBA override that is attached to an existing timecard, the system
enters the transaction number of the associated timecard (at the time the override is
entered into the system) into the Transaction Number field in the F0709 table. This
example illustrates how the system handles a DBA override that is attached to an
existing timecard.
The employee has an existing timecard in the EF06116 table that includes this
information: A DBA override for DBA 7000 is entered for 100 USD. The record in the

F0709 table includes this information after the override has been entered into the
system, but before pre-payroll has been processed:
Pay Type Transaction Number Hours

1 846 40
A DBA override for DBA 7000 in the amount of 100 USD is attached to the timecard.
The record in the F0709 includes this information after the override has been entered
into the system:
PDBA Code Transaction Number Amount

7000 846 100.00
The information from the attached timecard is used to derive the account information
for the journal entries that are created for the DBA.
13.3.1.6 Example 2: Standalone DBA Overrides for Autopay Employees

If the system generates autopay timecards for the employee, the transaction numbers
for those timecards are entered into the Transaction Number field in the F0709 table. If
multiple timecards are created, based on the employee's labor distribution
instructions, the system prorates the amount of the DBA overrides across the autopay
timecards and assigns the transaction number from each timecard to the appropriate
record in the F0709 table. This example illustrates how the system prorates a DBA
override for an autopay employee with labor distribution instructions.
A standalone DBA override for DBA 7000 is entered for 100 USD. The record in the
F0709 table includes this information after the override has been entered into the
system but before pre-payroll has been processed:

7000 Blank 100.00
During pre-payroll, the system creates two timecards for the employee based on the
employee's labor distribution instructions. The timecards include this information:
Pay Type Business Unit Hours Transaction Number

1 10 20 754
1 50 20 755
After the system creates the autopay timecards, the original record in the F0709 table is
changed to reflect prorated amounts. The records in the F0709 table that are associated
with this transaction now include this information:

7000 754 50.00
7000 755 50.00

The system uses the timecard associated with each record in the F0709 table, which is
determined by the transaction number, to derive the account information that is used
to create journal entries for the DBA.
13.3.1.7 Example 3: Standalone DBA Overrides for Non-Autopay Employees

When you enter a standalone DBA override for an employee who does not have any
timecards in the system, and who is not an autopay employee, the system creates a
timecard with zero gross pay and zero hours. This timecard is created using the
autopay pay type from the employee's F060116 record. When the DBA override is
entered into the system, the transaction number in the F0709 table is left blank. When
the employee is processed in pre-payroll, the system creates the zero-amount timecard
and assigns it a transaction number. After system creates the timecard, the transaction
number from the newly created timecard is automatically entered in the F0709 table,
and the information from that timecard is used to create the journal entries for the
DBAs. This example illustrates how the system handles standalone DBA overrides
when an employee does not have any timecards.
A standalone DBA override for DBA 7000 is entered for 100 USD. The record in the
F0709 includes this information after the override has been entered into the system,
but before pre-payroll has been processed:

7000 Blank 100.00
During pre-payroll, the system creates a timecard with no gross pay and no hours,
using information from the F060116 table. The timecard includes this information:
Pay Type Hours Transaction Number

1 (from the F060116 table) 0 957
After the system creates the zero gross timecard, the original record in the F0709 is
updated to associate the DBA override with the newly created timecard. The record in
the F0709 table now includes this information:

1 957 100.00
The system uses the timecard associated with the record in the F0709 table, which is
determined by the transaction number, to derive the account information that is used
to create journal entries for the DBA.
13.3.1.8 Resetting DBA Overrides

After you enter DBA overrides, you must then process the employee through a payroll
cycle to update the information to history. When you enter a standalone DBA override,
the system populates the Deduction/Benefit Override Code (PGRP) field in the F0709
table with an M (manual). When you process standalone overrides through
pre-payroll, the system prorates the amount of the override over all existing timecards
for the employee, provided that the pay type on the timecard is in the basis of
calculation for the DBA. If the employee does not have any existing timecards, the
system creates a zero gross timecard.

When the system prorates the override amount over existing timecards, additional
records are created in the F0709 table, and the Deduction/Benefit Code is changed to
MP (manual prorated). If you reset pre-payroll after the system has prorated the
override amount across multiple timecards, the system deletes the MP records in the
F0709 and reverts back to the original M record in the table.
Note: When you review timecards, the system does not indicate that
a DBA one-time override exists. To review all DBA overrides that exist
for an employee, you must perform a search for DBA overrides. In
addition, the Work With One-Time Overrides form allows you to
review only overrides with a Deduction/Benefit code of M. If you
have already processed pre-payroll and want to review the override,
you must use the Payroll Workbench.
13.3.2 Forms Used to Enter DBA Overrides

Work With Speed Time W051121E Time Entry (G05BT1), Select employee
Entry Speed Time Entry timecards to override.
Speed Time Entry W051131A Click Select on Work Override the hourly rate
Revisions With Time Entry by of an employee.
Individual.
Speed Time Entry W051121C Click Add on Work With Override the hourly rate
Revisions Speed Time Entry. of an employee.
One Time Overrides W07OTO1C Select One Time Override Attach a DBA override to
from the Row menu on an existing timecard.
Speed Time Entry
Revisions or Time Entry
Revisions.
Work With One Time W07OTO1B Payroll Workbench Review existing
Overrides (G07BUSP11), One-Time standalone DBA
Overrides overrides, or access the
revisions form.
Speed One Time W07OTO1D Click Add on Work With Enter standalone DBA
Overrides One Time Overrides. overrides.
13.3.3 Attaching a DBA Override to an Existing Timecard

Access the Speed Time Entry Revisions form.
This row selection is enabled only if the Transaction Number field in the grid is not
blank. If this field is blank, you must enter DBA overrides as standalone overrides.

Figure 13–1 Speed Time Entry Revisions form
DBA (deduction, benefit, accrual)

Enter a code that defines the type of deduction, benefit, or accrual.
1000 to 9999.
Amount
Enter the actual gross pay amount for an employee. This amount is to be distinguished
from the distributed gross pay amount used for labor distribution. See data item
DPAY.
When you are using Work Order Time Entry, this field is used to record miscellaneous
pay for an employee, (for example, piece rate bonus).
Basis
Enter the number of hours associated with each transaction.
Company
Work Tax Area

A/P Voucher (accounts payable voucher)

Enter a code to use to determine whether the system generates a voucher for the DBA,
tax, or wage attachment during the final update phase of the payroll processing cycle.
Values are:
N: Do not generate.
Y: Generate.

Payee No (payee number)

Enter the address book number for the supplier who receives the final payment.
In Benefits administration, this is the address book number of the company that issues
the plan and receives premium payments for that company.
For wage attachments, payee is the address book number of the agency, company,
individual, or court that is to receive the payment of the check.
Wage Att (wage attachment)

Enter a control number used to group and identify all related elements associated with
a wage attachment (Garnishment, Levy, Child Support, or Loan). This number is
assigned by the system and is used to attach a specific deduction to its related wage
attachment information.
Attached To Timecard,Stand Alone, and All

Enter a unique number that the system assigns to each timecard. You can use this field
in the Time Entry By Job program to retrieve a specific timecard for display. This field
is also used to tie a timecard to each Actual Burden audit record created for the
timecard during the Actual Burden Journaling process.
13.3.4 Entering Standalone DBA Overrides

Access the One-Time Overrides form.
Figure 13–2 One Time Overrides form
DBA (deduction, benefit, accrual)

Enter a code that defines the type of deduction, benefit, or accrual.
1000 to 9999.
Amount
Enter the actual gross pay amount for an employee. This amount is to be distinguished
from the distributed gross pay amount used for labor distribution. See data item
DPAY.
When you are using Work Order Time Entry, this field is used to record miscellaneous
pay for an employee (for example, piece rate bonus).
Basis
Enter the number of hours associated with each transaction.

Company
Work Tax Area

A/P Voucher (accounts payable voucher)

Enter a code to use to determine whether the system generates a voucher for the DBA,
tax, or wage attachment during the final update phase of the payroll processing cycle.
Valid codes are:
N: Do not generate.
Y: Generate.
Payee No (payee number)

Enter the address book number for the supplier who receives the final payment.
In Benefits administration, this is the address book number of the company that issues
the plan and receives premium payments for it.
For wage attachments, payee is the address book number of the agency, company,
individual, or court that is to receive the payment of the check.
Wage Att (wage attachment)

Enter a control number used to group and identify all related elements associated with
a wage attachment (Garnishment, Levy, Child Support, or Loan). This number is
assigned by the system and is used to attach a specific deduction to its related wage
attachment information.
Attached To Timecard
Stand Alone
Enter a unique number that the system assigns to each timecard . You can use this field
All

14
Administering Global Leave
41

■ Section 14.1, "Understanding Global Leave Administration"
■ Section 14.2, "Requesting Leave Time"
■ Section 14.3, "Administering Leave Requests"
■ Section 14.4, "Tracking Medical Leave Information"
■ Section 14.5, "Tracking Leave History and Accrual Balances"
■ Section 14.6, "Reviewing Leave Trends"
■ Section 14.7, "Purging Leave Requests"
■ Section 14.8, "Administering Employee Schedules"
14.1 Understanding Global Leave Administration

This section discusses:
■ Global leave administration overview
■ Global leave administration features
14.1.1 Global Leave Administration Overview

Most organizations need to track the amount of time that employees are on leave.
Although various payroll software products can track basic accrual balances and
timecard history, many organizations need additional planning and tracking tools that
track more detail and enable managers to evaluate and act upon trends.
Global leave administration offers robust time reporting and payroll features that
establish leave eligibility, accruals, and balance tracking. Global leave administration
enables you to immediately validate leave availability during the time entry process.
The system also provides an automated workflow feature that enhances the
management approval process.
Use global leave administration to track medical and maternity leave, known as
Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA), for U. S. employers. The system tracks
advanced information that is necessary for medical leave approval. After medical
leave begins, the system continues to track the progress of each approved leave and
gather additional information that is necessary to meet company and governmental
requirements.
Global leave administration includes Employee Self-Service and Manager Self-Service
features. You can use Employee Self-Service to:
Administering Global Leave 14-1

Understanding Global Leave Administration
■ View leave balances.

■ Request leave time.
■ Cancel or modify existing requests.
■ Submit FMLA requests and information for U.S. employees.
You can use the Manager Self-Service features to:
■ View leave requests and available balances.
■ Approve and reject leave requests.
■ View scheduled leave in the Work Order Employee Scheduling module.
■ Review leave trends.
All of the features and functions that are listed for Australia and New Zealand are also
available for use by all organizations. Although one of the modules, long service leave
administration, is provided specifically to meet the needs of users in Australia and
New Zealand, this module is also available to all users.
The setup processes for global leave administration include setting up system controls
and setting up leave types.
14.1.1.1 Prerequisite
Set up the system to process leave information correctly.
See Setting Up Global Leave Administration.
14.1.2 Global Leave Administration Features

Global leave administration includes features that are designed to meet specific needs
for users in multiple countries. Several of the features apply specifically to Australia
and New Zealand. This table describes generic and country-specific features:
Feature Description
Automatic leave The total hours of leave time are based on employee standard hours per
calculation. day. The system automatically calculates the time and displays the result.
Users can override this amount to adjust for variations, such as leave
time, that spans paid company holidays. Using daily leave time,
managers can view summary reports for leave trends.
Integration with As you enter leave events, the system can use the data to update resource
resource scheduling software.
assignment.

Feature Description
Employee Employees can enter detail information for each day of leave time and can
self-service and modify this information as needed. This detail information includes leave
leave request time taken and additional comments. If employees enter time on the
detail detail timecards that does not match the lump sum total for the leave
information. event, the system displays an error. The system stores the detail
information, including comments that cannot be overwritten.
Employees can select a reason for leave time from a list of user-defined
codes. Managers can use these codes to track information for various
purposes, such as leave patterns, leave time reporting disputes, or auditor
inquiries. For example, an organization might track sick time by type:
■ Personal illness.
■ Caring for a sick child or partner.
■ Caring for an elderly parent of in-law.
■ Doctor appointment.
■ Mental health time off.
Employees can also review leave time that the manager or an
administrator enters on their behalf. Security options exist to restrict
access to leave transactions to viewing only.
Manager In organizations where Manager Self-Service is installed and managers
self-service are responsible for approving leave events, managers can review their
review and employees time and comments, including time that is entered on their
approval. behalf. Security options exist to restrict managers access to time and leave
information only.
Leave Users can set up accruals and rollover rules for part-time employes
administration without having to define a Deductions, Benefits, and Accruals (DBA)
for part-time table method for each unique standard number of hours that is assigned
employees. to employees in the F060116 table. This feature includes various methods
of accruals such as accruals that are based on hours worked, days worked,
and lump sum accruals.
Leave The administration of leave based on days includes the ability to define a
administration leave type where the accrual, rollover, and limit can be established in
based on days. days. For example:
A new employee accrues one day of sick leave after working for eight
weeks. The employee continues at this rate until his first-year anniversary.
At the first-year anniversary, he accrues 12 days of sick leave.
An employee accrues one day of sick leave each month for the first five
months. She then receives an additional eight days of sick leave on her
one-year anniversary and each subsequent annual anniversary.

Feature Description
(AUS/NZL) Users can track leave time that is granted to employees based on their
Administration continuous service. This is an example of long service leave:
of long service
An employee is granted a leave of 13 weeks after 10 years of continuous
leave (LSL)
service. The leave is accrued each pay period until the employee reaches
dates.
the milestone anniversary date. On that date, the employee is entitled to
take the accrued leave.
The accrual is suspended in the event the employee has certain types of a
break in service, such as maternity leave. The accrual resumes once the
employee returns from the leave. Although a qualifying break delays the
LSL entitlement, the accrual continues when the employee returns to
work.
History records are automatically maintained for all LSL changes. The
system tracks these items:
■ Old and new amounts.
■ Date of change.
■ Identification of person who initiates each change.
■ Reason code.
History inquiry and reporting is also available for LSL.
Error messaging Organizations can set an error message for various types of leave. Users
by leave type. can set up leave type rules that use combinations of elements such as
company, business unit, union, employee type (full time, part time,
temporary), job type or step, locations, and two category fields. Note
these examples:
Sick leave can result in a negative amount, but vacation and holiday time
can result only in a positive amount.
In company ABD, union 101, full-time employees are enabled to request
vacation time that results in a negative amount. In company XYZ, union
999, full-time employees in Sydney are not allowed to request vacation
time that results in a negative amount.
You can set up a second type of leave editing to prohibit employees from
requesting partial days of leave.
Past period Employees can report leave time that was taken in previous payroll time
reporting. periods.
Comprehensive To enter leave time efficiently, employees can view and enter all
leave planning, applicable leave types that are offered by the organization or business unit
entry, and to which they are assigned.
review.
Adjustments by Employees can enter adjustments to the leave type that is assigned to
leave type. existing leave time entries. For example, an employee requests two weeks
of annual leave (vacation) and is away from work for the requested
amount of time. Upon return, the employee reports that he was ill for
three days of the vacation, and he wants to change three of the days from
annual leave to sick time.
Rollover Organizations can create rollover rules and set them up at the pay,
override rules. deduction, benefit, accrual (PDBA) level. You can also create overrides at
the table or employee instruction level. Leave programs that share
common leave types and pay types can include accrual rates, rollover
rules and proration rules that vary by type of employee. For example, an
organization offers sick leave for all employees. Exempt employees accrue
sick time at a higher rate than union and nonexempt employees and can
roll over higher amounts of sick time from one year to the next.

Feature Description
Time card When organizations use time card automation to create leave event time
automation cards for a group of employees, they can include information for these
includes leave items:
information.
■ Leave begin date
■ Leave end date
■ Leave reason
■ Sick certificate
When a user generates time cards, the system saves the information in
time entry and leave administration tables so that employees have a
consolidated view of all leave events and time cards regardless of how
they originated in the system.
Leave accrual To achieve a high degree of accuracy, organizations can establish leave
based on weeks programs that accrue leave time based on employee weeks of service.
of service. When leave accruals are based only on months of service, employees can
receive accruals before they are actually entitled to the time.
Partial approval Managers can use the Manager Self Service Leave Review program
of leave request. (P076311) to review and approve leave requests on a day-by-day basis
rather than approving or rejecting entire requests that might span
multiple days. (Release 9.1 Update) However, for medical requests,
managers can approve or decline only entire requests at the highest level
of the request.
See Administering Leave Requests.
Categorize Time entry or payroll administrators can specify timecards that they enter
timecard for into the F06116 table as public or private. Employees and managers can
viewing view public timecards, but cannot modify them.
(public/private
Employees and managers cannot view private timecards. Time entry or
timecards).
payroll administrators might use private timecards in situations such as
preparation for pay raises or bonuses.
See Understanding Timecard Automation
Setting Processing Options for the Time Entry MBF Processing Options
Program (P050002A)
"Manager Self Service," in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
"Approving Self-Service Timecards, " in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Human Capital Management Self-Service Implementation Guide.
"Understanding Self-Service Timecard Review and Approval," in the JD

Feature Description
(AUS/NZL) Employees can specify that they want the organization to pay them in
Request for advance for leave time that they are planning. Administrators can also
future leave and search for timecards that include the pay in advance designation.
advanced pay.
Administrators can specify types of leave that are available to employees
for payment in advance requests.
See Setting Up Leave Verification Rules
"Setting Up Self-Service Time Entry," in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Human Capital Management Self-Service Implementation Guide
"Setting Up the Time Entry Director Form", in the JD Edwards
"Setting Processing Options for Time Entry Self Service Director
(P051125)," in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Human Capital
Management Self-Service Implementation Guide
"Setting Up Self-Service Time Entry" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Human Capital Management Self-Service Implementation Guide
"Creating the Time Entry Interface for Employee Self-Service," in the JD
"Working with Interim Payments" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Payroll Implementation Guide.

Feature Description
Sick certification. Organizations can set up leave rules for sick certification that the system
processes within time entry. Depending on the setting for the sick
certificate rules code, employees can be paid based on whether they have
submitted a sick certificate. Additional data items are also included that
allow users to specify certification rules, including:
■ Definitions for a sick event.
■ Sick event time period.
■ Number of past months the system uses to calculate sick events.
■ Definition of the number of hours that constitute a sick event.
The time entry programs can notify users who enter sick time regarding
the requirement for a sick certificate, and whether leave rules allow
payment without the required certificate.
Note: If the system rolls over the accrual at the end of a standard year, it
compares the limit with the payroll month history. If the system rolls the
accrual over at the end of a fiscal or anniversary year, it compares the
limit with the fiscal and anniversary history.
You can use this information, stored in the F06106 table, in DBAs that you
base on another DBA, a union, or a calculation table. In many instances,
you need to set up only one accrual type and one pay type.
Administrators can use these programs to specify inception to date (ITD)
limits:
■ P059191 (Group Plan DBA Setup program): Group plan level.
■ P059021 (Table File Revisions): Calculation table level.
See Setting Up Leave Verification Rules
"Employee Self Service," in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
"Entering Timecards Using Self Service," in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Human Capital Management Self-Service Implementation
Guide.
Understanding Self-Service Time Entry," in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Human Capital Management Self-Service Implementation
Guide.
(AUS/NZL) LSL tracks employee service based on the date when their employment
Calculate began. This enhancement enables an organization to allow for gaps in
adjustments to service for such absences as maternity leave or sabbatical. Administrators
long service can use the Long Service Leave Management program (P75A670) to enter
leave dates. date adjustment information that the system saves in the F75A670 table.
See "(AUS) Processing Employee Leave in Australia, " in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Australia/New Zealand Payroll Implementation
Guide.
"Managing Long Service Leave," in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Australia/New Zealand Payroll Implementation Guide

Feature Description
Inception to date Administrators can use the new Inception to Date Limits code (CMAX) in
limit overrides. the Employee DBA Instructions program (P050181) to specify the
maximum payment amount or hours that an accrual can have at any one
time. For example, a company might have a vacation policy that allows an
employee to roll 40 hours each year over to the following year, but the
accrued balance cannot exceed a total of 300 hours at any one time. The
system calculates the payroll cycle and year-end rollover up to the limit
and takes into account the amounts that the system has processed.
See "Entering Employee Instructions" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Human Capital Management Fundamentals Implementation
Guide.
"Entering Employee Deduction, Benefit, and Accrual Instructions" in the
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Human Capital Management
"Setting Up Additional Information for DBAs" in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Human Capital Management Fundamentals
"Setting Up Rollover Information for DBAs" in theJD Edwards
Leave inquiry Organizations can use the Leave Management program (P07640) to
and manage all leave transactions. This program compares leave requests to
management. existing leave balances and displays the same information that managers
use when approving leave requests. Administrators can also use this
program to approve leave entry requests.
Users can add a leave request or transaction and can delete transactions
for individual days. This application also provides a powerful tool for
conducting individual or group inquires on all historical and current
leave transactions.
See Setting Processing Options for Leave Inquiry and Management
(P07640)
Understanding Leave Administration
Managing Leave Information.

Feature Description
PDBA effective Organizations can dramatically improve payroll efficiency and accuracy
dating. by automating PDBA rate changes that occur during the middle of a
payroll cycle. Users can enter a rate into the system with an effective date,
and the system completes the process, ensuring, for example, that an
employee's pay rate increase goes into effect on the first of the month.
See "Setting Up Deductions, Benefits, and Accruals" in the JD Edwards
"PDBA Effective Dates" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Human Capital Management Fundamentals Implementation Guide
"Setting Up Deductions, Benefits, and Accruals" in the JD Edwards
"Adding Basic DBA Information" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
"Entering Employee Instructions" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
"Entering Employee Deduction, Benefit, and Accrual Instructions" in the
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Human Capital Management
Setting Processing Options for Generate Timecard Entries (R052901)

Requesting Leave Time
Feature Description
Employee Employee scheduling enables you to create employee and employee
scheduling. group schedules. These schedules facilitate automated leave functions
and timecard generation. By establishing organizational holidays and
standardized work schedules, you can minimize data entry task and
automatically generate timecards that reflect the employee's work and
holiday schedule. You can establish holiday schedules for:
■ Companies
■ Business units
■ States or provinces
■ Unions
Administrators can set up schedule templates for user defined groups of
employees, minimizing set up and schedule maintenance for all
employees. Work schedules support nonstandard work patterns and
unique, individual work schedules. When administrators have defined
and assigned schedules, you can also significantly reduce time and leave
data entry by using schedules to pay employees for their scheduled time.
To manage situations where exceptions to the schedule template exist,
you can make changes to an individual employee's schedule even if that
employee is assigned to a schedule template. You can simplify the process
of assigning schedules to individual employees by linking templates to
employee groups. You can use the Manage Schedules for Employee
Groups program (P07315) to manage the links between employee groups
and schedule templates. You use the W07315A form as a director.
Administrators can assign a specific schedule template to an employee
group and launch a process that links each individual schedule calendar
for each employee in the group with the specified template. The time
entry system references the employee scheduling system when employees
or administrators enter, modify, or delete timecards that specify a leave
pay type.
You can use the Employee Schedules program (P07311) to view and
manage employee schedules. This program provides a list of employee
schedules (one calendar for each employee with a schedule). The program
also provides a consolidated view of an employee's schedule by
combining the employee's calendar, assigned schedule template, and
holiday calendars into a single calendar view. The program also provides
quick entry capability for new activities on an employee's schedule. From
this program, you can also launch programs to:
■ Create a new employee schedule.
■ Assign a schedule to a group of employees.
■ Work with group schedules.
■ Work with holiday schedules.
■ Work with calendars.
Timecard automation rules do not interact with employee schedules.
You can use the Generate Timecards from Schedule report (R07311) to
generate timecards from employee schedules. You can use the Employees
Without Schedules Report (R07311E) to generate a report that displays all
active employees who do not have a schedule established.
See Administering Employee Schedules
Assigning Schedules to Employee Groups.
14.2 Requesting Leave Time

This section provides an overview of leave requests and discusses how to:
■ Set processing options for Employee Leave Request (P07620).

■ Enter a leave request.

■ Enter medical information for a leave request.
■ Submit a leave request.
14.2.1 Understanding Leave Requests

Employees and managers can use global leave administration for planning,
requesting, and approving leave requests. You can use the Employee Leave Request
program (P07620) to plan and request leave time. In addition, you can review or
update previously requested leave time and review existing leave balances.
When they use this web-based program, employees navigate through a series of forms
that provide an intuitive approach to enter leave request information. Upon
completion of the planning stage, employees can use this program to submit leave
requests to their managers.
Employees can enter requests for medical or nonmedical leave. Leave types are user
defined. When an employee enters a request for medical leave, the system prompts the
employee to enter additional information about the leave time that is being requested.
Because this information might be considered personal and private, medical requests
can be submitted directly to the human resources department.
For all type of leave, employees can enter comments about the leave request in the
Leave Explanation/Comments field. The system saves all comments in the F07630
table. Employees can view historical comments by using a Form menu option on the
leave planning program and can modify comments by updating the leave request.
Managers can also enter comments for each leave request during the approval process.
When an employee submits a request, the system automatically sends a message to the
work center of the employee who initiates the request and to the work center of the
employee's reporting manager for manager review. Managers can review the pending
request from the work center, add comments if needed, and then approve or decline
the leave request, or indicate that it is under review.
When a manager enters a decision for a pending request, the system automatically
sends a response to the work center of the originating employee about the manager's
decision regarding the leave request.
The system stores employee leave request information in the F07620 table.
14.2.1.1 Creating FMLA Leave Request (Release 9.1 Update)

When employees are on FMLA leave, the system may allow them to substitute paid
leave time as a part of the leave request. An employee can substitute this time from
existing leave balances such as sick, vacation, flex holidays, etc. When an employee
substitutes paid leave during an FMLA leave request, the hours paid reduce accrual
amounts of the employee and also the amount of hours the employee is entitled to
each year for FMLA. The maximum number of FMLA allowed per year is 480 hours.
Consider this example: An employee requests 200 hours of FMLA and has accrued 20
hours of sick time and 120 hours of accrued vacation time. The company allows
substitution of paid sick and vacation accrual hours. The employee decides to
substitute 20 hours of paid sick and 80 hours of paid vacation. The result is that the
employee will have a zero sick accrual balance, 40 hour vacation accrual balance, and a
balance of 280 FMLA hours for the remaining year. Therefore, the employee will be
allowed to take a maximum of 280 additional hours of FMLA during the current year.
However, the employee will be paid for 100 of the 200 hours while on FMLA leave.

The system allows you to define rules regarding how an employee can substitute paid
leave and what types of accruals an employee can substitute for each FMLA leave
type. Additionally, the system allows you to specify what amount of a given FMLA
leave request shall be paid based on accruals. Administrators can use the FMLA
Leave Substitution Rules program to specify the order of substitution.
(Release 9.1 Update) When the system is set up to create timecards and you need to
approve or enter a medical leave request with substitution, the system uses the pay
type number for substitution based on the employee's balance for that substitution
leave type in the F07600 table. For example, the system uses the employee's accrual
type balance with value of S for timecards for leave type FS, the employee's accrual
type balance with value of V for timecards for leave type FV, and the employee's
accrual type balance defined in the USVH field of the F07600 table for timecards for
leave type FO.
(Release 9.1 Update) When you create a timecard for an accrual type, the system finds
all available DBA codes for that accrual type. Then, it checks the employee's balance
for the first pay type associated to that available DBA code in the F069036 table. You
must have set up the pay type with value of LVPT equal to 1, 2, or 3 in the F069116
table. If the system finds a balance, it creates timecards with that pay type until the
balance reduces to zero. If more substitution remains for the current substitution leave
type, the system uses the next available DBA code. Then, the system uses the first pay
type associated to that DBA code to create timecards if a balance exists for the
employee and DBA code.
(Release 9.1 Update) After the system has processed all DBA codes and there is still
remaining substitution time, the system uses the last used pay type to create remaining
timecards for the substitution type. If there is no remaining balance for any available
DBA code, the system uses the pay type associated to the first available DBA code.
14.2.1.2 Submitting Leave Requests

Depending on the company's leave policy and whether you have enough available
leave time to fulfill the request, one of these events occurs when you submit the
request:
■ If you have enough available leave time to fulfill the request, the system
automatically provides a confirmation notice indicating that the request has been
successfully completed and has been submitted for approval.
■ If you do not have enough available leave time to fulfill the request, and the
company enables you to submit requests regardless of the available vacation
balance, one of these events occurs, depending on the system setup:
– The system automatically provides a notice that the request has been
– The system displays a warning message and allows the time entry clerk to
submit the request.
■ If you do not have enough available leave time to fulfill the request, and the
company does not enable you to request more leave than you have available, the
system generates an error and does not let you submit the request.
You must change the leave request so that the predicted ending balance is greater
than or equal to zero.
After you submit the leave request, the system confirms that the request has been

14.2.1.3 Updating Submitted Requests

After you submit a leave request for approval, you can update the request if necessary.
If the manager has already addressed the original request, only the changed portion of
the request is sent to the manager for approval.
For example, if you initially request eight hours of leave on January 30 and submit the
request for processing, and then you update the request to include an additional eight
hours of leave on January 31, the approving manager receives an additional request
for eight hours of leave on January 31. After the leave is approved, the system updates
the original leave request to include the changes.
(Release 9.1 Update) You can modify or delete an FMLA leave request based on the
status of the request. If the request is pending approval, you can modify or delete it. If
the leave request is approved and there is no record at status T in the F07620 table,
then you can modify or delete the request. When you modify this request, the system
deletes the original request and creates a new request in pending status. If there are
any records at status T in the F07620 table, then you cannot delete those records, but
can delete other records that the user has not yet taken from the leave request. If a
request is approved and a part of it is taken, you can only delete the untaken part of it
and create another one. You cannot modify an approved request that has been
partially taken.
In addition to updating leave date and time information, you can also edit existing
comments or enter additional comments. Managers can also add comments during the
approval process, but they cannot overwrite employee comments.
14.2.2 Forms Used to Enter Leave Requests

Leave Planning W07620A Daily Processing Access leave forms.
And Request (G07GLVA2), Employee
Director Leave Request
Leave Planning W07620B Select the Plan and Enter a non-medical leave
Request Leave Time link request.
on the Leave Planning
And Request Director
form.
Medical Request W07620D Click Next after you have Enter medical information
Information selected a non-medical for a leave request.
leave type and completed
the steps for entering a
leave request on the Leave
Planning form.
(Release 9.1 Update) For
medical leave request,
select the Plan and Request
FMLA Leave Time link on
the Leave Planning And
Request Director form.
Review Requested W07620H Click Select. Access the Review/Update
Leave Time Requested Leave Time
form.
Note: Select the
Attachments button to add
an attachment for the leave
request. (Release 9.1
Update)


Review/Update W07620C Select the Review/Update Review, update, and
Requested Leave Requested Leave Time link submit leave requests.
Time on the Leave Planning
And Request Director
form.
Alternately, click Next on
the Leave Planning form.
Sick Substitution W07620K Click Next on the Leave (Release 9.1 Update) If you
and Balance Planning form. are allowed to substitute
paid sick hours, use this
form to see your sick
accrual balance based on
accrual type S.
If you are required to
substitute sick time, the
system displays the
employee’s sick time
balance in the Substituted
field and disables the field.
The substituted amount
can be up to the number of
hours remaining in the
leave request. The system
does not display this form
if sick substitution is not
allowed.
Vacation W07620L Click Next on the Leave (Release 9.1 Update) If you
Substitution and Planning form. are allowed to substitute
Balance paid vacation hours, use
this form to see your
vacation accrual balance
based on accrual type V.
substitute vacation time,
the system displays the
employee’s vacation time
balance in the Substituted
field and disables the field.
The substituted amount is
up to the number of hours
remaining in the leave
request. The system does
not display this form if
vacation substitution is not
allowed.


Other Substitution W07620M Click Next on the Leave (Release 9.1 Update) If you
and Balance Planning form. are allowed to substitute
other paid hours, use this
form to review your other
accrual balance based on
based on the user-defined
accrual type defined in
P07600.
substitute other leave time,
the system displays the
employee’s other leave
time balance in the
Substituted field and
disables the field. The
substituted amount is up
to the number of hours
remaining in the leave
request. The system does
not display this form if
other substitution is not
allowed.
FMLA Detailed W07620N Click Next on the Sick Review the allocation and
Review Substitution and Balance, ending FMLA balance.
Vacation Substitution and
Balance, or Other
Substitution and Balance
form.
FMLA Review W07620O Click Next on the Leave (Release 9.1 Update) When
Planning form. you are not allowed to
substitute paid leave
balances during an FMLA
leave request, you use this
form to review total hours
of your request and ending
FMLA balance.
Paid Time Off W053020A Select the Review Existing Review existing leave
Leave Balances link on the balances.
Leave Planning And
Request Director form.
Work With Leave W07630A Select the Review / Review all leave status and
Messaging and Update Requested Leave comments for a leave
Status Review Time link on the Leave request. To revise a
Planning And Request comment, go to the Leave
Director form. Select the Planning and Request
Leave Comments Review Director form and select
link on the Review the Review / Update
Requested Leave Time Requested Leave Time
form. link. Select a leave record
and then click Update.
14.2.3 Setting Processing Options for Employee Leave Request (P07620)

reports. Use these processing options to specify a calendar display preference and
processing default values.

14.2.3.1 Defaults
1. Approvals
Specify whether the employee is allowed to edit the Approving Manager field. If you
do not allow users to edit the processing option, the system automatically populates
this processing option with the manager from the F060116 table. This manager cannot
be edited. Values are:
1: Allow. (Default)
0: Do not allow.
2. Enter the version for P053020.

Specify the program version for P053020. The default program version is ZJDE0001.
14.2.3.2 Leave Entry

1. Leave Verification Set
Specify a group of leave verification rules that are grouped together for processing on
any given program. When users enter leave time, the leave verification rules validate
the entries. You create leave verification sets in the Leave Verification Rules program
(P07602).
2. FMLA Leave Verification Set

(Release 9.1 Update) Specify a group of leave verification rules for FMLA that are
grouped together for processing on any given program. When users enter leave time,
the leave verification rules validate the entries. You create leave verification sets in the
FMLA Leave Substitution Rules program (P07603).
3. Enter the instruction text users will see on the FMLA Sick Substitution form. 254
character max.
(Release 9.1 Update) Specify the instruction text that the system should display on the
FMLA Sick Substitution form. If you leave this field blank, the system displays the
default instruction text.
4. Enter the instruction text users will see on the FMLA Vacation Substitution form.
254 character max.
FMLA Vacation Substitution form. If you leave this field blank, the system displays the
5. Enter the instruction text users will see on the FMLA ’Other’ Substitution form. 254
character max.
FMLA Other Substitution form. If you leave this field blank, the system displays the
14.2.4 Entering a Leave Request

Access the Leave Planning form.

Figure 14–1 Leave Planning form
1. To enter a date range, click the Select Ranges button.
Note:
(Release 9.1 Update) When an employee has a schedule, the system
enables you to use the Use Employee Schedule option in conjunction
with the day check boxes. In this case, the system cannot consider a
leave request for an unscheduled day. If an employee has a schedule,
but you do not select the day check box, then the system does not add
the day to the leave request.
When an employee does not have a schedule, you can request leave
for any day by using the day check boxes to determine the days that
should be included in the leave request within the specified date
range. In this case, if you do not select a day check box, the system
does not add the day to the leave request.
2. Click Next.
Note: If you select dates directly from the calendar, you do not need
to use this option.
■ Manager
Enter a number that identifies an entry in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Address Book system, such as employee, applicant, participant, customer,
supplier, tenant, or location.
■ Leave Type
Enter a code from UDC 07/LV that describes the leave time that an employee
takes or requests. You can use this information to report leave trends. The
underlined leave types are links. When you select one of the leave types, the
system enters that leave type into the Leave Type field and then displays a list
of pay types that are available for that leave type.
Values might include:

C: Comp (compensation) Time

S: Sick Time
■ Start Date
Enter the beginning date of a leave time that an employee is requesting or
taking. If you accidentally select days in one month and then display another
month during which you want to request leave time, the system does not
automatically delete the days that you selected during the first month from the
leave request. You must manually clear the days that are in error before you
display any additional months. Otherwise, those days are included in the
leave request.
For example, if you initially load the January calendar on the form and select
two days as time off, but then you determine that you actually need to take
two days off during February, you must clear the January selections before
you select the February calendar.
■ End Date
Enter the ending date of leave time that an employee requests or takes.
■ Hours Per Day
Results in a calculation.
■ Leave Explanation/Comments
Enter employee comments that are associated with the leave transaction. The
system saves entries in the F07630 table. The system displays all comments
that an employee enters for a leave record and comments that a manager
enters during the leave approval process.
■ Attachment (Release 9.1 Update)
To attach additional information to a leave request, such as supporting or
required documentation, click the Attachment button. In the Manage File
Attachment form, browse and select the file and click on the Attach File
button.
Figure 14–2 Manage File Attachments

Note: You can use the attachment feature in both JD Edwards

EnterpriseOne Tools Release 9.1.3 or higher and Tools Release 9.1.2 or
lower.
For the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Release 9.1.3 or higher, see
"Attach Media Objects Directly from Applications" in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Tools 9.1.x Foundation Guide.
For the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Release 9.1.2 or lower, see
"Attaching Media Objects" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools 9.1.x
Foundation Guide.
14.2.5 Entering Medical Information for a Leave Request

Access the Medical Information form.
After you complete this form, click Next and proceed to the Submitting a Leave
Request task.
Enter relationship of person with medical condition.

Enter a UDC code that defines the relationship of the person with the medical
condition to a covered employee for medical leave purposes.
Enter spouse's address book number if they are an employee and you are requesting
time off for a reason related to him/her.
Enter the address book number of the spouse.
Enter name of person with medical condition.

Enter a display-only field that shows the employee's name as it has been entered in the
Alpha Name field in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book system.
Enter medical condition.

Enter a short description of the medical condition that is the reason for a medical leave
request.
Enter name of caring physician.

Enter the name of the medical professional who is caring for a patient or case.
14.2.6 Submitting a Leave Request

Access the Review/Update Requested Leave Time form.
Figure 14–3 Review/Update Requested Leave Time form (1 of 2)

Figure 14–4 Review/Update Requested Leave Time form (2 of 2)
Leave Request Number

Enter a code that identifies individual leave requests that are made by employees. This
code tracks and identifies leave request records.
Approving Manager
Enter the address book number for the manager or supervisor who is responsible for
approving or rejecting an employee leave request.
Previous Leave Requested Not Yet Approved

Enter the number of planned hours for a leave request.
Leave Hours Available

Review the value. This entry results in a calculation.
Current Leave Duration

Previous Leave Requested and Approved

Predicted Ending Balance

Review the value. This entry results in a calculation.
Request Number
Enter a code that identifies individual leave requests that are made by employees. This
code tracks and identifies leave request records.
Line Number
Enter a number that identifies multiple occurrences, such as line numbers on a
purchase order or other document. Generally, the system assigns this number, but in
some cases you can override it.
Leave Status
Enter a UDC from 07/LR that defines the stage of a leave request. Values are:
A: Approved
C: Currently Taking
D: Declined
P: Pending
T: Leave Taken

Administering Leave Requests
Leave Date
Enter the beginning date of a leave time that an employee is requesting or taking.
Leave Duration
Total Leave Duration

14.3 Administering Leave Requests

This section provides an overview of leave administration and discusses how to:
■ Set processing options for Manager Self-Service Leave Review (P076311).
■ Set processing options for Leave Inquiry and Management (P07640).
■ Approve leave requests.
■ Review leave trends.
■ Manage leave information.
14.3.1 Understanding Leave Administration

Managers can review pending leave requests from the work center and then approve
or decline them, or indicate whether a leave request is under review. You can also use
the Manager Self-Service Leave Review program (P076311) to review leave requests
and leave trends. Administrators can use the Leave Inquiry and Management program
(P07640) to perform inquiries and manage leave information.
The system enables managers to see the paid and unpaid proportions of the leave
request at the time of an FMLA leave approval.
Because managers can view all pending and historical leave requests for their
employees in P076311, they can also identify potential issues and make more informed
decisions about pending leave requests. When a manager enters a decision for a
pending request, the system automatically sends a response to the employee work
center that notifies the originator of the request about the status of the pending leave
request.
You can specify the leave requests by entering any combination of these criteria:
■ Employee address number
■ Leave status
■ Leave type
■ Leave dates
Review the Leave Status field before selecting a leave request record on the first form.
If the status for a given request is anything other than P (pending), you cannot enter
changes to the record.
If the system is set up to automatically create timecards, you can change an approved
leave request by entering changes to the timecard. If you delete a leave request record,
the system automatically removes the associated timecard. When you delete a
timecard that is associated with a leave request, the system automatically removes the
associated leave request.
Managers can use this program to review and approve leave requests on a day-by-day
basis rather than approving or rejecting entire requests spanning multiple days.

However, for medical requests, managers can approve only at one level that is the
highest node level for the leave request. This means that for medical leave requests,
managers need to either approve or decline the entire request.
When you respond to a leave request, you can select one of these options:
■ Approved
■ Currently taking
■ Declined
■ Leave taken
■ Pending
You can review comments that an employee enters and also enter comments to explain
the response. Although you can enter text to accompany any response, you typically
enter an explanation when you deny a request or assign a pending status to a request.
If an employee makes a change to a leave request after it has been approved, the
system forwards only the changed portion of the request to the manager for approval.
If the additional part of the leave request is also approved, the system deletes the
initial leave request and replaces it with an updated request that reflects both the
initial request and the changes. For example, assume that an employee originally
requested eight hours of leave on January 30 and submitted the leave request for
approval. After the manager approved the request, the employee decided to request an
additional eight hours of leave on January 31. In this example, the manager would
receive a new request, with the same request number, asking for approval for the
additional eight hours. At this point, these leave requests, with the same leave request
number, are in the system:
■ An approved request for the original eight hours.
■ A pending request for the additional eight hours.
If the manager approves the additional request, the system deletes both the original
request and the new request, and then creates a single request for 16 hours using the
original leave request number. If the manager did not approve the request, the two
original records remain in the system but with different statuses.
The Manager Self-Service Leave Review program displays information from and
records information into the F07620 table. Changes that you enter into the program can
also affect these tables:
■ F06116
■ F06116Z1
14.3.1.1 Leave Trends

After employee leave requests have been processed, managers can review the leave
requests across groups of employees so that they can identify trends in the types of
leave that employees are requesting. Identifying trends in employee leave time can
assist in developing leave policies that meet the needs of the employees and the
organization.
14.3.1.2 Leave Inquiry and Management

Organizations can use P07640 to manage all leave transactions. This program displays
the same information that managers use when they approve leave requests and
automatically compares leave requests to existing leave balances. Administrators can
also use this program to:

■ Inquire on historical and current leave information.

■ Approve or deny leave requests.
■ Add new leave transactions.
■ Delete leave transactions.
You can attach additional information to a leave request, such as supporting or
required documentation. To add an attachment, click the Attachment button in the
Leave Management form. In the Manage File Attachment form, browse and select the
file and click on the Attach File button (Release 9.1 Update).
This program also provides a powerful tool for conducting individual or group
inquiries on all historical and current leave transactions. While you are using P07640,
you can access these programs for related information:
■ Employee DBA Instructions (Deductions, Benefits, and Accruals).
■ LSL Administration (Long Service Leave).
■ Individual Time Entry.
■ Speed Time Entry.
■ Employee Master Filter.
■ Current Transactions Filter.
■ One-Time Overrides.
■ PDBA History (Pay, Deductions, Benefits, and Accruals).
14.3.2 Forms Used to Administer Leave Requests

Manager Self W076311D Daily Processing Access manager leave
Service Leave (G07GLVA2), Manager forms.
Review Self Service Leave
Review
Manager Self W076311D Search for leave Approve, deny, or return a
Service Leave requests. leave request or
Review individual days of a
request.
Review Time W076310A Daily Processing Review leave trends.
Attendance Trends (G07GLVA2),
Attendance Trend
Summary Review
Leave Management W07640A Daily Processing Inquire on historical and
(G07GLVA2), Leave current leave information
Management for individuals or groups.
Enter, approve, and delete
transactions for individual
days for all leave requests
except medical. For
medical, approve or
decline entire leave
request (Release 9.1
Update).


Leave Entry W07640D Click the Add/Append (Release 9.1 Update) The
or Update button on Add/Append button is
the Leave Management available to add regular
form. and medical requests. It is
also available to append
days to an existing regular
leave request. The Update
button is available to
update existing medical
leave requests.
14.3.3 Setting Processing Options for Manager Self-Service Leave Review (P076311)
reports.
14.3.3.1 Defaults
Use these processing options to specify default information about leave
administration.
1. Enter the Time Entry version to process

Specify which version of the Time Entry MBR Processing Options (P050002A) to use
when processing timecards. If you leave this processing option blank, the system uses
ZJDE0001.
2. Leave Balance Source

Specify whether the system retrieves leave balances for the current calendar year or for
the year based on the employee's leave anniversary date.
3. Leave Balance Units

Specify which unit of measure the system uses to display leave balances.
4. Default Standard Hours Per Day

Specify the number of hours the system uses to represent a work day when standard
hours per day are not specified for an employee.
14.3.4 Setting Processing Options for Leave Inquiry and Management (P07640)
reports.
14.3.4.1 Processing
Use these processing options to specify default information about leave inquiry and
management.
1. Leave Balance Source

Specify whether the system retrieves leave balances for the current calendar year or for
the year based on the employee's leave anniversary date. Values are:

0: F06146 (Current calendar year).

1: F06147 (Leave anniversary year. This is the default.)
2. Leave Balance Units

Specify which unit of measure is used to display leave balances. Values are:
H: Hours (Default)
D: Days
$: Dollars
3. Default Standard Hours Per Day

Specify the number of hours used to represent a work day if standard hours per day
are not specified for an employee. If you leave this field blank, the system uses eight
hours.
4. Time Entry Master Business Function Version

Specify the version of the Time Entry Master Business Function (P050002A) to use
when processing timecards that are associated with leave transactions. If you leave this
field blank, the system uses default version ZJDE0001.
14.3.5 Approving Leave Requests

Access the Manager Self Service Leave Review form.
Employee
Enter a number that identifies an entry in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address
Book system, such as employee, applicant, participant, customer, supplier, tenant, or
location.
Request Begin Date

Enter the beginning date of a leave time that an employee requests or takes.
Request End Date

Leave Type
requests. This information can be used to report leave trends. Values might include:
C: Comp Time
S: Sick Time
Accrual Type
Enter a UDC from 06/SV.
Leave Status
A: Approved
C: Currently Taking
D: Declined
P: Pending
T: Leave Taken

14.3.6 Reviewing Leave Trends

Access the Time Attendance Trends form.
Company
Enter the code of the company to which the employee is assigned. The system uses
this code to store historical payroll information and to determine accounts for some
journal entries.
Employee
location.
Week Day
Enter a code that indicates the day of the week in certified payroll processing and
reporting. Values are:
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
Leave Type
requests. You can use this information to report leave trends. Values include:
C: Comp Time
S: Sick Time
PDBA Code (pay types, deductions, benefits, and accruals code)

Enter a code that defines the type of PDBA.
1000 to 9999.
Work Date From and Work Date Through

Fiscal Year
Enter a number that identifies the fiscal year. Generally, you can either enter a number
in this field or leave it blank to indicate the current fiscal year (as defined on the
Company Setup form).
Specify the year at the end of the first period rather than the year at the end of the
fiscal period. For example, a fiscal year begins October 1, 2008, and ends September 30,
2009. The end of the first period is October 31, 2008. Specify the year 08 rather than 09.
Monday and Tuesday

The days that are associated with the code defined for this supplemental data type. For
example, engineering change order lead time days represent an association.

Total Occurrences
Enter the estimated number of occurrences per year for the service type. The PM
Projections program uses information from this field, in combination with the last
completed date, to project future schedule requirements.
You can use processing options to automatically calculate the estimated occurrences,
based on one of these:
■ One year of PM history.
■ Two years of PM history.
■ Inception-to-date PM history.
Total Hours
Enter the total number of hours in this payroll ID.
Work Date
Hours
Amount
Enter the actual gross pay amount for an employee. The system distinguishes this
amount from the distributed gross pay amount for labor distribution. See data item
DPAY.
When using Work Order Time Entry, that the system uses this field to record
miscellaneous pay for an employee, (for example, piece rate bonus).
14.3.7 Managing Leave Information

Access the Leave Management form.
Figure 14–5 Leave Management form
Supervisor
The address book number of the supervisor.

Union
A user defined code (06/UN) that represents the union or plan in which the employee
or group of employees work or participate.
Pay Status
Enter a code that the system uses to indicate whether an employee's pay status is
active or inactive. Codes for active pay status employees are numeric, and codes for
inactive pay status employees are alphabetic.
Leave Dates, To
The beginning date of a leave time that an employee is requesting or taking.
The ending date of leave time that an employee requests or takes.
Location
Enter a user defined code (07/SL) that defines the different salary localities within an
organization. For example, you can compare salaries for employees on the East Coast
with employees in the Midwest.
Accrual Type
Enter a user defined code (07/LV) that describes the leave time that an employee takes
or requests. You can use this information to inquire on leave transactions. Values might
include:
Fam/Med Leave Accrued
Holiday Accruals
Long Service Leave
Other Accruals
Rostered Day Off
Sick Accruals
Leave Status
Enter a user defined code (07/LR) that defines the stage of a leave request. Values are:
A: Approved
C: Currently Taking
D: Declined
P: Pending
T: Leave Taken
Available (Hours)
Review he total number of hours worked (for pay types) or the basis for deductions,
benefits, or accruals (DBAs) for each month.
Accrued (Hours)
Review the total number of hours worked (for pay types) or the basis (for DBAs) for
each month.
14.3.8 Managing Leave Entry (Release 9.1 Update)

Access the Leave Entry form.

Figure 14–6 Leave Entry form
Leave Type
C: Comp Time
S: Sick Time
Employee Number
The address book number of the employee.
Leave Date Range, To

The beginning date of a leave time that an employee is requesting or taking.
The ending date of leave time that an employee requests or takes.
Hours per Day

Enter the number of hours that the employee needs to work in a day. This results in
the calculation of total number of hours.
14.3.8.1 Leave Comments

Access the Leave Comments tab.
Leave Comments
Enter comments about the leave request.
14.3.8.2 FMLA Information

Access the FMLA Information tab.
Note: The system enables this tab only when you are entering a
medical leave type.
Enter relationship of person with medical condition

Enter a UDC code that defines the relationship of the person with the medical
Enter spouse's employee number if they are an employee and you are requesting
time off for a reason related to him/her.
Enter the address book number of the spouse.

Tracking Medical Leave Information
Enter name of person with medical condition

Enter a display-only field that shows the employee's name as it has been entered in the
Alpha Name field in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book system.
Enter medical condition

request.
Enter name of caring physician

14.3.8.3 FMLA Subsitution

Access the FMLA Substitution tab.
Note: The system enables this tab only when you are entering a
medical leave type.
Applied Hours Sick, Vacation, Other

Enter the number of hours to substitute for FMLA. The system enables only those
leave types to substitute that you have allowed in the P07603 program. If the
substitution is required, then the system retrieves the entire balance in that category
and disables the respective field.
14.4 Tracking Medical Leave Information

This section provides an overview of medical leaves and discusses how to:
■ Track medical leave information.
■ Attach a medical opinion to a leave request.
14.4.1 Understanding Medical Leaves

Human resources personnel can use the Medical Information Tracking program
(P076210) to review medical leave information and to track the progress of an
employee's health while they are on medical leave. You can also use this program to
send medical leave forms to employees through the employee work center. Employees
can print the forms from the work center.
For example, if you require a physician to verify an employee's physical condition
before you allow the employee to return to work, you can use this program to send a
message to the employee's work center with the medical form attached.
You can also use this program to attach medical opinion information to the request,
and to track historical medical opinions from doctors, which might provide important
information about the progress and status of an employee's medical condition and
fitness for work.
Note: Typically, only human resources personnel use this program.

Because the information that is tracked using this program can be
private and confidential employee information, it is recommended
that you set up a high level of security for this program. Contact the
system administrator or technical support personnel for assistance
with security setup.

When medical leave tracking is enabled in the Leave Type Setup program (P07601)
and employees submit requests for medical leave, the system creates records in these
tables:
■ F07620
All employee leave requests, including medical leave requests, are recorded in this
table.
■ F07621
Only medical leave requests are recorded in this table.
The employee's manager has access to the record that the system creates in the F07620
table. This record contains the information that the manager uses to review, approve,
or deny a leave request. Human resources personnel have access to the record that the
system creates in the F07621 table.
If you use this feature, the employee's manager and a human resources administrator
must approve each medical leave.
14.4.2 Forms Used to Track Medical Leave Information

Work With Medical W076210A Daily Processing Select leave requests.
Information Tracking (G07GLVA2), Medical
Leave Tracking
Medical Information W076210B Select a record and click Track medical leave
Tracking Select on the Work With information.
Medical Information
Tracking form.
Work With Medical W076210C Select Medical Opinion Review existing medical
Opinions from the Form menu on opinions, or access the
the Medical Information Medical Opinion form.
Tracking form.
Medical Opinion W076210D Click Add on the Work Attach a medical opinion
With Medical Opinion to a leave request.
form.
14.4.3 Tracking Medical Leave Information

Access the Medical Information Tracking form.
Employee Number
location.
Leave Begin Date

Enter the beginning date of a leave time that an employee requests or takes.
Leave Return Date

Enter the date that an employee actually returns from a leave period.
Current Status
A: Approved

C: Currently Taking
D: Declined
P: Pending
T: Taken
Person With Medical Condition

Review this display-only field that shows the employee's name as it has been entered
in the Alpha Name field in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book system.
Employee Relationship
Enter a use-defined code that defines the relationship of the person with the medical
Scheduled Leave End

Fitness Certification
Enter a code that indicates whether an employee is required to submit medical
certification that he or she is able to return to work. Values are:
1: Required.
0: Not required.
Medical Certification - Employee

Enter a code that specifies whether medical certification from a medical professional is
required for an injury or illness. Values are:
1: Required.
0: Not required.
Medical Certification - Family Member

Enter a code that specifies whether medical certification from a medical professional is
required for an injury or illness. Values are:
1: Required.
0: Not required.
Key Employee Status

Enter a code that indicates that an employee qualifies as a key employee.
Job Restoration Denial

Enter a code that determines whether an employee is notified that he or she might not
return to their original job when he or she returns from a leave period. Values are:
1: Employee is notified.
0: No action.
14.4.4 Attaching a Medical Opinion to a Leave Request

Access the Medical Opinion form.
Opinion Number
Enter a number that identifies multiple occurrences, such as line numbers on a
purchase order or other document. Generally, the system assigns this number, but in
some cases you can override it.

Tracking Leave History and Accrual Balances
Doctor Name
Opinion Date
Enter the date that an employee is notified that medical certification from a medical
professional is required for an injury or illness.
Medical Condition
request.
Perform Work Flag

Enter a code that indicates whether a medical professional has determined that an
employee is able to perform their normal work duties. Values are:
1: Able to perform work duties.
0: Unable to perform work duties.
Treatment Flag
Enter a code that specifies whether a patient requires ongoing treatment. Values are:
1: Requires ongoing treatment.
0: No ongoing treatment is required.
Work Function Acceptance

Enter a code that specifies whether a medical professional indicates there are certain
duties that the employee is not able to perform. Values are:
1: Yes, a medical professional is restricting employee duties.
0: No restrictions exist.
Patience Assistance Recovery

Enter a code that specifies an existing medical opinion of whether a patient requires
assistance. Values are:
1: Requires assistance.
0: No assistance is required.
14.5 Tracking Leave History and Accrual Balances

This section provides an overview of leave history and accrual balances and discusses
how to:
■ Set processing options for Tracking Leave History by Employee (R07531).
■ Set processing options for Accrual Roster Report (R074501).
14.5.1 Understanding Leave History and Accrual Balances

You can use the Leave History Tracking - By Employee report (R07531, version
ZJDE0001) and the Leave History Tracking - By Leave Type report (R07531, version
ZJDE0002) to review employee leave information and make informed decisions about
authorizing future leave requests. The system provides two versions of this program
so that you can automatically produce leave history reports that are organized by
employee or by leave type. You can set processing options for the version that you are
running to sort leave information by these parameters:

■ Leave type
■ Business unit
■ Company
You can also set processing options to specify whether the system displays paid and
unpaid totals.
Both versions of this program display company, employee, and business unit totals.
Depending on processing option settings, individual reports can display total paid
hours and total unpaid hours for each category. For example, if you run the Tracking
Leave History By Employee report and specify that the system report totals by
business unit, the system displays:
■ Employee total
■ Company total
■ Business unit total
■ Business unit paid hours
■ Business unit unpaid hours
If you leave the processing option on the Totals tab blank, the system does not display
paid or unpaid hour totals.
You can use the Accrual Roster report (R074501) to review accrued leave time and
evaluate the value of the time to the organization. You can set processing options to
specify whether the information is based on historical information for a fiscal
anniversary or payroll month. You can also specify whether values are expressed in
current or historical currency amounts.
To review and analyze trends in the time that employees take off, you use the Leave
Trend Inquiry program (P076310). You can search for employee leave information
using a wide range of parameters such as dates, days of the week, leave requests, and
so on.
14.5.1.1 Tracking Leave History by Employee

You can use the Leave History Tracking By Employee report (R07531, version
XJDE0001) to review employee leave information. The system gathers information for
this report from the F0618 table. Although this report provides information by
employee, you can use processing options to specify the amount and type of
information that appears. For example, you can specify whether the system:
■ Includes paid and unpaid totals for each employee.
■ Sorts by leave type.
■ Sorts by business unit.
■ Sorts by company.
■ Includes all totals.
14.5.1.2 Tracking Leave History by Leave Type

You can use the Leave History Tracking By Leave Type report (R07531, version
XJDE0002) to review employee leave information. The system gathers information for
this report from the F0618 table. Although this report provides information by leave
type, you can use processing options to specify the amount and type of information
that appears. For example, you can specify whether the system:

■ Includes paid and unpaid totals for each employee.

■ Sorts by leave type.
■ Sorts by business unit.
■ Sorts by company.
■ Includes all totals.
14.5.1.3 Tracking Accrual Balances

You can use the Accrual Roster report (R074501) to track and review leave balances for
employees. You can display accrued hours and the value of accrued time in current or
historical dollars. For example, an employee might accrue leave time during the
previous year and then carry that time over to the current year. If the employee had
earned a lower rate of pay when the time was accrued than the employee's current rate
of pay, then the value of the current time is different than that when the leave time was
accrued.
You can set processing options to specify date ranges and DBAs that you want to
include in the report. You can also specify whether the system gathers information
from history tables based on historical information for a fiscal year, anniversary year,
or calendar year.
14.5.2 Setting Processing Options for Tracking Leave History By Employee (R07531)
Access Periodic Processing menu (G07GLVA3), Leave History Tracking by Leave Type
or Leave History Tracking by Employee.
14.5.2.1 Totals
Use these processing options to specify totaling information for the report.
1. Print Paid and Unpaid Totals

Specify whether to print paid and unpaid totals. Values are:
E: Print paid and unpaid totals for each employee.
L: Print for each leave type.
B: Print for each business unit.
C: Print for each company.
A: Print all totals.
Blank: Print no paid and unpaid totals.
14.5.3 Setting Processing Options for Accrual Roster Report (R074501)

Access Periodic Processing menu (G07GLVA3), Accrual Roster.

Reviewing Leave Trends
14.5.3.1 Defaults
These processing options specify default information for the report.
1. Source Table
Specify whether to retrieve information from the Payroll History table or the Fiscal
Anniversary History table. Values are:
1: Retrieve balances from the Fiscal Anniversary table.
Blank: Retrieve balances from the Payroll Month History table.
2. Print Dollars
Specify whether you want to print dollars or hours on the report. Values are:
1: Dollars.
Blank: Hours.
3. Employee Number
Specify which employee number you want to print on the report. Values are:
A: Address Number.
T: Tax ID Number.
O: Other ID Number.
4. Current Dollars
Specify whether the system prints current or historical dollars. Current dollars are
calculated by multiplying the historical hours by the current pay rate in the F060116
table. Values are:
1: Current dollars.
Blank: Historical dollars.
14.5.3.2 Dates
Use these processing options to specify a date range.
1. Enter the from date for the range from which the data will be reported.
Specify the beginning date of the date range that the system uses when running the
report. If you leave this processing option blank, the system uses the system date.
14.5.3.3 DBAs
These processing options specify DBA codes.
1. Enter up to 5 DBAs to process or leave blank to process all DBAs.

Specify whether to process specified DBAs. To process DBAs, enter the identification
number of each DBA. You can specify up to five DBAs. Values are:
Blank: All DBAs.
DBA IDs: Specified DBAs.
14.6 Reviewing Leave Trends

This section provides an overview of leave trend review and lists the form used to
review leave trends.

Purging Leave Requests
14.6.1 Understanding Leave Trend Review

You can use the Leave Trend Inquiry program (P076310) to review trends in employee
leave time. For example, you can review time off that employees take on the first or
last day of the week, or all of the leave requests for a specified employee. This program
offers a wide range of parameters that you can use to analyze trends that are occurring
in the organization. This program references the F0618 table.
14.6.2 Form Used to Review Leave Trends

Review Time Attendance W076310A Daily Processing Search employee leave
Trends (G07GLVA2), Attendance time by a range of time
Trend Summary Review entry factors.
14.7 Purging Leave Requests

This section provides an overview of the leave request purge process and discusses
how to set processing options for the Purge Leave Request report.
14.7.1 Understanding Leave Purging

You can use the Purge Leave Request report (R07520) to delete records from the F07620
table. In some instances, this table might contain approved requests for leave time that
the employee did not take. In such an instance, the employee might not be aware that
the leave request is still active.
The table might also contain denied requests that you want to remove. When requests
are denied, the record remains in the system so that the leave request originator can
review the record, including any notes that the manager includes in the response.
When you process this program, you select a date range. You can then delete any of
these types of records that meet the date criteria:
■ Denied leave requests.
■ Completed requests for leave time that the employee takes.
■ Approved leave requests.
You can run this program in proof mode or update mode. When you run this program
in the proof mode, the system generates a report so that you can view the records that
the system will purge. When you run the program in update mode, the system deletes
those records from the table. You should run this program in proof mode before
running it in update mode to ensure that you delete the correct records from the
system.
Note: It is recommended that you do not purge leave transaction

records with a status of Taken. You might want to maintain a
historical view these records and include them on future reports.
14.7.2 Setting Processing Options for Purge Leave Request (R07520)


Administering Employee Schedules
Access Period Processing menu (G07GLVA3), Purge Leave Request.
14.7.2.1 Purge Selections

These processing options determine how the system purges leave requests.
1. Purge Date
Specify a date by which leave records are purged from the system. Records with dates
prior to this date are purged from the leave request tables.
2. Purge Types
Specify the leave request records that you want to purge. You can purge denied leave
requests, taken leave requests, or all leave requests. If you leave this processing option
blank, the system deletes all leave requests with leave end dates that are prior to the
date entered in processing option 1. Values are:
Blank: Purge all leave requests with leave end dates that are prior to the date entered
in processing option number 1.
D: Denied leave requests.
T: Taken leave records.
A: All leave requests.
14.7.2.2 Mode
This processing option specifies a system processing mode.
Report mode
Specify a processing mode. When you use proof mode, the system generates a report,
but no records are deleted from the system. When you use final mode, the system
generates a report and deletes records from the system. You normally run this report in
proof mode and then review the report before you run the program in final mode.
Values are:
Blank: Final mode
1: Proof mode
14.8 Administering Employee Schedules

This section provides an overview of employee schedule administration and discusses
how to:
■ Set processing options for Manage Employee Schedules (P07311).
■ Manage employee schedules.
14.8.1 Understanding Employee Schedule Administration

You can use the Employee Schedules program (P07311) to review, edit, and manage
schedules. You can search for schedules and add, edit, or delete activities within a
schedule. When you view an employee schedule, you can click any day or time on the
schedule calendar control and the software displays the Edit Activity program
(P01302). When you click Save and Close, the system returns to the Employee
Schedule form and displays the changes.
From the Employee Schedules program, you can select menu options to:
■ Create a new employee schedule.

■ Assign a schedule to a group of employees.

■ Review and edit employee schedule calendars.
■ Manage group schedule calendars.
■ Manage holiday schedule calendars.
■ Work with calendars.
You can also select either of these options from a separate menu to perform actions on
a selected record:
■ Edit Employee Details
Use this option to display the Employee Master program (P0801) where you can
update employee information.
■ Edit Schedule Definition
Use this option to display the Calendar program (P01311), where you can define
and edit calendar information for the selected individual employee calendar.
To help manage employee scheduling and ensure that all employees are included, an
administrator might periodically run the Check for Employees Without Schedules
report (R07311E). The administrator can use this report to identify employees who
have either been missed in the initial setup or who have been hired since the setup was
performed. Running this report is particularly important when you want to generate
timecards from schedules. The administer can create individual schedules where
necessary and include them for timecard generation.
When your organization uses employee scheduling, you can save substantial time
preparing for periodic payrolls by running the Generate Timecards from Schedule
program (R07311). When you run this program, the system creates a timecard for each
activity in the schedule, cross-references pay types, and creates a timecard for
scheduled hours. The Generate Timecards from Schedule program uses the same data
selection parameters as the Pre-Payroll Processing program (R07200). You can use this
approach to track time and generate pay instead of manually entering timecards.
See JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports: A to Z.
14.8.1.1 Employee Scheduling Integration with Time Entry

When you use employee scheduling, the system automatically integrates with some of
the time entry functions. For example, when you enter a timecard that includes a leave
type, From Date, and Thru Date, with no hours, the system automatically references
the employee's schedule and generates timecards that are based on the schedule. The
system then updates the schedule with the appropriate leave activity type.
When an employee requests paid time off, the system references the employee
schedule to show available days. When a manager approves the request, the system
creates a timecard and updates the employee schedule with the leave activity type.
To generate employee timecards, you use the Generate Timecards from Schedule
program (R07311).
See JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports: A to Z.

14.8.2 Forms Used to Administer Employee Schedules

Work with Employee W07311A Daily Processing Display schedules for
Schedules (G05BESDP), Manage review.
Employee Schedules.
Employee Schedule W07311B Select an employee record Review employee
on the Work with schedule information or
Employee Schedules form enter changes. Click Close.
and then click View
Employee Schedule.
14.8.3 Setting Processing Options for Manage Employee Schedules (P07311)

14.8.3.1 Display
1. Display Schedule Name
Specify whether the schedule name should appear with the employee name when
viewing the employee's schedule. Values are:
F: Do not display (default).
T: Display
2. Initial Week View Display

Specify how the system initially displays the week view of the schedule calendar. The
week view can display either a seven-day (Sunday through Saturday) week or the
span of days specified as the work week on the individual employee calendar. Users
can toggle this setting in the application. Values are:
W: Display the work week as defined by the schedule (default).
7: Display the Sunday through Saturday week.
14.8.3.2 Versions
1. Activities Common Process Options
Specify the version of the Activities Common Processing Options (P01350) that the
system uses. If you leave this field blank, the system uses default version ZJDE0003.
2. Time Entry Master Business Function

Specify the version of the Time Entry Master Business Function Processing Options
(P050002A) to use for synchronizing schedule events with the time entry system. If left
blank, the system uses default version ZJDE0001.
14.8.4 Administering Employee Schedules

Access the Employee Schedule form.

Figure 14–7 Employee Schedule form
See Also:
■ "Using Foundation Calendar, Managing Activities" in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation
Guide.


15
Processing Journal Entries
15

■ Section 15.1, "Understanding Journal Entries"
■ Section 15.2, "Processing and Reviewing Journal Entries"
■ Section 15.3, "Posting Journal Entries"
15.1 Understanding Journal Entries

You process journal entries to update the general ledger with labor, payroll burden,
and equipment expenses. The way in which you process journal entries depends on
whether you use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system.
If you use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system, you process journal entries
as part of each payroll cycle. In some cases, you might process journal entries at other
times during a pay period. For example, labor-intensive organizations might need to
monitor and analyze labor expenses daily. These organizations can process journal
entries for timecards daily.
If you are not using the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system but are using the
time and labor features of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Human Capital
Management Foundation system to enter timecards and track labor and equipment
expenses, you can process journal entries for timecards.
You process two types of journal entries for payroll and for time and labor:
Journal Entry Type Description

Pro forma journal entries Preliminary, review-level journal entries that the system
stores in the Payroll Journal (Compressed) File table
(F063951).
Actual journal entries Journal entries that the system posts to the F0911 table and,
optionally, the F0902 table.
When you process journal entries for payroll, you create pro forma journal entries
during each payroll cycle. After you review the pro forma journal entries, you can
create the actual journal entries that you post to the general ledger. You can set up the
company options so that the system automatically posts actual journal entries during
the final update step of the payroll cycle. If the company options are set up so that the
system does not post the actual journal entries automatically, you must post the
journal entries manually. You also must post the actual journal entries manually when
an error prevents the system from posting them automatically.
Processing Journal Entries 15-1

Processing and Reviewing Journal Entries
When you process journal entries for timecards, you run a batch program to create the
pro forma journal entries. After you review the pro forma journal entries and correct
any errors, you run another batch program to create the actual journal entries and post
them to the general ledger.
You can create journal entries for these document types:
Process Document Types

Document types for payroll T1: Payroll disbursement
T2: Payroll labor distribution
T3: Actual burden
T6: Payroll accruals and deferrals
T7: Payroll vouchers
The system creates document-type T7 journal entries only
when the payroll system is integrated with the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Accounts Payable system.
Document types for time and labor T2: Payroll labor distribution
You process pro forma journal entries for timecards only when you are not processing
the journal entries that are associated with a payroll cycle. You can use the Journal
Batch Proof report to review the pro forma journal entries before you post them to the
general ledger. You can also use this report to review the pro forma journal entries that
the system created during a payroll cycle. If errors occur in the journal batch, you can
correct the errors, delete the batch, and reprocess the pro forma journal entries.
When the pro forma journal entries are error-free and approved for posting, you post
them to the general ledger. You can post either type of pro forma journal entries:
■ Timecard journal entries.
■ Payroll journal entries that were not posted during the payroll cycle, either
because of errors or the way in which the company options are set up.
When you post journal entries, the system creates, posts, and removes the timecard
batch details from the F063951 table, and updates the F0911 table and the F0902 table
with the timecard transactions.
15.2 Processing and Reviewing Journal Entries

This section includes an overview of journal entries for timecards, and discusses how
to set processing options for:
■ Generate Timecard Entries (R052901).
■ The Payroll Journal Proof/Edit Report (R05229).
■ Create Payroll JE's - Batch Delete (R05227).

15.2.1 Understanding Journal Entries for Timecards

You process pro forma journal entries for timecards only if you are not creating the
journal entries associated with a payroll cycle.
When you process pro forma journal entries for timecards, the system converts the
F06116 table into the Payroll Journal (Compressed) File table (F063951) and the Burden
Distribution File table ( F07241). When you process these journal entries, you can:
■ Specify the general ledger date for the journal entries.
■ Select timecards based on a range of dates.
In addition to generating pro forma journal entries, this program generates the Journal
Batch Proof report. You review this report to verify the accuracy of the transactions
that the system generated from the journal data. This report includes individual
entries and totals for document type, period, and company, as well as a grand total for
the batch report. You can rerun this report without rerunning the pro forma journal
entries.
See "Working with the Payroll Cycle, " in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Payroll Implementation Guide.
"Working with Pro Forma Journal Entries" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Payroll Implementation Guide
15.2.1.1 Reviewing the Payroll Journal Proof/Edit Report

After you process pro forma journal entries, you review the Payroll Journal Proof/Edit
Report (R05229). Use this report to review the accuracy of the journal entries before
you post the information to the general ledger. The system generates this report when
you:
■ Process pro forma journal entries for timecards
■ Process the journal entry step of a payroll cycle.
The Journal Batch Proof report (R05229) lists the journal entry information by
document types. Grouping journal entries by document type enables you to separate
various types of accounts. The system uses these document types to group payroll
journal entries:
■ T1: Payroll Disbursement Entries
■ T2: Payroll Labor Distribution
■ T3: Actual Burden Journal Entries
■ T4: Labor Billing Distribution
T4 journal entries are the only entries that have transactions involving multiple
currencies and conversions. All other document types have entries made in the
currency of the employee's home company, and no currency conversion is
necessary.
■ T5: Equipment Distribution
■ T6: Payroll Accruals and Deferrals
Important: If errors appear on the Payroll Journal Proof/Edit report,

you must correct the errors and rerun the pro forma journal entries.

This list contains examples of what might cause errors to appear on the Payroll Journal
Proof/Edit report:
■ Inaccurate AAIs
■ An account number that was not yet added to the chart of accounts.
■ Incorrect setup of nontaxable benefits or accruals that were processed in the
journal entries step.
■ Incorrectly entered timecard information.
In this case, if you are processing journal entries for a payroll cycle, you also must
rerun pre-payroll.
The system does not recognize the corrections until you rerun the pro forma journal
entries. If you do not rerun the pro forma journal entries after you correct the errors,
the system creates the actual journal entries with errors.
When you are processing journal entries as part of a payroll cycle and you have not yet
printed the payments, you can complete this procedure to correct inaccurate timecard
information:
■ Rerun the journal entries step and delete the previous journal entries to remove
the lockout code on the timecards.
■ Correct the inaccurate timecards.
■ Run a changes-only pre-payroll.
■ Rerun the journal entries step.
You can reprint the Payroll Journal Proof/Edit report when you want to print the
report without re-creating the pro forma journal entries. The system prints the same
proof report that was created during the last iteration of the process. The related
payroll ID appears on the report when you reprint it. You can print this report as many
times as necessary before you run the final update. After you run the final update, the
system clears the Summarized Journal Entry Workfile (F063951), and the report does
not produce any information.
Note: If you are processing multicurrency timecards, the system

automatically creates intercompany settlement entries to account for
currency differences, even if you have not enabled intercompany
settlements. These journal entries are printed on the report so that you
can review all of the information associated with multicurrency
processing before you post the journal entries to the general ledger.
15.2.1.2 Reviewing Batches of Journal Entries

After you generate pro forma journal entries, you can review them to verify whether
they are correct. You do this by selecting Timecard Post/History Update menu
(G05BT11), Timecard Journal Batch Review.You can review batches of journal entries
based on the user ID, the batch number, a posting status, or a specific date range. You
can review batches of pro forma journal entries to verify that they are error-free before
you post them. You can review the pro forma journal entries that were generated from
the payroll cycle, as well as those that were generated from timecards.
You also can review actual journal entries that the system creates when you post
timecard journal entries to the general ledger, as well as the actual journal entries that
were created during the final update step of the payroll cycle. Depending on how the

company options are set up, the system might automatically post these actual payroll
journal entries.
The system uses batch types to group the various kinds of journal entries. You can
review these batch types:
Batch Type Description

51 Timecard pro forma journal entries. You can review
summary information only. Use the Journal Batch Proof
report to locate any errors.
41 Payroll pro forma journal entries. You can review summary
information only. Use the Journal Batch Proof report to
locate any errors.
P Actual timecard journal entries that have been posted to the
general ledger.
7 Actual payroll journal entries that have been posted to the
general ledger.
If you discover errors when you review batches of pro forma journal entries, you must
delete the entire batch, correct the errors, and then generate the pro forma journal
entries again.
If you discover errors when you review batches of actual journal entries, you can use
the General Journal Review program to do any of these actions to individual journal
entries:
■ Revise unposted journal entries.
■ Delete unposted journal entries.
■ Void posted journal entries.
You can revise and delete actual journal entries only. You cannot revise or delete
pro forma journal entries.
15.2.1.3 Deleting Batches of Journal Entries

You delete an unposted batch of pro forma journal entries when the batch contains
errors, and you must correct the timecard entries before you regenerate the corrected
batch.

See Also: ■"Working with the Payroll Cycle, " in the JD Edwards

■ "Reviewing Payroll Cycle Reports", in the JD Edwards
■ "Working with the Payroll Cycle, " in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
■ "Correcting Errors in Pre-Payroll Processing," in the JD Edwards
■ Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions for JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Human Capital Management.
■ "Processing Batch Journal Entries" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
■ "Processing Journal Entries, in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
■ "Working with Reversing Journal Entries," in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications General Accounting Implementation Guide
15.2.2 Setting Processing Options for Generate Timecard Entries (R052901)

Select Timecard Post/History Update menu (G05BT11), Generate Timecard Journals.
15.2.2.1 Date
This processing option specifies the date that the system uses to post journal entries.
1. General Ledger Date

Specify whether the program uses the general ledger date or the system date when it
posts journal entries.
To use the system date, leave this processing option blank. Timecards that have
multiple work dates are posted on the date that you define in this processing option.
To account for daily timecards, you must run this program every day with the
processing option set to the system date.
15.2.2.2 Process
These processing options specify values for processes related to benefits, intercompany
settlements, components, and premiums.
1. Benefits
Specify how the system processes benefits and accruals when it posts journal entries
for timecards. Values are:
0: Do not calculate any benefits or accruals.
1: Calculate only non-monthly benefits and accruals.
2: Calculate monthly and non-monthly benefits and accruals.
Enter this value only when you are processing the last timecards for calendar month.
The system uses the month that corresponds to the general ledger date.
Non-monthly benefits and accruals are those for which you entered M in the fifth Pay
Period of the Month processing option on the Basic DBA Information form
(W059116E). An M in this processing option indicates that the system calculates the
benefit or accrual during daily timecard post.

Monthly benefits and accruals are calendar-month DBAs, including those that are
non-monthly, that have these characteristics:
■ They are set up to calculate for the employee for an entire calendar month.
■ They have a value of 2 or blank in the Limit Method field on the Advanced DBA
Information form (W059117A).
2. Intercompany Settlements
Specify whether you want to process intercompany settlements when you post
timecard journal entries. Values are:
1: Process intercompany settlements.
When processing intercompany settlements, the system uses the general accounting
constants and the company number on the timecard.
0: Do not process intercompany settlements.
This processing option applies only when the journal type IC is set up in the
Debit/Credit-Accruals Clearing table (P069041).
3. Components
Specify how to post timecard journal entries for equipment time when the equipment
is used to build an item that comprises multiple components. Values are:
1: Distribute equipment time billed from the parent item to its components.
0: Bill equipment time to parent item only.
In the Asset Master table (F1201), you define the parent/child relationship between
parent items and their components. You enter billing rates for the components in the
Equipment Rates table (F1301).
4. Premiums
Specify how you want to update the F0911 table for premium labor entries. Premium
labor entries are entries for pay types that have a pay type multiplier greater than 1.
Values are:
1: Update.
Select this option when you want journal type PR to include labor hours in the Units
field.
0: Do not update.
Select this option when you want only journal type LD to include labor hours in the
Units field.
This processing option applies only when the Debit Burden/Premium Labor
Distribution table setup (P069042) includes these characteristics:
■ The journal type PR has been added to the table.
■ The company burden rules are set up to separate the premium portion of a pay
type from the regular portion.
5. Summarization Rules
Specify how journal entries are created and printed. Each account number has a
summarization rule defined for it in the Journal Summarization Rules program
(P06914). This processing option enables you to override the summarization code to a
type 6 so that you can see the journal entries in the highest level of detail possible.
Values are:

1: This option overrides any summarization rules, making the summarization code a
type 6. Select this option when you want the journal entries to be created and printed
in full detail.
0: This option is the default value, so the system uses the predefined summarization
rule.
6. Hours Only Timecards

Specify which effect on general ledger codes (set up in a PDBA) create T2 and T4
entries for timecards that include hours worked, but do not include a recharge
amount. Values are:
0: Effect on general ledger codes must be H.
1: Effect on general ledger codes can be H or N.
T2 entries are created for all record type 1 or 2 timecards with hours worked. T4
entries are created for all record type 2 or 3 timecards with hours worked.
7. Equipment Asset Number on T5 Debit Entry

Specify whether to include the equipment worked asset number (EQCG) on the debit
entry (ED) of the equipment distribution journal entries (T5). This processing option is
valid only when an asset ID exists in the Equipment Worked field and when no value
exists in the Equipment Worked On field on the employee's time card. Values are:
Blank: Do not use asset number.
1: Use asset number.
15.2.2.3 Timecard Selection

This processing option specifies the date that the system uses to post journal entries.
1. Time Entry MBF Version

Override the default version for standard time entry. The default version for Time
Entry Master Business Function (P050002A) is ZJDE0001. You might need additional
versions to meet new requirements. For example, you might need to create a new
version of the Time Entry MBF for employee assignments. To change the default, enter
a different version number. Only persons responsible for system-wide setup should
change this option.
2. Timecard From Date

Select timecard records that include a date worked that is greater than or equal to the
specified Timecard From date. If you leave this field blank, the system uses only
Timecard Reprocessing Flag (TCRFLG = ' 1'), General Ledger Batch (GICU equal to
Zero), and Time Entry Lockout Flag (TELKFLG equal to blank) from the Timecard File
(F06116) to select Timecards to process effective-dated logic. If you enter a value for the
From date processing option, you must also enter a value for the Thru date processing
option.
Timecard Thru Date

Use this processing option to select timecard records that include a date worked that is
before or equal to the specified Timecard Thru date. If you leave this field blank, the
system uses only Timecard Reprocessing Flag (TCRFLG = ' 1'), General Ledger Batch
(GICU equal to Zero), and Time Entry Lockout Flag (TELKFLG equal to blank) from
the Timecard File (F06116) to select timecards to process effective dated logic.
15.2.3 Setting Processing Options for Payroll Journal Proof/Edit Report (R05229)
Select Timecard Post/History Update menu (G05BT11), Journal Batch Proof.

Posting Journal Entries
15.2.3.1 Defaults
1. Enter the Batch Number to print.
Specify a batch number.
2. Send ALL errors to the report.

Specify where the system sends errors. Values are:
Blank: Send all errors to the Employee Work Center.
1: Send all errors to the report.
15.2.4 Setting Processing Options for Create Payroll JE's - Batch Delete (R05227)
Select Timecard Post/History Update menu (G05BT11), Batch Delete.
reports.
15.2.4.1 Select
Use this option to specify the daily timecard journal batch that you want to delete. Be
aware that you cannot recover batches after they have been deleted.
1. Batch Number
Specify the batch number that the system assigned to the Daily Timecard Journal Batch
that you want to delete.
Caution: Use caution when exercising this processing option because

you cannot recover batches after they have been deleted.
15.3 Posting Journal Entries

This section includes an overview of the post process and lists a prerequisite for the
General Ledger Post program.
15.3.1 Understanding the Post Process

For time and labor reporting, you must run a program to post the batch of timecard
journal entries to the general ledger and to update timecard history. The batch that you
post for timecards contains pro forma journal entries. During the posting process, the
system creates the actual journal entries in the F0911 table and automatically posts
them to the F0902 table. The system also creates timecard history records in the F0618
table.
If you use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system to process timecards
without the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system, you must manually run the
post program to update timecard history and the general ledger. In the Company
Options program (P05001C), the general ledger integration value must be set to T
(time accounting).
Note: When the value is set to A (automatic) or M (manual), the post

program posts the current records in the F06116 table to the F0618
table for recharge-only timecards (record type 3).

If you process timecards through the payroll cycle, you can set up the company
options for either of these to occur:
Process Description
The system automatically posts actual journal entries You use the manual post program only if an error
during final update. occurred during final update that prevented the
system from posting the journal entries.
The system does not automatically post actual After you run the final update, you run the manual
journal entries. post program to post the actual journal entries to the
general ledger. The batch might need to be approved
before you run the post program.
If the General Ledger Post Report program (R09801) encounters errors, the system
creates the actual journal entries in the F0911 table but does not post them. After you
have corrected the actual journal entries, you must resubmit the batch for posting.
Because the batch contains actual journal entries, you must post the journal entries
directly from the general ledger.
When you run the manual post program, the system updates timecard history and
general ledger tables and also generates the General Ledger Post report. If errors occur
during the posting process, the system also generates the Post Detail Error report.
Review these reports to verify whether the journal entries were posted successfully.
The General Ledger Post report lists all journal entries. The column titles and
information are similar to the Payroll Journal Proof/Edit report. However, the General
Ledger Post report includes the journal entry number, general ledger date, and
account descriptions instead of the document reference numbers.
See Also: ■"Posting Financial Transactions," in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Financial Management Fundamentals

■ "Posting Financial Batches," in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Financial Management Fundamentals Implementation
Guide
■ "Setting Processing Options for General Ledger Post (R09801)," in
the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Financial Management
15.3.2 Prerequisite
Review the batch of journal entries to verify whether it is approved for posting. You
might need to approve the batch before the system will post it.
See "Managing Fixed Asset Journal Entries" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Fixed Assets Implementation Guide.
"Processing Journal Entries" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications General
Accounting Implementation Guide
15.3.3 Setting Processing Options for General Ledger Post (R09801)

reports. Use these processing options to specify the program version that the system
uses and the dates that contain data selection.

15.3.3.1 Print
These processing options are used to specify print information.
1. Account Format
Specify the account format that you want to print on the General Ledger Post report.
Values are:
■ Blank: Default account format
■ 1: Structured account
■ 2: Short account ID
■ 3:Unstructured account
2. Print Error Messages

Specify the account format that you want to print on the General Ledger Post report.
Values are:
■ Blank: Do not print.
■ 1: Print
15.3.3.2 Versions
These processing options specify version information.
1. Detail Currency Restatement Version

Specify the version of the Detailed Currency Restatement program (R11411) that you
want to run to create entries. If you leave this processing option blank, the program
does not run and does not create detailed currency restatement entries.
2. Fixed Asset Post Version

Specify the version of the Fixed Asset Post program (R12800) that you want the system
to run to create fixed asset entries. If you leave this processing option blank, the Fixed
Asset Post program (R12800) does not run and does not create fixed asset entries.
3. 52 Period Post Version

Specify the version of the 52 Period Accounting Post program (R098011) to use to
update the F0902 table and the Account Balances - 52 Period Accounting table
(F0902B). If you leave this processing option blank, the 52 Period Accounting Post
program does not run and does not update the tables.
15.3.3.2.1 Edits These processing options specify edit information.
1. Update Transaction
Specify whether to update Account ID, Company, Fiscal Year, Period Number,
Century, and Fiscal Quarter on unposted records in the F0911 table. You might need to
update these processing options if you have records in the Account Ledger table that
were created by a custom program and may not contain the correct values in these
processing options.
The system uses the value in the G/L Account Number field of the unposted record in
the F0911 table to update the Account ID and Company fields.
The system calculates the correct values for the Fiscal Year, Period Number, and
Century fields using the value in the G/L Date field of the unposted record in the
F0911 table.
The system will update the Fiscal Quarter field on the unposted record in the F0911
table to blank.

15.3.3.2.2 Process These processing options specify process information.
1. Explode parent item time

Specify whether the system explodes the time entries for a parent asset down to the
children of the parent asset. If you enter a 1 for this processing option, the General
Ledger Post Report program (R09801) creates time entries for the parent asset's
children. The system uses the unit of time from the parent asset entries and the rates
from the child asset to calculate the appropriate entries. This processing option applies
only to batch type T entries. Values are:
■ Blank: Do not explode the time entries for a parent asset down to the children of
the parent asset.
■ 1: Explode the time entries for a parent asset down to the children of the parent
asset.
15.3.3.3 Taxes
These processing options specify tax information.
1. Update Tax File

Specify whether and how to update the Taxes table (F0018) when you post transactions
with tax information to the general ledger. Values are:
■ Blank: The system does not update the Taxes table.
■ 1: The system updates the Taxes table for these tax explanation codes only: V, VT,
V+, U, and UT.
■ 2: The system updates the Taxes table for all tax amounts.
The system does not update the Taxes table for transactions with tax explanation
code E (exempt).
■ 3:The system updates the Taxes table for all tax explanation codes including E
(exempt).
2. Update VAT Discounts

Specify whether to adjust the tax amount fields, and which fields to adjust, when
discounts are taken. The system adjusts the tax amount fields only for transactions
with tax explanation code V.
Note: These options in the tax rules must be turned on to use this
processing option:
■ Tax on Gross Including Discount

■ Discount on Gross Including Tax
Values are:
■ Blank: The system does not adjust tax amounts for discounts taken.
■ 1: The system updates only the tax amount field (STAM).
■ 2: The system updates the tax (STAM), taxable (ATXA), and extended price
(AEXP) amount fields.
The system uses these algorithms to calculate the adjustment amounts to the tax,
taxable, and gross (extended price) amount fields for discounts taken:
■ Adjustment to the gross amount (extended price) = discount taken.

■ Adjustment to the taxable amount = (taxable amount / gross amount) x discount

taken.
■ Adjustment to the tax amount = (tax amount / gross amount) x discount taken.
For example:
Tax Rate = 25 per cent.
Discount Taken = 12.50 USD.
Gross Amount (Extended Price) = 1,250.00 USD.
Taxable Amount = 1,000.00 USD.
Tax Amount = 250.00 USD.
Based on the example, using the adjustment algorithms, the system calculates these
adjustment amounts:
■ Adjustment to the Gross Amount = 12.50.
■ Adjustment to the Taxable Amount = 10.00.
■ Adjustment to the Tax Amount = 2.50.
To calculate the adjustments, the system subtracts the adjusted amount from the
original amount:
■ Adjusted Gross Amount: 1,250.00 - 12.50 = 1,237.50.
■ Adjusted Taxable Amount: 1,000.00 - 10.00 = 990.00.
■ Adjusted Tax Amount: 250.00 - 2.50 = 247.50.
3. Update VAT Receipts and W/O (update VAT receipts and write-off)
Specify whether to adjust the tax fields, and which fields to adjust, when the receipt
has a write-off. The system adjusts the tax amount fields only for transactions with tax
explanation code V. Values are:
■ Blank: The system does not adjust tax amounts for write-offs.
■ 1: The system updates only the tax amount field (STAM).
■ 2: The system updates the tax (STAM), taxable (ATXA), and extended price
(AEXP) amount fields.
The system uses these algorithms to calculate the adjustment amounts to the tax,
taxable, and gross (extended price) amount fields for write-off amounts.
■ Adjustment to the gross amount (extended price) = write-off amount.
■ Adjustment to the taxable amount = (taxable amount / gross amount) x write-off
amount.
■ Adjustment to the tax amount = (tax amount / gross amount) x write-off amount.
For example:
Tax Rate = 25 per cent.
Write-off Amount = 12.50 USD.
Gross Amount (Extended Price) = 1,250.00 USD.
Taxable Amount = 1,000.00 USD.
Tax Amount = 250.00 USD.

Based on the example, using the adjustment algorithms, the system calculates these
adjustment amounts:
■ Adjustment to the Gross Amount = 12.50.
■ Adjustment to the Taxable Amount = 10.00.
■ Adjustment to the Tax Amount = 2.50.
To calculate the adjustments, the system subtracts the adjusted amount from the
original amount:
■ Adjusted Gross Amount: 1,250.00 - 12.50 = 1,237.50.
■ Adjusted Taxable Amount: 1,000.00 - 10.00 = 990.00.
■ Adjusted Tax Amount: 250.00 - 2.50 = 247.50.
15.3.3.3.1 Cash Basis These processing options specify cash basis information.
1. Units Ledger Type

Specify the units ledger type for the system to use for cash basis entries. You must
enter a valid ledger type from the Ledger Type Master Setup program (P0025). If you
leave this processing option blank, the system uses a default ledger type of ZU.
2. Create Cash Basis

Specify a version of the Create Cash Basis Entries program. If you leave this processing
option blank, the program does not run and does not create Cash Basis entries.

16
Working with the ALM Workbench
61

■ Section 16.1, "Working with ALM Workbench"
■ Section 16.2, "Setting Processing Option for the Advanced Labor Management
Workbench Program (P05210)"
■ Section 16.3, "Importing Timecards"
16.1 Working with ALM Workbench

This section provides an overview of ALM workbench and discusses how to access
tasks under ALM workbench.
16.1.1 Understanding ALM Workbench

ALM workbench is a central area where you can access and run various
payroll-related processes. The programs under ALM workbench are Advanced Labor
Management Workbench program (P05210) and Setup Advanced Labor Management
Workbench program (P05211). You use the P05210 program to perform various tasks in
these categories:
■ Importing timecards.
■ Uploading timecards.
■ Generating component pay.
■ Setting up total time accounting.
■ Processing journals.
■ Processing payroll.
Before you use the P05210 program, you use the P05211 program to configure settings
for the P05210 program. The system displays the tasks in the P05210 program based on
this configuration. You also use the P05211 program to change the name and
description of tasks displayed in the P05210 program.
Working with the ALM Workbench 16-1

Setting Processing Option for the Advanced Labor Management Workbench Program (P05210)
16.1.2 Forms Used to Work with ALM Workbench

Work with Advanced W05211A Advanced Labor Set up list of tasks to be
Labor Management Management (G05BALM), displayed under ALM
Workbench Options Setup Advanced Labor workbench.
Management Workbench
Work with Advanced W05210A Advanced Labor Access tasks under ALM
Labor Management Tasks Management (G05BALM), workbench.
Advanced Labor
16.1.3 Accessing Tasks Under ALM Workbench

Access the Work with Advanced Labor Management Tasks form.
Figure 16–1 Work with Advanced Labor Management Tasks form
16.2 Setting Processing Option for the Advanced Labor Management

Workbench Program (P05210)
Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs.
16.2.1 Processing
1. Application Options
Specify a value that identifies the version of application options that you want to use
for running the Advanced Labor Management Workbench program (P05210).
You use the P05211 program to create these versions.

Importing Timecards
16.3 Importing Timecards

You use import tasks to transfer timecard information from third-party source to the
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system. This section discusses how to:
■ Set up timecard imports through ALM workbench.
■ Import timecards through ALM workbench.
■ Review and revise imported timecards through ALM workbench.
■ Run the time and pay register for imported timecards through ALM workbench.
16.3.1 Forms Used to Import Timecards

Work With Flat File W47002A Advanced Labor Set up timecard imports
Cross-Reference Management (G05BALM), through ALM workbench.
Advanced Labor
On the Work with Advanced
Labor Management Tasks
form, click Import to expand
the tree structure. Select the
Setup Timecard Import
option and click Perform
Selected Task.
16.3.2 Setting Up Timecard Imports Through ALM Workbench

Access the Work With Flat File Cross-Reference form.
You use this task to set up flat files for timecard imports by using the Flat File Cross
Reference program (P47002). You use these files to import timecard information from
third-party sources to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system. The flat file must
correspond to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne format.
See Also: ■Setting Up a Flat File Cross-Reference.
16.3.3 Importing Timecards Through ALM Workbench

Select Advanced Labor Management (G05BALM), Advanced Labor Management
Workbench. On the Work with Advanced Labor Management Tasks form, click Import
to expand the tree structure. Select the option to import timecards and click Perform
Selected Task.
Alternatively, select Batch Time Entry Processing (G05BBT3), Batch Time Entry File
Upload.
You use this task to run the Batch Time Entry File Upload report (R47002C) report.
This report imports timecards from third-party sources to a staging table in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne system. You might need to format the timecard information in
the third-party source so that the information uploads in a corresponding tabular
format. The system retrieves the data from the flat files provided by the third-party
source and stores it in the Employee Transactions Batch table (F06116Z1).
See Also:
■ Uploading Timecard Information.

Importing Timecards
16.3.4 Reviewing and Revising Imported Timecards Through ALM Workbench

After importing the timecards, you can review and modify them before uploading
them to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Timecards system. You use this task to view
and modify timecards in the Employee Transactions - Batch File table (F06116Z1) by
using the Batch Time Entry File Revisions program (P05116Z1).
See Also:
■ "Converting Payroll History, " in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
■ "Generating Timecards and Interim Header Records" in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Payroll Implementation Guide
16.3.5 Running the Time and Pay Register for Imported Timecards Through ALM
Workbench
Workbench.
On the Work with Advanced Labor Management Tasks form, click Import to expand
the tree structure. Select the Run Time and Pay Register option and click Perform
Selected Task.
Alternatively, select Batch Time Entry Processing (G05BBT3), Batch Time Entry File
Register.
You use this task to run the Batch Time Entry File Register report (R053001Z). You use
this report to verify the timecard information for imported timecards.
See Also: Reviewing the Time & Pay Entry Register for Batch File
■
Report.
16.3.6 Uploading Timecards

You use upload tasks to transfer imported timecards to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
time entry system. This section discusses how to:
■ Review and revise imported timecards before uploading through ALM
workbench.
■ Run time and pay register before uploading through ALM workbench
■ Upload timecards through ALM workbench.
■ Purge processed timecards through ALM workbench.
■ Review and revise uploaded timecards through ALM workbench.

Importing Timecards
16.3.6.1 Forms Used to Upload Timecards

Work with Time Entry W05116Z1A Advanced Labor Review and revise imported
Batch File Revisions Management (G05BALM), timecards before uploading
Advanced Labor through ALM workbench.
form, click Upload to expand
Review and Revise Imported
Timecards option and click
Perform Selected Task.
Alternatively, access Batch
Time Entry Processing
(G05BBT3), Batch Time Entry
File Revisions.
16.3.6.2 Review and Revise Imported Timecards Before Uploading Through ALM
Workbench
Before uploading the timecards to the Employee Transaction Detail File table (F06116),
you can review and modify them. You use this task to run the Batch Time Entry File
Revisions program (P05116Z1). You use this program to view and modify timecards in
the Employee Transactions - Batch File table (F06116Z1).
See Also: ■"Converting Payroll History, " in the JD Edwards

■ "Generating Timecards and Interim Header Records," in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Payroll Implementation Guide
16.3.6.3 Run Time and Pay Register Before Uploading Through ALM Workbench
Workbench. On the Work with Advanced Labor Management Tasks form, click
Upload to expand the tree structure. Select the Run Time and Pay Register option and
click Perform Selected Task.
Alternatively, select Time Entry (G05BT1), Time and Pay Entry Register.
After you revise the timecard information in the Employee Transactions - Batch File
table (F06116Z1), you use this task to run the Time and Pay Entry Register report
(R053001). You use this report to verify that the revised timecard information for
imported timecards is correct.
See Also: Setting Up Time Entry Batch Processing.

■
16.3.6.4 Uploading Timecards Through ALM Workbench

Upload to expand the tree structure. Select the Upload Timecards option and click
Alternatively, select Batch Time Entry Processing (G05BBT3), Batch Time Entry
Processor.

Importing Timecards
After reviewing and revising the imported timecard information, you use this task to
run the Batch Time Entry Processor report (R05116Z1I). This report uploads the
imported timecards from the Employee Transactions - Batch File table (F06116Z1) to
the Employee Transaction Detail File table (F06116).
Note: When you create timecards from uploaded timecard

information, the system verifies the information against constants
tables in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll system.
See Also: ■Creating Timecards from Uploaded Information and
Purging Processed Payroll Batches.
16.3.6.5 Purging Processed Timecards Through ALM Workbench

Upload to expand the tree structure. Select the Purge Processed Timecards option and
Alternatively, select Batch Time Entry Processing (G05BBT3), Purge Batch Time Entry.
After uploading the timecards to the Employee Transaction Detail File table (F06116),
you use this task to run the Purge Batch Time Entry report (R05116Z1P). This report
removes the processed timecards from the Employee Transactions - Batch File table
(F06116Z1).
See Also: ■Creating Timecards from Uploaded Information and
Purging Processed Payroll Batches.
16.3.6.6 Reviewing and Revising Uploaded Timecards Through ALM Workbench

Access the Work with Time Entry by Individual form.
You use this task to run the view and modify the uploaded timecards by using the
Work with Time Entry By Individual program (P051121). You can also use this task to
add new timecards.
See Also: Working with Timecard Batches.

■
■ Entering Timecards Using Speed Time Entry.
16.3.7 Generating Component Pay

You use the component pay tasks to create multiple timecards from a single timecard
based on a set of predefined rules. These rules are assigned to the pay type of the
original timecard. This section discusses how to:
■ Generate component pay through ALM workbench.
■ Review and revise processed timecards through ALM workbench.
■ Run time and pay register through ALM workbench.

Importing Timecards
16.3.7.1 Forms Used to Generate Component Pay

Work with Time Entry W051121A Advanced Labor Review and revise processed
by Individual Management (G05BALM), timecards through ALM
Advanced Labor workbench.
Review and revise timecards
On the Work with Advanced with processed journals
Labor Management Tasks through ALM workbench.
form, click Component Pay
to expand the tree structure.
Select the Review and Revise
Timecards option and click
Alternatively, access Time
Entry (G05BT1), By
Individual.
16.3.7.2 Generating Component Pay Through ALM Workbench

Component Pay to expand the tree structure. Select the Generate Component Pay
option and click Perform Selected Task.
Alternatively, select Periodic Processing menu (G18620), Generate Component Pay.
You use this task to run the Generate Component Pay report (R05601). This report
generates component pay transactions for a batch of timecards. Each component pay
transaction is based on the component pay instructions that you define in the
Component Pay Instructions program (P05601).
See Generating Component Pay
16.3.7.3 Reviewing and Revising Processed Timecards Through ALM Workbench

You use this task to view and modify timecards for which you have generated
component pay by using the Work with Time Entry By Individual program (P051121).
You can also use this program to add new timecards if needed. If you make any
changes to timecards in this task, you must regenerate the component pay.
See Also: ■Entering Timecards Using Speed Time Entry.

■ Working with Timecard Batches.
16.3.7.4 Running Time and Pay Register Through ALM Workbench

Component Pay to expand the tree structure. Select the Run Time and Pay Register
option and click Perform Selected Task.
Alternatively, select Time Entry (G05BT1), Time and Pay Entry Register.
You use this task to run the Time and Pay Register report (R053001) to verify that the
timecard information for the timecards for which you have generated component pay
is correct.

Importing Timecards
16.3.8 Setting Up Total Time Accounting

You use the total time accounting (TTA) tasks to define and apply rules for disbursing
salary to employees. This section discusses how to:
■ Set up rules and submit batches through ALM workbench.
■ Review and approve rules batches through ALM workbench.
■ Review and revise timecards with TTA rules through ALM workbench.
16.3.8.1 Forms Used to Set Up Total Time Accounting

Work With Rule Sets W186401A Advanced Labor Set up rules and submit
Management (G05BALM), batches through ALM
Advanced Labor workbench.
form, click Total Time
Accounting to expand the
tree structure. Select the
Setup Rules and Submit
Batches option and click
Alternatively, select Periodic
Processing (G18620),
Overtime.
Work With Timecard W186601A On the Work with Advanced Review and approve rules
Automation Batches Labor Management Tasks batches through ALM
form, click Total Time workbench.
Accounting to expand the
tree structure. Select the
Review and Approve Rules
Batches option and click
Alternatively, select Daily
Processing (G18610),
Reviewing and Approving.
16.3.8.2 Setting Up Rules and Submitting Batches Through ALM Workbench

Access the Work With Rule Sets form.
When you pay overtime to employees, you can use the Overtime Rules program
(P186401) to automate many actions. You use this task to create an overtime rule set,
which is a group of overtime rules that the system uses to automate the calculation of
overtime pay.
After creating the overtime rule sets, you submit the batch for processing by running
the Overtime Rule Set Processing report (R186405). To run this report, you select the
batch on the Work with Rule Sets form and click Submit on the Row menu.
See Also: ■Creating Overtime Rule Sets.
16.3.8.3 Reviewing and Approving Rules Batches Through ALM Workbench


Importing Timecards
You use this task to run the Reviewing and Approving program (P186601). After you
submit the overtime rule set for processing, you use this task to review, approve, or
cancel a batch. If you cancel a batch, the system restores the original timecards.
See Also: ■Reviewing and Revising Timecards Created by Timecard
Automation.
16.3.8.4 Reviewing and Revising Timecards with TTA Rules Through ALM
Workbench
You use this task to run the Work with Time Entry By Individual program (P051121).
You perform this task to review or modify the timecards on which you have applied
TTA rules. If you make any changes to timecards, then you must regenerate the total
time accounting rules.
See Also: ■Working with Timecard Batches.
16.3.9 Processing Journals

You use the tasks listed under Journals to process accounting records for timecards.
This section discusses how to:
■ Generate timecard corrections through ALM workbench.
■ Process timecard journals through ALM workbench.
■ Delete journal batches through ALM workbench.
■ Review and revise timecards with processed journals through ALM workbench.
16.3.9.1 Generating Timecard Corrections Through ALM Workbench

Workbench.
On the Work with Advanced Labor Management Tasks form, click Journals to expand
the tree structure. Select the Generate Timecard Corrections option and click Perform
Selected Task.
Alternatively, select Timecard Post/History Update (G05BT11), Generate Timecard
Corrections.
You use this task to run the Generate Timecard Corrections report (R05602). This
report creates adjusting entries for labor and burden that reflect the corrections made
to timecards through the Timecard Corrections program (P05602).
16.3.9.2 Processing Timecard Journals Through ALM Workbench

Workbench.
On the Work with Advanced Labor Management Tasks form, click Journals to expand
the tree structure. Select the Process Timecard Journals option and click Perform
Selected Task.
Alternatively, select Timecard Post/History Update (G05BT11), Generate Timecard
Journals.
You use this task to run the Generate Timecard Journals report (R052901). This report
processes journal entries for the processed timecards. You process pro forma journal

Importing Timecards
entries for timecards only if you are not creating the journal entries associated with a
payroll cycle.
See Also: Processing and Reviewing Journal Entries.

■
16.3.9.3 Deleting Journal Batches Through ALM Workbench

Journals to expand the tree structure. Select the Delete Journals Batch option and click
Alternatively, select Timecard Post/History Update (G05BT11), Batch Delete.
You use this task to run the Batch Delete report (R05227). This report deletes the daily
timecard journal batch.
Caution: You cannot recover batches after deleting them.
See Also: Processing and Reviewing Journal Entries.

■
16.3.9.4 Reviewing and Revising Timecards with Processed Journals Through ALM
Workbench
You use this task to run the Work with Time Entry By Individual program (P051121).
You perform this task to view and modify the timecards for which you have processed
journals. You can also use this task to add new timecards.
See Also: Working with Timecard Batches.

■
■ Entering Timecards Using Speed Time Entry.
16.3.10 Processing Payroll

You use the payroll tasks to:
■ Calculate gross and net payment amounts.
■ Issue payments for the time entered in the timecards.
This section discusses how to process payroll through ALM workbench.

Importing Timecards
16.3.10.1 Forms Used to Process Payroll

Work With Pay Cycle W07210A Advanced Labor Process payroll through ALM
Workbench Management (G05BALM), workbench.
Advanced Labor
form, click Payroll to expand
Process Payroll option and
Alternatively, select Payroll
Workbench (G07BUSP11),
Pay Cycle Workbench.
16.3.10.2 Processing Payroll Through ALM Workbench

Access the Work With Pay Cycle Workbench form.
You use this task to run the Payroll Cycle Workbench program (P07210). This program
completes the payroll cycle. The payroll cycle is a process that you complete each time
you pay employees. The payroll cycle consists of five basic steps, which are:
■ Process prepayroll.
■ Print payments.
■ Process pro forma journal entries.
■ Print payroll cycle reports.
■ Process final update.
See Also:
■ Setting Up Payroll Cycle Information, " in the JD Edwards
■ "Setting Up the Payroll Cycle Workbench" in the JD Edwards

Importing Timecards

A
A JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor
Reports
This appendix contains the following topics:

■ Section A.1, "JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports: A to Z"
■ Section A.2, "JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports: Selected
Reports"
A.1 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports: A to Z

This table lists the time and labor reports, sorted alphanumerically by report ID.
Report ID and Report Name Description Navigation

R07311 Use this program to generate Periodic Processing (G05BESPP),
timecards from their schedule. Generate Timecards from Schedule
R07311E Use this program to check for Periodic Processing (G05BESPP),
employees who do not have Check for Employees Without
schedules assigned to them. Schedules
R186404 Use this program to verify that the Produced automatically when
system performed the calculations as processing overtime rule sets.
Overtime Rule Set Batch
expected and charged any
Review Report
adjustments to the correct pay codes
for each employee.
R186405 Use this program to verify that the Produced automatically when
system processed the overtime rule processing overtime rule sets.
Overtime Rule Set Processing
without any processing errors.
Report
R8906116A Use this program to create timecard Fast Path: P98305W (BV)
conversion from a previous software
Convert Timecard to 812
release.
R890618A Use this program to create timecard Fast Path: P98305W (BV)
history conversion from a previous
Convert Timecard History to
software release.
812
A.2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports: Selected

Reports
Some reports include a more detailed description, as well as information about
processing options. These reports are listed alphanumerically by report ID in this
appendix.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports A-1

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports: Selected Reports
A.2.1 Setting Processing Options for the Generate Timecards from Schedule Program
(R07311)
reports. Use these processing options to specify the program version that the system
uses and the dates that contain data selection.
A.2.1.1 Processing
1. Version
Specify the version of Time Entry Batch Processor (R05116Z11) that the system uses. If
you leave this field blank, the system uses the default version XJDE0001.
A.2.1.2 Select
1. Starting Date
Select schedule activities that have a date that is equal to or greater than the specified
date.
2. Ending Date
Select schedule activities that have a date worked that is less than or equal to the
specified date.
A.2.2 R186404 - Overtime Rule Set Batch Review Report

Use the Overtime Rule Set Batch Review report (R186404) to verify that the system
performed the calculations as expected and charged any adjustments to the correct pay
codes for each employee. The report included detailed information about the overtime
rules that the system processed for each employee, including the hourly rate that the
system calculated for overtime and the gross pay amounts for any adjustments. The
report also includes totals of these:
■ Original hours worked
■ Original gross pay
■ New hours worked
■ New gross pay
If the calculations are not correct, make any necessary corrections before you process a
payroll cycle that includes these timecards.
A.2.3 R186405 - Overtime Rule Set Processing Report

Use the Overtime Rule Set Processing report (R186405) to verify that the system
processed the overtime rule without any processing errors.
The Exceptions section of the report lists the employees for whom one of these
conditions is true:
■ The system created the timecard, but an error or warning exists.
In addition to the exceptions, the report also includes totals of these:
■ Employees processed
■ Timecards created
A-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor Implementation Guide

■ Timecards processed
■ Timecards changed
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports A-3

A-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor Implementation Guide

B
Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards
B
EnterpriseOne Time and Labor
This appendix contains the following topics:

■ Section B.1, "Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor"
See Also: JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Workflow Tools Guide.

■
B.1 Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor

This section discusses the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor workflow.
B.1.1 Update Employee Auto Deposit Instructions

This section discusses the Update Employee Auto Deposit Instructions workflow.
B.1.1.1 Description
Workflow Description
The system sends a workflow message to a human resources or payroll approver
when a self-service user changes their auto deposit instructions. The instructions
remain at a status of P (pending) and are not updated until the approver changes the
status to A (approved).
Workflow Trigger
A self-service user changes their auto-deposit instructions.
Workflow Action
The approver for the employee receives a message in the Work Center to approve the
auto deposit instructions. When the approver selects the message in the Work Center,
the system displays the instructions and the approver can approve or deny the
request.
B.1.1.2 Workflow Objects

System
05
Workflow Object Name

UPDTEMPAUT
Object ID
N0500260
Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor B-1

Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor
Event Description / Function Name

LaunchAutoDepositRequest
Sequence / Line Number

5
B.1.2 Add Bank Transit Number

This section discusses the Add Bank Transit Number workflow.
B.1.2.1 Description
The system sends a workflow message to a human resources or payroll approver
when a self-service user changes their auto deposit instructions to specify a bank
transit number that is not listed in UDC 07/BC. The instructions remain at a status of P
(pending) and the transit number is not updated until the approver changes the status
to A (approved).
Workflow Trigger
A self-service user specifies a bank transit number that is not in UDC 07/BC.
Workflow Action
The approver for the employee receives a message in the Work Center to approve the
bank transit number. When the approver selects the message in the Work Center, the
system displays the instructions and the approver can approve or deny the request.

System
05

ADDBANKTRA
Object IDs
N0500270, W055011I
Event Description / Function Names

LaunchAddBankTransitNumber, Button Clicked
Sequence / Line Numbers

2, 4
B.1.3 Verification of Employment Request

This section discusses the Verification of Employment Request workflow.
B.1.3.1 Description
The system sends a workflow message to the employee listed in the processing options
when an employee or manager enters a verification of employment request.
B-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor Implementation Guide

Workflow Trigger
An employee or manager enters a verification of employment request using a version
of the Review Requests for Verification Of Employment program (P05003) for which
the User Level processing option is set to 1 or 2.
Workflow Action
The approver receives a message in the Work Center to approve the requisition. When
the approver specifies whether to create a mail merge letter and clicks the OK button,
the workflow process continues and completes.

System
05

VOEREQUEST
Object ID
W05003B
Event Description / Function Name

Add Record to DB - After
Sequence / Line Number

4
Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor B-3

B-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor Implementation Guide

Glossary
Account Number
Enter a value that represents an account number. If you enter a value in the Account
Number field, the system uses this account number to override the automatic
accounting instructions (AAIs) that are normally associated with the pay type for all of
the timecards that are created by the template. If you leave this field blank, the system
uses the AAIs to determine the account number.
A value that identifies an account in the general ledger. Use one of these formats to
enter account numbers:
■ Standard account number (business unit.object.subsidiary or flex format).
■ Third G/L (general ledger) number (maximum of 25 digits).
■ Account ID number. The number is eight digits long.
■ Speed code, which is a two-character code that you concatenate to the AAI item
SP.
You can then enter the code instead of an account number.
The first character of the account number indicates its format. You define the account
format in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Accounting constants.
Business Unit
Enter an alphanumeric code that identifies a separate entity within a business for
which you want to track costs. For example, a business unit might be a warehouse
location, job, project, work center, branch, or plant.
You can assign a business unit to a document, entity, or person for purposes of
responsibility reporting. For example, the system provides reports of open accounts
payable and accounts receivable by business unit to track equipment by responsible
department.
Business unit security might prevent you from viewing information about business
units for which you have no authority.
Company
Enter a code that identifies a specific organization, fund, or other reporting entity. The
company code must already exist in F0010 and identify a reporting entity that has a
complete balance sheet. At this level, you can have intercompany transactions.
Note:You can use company 00000 for default values such as dates and automatic
accounting instructions. You cannot use company 00000 for transaction entries.
Glossary-1
Employee (Employee No)
Employee (Employee No)

Enter the employee numbers of the employees that you want to include in the group.
The employee number identifies an entry in the Address Book system, such as
employee, applicant, participant, customer, supplier, tenant, or location.
Employee Business Unit

Enter a value that identifies the Business Unit the system searches to determine the
accounting distribution. When defining the default rules (Company 00000), leave the
Business Unit blank for the system to retrieve the Business Unit number entered on the
Employee timecard, or from the Employee's Home Business Unit.
You can use the Skip to Business Unit field in the header part of the screen to specify
the Business Unit to be displayed first in the lower part of the screen.
Equipment Worked On
Enter an identification code that represents an asset. You enter the identification code
in one of these formats:
■ Asset number: a computer-assigned, 8-digit, numeric control number.
■ Unit number: a 12-character alphanumeric field.
■ Serial number: a 25-character alphanumeric field.
Every asset has an asset number. You can use unit number and serial number to
further identify assets. If this is a data entry field, the first character you enter indicates
whether you are entering the primary (default) format that is defined for the system,
or one of the other two formats. A special character (such as / or *) in the first position
of this field indicates which asset number format you are using. You assign special
characters to asset number formats on the fixed assets system constants form.
Home Business Unit

Job Step
Enter a UDC (UDC) (06/GS) that designates a specific level within a particular job
type. The system uses this code in conjunction with job type to determine pay rates by
job in the Pay Rates table.
Job Type
Enter a UDC (06/G) that defines the jobs within the organization. You can associate
pay and benefit information with a job type and apply that information to the
employees who are linked to that job type.
Pay Cycle
Enter a code that identifies the values for a master payroll cycle.
Pay Type and Pay Type Code

Enter a pay type that will be used on the newly created timecards. This is a code that
defines the type of pay, deduction, benefit, or accrual.
1000 to 9999.
Piecework Rate
Enter the rate that is paid for the type of component (piece) that is produced. If you
enter a rate in this field, this rate overrides the rate in the Employee Master file.
Glossary-2
Union and Union Code
For the system to use this rate, you must set the processing options for the Time Entry
Master Business Function to retrieve piece rates from F060116
Position ID
A code that you use for budgetary (position) control purposes. The position ID
consists of:
■ Position (position code and its description).
■ Fiscal year.
■ Home business unit.
For example, you can identify position A0-1 as Accounting Manager for fiscal year
2005-2006, for home business unit 41.
You can set up positions so that the position IDs are the same as the corresponding job
IDs. Within a home business unit, positions appear in the alphanumeric sequence of
their position IDs. For example, position A0-1 appears before position A0-2.
You need to complete the Position ID field if you want to allocate hours and pay to a
specific position budget.
Shift Code
A UDC (00/SH) that identifies daily work shifts.
In payroll systems, you can use a shift code to add a percentage or amount to the
hourly rate on a timecard.
For payroll and time entry: If an employee always works a shift for which a shift rate
differential is applicable, enter that shift code on the employee's master record. When
you enter the shift on the employee's master record, you do not need to enter the code
on the timecard when you enter time. If an employee occasionally works a different
shift, you enter the shift code on each applicable timecard to override the default
value.

Enter a UDC (06/UN) that represents the union or plan in which the employee or
group of employees work or participate.
Glossary-3
Glossary-4
Index
Symbols setting up labor, billings, and equipment

distribution, 11-18
(AUS, NZL) global leave setting up liabilities, 11-31
features, 14-2 system search criteria, 11-12
usage information, 14-2
B
A
base currency, 2-1
AAI, 11-1 Batch Delete report (R05227)
setting up for accruals and clearing, 11-35 pro forma journal entries, 15-9
setting up for burden and premium labor processing options, 15-9
distribution, 11-22 Batch Inbound Flat File Conversion program
setting up for intercompany settlements, 11-15
(R47002C)
setting up for labor billings, 11-34 processing options, 5-7
setting up for labor, billings, and equipment usage information, 5-7
distribution, 11-18 batch processing
usage information, 11-1 purging processed payroll batches, 5-14
Account Ledger table (F0911), 11-7 revising uploaded information, 5-8
Accounting JE Rules - Cash/Bank Account program setting up a flat file cross-reference, 5-2
(P069040), 11-30 uploading timecard information, 5-10
Accrual Roster report (R074501)
Batch Time Entry File Register report (R053001Z)
processing options, 14-35 processing options, 5-9
usage information, 14-35 reviewing, 5-9
accruals and clearing usage information, 5-9
setting up automatic accounting Billing Rate/Markup table (F48096), 2-2
instructions, 11-35 setting up for multicurrency time accounting, 2-3
system search criteria, 11-36 usage information, 2-2
Archive EE Assignment T/E Information report Build Formula form, 7-12, 7-13
(R0716709) burden distribution and automatic accounting
processing options, 10-18 instructions, 11-22
usage information, 10-17 burden fringe search criteria for AAIs, 11-23, 11-24
Assign Schedules to Employee Groups burden rule
(R07315), 9-20 setup for business unit, 11-24
Associate Pay Types with Activity Types burden rules
(P073111), 9-19 setting up for company, 11-24
automatic accounting instructions Business Interface Integration Objects, 1-7
company burden rules, 11-24
default journal types, 11-5
intercompany settlements, 11-15 C
payroll and time accounting, 11-1 Call Custom Overtime Rule form, 6-39
setting up accruals and clearing, 11-35 Call Rule Set Rule form, 6-39
setting up burden and premium labor cash in bank account distribution
distribution, 11-22 setting up automatic accounting
setting up cash-in-bank account instructions, 11-28
distribution, 11-28, 11-30 system search criteria, 11-30
setting up labor billings, 11-34 chart of accounts, 11-14
Index-1
copying labor distribution instructions, 12-13 associate pay types with activity types, 9-19
Credit-Labor Billings program (P069044) Associate Pay Types with Activity Types
processing options, 11-35 (P073111), 9-19
usage information, 11-34 calendar, 9-2
Credit-Liabilities program (P069045), 11-32 feature overview, 14-10
custom functions, 7-2 integration with time entry, 14-39
custom overtime rules, 7-7 Manage Employees Schedules (P07311), 9-4
overview, 9-2
Employee Schedules program (P07311)
D overview, 14-38
Daily Time Entry form, 12-21 processing options, 14-40
Dates associated with journal entries chart, 11-3 Employee Select Group form, 6-8
Debit - Burden/Premium-Labor Distribution program Employee Transaction Detail File (F06116), 5-10
(P069042) Employee Transaction History table (F0618), 12-6
processing options, 11-25 Employee Transactions Batch File (F06116Z1), 5-1,
usage information, 11-23, 11-24 5-10
Debit/Credit - Accruals/Clearing program entering timecards with equipment
(P069041), 11-38 information, 12-12
Debit-Labor/Billing/Equipment program (P069043) equipment billing on timecards, 12-12, 12-24
processing options, 11-20 equipment distribution, 11-18
setting up AAIs, 11-18
deductions, benefits, and accruals (DBAs), 13-4 F
distribution account fields, 11-32 F06116 table, 5-10
F06116Z1 table, 5-1, 5-10
F0618 table, 12-6
E F06395 table, 11-2
EE Assignment Default Pay Types form, 10-2 F0911 table, 11-7
EE Assignment form, 10-7 F48096 table, 2-2
EE Assignment Job Description form, 10-13 Field/Function Definition form, 7-9, 7-12
EE Assignment Pay/Bill Rates form, 10-13 Fields and Functions program (P186101), 7-12
EE Assignment program (P0716701) Flat File Cross-Reference form, 5-2
processing options, 10-5 Flat File Cross-Reference program (P47002), 5-2
usage information, 10-3 setting up, 5-2
employee assignment usage information, 5-2
archiving and restoring, 10-17, 10-18 Formula Tester form, 7-12, 7-13, 7-14, 7-15
creating employee assignments, 10-3 formulas
generating and saving time entry creating formulas for timecard automation, 7-9
templates, 10-14 testing formulas for timecard automation, 7-12
generating time entry templates, 10-14 fringe burden using system search criteria,
overview, 10-1 clearing, 11-37
setting up default pay type cross references, 10-2 functions
setup overview, 10-2 custom overtime rules functions, 7-7
Employee Combo Group form, 6-10 hourly rate functions for overtime accumulator
Employee groups program (P07315), 9-4 rules, 7-5
employee information hourly rate functions for retroactive pay
DBA one-time overrides, 13-4 rules, 7-4
timecards, 12-1 hourly rate functions for timecard templates, 7-3
Employee Leave Request program (P07620) hours worked function for retroactive pay
processing options, 14-15 rules, 7-3
usage information, 14-11 hours worked function for timecard
Employee List Group form, 6-8 templates, 7-2
Employee Piece Rate Revisions form, 4-2 registering functions for timecard
Employee Schedule form, 14-40 automation, 7-8
employee schedules timecard automation, 7-1, 7-2
administering, 14-38 usage information, 7-1
Assign Schedules to Employee Groups
(R07315), 9-20
assign schedules to groups, 9-20 G
assigning schedules to groups, 9-4 general ledger account structure, 11-2
Index-2
General Ledger Post Report program (R09801) I
Integration, 1-7
Generate Timecard Entries program (R052901)
intercompany settlement
processing options, 15-6
automatic accounting instructions (AAIs), 11-15
setting up, 11-12
Generate Timecard Template program (R0716711)
setting up a payroll ID, 11-15
understanding, 11-12
using document type T2, 11-13
Generate Timecards from Schedule (R07311)
verifying the chart of accounts, 11-14
overview, 14-39
Item Piece Rate Revisions program (P07918), 4-3
processing options, 15-10, A-2
Item Piece Rates Revisions form, 4-4
report, A-1
global leave
adjustments, 14-4 J
adjustments to long service leave dates, 14-7
journal entries
automatic leave calculation, 14-2
associated dates, 11-3
based on days, 14-3
batch delete, 15-9
based on weeks of service, 14-5
codes to identify, 11-6
employee schedules, 14-10
document and journal types, 11-11
employee self-service, 14-3
general ledger account structure, 11-2
error messaging, 14-4
multicurrency timecards, 12-5
features, 14-2
payroll cycle, 11-4
for part-time employees, 14-3
payroll example, 11-5
future leave and advanced pay, 14-6
reviewing batches of, 15-4
inception to date limit overrides, 14-8
system creation, 11-2
inquiry and management, 14-8
system document code, 11-6
integration with resource assignment, 14-2
system search criteria, 11-12
long service leave, 14-4
time accounting, 11-4
manager self-service, 14-3
type T1 - payroll disbursements, 11-7
partial approval, 14-5
type T2 - labor distributions, 11-7
past period reporting, 14-4
type T3 - actual burdens, 11-8
PDBA effective dating, 14-9
type T4 - labor billing distributions, 11-8
planning, entry, and review, 14-4
type T5 - equipment distributions, 11-9
public and private timecards, 14-5
type T6 - payroll accruals and deferrals, 11-10
Rollover override rules, 14-4
type T7 - payroll vouchers, 11-11
sick certification, 14-7
Journal Summarization Rules program
timecard automation, 14-5
(P06914), 11-38
global leave administration
setting up rules, 11-38
Employee Schedules program (P07311), 14-38
processing options for Leave Inquiry and
journal type defaults setup, 11-5
Management (P07640), 14-24
processing options for Manager Self-Service Leave
Review (P076311), 14-24 L
setting up global leave system controls, 9-4 labor billings
setting up leave types, 9-8 setting up automatic accounting
tracking leave history and accrual balances, 14-33 instructions, 11-34
system search criteria, 11-34
H Labor Distribution Instructions program
(P050151), 12-13
hourly rate
Leave Administration Setup form, 9-5
calculating for individual employee, 13-2
Leave Administration Setup program (P07600), 9-4
creating formulas, 7-9
Leave Entry New form, 14-28
hourly rate functions
Leave Inquiry and Management program (P07640)
overtime accumulator rules, 7-5
overview, 14-22
retroactive pay rules, 7-4
timecard templates, 7-3
Leave Management form, 14-27
hours worked function for retroactive pay rules, 7-3
Leave Planning form, 14-16
hours worked function for timecard templates, 7-2
leave requests
approving, 14-25
entering, 14-16
Index-3
entering medical information, 14-19 processing options, 6-42
identifying trends, 14-22 usage information, 6-33
managing, 14-21 Overtime Rule Set Processing report (R186405), 6-33,
planning, 14-10 A-2
processing options, 14-15 overtime rules
submitting, 14-12, 14-19 creating overtime rules, 6-26
updating, 14-13 custom functions, 7-7
leave substitution rules timecard accumulator rule, 6-27
overview, 9-16 Overtime Rules program (P186401)
setup, 9-16 processing options, 6-41
leave transactions usage information, 6-23, 7-12
Leave Transaction Update (R0707620), 9-19
Leave Transactions Update (R0707620), 9-18
P
overview, 9-18
setup, 9-18 P050002A
Leave Type Setup program (P07601), 9-8 processing options, 3-5
Leave Type Setup Revisions form, 9-9 usage information, 3-1
leave verification rules P050151 program, 12-13
overview, 9-11 P051121 program
setup, 9-11 processing options, 3-13
liabilities usage information, 12-1, 12-24
setting up AAIs, 11-31 P051191 program
system search criteria, 11-32 processing options, 3-14
P05OTO1 program, 13-4
M P069040 program, 11-30
Manager Self Service Leave Review form, 14-25 P069041 program, 11-38
Manager Self-Service Leave Review program P069042 program
(P076311) processing options, 11-25
processing options, 14-24 usage information, 11-23, 11-24
usage information, 14-21 P069043 program
master business functions, 3-1 processing options, 11-20
Medical Information form, 14-19 setting up AAIs, 11-18
Medical Information Tracking form, 14-31 usage information, 11-20
Medical Information Tracking program P069044 program
(P076210), 14-30 processing options, 11-35
medical leave usage information, 11-34
saving medical opinions, 14-32 P069045 program, 11-32
tracking, 14-30 P06914 program, 11-38
Medical Opinion form, 14-32 P0716701 program
multicurrency time accounting processing options, 10-5
entering multicurrency time cards, 12-4 usage information, 10-3
overview, 2-1 P07311 program, 14-38
setting processing options, 2-4 P073111 program, 9-19
setting up, 2-3 P07600 program, 9-4
setting up employee payroll information, 2-3 P07601 program, 9-8
P07620 program
O usage information, 14-11
One Time Overrides form, 13-9 P076210 program, 14-30
One Time Overrides program (P05OTO1), 13-4 P076311 program
One-Time Override Revisions form, 13-11 processing options, 14-24
Overtime Rule Batch Review report (R186404), A-2 usage information, 14-21
Overtime Rule Processing report (R186402), 6-33 P07640 program, 14-24
overtime rule set P07916 program, 4-2
creating overtime rule sets, 6-25 P07918 program, 4-3
definition, 6-25 P186101 program, 7-12
submitting overtime rule sets for processing, 6-33 P186301 program, 7-12
timecard automation, 6-25 P186401 program
Overtime Rule Set Batch Review report (R186404) processing options, 6-41
Index-4
usage information, 6-23, 7-12 processing options, 14-37
P186701 program, 7-12 usage information, 14-37
P47002 program, 5-2 R07531 report
payroll processing options, 14-35
ID for intercompany settlements, 11-15 usage information, 14-33, 14-34
purging processed batches, 5-14 R078001 program
setting up automatic accounting instructions piece rate history, 12-32
(AAIs), 11-1 processing options, 12-34
setting up employee information for multicurrency R09801 program
time accounting, 2-3 usage information, 15-10
Payroll Journal Entry Summarization Rules Multiple R186303 report, 6-12
Edit form, 11-39 R186304 report, 6-13
Payroll Journal Proof/Edit report (R05229) R186402 report, 6-33
processing options, 15-8 R186404 report
reviewing, 15-3 processing options, 6-42
usage information, 2-2, 15-3 usage information, 6-33, A-2
Payroll Journal table (F063951), 11-2 R186405 report, 6-33, A-2
Piece Rate Item Master program (P07916), 4-2 R186602 report, 8-5
Piece Rate Item Master Revisions form, 4-3 R186702 report, 6-18, 6-19
Piecework by Payroll Month form, 12-33 R47002C program
Piecework Register program (R078001) processing options, 5-7
piece rate history, 12-32 usage information, 5-7
processing options, 12-34 rate calculation, employee hourly, 13-2
premium labor distribution, 11-22 Retroactive Pay Rule form, 6-20, 6-23, 7-12
processing journal entries, 15-1 Retroactive Pay Rule Processing report
Purge Batch Time Entry report (R05116Z1P), 5-14 (R186702), 6-18, 6-19
Purge Leave Request report (R07520) reviewing, 6-19
processing options, 14-37 usage information, 6-19
usage information, 14-37 retroactive pay rules
creating retroactive pay rules, 6-18
hourly rate functions, 7-4
R hours worked function, 7-3
R05116Z1I report submitting retroactive pay rules for
processing options, 5-11 processing, 6-18
usage information, 5-10 timecard automation, 6-5, 6-17
R05116Z1P program, 5-14 usage information, 6-17
R05229 report Retroactive Pay Rules program (P0186701), 7-12
processing options, 15-8 Review/Update Requested Leave Time form, 14-19
usage information, 2-2, 15-3 Revise Business Unit Burden Rules form, 11-27
R052901 program Revise Company Burden Distribution Rules
processing options, 15-6 form, 11-24, 11-27
usage information, 15-3 Revise Multiple Burden Distribution AAIs
R053001 report, 2-3 form, 11-23, 11-25
R053001Z report Revise Multiple Cash/Bank Account form, 11-30,
processing options, 5-9 11-31
usage information, 5-9 Revise Multiple Debit/Credit-Accruals/Clearing
R0707620 program form, 11-38
processing options, 9-19 Revise Multiple Labor Billing Credits form, 11-35
R0716709 report Revise Multiple Labor/Billing/Equipment
processing options, 10-18 form, 11-21
usage information, 10-17 Revise Multiple Liabilities form, 11-33
R0716711 program Revise Payroll JE Summarization Rules form, 11-39
processing options, 10-14 Revise Single Liabilities form, 11-32
usage information, 10-13 Rule Set form, 6-34, 6-42, 7-12
R07311 program, 14-39
R07315 program, 9-20
R074501 report S
processing options, 14-35 setup
usage information, 14-35 global leave system controls, 9-4
R07520 report leave types, 9-8
Index-5
tracking leave history and accrual balances, 14-33 multicurrency, 12-4
Speed Time Entry program (P051121) overriding, 13-1
processing options, 3-13 overriding DBA amounts for employees, 13-4
usage information, 12-1, 12-24 purging processed payroll batches, 5-14
Speed Time Entry Revisions form, 12-25, 13-3 reviewing timecards created by timecard
submitting overtime rule sets for processing, 6-33 automation, 8-2
submitting retroactive pay rules for processing, 6-18 revising the status of a batch of timecards, 8-5
submitting timecard templates for processing, 6-12 revising timecards created by timecard
automation, 8-3
revising uploaded information, 5-8
T timecard automation, 8-1
T1 - payroll disbursements, 11-7 timecard accumulator rule, 6-27
T2 - labor distributions, 11-7 Timecard Accumulator Rule form, 6-35
T3 - actual burdens, 11-8 timecard automation
T4 - labor billing distributions, 11-8 creating a timecard accumulator rule, 6-27
T5 - equipment distributions, 11-9 creating formulas, 7-9
T6 - payroll accruals and deferrals, 11-10 creating overtime rule sets, 6-25
T7 - payroll vouchers, 11-11 creating overtime rules, 6-26
Tax Area Revisions form, 4-7 creating retroactive pay rules, 6-18
tax burden using system search criteria, creating timecard templates, 6-11
clearing, 11-36 fields and functions, 6-5
TE Template form, 10-8 functions, 7-1, 7-2
time accounting overtime rule set, 6-25
selecting employees for time entry, 12-1 overview, 6-5
setting up automatic accounting instructions registering functions, 7-8
(AAIs), 11-1 retroactive pay rules, 6-5, 6-17
Time and Pay Entry Register (R053001), 2-3 reviewing timecards, 8-2
Time Attendance Trends form, 14-26 revising the status of a batch of timecards, 8-5
time entry revising timecards, 8-3
autopay employees, 12-2 submitting overtime rule sets for processing, 6-33
batch processing, 5-1 submitting retroactive pay rules for
batch reports, 5-7, 5-9 processing, 6-18
Purge Batch Time Entry report (R05116Z1P), 5-14 submitting timecard templates for
revising uploaded timecard information, 5-8 processing, 6-12
selecting employees for time entry, 12-1 testing formulas, 7-12
uploading information, 5-7 timecard review and approval, 6-5
Time Entry Batch Processor report (R05116Z1I) timecard templates, 6-5, 6-11
processing options, 5-11 working with timecards, 8-1
usage information, 5-10 Timecard Automation Batch Approval/Cancellation
Time Entry Batch Revisions form, 5-9 report (R186602), 8-5
Time Entry Floods program (P051191) Timecard Change Rule form, 6-37
processing options, 3-14 timecard template
usage information, 3-2 creating timecard templates, 6-11
Time Entry MBF (P050002A) hourly rate functions, 7-3
processing options, 3-5 hours worked function, 7-2
usage information, 3-1 submitting timecard templates for
Time Entry Revisions form, 12-15, 13-3 processing, 6-12
Time Entry Time Sheet Revisions form, 12-22 timecard automation, 6-5, 6-11
timecard usage information, 6-11
accumulator rule, 6-27 Timecard Template Batch Review report
approving batches, 8-3, 8-5 (R186304), 6-13
autopay employees, 12-2 reviewing, 6-13
canceling batches, 8-3, 8-5 usage information, 6-13
creating from uploaded information, 5-10 Timecard Template form, 6-13, 6-16, 7-12
entering for employees, 12-1 Timecard Template Processing report
entering for employees using speed time (R186303), 6-12
entry, 12-24 reviewing, 6-12
entering timecards for employees, 12-12 usage information, 6-12
entering with equipment information, 12-24 Timecard Templates program (P0186301), 7-12
equipment billing, 12-12 Tracking Leave History By Employee report (R07531)
Index-6
usage information, 14-33, 14-34
Tracking Leave History By Leave Type report
(R07531), 14-33, 14-34
transaction currency, 2-1
U
uploading timecard information, 5-7
user-defined Parameter Descriptions for Custom
Overtime Rule form, 6-41
W
Work with Burden Distribution AAIs form, 11-23
Work With Field/Function Definitions form, 7-9
Work With Speed Time Entry form, 12-25
Work with Time Entry Batch File Revisions
form, 5-8
Work With Time Entry by EE Transaction Current
form, 12-9
Work With Time Entry by EE Transaction History
form, 12-10
Work With Time Entry by Employee Master
form, 12-7
Work With Time Entry by Individual form, 12-25
Work With Timecard Automation Batches
form, 5-14, 6-16
Index-7
Index-8

Time and Labor Implementation Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Time and Labor Implementation Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Time and Labor Implementation Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications

Time and Labor Implementation Guide

Copyright © 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Preface .............................................................................................................................................................. xvii

1 Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor

2 Overview of Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking

3 Setting Time Entry Processing Options

4 Setting Up Piece Rate Processing

5 Setting Up Time Entry Batch Processing

6 Setting Up Timecard Automation

7 Setting Up Functions and Formulas for Timecard Automation

8 Working with Timecards for Timecard Automation

9 Setting Up Global Leave Administration

10 Creating Employee Assignments

11 Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions for JD Edwards

12 Entering Timecards for Employees

13 Overriding Timecard Information

14 Administering Global Leave

16 Working with the ALM Workbench

A JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Reports

B Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor

Welcome to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Products

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Application Fundamentals

See Also: ■JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Financial

Management Fundamentals Implementation Guide.

Access to Oracle Support

Time and Labor

This chapter contains the following topics:

1.1 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Overview

Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor 1-1

■ Track employee assignment information and populate timecards automatically

1.1.1 System Features

1.1.2 Important JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Tables

Table Name Table Description

1-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor Implementation Guide

Table Name Table Description

1.2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Integrations

Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor 1-3

Figure 1–1 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system integration

We discuss integration considerations in the implementation chapters in this

1-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor Implementation Guide

■ Improves communication between departments.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne System Description of Integration

1.3 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor Implementation

Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor 1-5

1.3.1 Global Implementation Steps

1-6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor Implementation Guide

1.4 Business Interface Integration Objects

Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor 1-7

1-8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor Implementation Guide

This chapter contains the following topics:

2.1 Understanding Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking

Currency Type Description

Overview of Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking 2-1

2-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time and Labor Implementation Guide

Note: If you are posting entries with no currency amounts (hours

■ Time and Pay Entry Register (R053001)

2.1.1 Setting Up Multicurrency Time and Labor Tracking

2.1.2 Set Up Company Options